a

2 A
. ' PN oF
| fii - a

Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2010 with funding from
University of Toronto

http://www.archive.org/details/canadianfieldnat09otta

ve

OTTAWA NATURALIST.

BEING VOL. XI OF THE

TRANSACTIONS

OF THE

(Organized: March, 1879. Incorporated: March, 1884.)

ee tt

OTTAWA, CANADA.
m PAYNTER & ABBOTT,
1895.

Tue Orrawa NATURALIST, 3

ipot OF MEMBERS.

,

' Allan, Hon. Geo. W., D.C.Z.,7.R.G.S.,
emery FG. , (Lh oronto, )
;

Allan, W. A.

fee tieavi.. M7.A., D. «Sc., F.G.S.,
F.G. S.A.

Ami, Mrs. H. M.

Anderson, JZzeut.-Col. W. P., C, E.,

WAT CT:

Anderson, Mrs. W.P.

_ Armstrong, John R.

Ballantyne, Miss I. M.

Ballantyne, James.

Baptie, George, A/7.4., M7. D.

Barlow, A.E., 47.A., F.G.S7A.

Bate, H. Gerald.

Bate, H. N.

Beddoe, Chas. H.

- Bell, E. B.

Bell, Robert, B..Afp.Sc., .D., LL.D.,
Fie. FG: 5. é:

Bethune, Rev. C.J. S., 17.4.;
F.R.S.C., (Port Hope, Ont. )

Bigger, Howell.

Billings, W. R.

Blanchet, W. H.

Boardman, Wm. F.

Bolton, Rev. C. E., (Paris, Ont.)

Bolton, Miss Eliza.

Borden, F. W.,
IN:S.)

Boville, T. C., B.A.

Bowen, Miss Alice, (Quebec. )

Bowerman, J. T., 4.4

Bowles, W. C.

Brewster, W., (Cambridge, Mass.,

Broadbent, Ralph L.

Brown, Mrs. R. D.

Brumell, H. Peareth, /.G.S.A.

mecca fo VWVe.4 07. D.; 2.R.S.C.,
(Montreal.)

Burland, J. H.,, \2.4fp.Sc., &.C.S:

Campbell, A. M., (Perth, Ont.)

Campbell, R. H.

Chubbuck, C. E. D.

Cornu, Felix, 47. D., (Montreal.)

Cousens, W. C., AZ. D.

Cowley, R. H., B.A.

Craig, John.

Craig, Wm., (Russell, Ont.)

Coughlin, Mrs. M. A

Dawson,G.M., C.47.G., LL.D.,F.R.S.,
DS., Assoc. R.S.M.,F.GS.,F.RS.C.

Dawson, S. E., Zzt.D.

DEC,

Uss:)

M.D., M.P., (Canning,

Dickieson, M. G.
Dimock, W. D., B.A., M@.L.A,, (Truro,
N.S.)
Dixon, F. A.
Dowling, B. D., 2.4.Sc.
Doyon, J. A.
Dresser, J. A. B.A. (Aylmer, Que.)
Dulau & Co., (London. )
Dwight, Jonathan, Jr.,47.D.,
Baton; Ds Ie Vv.
Elkins, A. W., C.Z., £.Z.S,, (Lennox-
ville, Que.)
Bs; RoW. fe GeSee.
Ells, Mrs. R. W.
Evans, Jno. D., C.£.,
Ewart, D.
Fedarb, F. J.
Ferrier, W. F., B.A.Se. aa
Ferrier, Mrs. W. F. ,
Fleming, Sandford, C. 47.G., C. £.,
FR i Ole Be heaaes
Fletcher, Miss Cub. Se
Fletcher, James, 7.Z.S., /.R.S.C.
Fletcher, Mrs. J.
Fortescue, IL;
Fortescue, Mrs. L. :
Fuller, Thos., 2.C.A. “a
Gallup, A. H.
Gemmell, R. E.
Gilmour, T.
Glashan, J. C.
Gobeil A., B.A.
Grant, Szr J. A. AVC. G{MeEDS
FRCS, Edits FR. S.C. btaens
Grist, Henry.
Grist, Miss Mary, L.
Hardie, John. |
Hardie, Miss Jessie.
Halkett, Andrew.
Harmer, Miss G., (Hintonburgh, Ont.)
Harmon, Miss A. Maria.
Harrington, W. Hague, 7. 2..S.C.
Harrington, Mrs. W. HH.
Harrison, Edward.
Hay, Sr., George
Hay, G. U., #.#.S.C., (St. John, N.B.)
Hayter, F., B.A.
Herridge., Rev. W. T., B.A., B.D.
Hodgins, John.
Hope, James.
Hughes, Chas., SNe sk )
Jenkins, S. J., B.+

(New York.)

(Trenton, Ont.) 2

Johnston, J. F. ts

4

Johnston, Robt.
Jones, C. J.
Kearns, J. C.

ASAe

List oF MEMBERS.

Keefer, Thos. C., C.Z., F.2.S.C.

Keeley, D. H.

Kingston, A. G.

Klotz, Oskar.

Klock, Alonzo 13 BA SG

Lambart, ov.
Lambart, Hon.
Icambe, L.. M.,

Lawson, Prof.
jad tet Ox Came Fie

Lees, Miss V.

Lees, W. A. D.

Lees, Mrs. W.
Lehmann, A.,
ia); S.A.

LeSueur, W. D.,
W. D,

LeSueur, Mrs.

Lester, Miss M.

ls Es
He GRIER

FENG Snel. Gi eee

Latchford, F. R. »2.A
Gs Pes Le Phe

RS. C., (Halifax-)

Lee, Miss Katharine.

Lees, Miss Jessie.

Ae Ly:

B.S.A., (Baton Rouge,

B.A.
EE

Library, Leg. Assembly, (Quebec.)
Library of Parliament.

Lindsay A.
Living, Miss A.

Marion.

Living, Miss M.
Lovick, Miss G.

Lowe, John.

MacCabe, J. A., ZZ.D., F.R.S.C.
McConnell, R. G., B.4., F.G.S.A.
MacCraken, John I., 8.4

MacKay, A. H.

(Halifax. )

BIA. BSC.

MacLaughlin, T. J.

MacFarlane, T.,

WEE 5, tates

Macleod, -H: A. B., Cz.

McLean, J. D.
McDougall, A.

McDougall, P. A.,
McElhinney, M.

HB. bu2;
M.D.
|e

McEvoy, Jas., B.A.Sc.
McGill, A., B.Ad., B.Sc.

McLaughlin, S.
McMinn, W. J.
McNab, Chas.

R., B.A.

McNaughton, H. F.
John, J4Z4A.,

Macoun, Prof.
is thasds Gr
Macoun, J. M.
Marsh, H. S.,
Matheson, D.
Mearns, Dr. E.

a5 10C,

A (U.S.A.)

F.

McInnes, Wm., 2.A., 7.G.S.A.

eres

pa Es

He

Meneilly, W. J., (Toronto.)

Mills, Miss Margaret A.

O’Brien, S. E. -

Odell, W. S.

Panet, Maurice.

Paquet, F. X.

Perley, Wajor Henry F., C.Z.
Poirier, How. P. S., A7.A., (Shédiac, N.B.)
Pratt HOE. A

Prévost, L. C., AZ. D:

Prince, /ro/. E. B. BAS ees
Robert, J. A., &.A.Sc. (Montreal.)

“Robertson, Prof. J. W.

Robertson, N.

Robins, R. N., (Sherbrooke, Que.)

Ross, Ws: Ass 7-4 Gs

Rothwell, Miss Lina.

Saint-Cyr, D. N., (Quebec.)

Saunders, Fredk. A

Saunders, Prof. W., F.L.S., F.RiSies
FF: GOS: ;

Saunders, W. E., (London, Ont.)

Scott, Duncan Campbell.

Scott, Fred., (Toronto.)

Scott,, P., JZ. 2., (Southampton, Ont.)

Scott, W.

Scott, W., &.A., (Toronto.)

Scott, (Wale ae

Scott, Miss Mary.

Selwyn, A. R. Ci, CHEG Eee
FLR.S., FE: RS. C.F GES alae

Senate of Canada, The.

Shenick, Miss A., B.Sc.

Shutt, FT: A.A. PEGG

Simpson, Willibert.

Sims. R. J.

Sinclair, S. B., B.A.

Small, H. B.

Small, H. Beaumont, MD.

Smith, Miss Eloise.

Smith, Miss Ethel M.

Steckel, R , C.Z.

Summerby, Wm. J., 47.A., (Russell, Ont.)

Sutherland, J. C., (Richmond, Que.)

Sweetland, John, 47D.

Symes, Miss E.

Symes, P. B., A.K.C.

Taylor, Rez. G. W., F.R.S.C, (Victoria,

BC)

Thayne, E. Stewart.

Thompson, T. W.

Thorburn, John, 47.4., ZZ.D.

Topley, EIN,

Topley, Mrs. H. N.

Topley, Mrs. W. J.

Treadwell, C. W., B.A., B.C.L.

<a Al at aw = + os at
hg oo eet ae ey ys

WA 1 Ai a

(Hig eek. Que.) White, W. R., Q.C., (Pembroke, Ont.)
(Chimmings Bridge.) Whiteaves, J, F., AGS, F.R.S.C.,
B.A., WSs) Po GiS.,). Fi G.S Ae
; Whitley, C. F., B.S.A.
Whyte, Miss Isabella.

“Why te Miss Ethel.
RAR, (Kingston, Ont.) Whyte, Miss Marion.
AT. ’D., , (Buckingham, Whyte, R. B.
Whyte, Mrs. R.B.
Willimoitt, Chas. W.
Willing, T. N., (Calgary, N. W. E)
Wilson, W. J.
ters, Ww ilson, Mrs. E.
S it W. H., ev erd. Wintle, E. D., (Montreal.)
eldon, Prof. R. C., Mf.P., (Halifax.) Wood, Josiah, 42.2, (Sackville, N.B.)
Cs FGSA Wright, Wek:
Young, Rev. C. J., ALA., (Lansdowne,
Ont.)

See)

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

RRIAM, Dr. C. Pech: Bessie of eke itis Wasiieetans Use a
ae Miss E. A,, 7. 2. ae Soc., i Os St. Albans, England. f a

THE OTTAWA NATURALIST,

VoL. IX. OTTAWA, APRIL, 1895. No. 1.

COLOURLESS BLOOD IN ANIMALS.

By Pror. E. E. Prince, B.A., F.L.S., &c., Dominion Commissioner of Fisheries,
Ottawa.

We are so accustomed to think of that wonderful fluid, which
circulates through the blood-vessels of animals, as essentially a red fluid,
that it may be a matter of surprise to many that red blood is in reality -
very exceptional in the animal kingdom. In all the various classes of
animals, from the lowest to the highest, we recognize the remarkable
fact that colourless blood is most general. Inthe highest forms there
are corpuscles, coloured by that oxygenoving substance, red hzmo-
globin ; but the presence of this coloured matter is so uncommon in the
blood of the lower types, that examples of it are of extreme physiological
interest. Thus, the earthworm and the leech have red blood ; but the
presence of the red colour is not in the corpuscles, it is due to
hemoglobin in the serum or fluid. The fluid 1s red, but the corpuscles
themselves, are colourless. - Other worms (marine annelids) have
emerald green blood, otiiers yellow: but in most the fluid is destitute of
culour. Itisthe same amongst insects, and arthropods generally. The
heart, which passes down the back in these creatures, drives a clear
corpusculated fluid over the body. Remarkable exceptions amongst
these may be noted, however. Thus, a small Dipteran fly, Chzronomus,
in its aquatic larval condition, is of a brilliant vermilion hue, due to the
red blood visible through the transparent walls of the worm-like body.
Such exceptions only emphasize the fact more:strongly that colourless
blood prevails. Anyone who has studied the anatomy of a starfish, has
noticed below the intricate water-vascular system, a central ring or blood
vessel encircling the mouth. This blood-ring is clear and transparent ;
and sends off a translucent radial blood vessel to each arm. ‘The fluid

Tue Orrawa NATURALIST, 7

inside these tubes is colourless, slightly opalescent, and contains the
characteristic corpuscles or floating cells present in all blood. This
description of the nutrient fluid applies not to Echinoderms only, it is
true, also, of mollusks, though there are some familiar exceptions,
Certain cuttlefishes have green or even violet blood, while in the familiar
Planorbis the blood is red. If from the simple dilated heart-tube of a
shell-fish, say Uzo, or of a beetle or lobster, we take a little of the watery
blood, we may see, in the oxidised fluid, a faint blue tinge visible, due
to haemocyanin, which tinge disappears under deoxidation. When we
come to the vertebrates, the highest forms of animal life, we find in the
simplest and most primitive of them,the worm-like lancelet (AmpAzsoxus),
colourless blood. Nay, in the early larval stages of other vertebrates,
such as fishes, the blood is at first colourless, and the corpuscles exhibit

_ notint. Now it is well known that fishes, amphibians, reptiles, and

higher animals, possess a circulation, called the lymphatic system, in
which a clear corpusculated fluid flows. This lymphatic system is suff-
ciently distinct from the arteries and veins to be regarded as separate ;
but its real importance has not been generally recognised. It is usually
regarded as a supplementary and subordinate system. In view of the
foregoing facts it would seem in reality that the lymphatic system repre-
sents the primary blood-circulation. Physiologists have long been
puzzled in interpreting the real nature of the red blood in man. The
red-corpuscles are certainly not true cells, as Dr. Minot has shown, and
they are not nucleated. The serum of red blood is almost identical
with the lymph,and the white corpuscles are believed to be neither more
nor less than lymph corpuscles or leucocytes originating in the lympha-
tic glands. The red-blood system has thus overshadowed the colourless
blood, or lymphatic system, in man and the highest vertebrates, and
the latter system has been, to some extent, turned to other purposes ;
the lymphatics of the digestive canal being now lacteals for conveying
chyle into the red-blood system.

In the lower vertebrates the lymphatics still play an important part,
and retain much of their primitive character. In fishes, well-marked
pulsating chambers or lymph hearts, connected with an elaborate system
of capillaries and larger vessels, convey clear lymph fluid and floating

Re

8 CoLouRLEss Bioop In ANIMALS.

corpuscles. The lymph hearts occur in the tail region and are much
more than mere ill-defined spaces in the tissues. ‘They are distinct
chambers with special walls, in which striated muscle fibres may be
made out. <A long lymphatic vessel passes midway along the lateral
muscle masses receiving successive side branches, while two tranks run
alongside the lateral nerves, one on each side, and two pass along inside
the spinal canal. Perhaps the amphibians, frogs especially, have this
colourless blood-circulation best developed. Two definite lymph
hearts occur, in the frog, between the short rib-like transverse processes of
the 3rd and 4th vertebre, and a second pair behind the hip-joint, on
each side of the urostyle. These pulsating organs show striped muscle
fibres. Other large lymph spaces, which do not however pulsate, occur
on each side of the head, and a chain of irregular spaces, filled with
fluid, run down each side of the back, with corresponding ventral
vessels, and ramifications along the limbs. Lymph spaces and vessels
have not been noticed so prominently in reptiles, except in tortoises and
crocodiles. In the latter there are large abdominal spaces, and smaller
chambers near the root of the tail. In the tail region in birds, during
the early stages especially, there exist well-marked lymph spaces. The
existence of a lymph or colourless blood circulation in so many groups
of animals, including the highest vertebrates, must have some weighty
significance. Its primitive character is demonstrated by the fact that

the suspended corpuscles are nucleated cells, and quite unlike the red

corpuscles of warm-blooded mammals. When we thus find in the
lowest vertebrate (AmfAioxus) and in the early stages of higher forms,
such as larval fishes, that the red blocd circulation is absent there is
every evidence that a colourless blood system is the original system, and
that red-blood is a modified and seccndary arrangement.

The blood circulation in the invertebrates is then a primitive system,
which persists in AmpAtoxus as the only system ; while in fishes and the
lower vertebrates it maintains an importance almost equal to that of the
red-blood circulation, but in the higher vertebrates, although itstill supplies
colourless corpuscles and serum to the red blood, the latter circulation
has largely supplanted it and deprived it of its original importance.

—— =

Tue Orrawa NATURALIST. 9

THE RENSSELAER GRIT PLATEAU.
By hk. W. ELts; LL.D», FR.S.G,-E.G.S. A:

A very interesting report has recently been published by Mr. T.
Nelson Dale, of the U.S. Geological Survey, styled ‘The Rensselaer Grit
Plateau in New York.” His paper is of interest to Canadian geologists
since the rocks there discussed form part of the series so carefully studied
in the earlier years of the Canadian Survey by Sir William Logan and
his assistants in the province of Quebec, and the adjoining states to the
south and described by him under the heading of “ The Quebec Group.”
The area reported on by Mr. Daie was also examined very thoroughly
by Sir William Logan, some thirty years ago, and his note books shew

- many careful measurements and sections of the rock there found which

are evidently the extension southward down the valley of the Hudson,
of the great series in Quebec which extends continuously from the
extremity of the Gaspé Peninsula to the Vermont boundary. The
arrangement and description of the strata as given by Mr. Dale, show
that the same features are there found as in Quebec; and that the
strata are practically the same in character.

These rocks in Canada consist of green, gray, black and red or
purple slates, with heavy beds of gritty sandstones which occasionally
pass into fine conglomerates. In the description of the grit and
associated slates stated by Mr. Dale on p. 306 of his report, they
are said to consist of a dark green exceedingly tough, in some places
calcareous, generally thick bedded granular rock in which the quartz
grains are apparent and upon closer inspection the feldspar grains also.”
“This rock is interbedded with strata of purplish or greenish slate
(pAylite), varying in thickness from a few inches to perbaps a hundred
feet . . . . the thin purple phyllite layers along the west edge of the
plateau, contain minute branching annelid trails or fucoidal impres-
sions.” The conglomerate portion of the grits is thus described : ‘‘ the
pebbles of irregular outline measure from two-tenths to eight-tenths inch
in diameter and consist of white, pinkish or blueish quartz, reddish
felspar, gneiss, slate and red quartzite and as to relative abundance,

10 THE RENSSELAER GRIT PLATEAU.

occurs in the order named.”* These grits and conglomerates are now
regarded by Mr. Dale as the equivalents of the Oneida conglomerates
of Upper Silurian age.

The descriptions just quoted correspond so closely with those given
by Sir Wm. Logan for the sandstone and slates of the Sillery formation
as developed in Quebec and on the north-west coast of Newfoundland,
that but little doubt can exist as to their being portions of the same
geological series. The arrangement of strata at Rensselaer is evidently
complicated by faults, folds and overturns as in Quebec which have
been so extensive as in places to bring horizons, otherwise widely
separated, contiguous to each other and in some cases even to have
placed the newer formation beneath the older. Thus at Orleans
Island, below Quebec, the strata which hold the Black-River-Trenton
fauna, are now beneath those holding the Sillery-Lévis fauna, the whole
series being apparently conformable. So also at several places along the
coast below Métis the Trenton beds are enfolded and appear to consti-
tute an integral part of the Sillery red and green slates. From the_
‘description of the rocks of the Rensselaer area a precisely similar
arrangement would appear to exist and the Sillery red and green slates,
grits and fine conglomerates appear to form a higher portion of the series
above the ‘“‘ Hudson River” or Trenton formation. The relations of
the several series in the two districts of Quebec and New York appear
to be very similar. ;

It is therefore natura} to suppose that the view taken by Sir Wm:
Logan, after a careful study of the strata in both countries, that these
represent portions of the same great series, is a correct one; and so
strongly was he impressed with this fact that in the great geological
map of Canada and the northern United States, (1866,) he so mapped
them as portions of the Sillery and Lévis formations. It is interesting to
notenerealsothatin Quebecthe conclusions firstreached as to thestratigra-
phical sequence of this series coincided almost exactly with those put forth
by Mr. Dale in his recent report, in which the Sillery and Lévis rocks
were regarded as _ stratigraphically newer than the Hudson River

*The Rensselaer Grit Plateau in New York, by T. Nelson Dale,13th Ann. Rep.
U.S. Geol. Survey, pp. 306, 307.

THe Orrawa NATURAEIST, ll

_ division. Thus in a small volume called ‘ Esquisse Géologique du
- Canada,” published in connection with the Paris Exhibition, 1855, in the
_ chapter relating to the rocks afterwards known as the “ Quebec Group,”
_ after describing the Hudson River division near Quebec city and the
i overlying slates and conglomerates of Lévis, ‘it is stated that ‘this
' formation at Quebec is succeeded by red and green slates with thin
bands of calcareous matter, and intercalated towards the summit with
great masses of quartzose sandstone, often calcareous, and coloured by a
mixture of argillaceous matter which is greenish or reddish. This series
of sandstones and slates which has a total thickness of 1000 metres has
been named by Logan the Sillery group, and appears to be the equiva-
lent of that which has been named by the New York geologists the
Shawangunk or Oneida conglomerate, which in central New York lies
¢ between the Richelieu slates and the Medina sandstone.”
Subsequently however the finding of Calciferous and Chazy fossils in
the beds overlying the Hudson River portion led to a change of view as
to the age of the Sillery and Lévis rocks, and to their being placed in a
much lower position in the geological scale. The subsequent
detailed work on these rocks shewed that the Sillery grits and slates
were of the horizon of the Potsdam sandstone, while the Lévis lime-
stones and slates associated, were Calciferous. As for the so-called
Hudson River division, then supposed to be the lowest beds of the
series, the work of Lapworth and Ami has shewn these to be presum-
ably about the horizon of the Black River and Trenton.
It would thus appear that in connection with the Rensselaer beds
the order as proposed by Mr. Dale, may be subject to criticism ; more
‘particularly when we consider the work done by Sir Wm. Logan in
this area, and the resemblance, in every particular, to the beds which we call
the Sillery and Lévis in Canada, and which the work of recent years has
placed on asatisfactory basis. And it is interesting to note how the views
of structure concerning the northern extension of these beds in Canada,
abandoned forty years ago by Logan and his associates, have so lately
been put forward by our fellow geologists south of the line. This may
readily be regarded as a clear case of history repeating itself.

oe
1
d

Ly, Tue RELATION OF THE ATMOSPHERE TO AGRICULTURE.

THE RELATION OF THE ATMOSPHERE TO
AGRICULTURE.*

By Frank T. Suutt, M.A., F.I.C., Chief Chemist, Dominion Experimental Farm

The fundamental principle to realize in the consideration of this
question is that plants are living organisms, and as such, in order to
develop and multiply, require food. Their requirements may be
ascertained by several methods, chief among which is chemical analysis,
by which also we arrive at the proximate and ultimate composition of
plant constituents.

A preliminary analysis of a plant, as for example the Indian Corn,
enables us to arrange its constituents under one or another of the
following classes :

WATER,

ORGANIC MATTER,

MINERAL MATTER or ASH.
Taking as an illustration the Indian Corn plant, when approaching
maturity, we find that it is made up of,

WATER to. Phares aie i ae” 72.0 lbs.

ORGANIC (MAGSTER= eee ae 26:0 ees

MINERAL MATTER Or ASH...... 14. =
LOO!

These materials have been derived and assimilated by the plant from
two sources, the atmosphere and the soil.

With respect to the water contained in a plant, it is only necessary
to point out that its source is soil-moisture, derived by the deposition of
atmospheric aqueous vapour (chiefly rain), and that it has been taken up
by the plant roots. ;

The mineral constituents are also soil-derived. To be assimilated
they must be in solution, and to this end atmospheric agencies and
small quantities of acid exuded by the plant rootlets, assist. *

The organic matter of plants is composed of varying quantities of

*NotTe-—This is a condensed report of an address delivered before the Central

Experimental Farm Club, March 27th, 1895.

THE OTrrawa NATURALIST. 13

the familiar substances, sugar, starch, fibre and a class of nitrogen-
containing bodies known as albuminoids or proteids. Of these the gluten
of wheat and other grains, forms a well known example.

The sugar, starch, fibre and other non-nitrogenous organic con"
“stituents are built up by the physiological functions of the plant from
the carbonic acid, which exists to the extent of 4 volumes in 10,000
volumes of the atmosphere. This absorption and assimilation takes
_ place by means of the plant’s choropbyll (or green colouring matter) in

the presence of sunlight, oxygen by the same process being evolved.
_ The carbon (the fundamental element in organic bodies) of the album-
_ inoids is also derived from the same source. It will thus be seen that

by far the greater part of the dry matter of all plants is derived directly
: from the atmosphere. It may be pointed oui in passing that in this

way the carbonic acid exhaled by animals is utilized, and thus the
| approximate constancy in the proportions of the atmospheric elements,
_ maintained. The production and consumption of carbonic acid and

oxygen thus effected, provides for the welfare of both plants and

animals.
PLANT CONSTITUENTS.
Carbon \ Carbonic Acid )\ Starch
P The ~ | Oxygen | 2 Siac A Agia: Air
| Organic Ee teoniet J = | Fibre |, die derived
elements eae Oil me elements
4 Nitrogen :
Calcium Phosphorus |
Magnesium Silicon a
Bet abe Potassium Sulphur : —
| norganic + Sodium derived
elements hoa elements.
. Manganese

r Until recent years, it was believed that all plants absorbed their
a nitrogen from nitrogen-containing bodies (chiefly humus) in the soil,

and from this source only. It has now, however, been definitely

ascertained, as the result of many carefully conducted experiments in
_ Germany and England, that certain plants have the power of utilizing
: the free nitrogen of the air, building it up within their tissues into
_ complex organic substances, as the albuminoids. These plants are
known as the Legumes, comprising the well known plants, pea, bean

— T=

14 £=‘THe RELATION OF THE ATMOSPHERE TO AGRICULTURE,

clover, vetches, etc. The names of some of the principal scientists who
have solved this problem are: Sir. J. H. Gilbert, who for more than
half a century has been associated with Sir John B. Lawes in agricultural
research, Wagner, Hellriegel, Wilifarth, Frank and Warrington. Their
successful work in determining beyond all doubt that the legumes have
this power, marks the most important and valuable discovery in
agricultural science of the present day. It means practically that the
soil-nitrogen, exhausted by the growth of cereals and other farm crops,
can be readily and cheaply restored by “ green manuring” with one or
other of the legumes—their nitrogen for the most part having been
appropriated from the atmosphere.

The exact way in which these plants are able to appropriate free
nitrogen is not known, but the fact has been ascertained that the
assimilation is directly connected with the presence and development of
certain tubercles or nodules on the roots. These tubercles contain
micro-organisms, whose apparent function it is to absorb the atmospheric
nitrogen, present in the interstices of the soil, and convert it into com-
pounds of its host. We have here an excellent example of symbiosis,
and one which must in the future prove of immense value to agricul-
turists and indirectly to the community in general.

THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA.

The fourteenth ineeting of the Royal Society of Canada will be
held in Ottawa on the 15th, 16th and 17th of May, 1895.

In a circular letter received from Dr. J. G. Bourinot, C.M.G.,
Hon. Secretary of the Royal Society, the members of the Ottawa
Field Naturalists’ Club are invited to contribute papers or articles for
the approaching meeting of that Society.

Our President, Mr. F. T. Shutt, has been chosen by Council to
represent us on that occasion. Any member of the Club desirous of
submitting papers should communicate with him at as early a date
as possible, so that thé necessary arrangements may be made for their
presentation befcre the proper section.

5

i i ti

pay

Pe RP ee ere a

pees.

oo,

Tue Orrawa NATURALIST. 15

SIXTEENTH ANNUAL REPORT OF COUNCIL, 1894-95.

_ To the Members of the Oltawa Field Naturalists Club :-—

The Council elected by you on the zoth of March, 1894, has
pleasure in reporting that the past year, on the whole, has been a
successful and prosperous one.

Perhaps in no single year of the history of the club has the attendance
at both the excursions or field days, in summer, and the evening soirées
during the winter season, been so satisfactory.

The membership list keeps up a high level, there being no less than
233 at present on the roll. Seven new members were added during the
year. Three members were removed by death, viz :—Mr. Scott Barlow,
Chiet Draughtsman and Cartographer to the Geological Survey of
Canada, Mr. P. H. Le Rossignol, B.A.Sc., Assistant Chemist, Central
Experimental Farm, and Mr. H. R. Moore, B.A. Seventeen members,
many of whom are non-resident members, have sent in their resignations.
Your Council has beld ten meetings during the year to carry on the
routine work of the club, which includes the ‘ striking’ and arrangement
of committees, the appointments of leaders in the various branches of
the Club’s work, and the nomination of the Editor of THe OTrawa
NATURALIST and his staff.

Early in the year, an effort was made by your Council to obtain a
grant from the Ontario Legislature, but this proved unsuccessful. We
are indebted to the Hon. E. H. Bronson for the manner in which he
presented our claims before his colleagues in the Council.

The Royal Society of Canada’s invitation to send a delegate to its
meeting in Ottawa last May was received and Mr. F. T. Shutt, who has
acted in that capacity for some years past was again chosen to represent
us. At the meeting, he presented the customary annual account of the
work of the club,which is incorporated in the Transactions of the Royal
Society of Canada.

The Council finds it necessary to draw the particular attention of the
members of the club to the necessity of paying the annual club dues
promptly. There are now 114 members in arrears. The amount of

_the subscription is small and when not handed in spontaneously-—the

—-

time and labour involved in collecting the dues is very great.

>

16 SIXTEENTH ANNUAL REPORT.

Three successful excursions were held in 1894, under the auspices
of the club. .

1. Chelsea.—The first of these was to Chelsea, on the Gatineau
Valley R.R., in May, when a number of Fellows of the Royal Society
joined us as guests of the Club; 218 persons were present at this
excursion which proved both enjoyable and profitable.

2. Wakefield.—This excursion was also largely attended. Some
interesting work was done and valuable information obtained by
members of the club.

3. Gadetta.—The third excursion took place at this very interesting
new locality for the club. The opening of the Ottawa, Amprior &
Parry Sound Railway has afforded special facilities to examine the
region west of Ottawa and south of the Canadian Pacific Railway
track.

Besides the large and general excursions of the club held at more
or less lengthy intervals during the summer, a number of members have
availed themselves of the sub-excursion scheme, which has always
proved so important to the welfare of the club in this district. Asarule
much better and closer work can be accomplished when a few members
meet together and visit a certain definite locality with a special object
in view. The Council recommends these sub-excursious to all the
members of the club.

THE Orrawa NATURALIST has been published by the Editor, Mr.
W. H. Harrington. ‘We regret, however, to add, that the January
number was not issued, but if the increased interest taken
during the past year in recording facts and observations in this
district and elsewhere be an earnest of what the members of the club
propose to do, then the success of the official organ of our club is
assured for the future,and the NATURALIST will be filled with the records
of observers in all parts of Canada since our membership counts most of
the leading men interested in the scientific growth and development of
ourcountry, THE Orrawa NATURALIST is nota purely local publication.
A perusal of the volume of 162 pages, just published, amply shows the
wide scope of its articles.

Our exchange list is an important one and the Library which the

Tue Orrawa NATURALIST. ty

ub possess is indicative of the high appreciation of the work done.
From many quarters we hear of congratulatory remarks on our work and
_ especially on our simple but practical methods of organizing for work,
q Seven soirées were held during the past winter, which as you are
4 all aware have been remarkably well attended and proved highly
: interesting.

) The following is the programme as carried out by the Club during
the past season, 1894-95.

PROGRAMME OF SOIREES.

Dec. 6th, 1894. MICROSCOPICAL SOIREE.
r Inaugural Remarks, Dr. G. M. Dawson, F.R.S.; A Grain of
Wheat, Prof. W. Saunders ; Microscopic structures in young fishes, etc.,
Prof. E. E. Prince, B.A, F.LS. Microscopes and slides were kindly
- furnished by Messrs. J. F. Whiteaves, Wm. Scott, G. M. Dawson, W. S.
- Odell, F. T. Shutt, A. Halkett, T. C. Weston, D. B. Dowling, W.
- Saunders, E. E. Prince, W. F. Ferrier, R. W. Ells and H. M. Ami.

Dec. 2oth, 1894. GEOLOGY.
1. How Rocks are Formed, Dr. R. W. Ells, F.R.S.C. 2. Crystals.
(Illustrated by Models}, W. F. Ferrier, B.A.Sc. 3. Report of the
- Geological Branch, H. M. Ami. 4. On the Shumardia limestones of
- Levis, Que, T. C. Weston, F.G.S.A. 5. Description of a new Caddis-
| fly (Phryganea cecta) from the Pleistocene clays of Green’s Creek, Prof.
S. H. Scudder.

Jan. 17th, 1895. BOTANY.
1. Flowering of Plants, Mr. R. B. Whyte. 2. The Growth and

af

~ Development of Fruit, Mr. J. Craig.
Jan. 31st, 1895. CONCHOLOGY.
1. The present condition of Canadian Conchology, Rev. G. W.
Taylor, F.R.S.C. 2. How Shells grow, F. R. Latchford, B.A. 3. How
to collect Shells, Prof. J. Macoun, F.L.S. 4. Report of the Concho-
_ logical Section, Mr. Fletcher.
- Feb. 14th, 1895. ENTOMOLOGY
| 1. How Insects grow, Mr. James Fletcher, F.L.S. 2. Some

Te
¢

i a -

18 SIXTEENTH ANNUAL REPORT.

Insect Works, Mr. W. H. Harrington, F.R.S.C. 3. Report of the

Entomological Branch, Mr. J. Fletcher. 4. Noticeofa Monograph on

Canadian Spiders by Emerton, H. M. Ami. -

Feb. 28th, 1895. ZOOLOGY.

“Qn some protective peculiarities in young animals,” Prof.
E. E. Prince, B.A., F.L.S. Illustrated lecture.

March 14th, 1895. ORNITHOLOGY.

1. “Town Birds,” Mr. W. A. D. Lees. 2. How to Study Bird-
life, Prof. Macoun, M.A. 3. ‘‘ Feathers,” Mr. A. G. Kingston.

All these lectures were illustrated with microscopic sections or
specimens and interesting discussions followed their delivery. Through
the kindness of Dr. McCabe, Principal of the Normal School, Ottawa,
the club has held its soirées in the lecture rooms of that institution.
The thanks of the Council and Club are unanimously due to Dr.
McCabe for his kindness and courtesy.

The Council in resigning its trust for the year, leaves the considera-
tion of the future character of the work again in the hands of the
members generally. It is possible that recommendations and
suggestions may have occurred to many of the members, the adoption
of which would add to the usefulness and still further popularize the
work of the club. This meeting is the occasion upon which the future
policy of the club should be fully considered.

All of which is respectfully submitted on behalf of the Council.

G. M. Dawson, Henry M. Amt,
President, Secretary.

Ottawa, 19th March, 1895.

See

~*~ ’ —— a sd

Tue Orrawa NATURALIST. 19

OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB.

| ‘TREASURER’S STATEMENT, CLUB YEAR ENDING 19TH MARCH, 1895

RECEIPTS.
p balanee on hand from 1893-94................ $ 25 92
_ Subscription fees received—
| Arrears of previous years.:........ $ 48 00
BEPESIECHE (YOar 22a... ss sae 118 00
For 1895-96, paid in advance ...... 8 00
— 174 00
Received for advertisements in “ Naturalist”...... 37 00
< SN aenraltsts:”- SOle to... ho i ee 2 20
¢ *‘ Authors’ Extras” including arrears... 17 25
Meee wrmceeds Of Excursions .............-.. sess 7. iG
$263 47
EXPENDITURE,
Printing “Ottawa Naturalist,” Vol. VIII........ $192 28
Ee re ee 15 93
See atitnors Extras” ol. ee ee eee II 30
“Flora Ottawaénsis, balance to date ...... I 20
General Printing and Stationery ................ 13 92
NM rg ed os oi as 2 wien ms Wa tees tee 1 66
Expenses of Soirées ............ ee eee IO 30
$249 59
Sueeeees ear ado aie... se as 13 88
1 7 eae ae

A. G. KINGSTON,
Treasurer.
Audited and found correct.
Ottawa East, 4th April, 1895.

Wm. A.D. LE&Es,

J. BALLANTYNE, } Auditors

_—s =~.

20 Nores, Revizrws AND CoMMENTs.
NOTES, REVIEWS, AND COMMENTS.

Geology.—Etts, R. W., LL.D., F.R.S.C.—* The Potsdam and
Calcifercus formations of Quebec and Eastern Ontario.” Advance
copy and Ex. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, Vol. XI., Section IV.,
pp. 21-30, 1895— (distributed, 12th February 1895.)

In this paper, the geographical distribution, local characters,
palzontological as well as stratigraphical relations of the Potsdam and
Calciferous formations as they are found in Eastern Canada in particu-
lar and in Eastern America in general are discussed. Ur. Ells points
out also the relations of these two formations to the Levis and Upper
Sillery. He correlates the Calciferous with the Levis of the vicinity of
Quebec and the Potsdam with the Upper Sillery of the same region.
He places all these in the Ordovician system—but refers the Lower
Siliery to the Cambrian epoch.

Dr. Ells concludes by stating : ‘It would appear, therefore, from
all the evidence at cur disposal, that the real line of division between
the Cambrian and the Cambro-Silurian system should be placed at the
close of the Georgia slate and Red Sandrock divisions, and that the
series from the base of the typical Potsdam to the summit of the Utica
and Hudson River formations should constitute the system known as
Cambro-Silurian or Ordovician.

Ami, H. M.—‘“‘ Wotes on Canadian Fossil Bryozoa.” Ex. Can. Ree.
Science, Vol. VI., No. 4, pp. 222-229, Montreal, January, 1895.

This paper is practically a 1ésumé of Prof. Ulrich’s work on the
3ryozoa of the J.ower Silurian in Minnesota,* in which
attention is called to thirty-three species from Canada comprising
twenty-one genera. Six additional species of Bryozoa referable to as
many genera are added to the above, but these were described by Prof.
Ulrich’s in Part II. of the Paleontology of Illinois, Section VI. The
localities in Canada from which the species recorded were obtained,
the horizon, references and other points of interest regarding these are

given in them notes.
. ~~

*Vol. II] of Final Rep. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey of Minnesota, Minne: -
apolis, 1894.

Tue Orrawa NaATurRALIst. 21

I, HL. M—* Notes on a Collection of Silurian Fossils from Cape
George, Antigonish Co., Nova Scotia, with descriptions of four new
Species,” Ex. Proc. and ‘Trans. Nova Scotian Inst. Science, Halifax,
2nd Ser. Vol. I., pt. 4, pp. 411-415, October, 1894.

: Contains descriptions and notes on a collection of fossils made in
Nova Scotia, by Messrs. Hugh Fletcher, and J. McDonald in 1886.

Jones, Pror. T. Rupert F.R.S., F.G.S.—“ On some fossil Ostracoda
from Canada.”—Ex. Geol. Mag. Dec. IV. Vol. II, No. 367,
_ pp. 20-28, Pt. II., January, 1895.

In this paper are described s7x new species of Ostracoda from col-
-lections made in the North West [Territory of Canada and Manitoba.
Three of these collections were made by Dr. G. M. Dawson, fromm the
‘St. Mary River beds in 1874 and 1881 :—Another collection was
made by Mr. J. B. Tyrrell of the Geol. Surv. Dept. from the friable
marl beds of the Rolling River district of Manitoba. The descriptions
_ of the species by Prof. Jones comprise :

I. PLEIsTOcENE of Rolling River, Manitoba.
1. Candona candida, Miller.
2. ? Ilyobates reptans, Baird.
3. Cytheridea Tyrrellii, n. sp.
II. St. Mary-River-Serizs. Milk R., N.W. T. (Loose.)
4. Pontocypris »yriformis, n. sp.
5. Cypris Dawsoni, n. sp.
. 6. Ilyocypris oblonga, n. sp.
4 III. St. Mary-River-Serigs. Milk River, N.W.T.
7. Cythere, sp. indet.
; 8. Candona ? Sanctz-Mariae, pn. sp.
; ' g. Cytherella crucifera, n. sp.
} IV. St. Mary-River-Series. Old Man R., N.W.T.
| 1o. Candona ?, sp. undet.
>

Nine of these species are figured on PI. II. accompanying the text

Prof. Jones adds a note stating that the hingement being very rarely

_ indicated, the generic relationships of the foregoing species are for the
most part uncertain. ‘This interesting contribution to our knowledge

22 Nores, Reviews anD ComMMENTS.

of the more recent fossil Ostracoda of Canada, from the pen of Prof. I.
Rupert Jones serves to increase our indebtedness to him for his zeal,
patience and assiduity in working out the material which has been sent
to him from Canada during the past thirty-six years.
Conchology.—Recrnr MoLiuscA FROM THE HEADWATERS OF
THE Ottawa. The following recent shells were collected by Mr. A. E.
Barlow, of the Geological Survey Department. These have been
kindly determined by Mr. Whiteaves of the same department, as

follows :-—
A.—Foot or LAKE TEMISCAMING.

Fresh Water Mollusca .
PELECYPODA.

. Spherium secure, Prime.

ws striatinum, Lamarck.
sulcatum, Lamarck.
Pisidium abditum, Haldeman.

Anodonta, sp.

ce

me oN

GASTEROPODA.
Valvata sincera, Say.
“ tricarinata, Say,
Amnicola porata, Say.
g. Fhysa heterostropha, Say.
1o. Planorbis bicarinatus, Say.
# deflectus, Say.
re. fs trivolvis, Say.
2 es var. macrostomus, Whiteaves.
14. Limneea desidiosa, Say.
a humilis, Say.
Land Mo/lusca.
16. Patula alternata, Say, sp.
B.—EMERALD LAKE. :
From Emerald Lake at the head of the South Branch of the
Opemican Creek, district of Nipissing, the following fresh-water shells
were also obtained by Mr. Barlow, ina thick deposit of shell-mar] :—

1. Spherium sulcatum, Lamarck.
2. Planorbis trivolvis, Say, var. macrostomus, Whiteaves.

Ornithology.— Winter Birds.—BoHEMIAN WaxwinG (AMPELIS
GARRULUsS.) A flock of 20 or 30 of these rare cold weather visitors
has been spending the winter with us. They first appeared on
the 8th of January and since then have frequently been seen

Tue Orrawa NATURALIST. Fs,

in different parts of the city, feeding on the berries of the
rowan-trees (Pyrus Americana). Their note is much like that
of their summer cousins the cherry-birds, but louder and more
~ incessant. Even during the worst days of the ‘cold wave,” at the
“ opening of February, their merry voices told how well earned was their
_ old name of Bohemian Chatterer. The epithet Bohemian is probably
~ applied with the meaning of géfsy in reference to their erratic
migrations, for they have no special connection with Southern
Germany. In winter they may appear at uncertain times. in almost any
country of the north temperate zone ; and their summer home is in the
- extreme north, being bounded only by the last stretches of timber
country. The few records of nests are from Lapland and Alaska.

NORTHERN SHRIKE (LANIUS BOREALIS). This bird, always a

sparse winter resident in the open country, has been growing noticeably

~ commoner in Ottawa of late years. Ona sunshiny winter morning his

song from the top of poplar or maple is really pleasing, as well as a

surprise from a bird of such hawklike build and habits. Perhaps he

sings the praises of the introducer of the European sparrow, for, in the
flocks of these birds, he seems to find a never-failing source of food.

A. G KINGSTON,
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA.

The winter meeting of the Geological Society of America was held
at Baltimore, Md., Dec. 27th, 28th and 2gth, and was largely attended
by the Fellows. There were forty-eight papers on the list and most of
these were read by the authors themselves. Prof. T. C. Chamberlin,
of the.University of Chicago presided. Dr. Adams, of McGill, and Dr.
Ami, of the Geological Survey, were the only two Canadians present.

At the opening meeting, Prof. W. B. Clark, of Johns Hopkins
University, read a biographical notice of the late Dr. G. H. Williams,
of whose life and work a brief sketch has already appeared in THE
Naturatist.* Dr. Ami read an appropriate memorial of the late
Amos Bowman, F.G.S.A. at one time a member of this club. Among
the papers read at this meeting the following were prepared by

* Ortrawa NATUwRALIST, vol. VIII, No. 7, p. 113, 1894.

24 EDITORIAL.

Canadians:—1. A further contribution to our knowledge of the
Laurentian, Dr. F. D. Apams. 2. On the honeycombed limestones
in the bottom of Lake Huron, Dr. Ropert BELL. 3. On some dykes
containing ‘‘ Huronite,” ALFRED E. Bartow. These three papers were
read zz extfenso and were well received.

For a complete list-of the papers read at the meeting the reader is
referred to No. 1, Vol III, p. 99. of the ‘Journal of Geology,”
Chicago, Jan.-Feb., 1895,

EDITORIAL.

THe Orrawa NAfURALIST is entering upon the ninth year of its
existence and as in the past, will be the official organ of the Ottawa
Field Naturalists’ Club.

The Council of the Club has appointed four of its number a
Publishing Committee, and selected seven members of the club who
are leaders in the various branches of the Club’s work as AssociatE
EDITORS.

After careful consideration and discussion, the Publishing Com-
mittee of Council has decided to change somewhat the dress and general
appearance of THE NaAtuRALIsT. The present number has deen
unavoidably delayed. It is the purpose of the new committee and
editorial staft to issue THE NaTURALIST promptly on time.

A number of advertisements have been secured from business —
firms and houses in the city. Tne attention of our members and —
others, in whose hands THE NATURALIST may fall is called to them.

Members and contributors will confer a favour on the Committee —
if they will send their articles on Geology, Botany, Entomology etc., at
as early a date as possible. Records of observations, notes and papers
on the Geology, Botany, Entomology, Zoology, Couchology and
Ornithology of this district or of any part of the Dominion are earnestly
solicited.

The intention of the Publishing Committee and of the editorial
staff is to increase the sphere of usefulness of THE OTTAWA
NATURALIST. Not less than 16 pp. will be published every month,
and our purpose is to increase the amount.of reading matter in proportion
to the amount of MS. and funds at our disposal. With an increased
revenue from an increasing membership, and from a larger number of
paying advertisements, we hope to accomplish that purpose. We
want new subscribers to our magazine and a much larger membership
list to the club, ‘The fee is very small, being only one dollar. Blank
forms of application may be obtained from the secretary of the club
from any member of Council, or from

THE EpITor.

THE OTTAWA NATURALIST.

Vou. IX. OTTAWA, MAY, 1895. No. 2.

ON SOME DYKES CONTAINING “* HURONITE.”
By ALFRED E. BARLOw, M.A.
Geological Survey Department, Ottawa, Canada.

( Read before the Geoloyical Society of America, Baltimore, Dec. 28th, 1894. )

The name Huronite was long ago given by Dr. Thomson of
Glasgow, to certain light-yellowish green masses or crystals which
occurred porphyritically embedded in a boulder of diabase found on the
shores of Drummond Island, Lake Huron, specimens of which had
been sent to him by the late Dr. Holmes of Montreal. Thomson
regarded it as a new species and published a description and analysis of
it in his Mineralogy of 1836. ‘The occurrence of these crystals was
first noticed by Dr. Bigsby in 1820, who writes of the rock containing
them in a general way as “greenstone porphyries having a light-colored
base and containing crystals of red or white felspar—seldom of both in
the same block,”/1) This brief and general description would not have
been sufficient for purposes of identification except for the fact that his
manuscript report which formed the basis of this paper, (2) was lately pre-
sented to the hibrary of the Geological Survey of Canada. In the appendix
Dr. Bigsby notes “ among the debris of the shore of Lake Huron are por-
phyries of greenstone with embedded crystals of red felspar or of four
or six sided prisms of cream white colour, foliate fracture, cleavage about
60°, yielding to the knife readily, translucent at the edges and of a feel
slightly soapy. Their crystallization is seldom well defined, but some-
times remarkably so.” ‘This clear and accurate description serves at

(1) Trans. Geol. Soc. London, Vol. 1, p. 205. On the Geography and Geology
of Lake Huron, read Feb. 21, March 7 and 21, 1823.

(2) Notes on the Topography and Geologieal structure of the north-west portion
of Lake Huron, addresseed officially to Dr. J. Wright, Inspector of Hospitals in

Canada and dated Quebec, Feb. 23, 1821.
*(Commu icated by permission of the Director )

26 THE OrrawA NATURALIST.

once to identify the substance composing these porphyritic crystals with
the minerai described later by Dr. Thomson as “ Huronite.” The
source of these boulders was not known and the mineral never found
“in situ” until 1881, when Dr. Robert Bell, (1) of Ottawa,in his examina-
tion of the country to the north-east of Lake Superior, noticed the
occurrence “ of a dark grey crystalline diorite (in one place rendered por-
phyritic by spots of light-greenish yellow felspar) on the neck of land se-
parating Lake Mattawagaming from Lake Wabatongwashene.” This rather
brief description was altogether inadequate to connect the mineral with the
Huronite which had previously been described by Thomson, and it was
not until Dr. Harrington, of Montreal, visited the spot on professional
business some year later, that the true identity of these “ spots” was
clearly established. In 1891, Dr. Selwyn, of Ottawa, happened to be
at the same locality which is situated between Missinaibi and Loch
Alch Stations on the main line of the Canadian Pacific Railway, and he
states that the dykes containing the Huronite cut both Huronian and
Laurentian strata. During the construction of the Canadian Pacific
Railway in 1884, Drs. Girdwood and Ruttan made a collection of the
principal rocks met with on the main line from Chalk River westward.
This collection, they subsequently presented to McGill University.
Among the specimens, was one of a dark green diabase with pheno-
crysts of a mineral resembling Huronite scattered through it. This
specimen had been obtained from a dyke cutting the granitoid gneisses
a few miles north-west of Pogamasing Station. The microscopical
examination, however, reveals the fact that the original Drummond
Island boulder was not derived from either of these localities. Mr. W.
G. Miller of the School of Mines, Kingston, who acted as Dr. Bell’s
Assistant in 1893, mentions the occurrence of a dyke containing
Huronite near the contact between the granite and slates (Huronian)
at Depot Lake in the northern part of the Township of Proctor, about
fifteen miles north-east of Cook’s Mills. From its geographical position
and the direction of the glacial striae this would seem to be the
most likely source of the Drummond Island boulder, although this
cannot be ascertained with certainty as the specimen from the ‘locality

(1) Report, Geological Survey, Canada, 1880-2, part c, p. 4.

—— Oe

On Some Dykes ConrAInine IlUrRonNrreR. 27

was Jost. Mr. H. G. Skill, of Cobourg, Ontario, who assisted the
~ writer in 1891, discovered another dyke containing this mineral, about
one quarter of a mile north of Murphy Lake, in Timber Limits go»
Algoma District. During the progress of his explorations in the
peninsula of Labrador, Mr. A. P. Low, of the Geological Survey of
Canada, noticed the presence of Huronite in a dyke cutting Laurentian
gneisses about ten miles north of Lake Kawachagami on the portage
route between the Rupert and Eastmain rivers and also in two dykes,
each about two hundred yards wide, breaking through rocks of Cambrian
age, on the west branch of the Hamilton River, fifteen and twenty
miles respectively, below old Fort Nascawpee, on [ake Petitsikapow.

Dr. Harrington (private communication) has_ noticed loose pieces
of diabase containing Huronite a few miles beyond Amyot Station. He
also mentions the occurrence of a diabase dyke four inches in width,
containing phenocrysts of the same mineral, a short distance east of the
crossing of the Magpie River, near Otter Station, on the Canadian
Pacific Railway.

Prof. N. H. Winchell, of Minneapolis, Minnesota, in his
visit to the Lake Huron district, in 1889, made note of “the’
occurrence at Algoma of occasional very interesting boulders
(1605). (1) They contain large and small rounded whitish green
felspathic spots which are distributed somewhat like porphyritic
crystals but they have not the regular periphery of crystals. They
are in a matrix of ordinary diabase of dark green colour and the
spots make the rock noticeable, their largest size being somewhat larger
than an inch in diameter. Some of the boulders are put in the
foundation of the great hotel which the Canadian Pacific Railroad (2)
projected at Algoma, and that is where we saw them first. Dr. Selwyn
recalled the dyke cutting the Animikie on the high ridge back of Silver
Islet, as the only spot where such a rock is in place,” Professor
Winchell, who visited this place in 1879, has sent mea small chip from °
a specimen then collected, as well as fragments of the Algoma boulder

(1) The number 1,605 refers to the number of the specimen in the rock series of

the Geclogical Survey of Minnesota
(2) 18th Annual Report, Geological Survey, Minnesota, 1889, pp. 58 and 63.

28 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

and a small sample from a dyke near Gunflint Lake, north-west of Lake
Superior. The phenocrysts of felspar in the Silver Islet specimen,
according to Professor Winchell (1) are distinctly angular and not
greenish, but greyish in colour. Under the microscope, these felspar
phenocrysts are seen to bea plagioclase towards the basic end of the
series (very probably labradorite) which has undergone only incipient
alteration, whereas, in general the Huronite shows very great decom-
position.

- The writer has seen numerous boulders of diabase containing this
mineral in the region to the north and north-east of Lake Huron,
especially on the shores of Lake Huron from Killarney westward to the
mouth of the Spanish River,

During the summer of 1893, the writer also noticed a boulder of
dark green diabase, on the west shore of Bear Island on Lake Temagami,
with plagioclase phenocrysts, which bore a very marked resemblance to
the more altered Huronite. As the felspar seemed s9 fresh and glassy
in places, it was thought an optical examination accompanied by a
chemical analysis would throw a great deal of light on the original
character and composition of Huronite. Dr. Harrington kindly under-
took the analysis of this felspar, which proves it to be labradorite.
Under the microscope most of these crystals are quite fresh, although
certain portions are more or less clouded by the presence of
decomposition products, which it is often difficult to resolve, even with
the higher powers of the microscope. Certain of the crystals, however,
show the same alteration, only in a lesser degree, as that which charac-
terizes the Huronite.

It will thus be seen that the mineral is by no means so rare as some
have supposed, but has, on the contrary, a wide geographical distribu-
tion. ‘Fhe sole reason of its not being discovered, “in situ,” earlier
seems to have been due to the necessarily hurried and imperfect
explorations first undertaken through these wild and unsettled districts. -

In 1885, Dr. B. J. Harrington, of McGill University, Montreal,
decided to undertake an examination of the Pogamasing mineral for
purposes of comparison with that contained in the original Drummond

(1) No, 601, toth Annual Report, Geological Survey, Minnesota, p. 56.

ri

On Some Dykes Conrainina Huronire. 29

Island boulder, a sample of which was coutained in the Holmes collec-
tion in the Peter Redpath Museum. In the course of this investigation

he discovered some very grave errors in Thomson’s description. ‘The
hardness for example is about 5} instead of 3} as stated by Thomson.
Instead of being infusible it is distinctly fusible (F about 5) while it con-
tains alkalies the presence of which is entirely ignored by Thomson.”(1)

Dana, in an old edition (2) of his mineralogy mentions Huronite

~ under Prehnite, evidently deeming it an allied mineral. In 1889, (3)

¥
4

4

the same author mentions Huronite along with Weissite and Ikerite as
a supposed altered form of Iolite (Cordierite). In the same edition (4)
he also says ‘‘Thomson’s Huronite is an impure anorthite-like telspar
related to bytownite, according to T. S. Hunt (priv. contrib.), ex-
cluding the 416 per cent of water the SiOz would be 47 per cent.
of the remainder.” Again, in the same edition, Dana states (5)
“ Huronite, Thomson (Min., I., 384, 1836) considered an altered
mineral near fahlunite by T. S. Hunt, occurs in spherical masses in
hornblendic boulders in the vicinity of Lake Huron.” In the last
edifion of Dana’s Mineralogy (6) the author, Mr. E. S. Dana, places the
mineral under anorthite on the authority of Dr. Harrington’s paper in
the Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada, but Dana is wrong
in referring the analysis made by Mr. N. N. Evans, to the Huronite of
the Drummond Island boulder, for in reality it belongs to the Huronite
found by Dr. Girdwood near Pogamasing. Michel-Lévy and Lacroix (7)
include Huronite among the decomposition products of Iolite or Cor-
dierite. The failure to assign to Huronite its rightful mineralogical posi-
tion arose from the fact that it was impossible to ascertain its true
nature by chemical analysis. It remained for the microscope to dis-
close its composite nature and to show its relation to the more widely
known ‘“ Saussurite.”

[1) See Trans-Royal Soc. Canada, Section III, 1886, p. 82.
(2) System of Mineralogy, 3rd edition, 1850, p. 313.

(3) See System of Mineralogy, 1889, p. 301.

(4) See Idem. page 34.)

(5) See Idem. page 485.

(6) System of Mineralogy, 1892, p. 340.

(7) Les Minéraux des Roches, 1888, p. 174.

30 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

Seale cf ISnehes.

CRYSTALS OF HURONITE IN DIABASE.

(Cat. No. 995, Geological Survey of Canada Museum)

From 4 mile N. of Murphy Lake, Algoma, Ont.

The name “ Huronite ” has usually been restricted to yellowish
green more or less rounded masses or phenocrysts, which rarely
exceed two inches in diameter, embedded in a medium textured dark
greenish or greyish groundmass. Many of the smaller and not a few of
he larger individuals have an irregular or jagged outline owing to mag-
matic corrosionand frequently exhibit small armsor bays which have been
filled by the invading magma. Occasionally some are seen with a
more or less perfect crystallographic outline and many exhibit one or
more sharp crystal faces. The mineral is light yellowish-green in
colour although portions of the crystals which have undergone less
alteration show a very pale flesh red or pink colour as in the case of
the Murphy Lake and Eastmain specimens. The crystals weather
to an opaque greyish-white forming very conspicuous spots in an other-
wise dark coloured rock. Under the microscope the greenish colour
is seen to be due to the more or less abundant development of

a eee es.

On Some Dykes ConTaInInc Hwuronirte. 31

zoisite, epidote, sericite and chlorite at the expense of the original
felspar. Some of the phenocrysts show a more or less perfect cleavage
which is noticeably the case in the Eastmain specimen, although in the
more hightly altered samples, as those from the vicinity of Missinaibi,
little or none can be seen. Occasionally, crystals show macroscopically
the lamellation due to polysynthetic twinning, as in some of those in
the Murphy Lake diabase, but as a general rule these lamelle are
either absent altogether or so faint that they cannot be detected. The
mineral is subtranslucent, varies in lustre from pearly to waxy accord-
ing to degree of alteration. The hardness varies from 5% to 6, fusibility
about 5, and the specific gravity, according to Mr. R. A. A. Johnston,
of the Geological Survey of Canada, varies from 2°725 in the East-
main specimen to 2935 in those from Missinaibi. The specific

- gravity, as would be expected, shows an increase in proportion to the

the alteration. The microscopic examination in general reveals the
fact that in every case the so-called ‘“‘ Huronite” is really a plagioclase
near the basic end of the series which has undergone more or less
complete “saussuritization.” In most instances the development of zoisite,
epidote, sericite, chlorite, etc., at the expense of the original felspar has
been so abundant as to leave only traces of the original twinning
lammellze and occasionally to destroy all evidence of this structure.
Specimens may be obtained from the large number of slides examined,
showing a complete gradation of this decomposition from the pure
glassy plagioclase (labradorite) composing many of the phenocrysts con-
tained inthe diabase from Temagami Lake to the completed Saussurite
or Huronite in the porphyritic individuals of the Missinaibi rock. The
matrix in which those phenocrysts are embedded is in general a typical
diabase of dark greenish or greyish colour which likewise shows a wide
difference in degree of alteration under the microscope. The speci-
mens from Bear Island, Lake Temagami, show a very typical and fresh
olivine-diabase. With the exception of some of the crystals of olivine,
the rock is remarkably free from decomposition, while in the finer
grained portion of the rock from Missinaibi all the component minerals
have undergone great alteration. The plagioclase is more or less
completely ‘“saussuritized,” the augite originally present wholly con-
verted to hornblende (uralite) and the ilmenite replaced by the dull

32 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

gray almost opaque variety of sphene known as leucoxene. A strange

fact noticed, moreover, is that frequently the less altered phenocrysts
of Huronite occur in an exceedingly decomposed diabase as is the case
in the Pogamasing and Eastmain specimens, while the more highly
altered porphyritic individuals of this mineral are frequently developed
in a groundmass more or less remarkable for its freshness. This is
noticeably the case in the original specimen from the Drummond Island
boulder.

The first stage in the decomposition or “ saussuritization” of the
plagioclase shows a cloudiness due to the development of a dull, fine
grained, more or less opaque material, with a higher index of refraction
causing the granules to stand out in relief from the surrounding felspar.
In many cases, even in the thinnest sections, this is beyond the
highest power of the microscope to resolve into its component min-
eral or minerals. This is accompanied, or immediately followed, by the
development of sericite (hydrated muscovite) in small scales showing
characteristic brilliant interference colours. The cleavage planes and
fissures are seen to contain large scales and plates of this mineral, while
certain other cracks and fissures are filled with chlorite and serpentine
resulting from the decomposition of the bisilicates present. The smaller
granules now coalesce and form larger masses and individuals of zoisite
and epidote, while larger plates and scales of sericite are developed
and the original plagioclase is finally replaced by a comparatively coarse
grained aggregate consisting of zoisite, epidote, sericite, chlorite, calcite,
and felspar. Where the alteration has been extreme, as in the case of
the plagioclase originally present in the matrix of the Pogamasing
specimen, the lime is more or less completely removed, and the alkaline
portion of the plagioclase has crystallized into pure limpid grains of
albite which seldom show twinning striations and are accordingly fre-
quently mistaken for quartz with which they are often associated.

The larger phenocrysts very frequently showed a marked difference
both in the degree and character of the alteration of their central and
peripheral portions. ‘The zoisite and epidote were much more abund-
ant in the zone or belt immediately surrounding the crystals, while
muscovite is the prevailing decomposition product present in the cen-

=

a,

»

Dp > i’ ys) TEMS: ok 7 2

On Some Dykes CoNTAINING HURONITE. 33

- <«

tral portion. In the plagioclase of the matrix the decomposition pro-
} ducts are frequently grouped together in the central portion, leaving a
comparatively clear and tresh periphery. Certain of the crystals of
felspar are quite fresh and glassy, having for some reason escaped the
alteration to which most have been subjected.
With the single exception, perhaps, of the plagioclase originally
contained in the fine-grained portion of the rock from Pogamasing the
_decomposition has not been of such extreme character that secondary
albite has resulted and in every other instance the clear felspar sub-
stance is certainly an unaltered survival of the original individual. The
plagioclase of the groundmass is usually in more or less elongated forms,
but occasionally mutual interference has produced at times rounded
contours. In composition—to judge from the measurements of the
-angle contained between the maximum extinction of adjacent lamellae
—the plagioclase appears to be always near the basic end of the felspar
series. Some of the angles obtained are high enough for anorthite, the
most basic of the felspars, but generally the angles obtained indicated
labradorite as the most frequent source of the Huronite.

PETROGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTIONS.

1. Locality —At Hudson’s Bay Co.’s Post, Bear Island, Lake
Temagami, District of Nipissing, Ontario. (From a boulder.)

|
}
|

In the hand specimen the rock is a dark green, medium textured
diabase in which numerous large phenocrysts of plagioclase are deve-
loped. Most of these porphyritic crystals are more or less rounded
owing to magmatic corrosion, although occasional individuals exhibit
tolerably sharp and perfect crystallographic boundaries. Some of the
crystals measure as much as three inches in diameter, but as a rule they
vary from one to two inches across. They have in general a greenish
tinge, although portions cf some of the crystals show a flesh red colour.
Most of this plagioclase is remarkably fresh and glassy, but the cleavage
planes are very frequently coated with such alteration products as ser-
pentine and chlorite derived from the decomposing bisilicates present
in the matrix. The phenocrysts are often seen containing or invaded
by portions of the finer-grained groundmass. This matrix weathers
brownish or yellowish owing to the oxidation of the iron present, while

34 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

the phenocrysts of plagioclase become a dull greyish white, thus ren-
dering the rock very conspicuous. In general the rock bears a very close
megascopical resemblance to the diabase originally described as con-
taining the Huronite while the phenocrysts themselves differ only in the
degree of alteration they have undergone. The writer regards this
diabase as the least altered representative of the series of rocks studied
but which, under similar conditions, would have furnished a rock dif
fering but slightly, if at all, from any of the more decomposed speci-
mens first noticed and described as containing ‘‘ Huronite.”

An analysis of a portion of one of the least altered of these pheno-
crysts of plagioclase, kindly undertaken by Dr. Harrington of McGill
University, proves the species to be labradcrite. The followiug are
the results :

Silica: 52... she ote tga eerie ee ee ee eee 54°19
Alumina’, . 3 sos seks pec See ee eee 28°42
Berrie: Oxide: . Ste. ois ce fe eae ee eee 0°77
Ferrous: Oxide Fa Psu on.espalc erections etree o'al
Manganous Oxid@eianccs: seo mane nee Trace
TAME nce okie Sse S OR oe a ee eee 10°47
Maoneésia:.. ©. 2 oi7towes ec aetna ee ee O52
Soda 22.5. sicic actuate ei ines Oke Oa oe eee 4°47
Potash): 2.2) ci oe beens see hoe ee eee OEE 0°63
oss onmenition’, «-t.405 co cme sete or ar Sars “59

-100° 47

The specific gravity of carefully selected fragments with the bottle
was 2 679.

Under the microscope the rock is seen to be a very typical and
rather fresh olivine-diabase. In many instances the large phenocrysts
are quite tresh and give the extinction angles characteristic of labra-
dorite. Very often, however, irregular areas and patches have under-
gone considerable “ sericitization,” the resulting scales of hydrated mus-
covite being very minute. Occasionally this alteration is carried farther
and both zoisite and epidote are present in addition to the sericite as a
result of secondary action. At times a narrow border surrounding those
crystals exhibits a micro-perthitic structure. A careful examination ad-
duced sufficient evidence to indicate clearly that a more extended alter-

-
———— —

Peel S

s

er. foe

até all
ae ww!

On Some Dykes Conraininc Huronire. 35

tion of these phenocrysts of labradorite would produce the so called
Huronite. The fine-grained portion of the rock in which these crystals
have been developed is a fresh aggregate composed chiefly of plagio-
clase (labradorite), augite and olivine. The ophitic or diabasic struc-
ture is very pronounced. ‘The plagioclase is usually idiomorphic form-
ing an interlacing network of lath-shaped crystals, the interstices ot
which are filled with augite and olivine. The augite possesses the red-
dish colour and pleochroism so common in diabase, the larger grains
showing frequent distortion and occasional dislocation. Both the fel-
spar and augite exhibit undulatory extinction as an effect of pressure.
The olivine, as usual, occurs in irregular, more or less rounded irdi-
viduals, only very rarely presenting sharp crystallographic outline. Com-
monly, it is rather fresh, showing a colourless or light greenish sec-
‘tion with characteristic high relief, rough surface and brilliant interfer-
ence colours. It is rarely so fresh, however, as to be without traversing
fissures filled with more or less opaque alteration products. In many
instances the original olivine grain is represented by a greenish or yel-
lowish material, probably serpentine. Small scales or grains of opaque
iron ore (magnetite) are associated with this serpentine indicating that
they were aiso a result of the decomposition of the olivine. Less fre-
quently, perhaps, the olivine shows a very interesting and rather un-
usual alteration to talc, but the resulting scales of this mineral were so
small that this could not be ascertained beyond dispute. The talc is of
a very pale green colour, slightly pleochroic, and exhibits very brilliant
interference colours between crossed nicois. It occurs as a matted or
felted aggregate of very minute scales filling the original olivine grain.
The talc is usually accompanied by more or less opaque iron ore and
occasionally some chlorite. (1) A considerable quantity of biotite
is present which in some cases has undergone considerable
bleaching” owing to the removal of iron, while in other
cases it is altered to chlorite. Apatite is also a tolerably abun-
dant accessory constituent. The magnetite occurs usually in irregu-
lar black grains, most of which have resulted from the decomposi-

(1) Vol. III. Geol., Wisconsin, p. 235.

36 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

tion of the olivine. Frequently, however, it occurs in tabular or rod-
like forms, which are sometimes arranged in one set of parallel planes
only, while in other cases they lie in two sets of planes intersecting one
another. These rod-like forms penetrate all the constituents of the
rock. In many instances the smaller rod-like forms occur in associa-
tion with the biotite, and their correspondence in position with the
planes of cleavage of this mineral suggests that in these cases. at least,
their formation has been due to secondary action (“ Schillerization ”), in-
volving the elimination of the iron and the development of magnetite
along the planes of easy cleavage.

2. Locality —S.E. 4, N.W. 4, Section 19, 65, 3, cutting on the
Port Arthur, Duluth and Western R.R., just west of the narrows of
Gunflint Lake, Minnesota. (1)

Mr. U.S. Grant, who kindly sent me the speciment at Prof. Win-
chell’s request, says: ‘‘ The rock is from one of the diabase sills (2) in the
lower oriron-bearing memberofthe Animikie. The markedly porphyritic
character is only local, the main part of the siil being without phenocrysts.
These porphyritic patches are sometimes rather sharply marked off
from the main mass of the sill, but they usually pass into the non-
porphyritic parts simply by a gradual loss of the large crystals. This
sporadic development of large felspar phenocrysts in certain of these
Animikie sills is a rather common feature.”

Macroscopically the rock resembles very closely the boulder
brought from Lake Temagami, being a dark green diabase with pheno-
crysts of fresh plagioc'ase which exhibit the polysynthetic twin lamel-
lation very beautifully.

The microscope reveals a rock composed mainly of plagioclase and
augite with pronounced ophitic structure. The augite when fresh is of
the reddish and slightly pleochroic variety so common in diabase, but it
shows abundant alteration to greenish or brownish green hornblende
(uralite). ‘The opaque iron ore has the same rod-like development
noticed in the examination of the preceding rock. Biotite is present

(1) Specimen No. 951, Geographical and Natural History Survey of Minnesota,
collector U.S, Grant, see 22nd Annual Report, p. 82.
(2) Logan hills of Lawson, see Bulletin 8, Minnesota Survey.

a
.
"
4
:
’
‘
\
{
]
P
{
4
‘

On Some Dykes ConraininG Huroyire. 37

and shows considerable “bleaching” and chloritization. The larger
phenocrysts, which are probably labradorite, are mostly quite fresh and
glassy, but irregular areas are more or less clouded by the development
of.minute scales of sericite or kaolin. The rock differs from the
_ Temagami specimen in the absence of olivine and the advanced
uralitization of the augite
3. Locality,—Landing at Silver Islet, north shore of Lake Superior.
Prof. Winchell thus describes this rock (601) : (1) “A coarse porpby-
_ ritic ‘dioryte’ in a dyke running parallel to and contiguous, to and’
passing into (602) a fine grained ‘dioryte’ in the form of a dyke. The
interval of transition is perhaps two feet wide, and the crystals of felspar
are scatteringly disseminated through it on the south side, and wholly
disappear on the north side. They run in the same direction as the
dyke on Silver Islet. The whole is 45 feet wide, but is evenly divided
between Nos. 601 and 602 from about a mile north of the ‘ Landing at
Silver Islet.’ ”

se eee

The thin section under the microscope showed an aggregate of
plagioclase (labradorite), augite, serpentine and opaque iron ore.
The phenocrysts of plagioclase as well as the lath-shaped crystals pre-
sent in the groundmass show more or less ‘cloudiness’ due to the
development of minute scales of muscovite. Irregular fissures travers-
ing the felspar are filled with yellowish green serpentine derived from
that present in the surrounding matrix. The augite, which is quite

- fresh, has a reddish colour, and is slightly pleochroic. It occurs in
irregular grains and areas filling in the spaces between the plagioclase
laths. The yellowish green serpentine, which is abundant, is present
in areas whose external form and internal arrangement at once suggest
its alteration from olivine, which was no doubt originallv present.
These phenocrysts of labradorite are much fresher than those to which
the name “ Huronite” has usually been applied, but under similar

- conditions of alteration there is no doubt that they would become so
decomposed as to be indistinguishable from this mineral.

_., {1) Specimens Nos. 60r and 602, toth Aunual Report of Geolcgical and Natura
History Survey, Minnesota, page 56.

38 Tue OrrawaA NATURALIST.

4. Locatity.—Knob or Fault Hill, west branch Hamilton River,
20 miles below old Fort Nascawpee on Lake Petitsikpow, (1) Labrador

Peninsula.

The specimen, according to Mr. A. P. Low, is from a dyke cutting
the ferruginous limestones and shales of Knob or Fault Hill, a promi-
nent topographical feature, as it rises rather abrupily to the height of
350 feet above the surrounding country. The dyke occupies the sum-
mit of the hill, while 200 feet below come in the stratified rocks
through which it has been intruded. Neither the width of the dyke
nor the nature of its contact with the bedded rocks could be ascertained
owing to the accumulation of drift material, but it certainly cannot be
much less than 200 yards. :

Macroscopically the hand specimen shows a medium textured dark
green almost black diabase containing occasional small and imperfect
phenocrysts of a light greenish grey plagioclase which has undergone
incipient ‘‘saussuritization.” Under the microscope the rock is seen to -
be composed of an aggregate of plagioclase, augite, serpentine, and
ilmenite. The augite is very fresh, has a light brownish red colour and
shows a marked pleochroism. In general its fo1m is allotriomorphic,
filling in the spaces between the felspar, but occasional individuals
exhibit sharp and perfect crystal boundaries. The plagioclase occurs
in more or less elongated lath-shaped crystals which are often
somewhat stout and rounded thus producing a rather coarse ophitic
structure. Many of the small individuals are quite fresh, but —
the larger ones show considerable alteration to sericite and epidote.
The resulting “‘saussurite” is innoinstance so abundantly developed
as to destroy the polysynthetic twinning striez. The large amount of
serpentine noticed in this rock has evidently resulted from the decom-
position of olivine originally present. The serpentinization of the olivine
is in every instance completed, and only the outline and structure of
the serpentine individuals serve to indicate the mineral from which it
has been derived. These occasionally show a network of fibrous ser-
pentine which was first produced, the greenish fibres standing perpen-
dicular to the cracks along which they have been developed. Owing

(1) Reference No. 4, A, p. 28, Book II., Low, 21/6/94.

On Some Dykes Contraininc Huronire. 39

to this parallel arrangement of the fibres, the serpentinous substance
gives a faint but definite reaction with polarized light: The meshes of
the net-like structure thus produced are filled with more finely devel-
oped scales and fibres of serpentine which are nearly, if not, quite
isotropic. These decomposed grains are often seen embedded in the
fresh augite. The ilmenite occurs in large irregular fragments or in
small more or less rounded granules and in both cases shows character-
istic alteration to leucoxene. The leucoxene is of the usual opaque
grey colour, but sometimes brownish grey, and frequently show,
especially in the thinner portions of the slide as also the smaller frag-
- ments, the brilliant chromatic polarization of sphene of which it is
simply a variety.

5. Locality.—¥% mile north of Murphy Lake, Timber Limit, go,
_District of Algoma, Ont.

The specimen is from a dyke cutting rocks of Huronian age. The
matrix is a normal dark green diabase whose ophitic structure is mega-
scopically apparent. A freshly exposed surface shows the Huronite to
be of the usual pale yellowish green colour, while the less altered por-
tions of the crystals have a more or less pinkish or flesh red colour.
In many of these individuals a somewhat indistinct cleavage and a
rather faint striation due to multiple twinning may be seen. The
Matrix weathers a brownish colour while the phenocrysts become a
dull opaque greyish white thus rendering portions of this rock which
have been subjected to atmospheric action very conspicuous.

Microscopically, the Huronite is seen to be labradorite which has
_ undergone more or less “‘saussuritization.” A narrow border usually
‘surrounds these phenocrysts of labradorite which is free from the pro-
ducts of decomposition, but immediately within this rim is a zone or
band where the alteration has been extreme and here the resulting
zoisite, epidote and sericite replace nearly, if not quite, all of the origi-
‘nal felspar: The epidote and zoisite are present in irregular grains or
masses, while the sericite, as usual, occurs in scales and plates. All of
these alteration products have a more or less definite arrangement. The
grains and imperfect crystals of epidote and zoisite are usually elongated
‘in a direction corresponding more or less with the twinning -striations

40 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

or in a direction nearly at right angles while the scales and plates ot
sericite have a similar development. .

The specific gravity, ascertained by Mr. R. A. A, Johnston, of these
porphyritic crystals was 2°758.

The matrix of these crystals is a rather fresh diabase with pro-
nounced ophitic structure and composed chiefly of plagioclase and
augite. The plagioclase is idiomorphic and forms an interlacing net-
work of lath-shaped crystals. Occasional crystals are rather fresh and
glassy, but usually they exhibit the same alteration as the larger por-
phyritic individuals, and apparently belong to the same species of felspar
(labradorite). The decomposition products aggregate themselves to-
ward the centre of the crystal leaving a somewhat fresh periphery. The
augite is in general quite fresh, but occasionally an individual was seen
partially altered into green, strongly trichroic hornblende. Twins are
common. A considerable quantity of biotite is present which is al-
ways more or less altered to chlorite. Ilmenite, an abundant consti-
tuent, occurs in irregular grains and only shows incipient alteration to
leucoxene. Occasional prisms of apatite were noticed, chiefly developed
in the chloritized biotite. The more unaltered portions of the plagio-
clase show the undulatory extinction due to pressure. Pyrite is also an
abundant constituent.

6. Locality.—A\goma Mills, north shore of Lake Huron, district
of Algoma, Ontario. (1)

The thin section exhibits a rock very similar to the one just des-
cribed and must be regarded as being derived from a dyke almost anal-
agous in character and composition to that exposed near Murphy Lake.

The phenocrysts of labradorite show the usual alteration into an
aggregate composed chiefly of muscovite, epidote and zoisite although
considerable portions of some of the crystals are free from these de-
composition products. The augite has a light yellowish colour and is
only slightly pleochroic. ‘Twins are common, the twinning plane and
composition face being the orthopinacoid.

Curved or distorted individuals were often noticed exhibiting the

*From a boulder No. 1605, Geological Survey of Minnesota, series of rocks, 18th
Annual report, page. 58.

——- =

’

\

On Some Dykes Coytatninc Hurovyire. 4]
{

“strain shadows” due to pressure. A good proportion showed an in-

cipient uralitization. The plagioclase of the groundmass has also
undergone more or less ‘“saussuritization” and occurs in stout and
rounded laths thus producing a rather coarse ophitic structure. ‘The
ilmenite present in irregular grains is often fresh but shows occasional
incipient alteration to leucoxene. A small amount of chlorite is also
present.

7. Locality —Shore of Drummond Island, Lake Huron, (from a
boulder.)

The slide was made from a fragment, obtained through the kind-
ness of Dr. Harrington, from a duplicate specimen of the original
boulder at present in the Holmes collection of the Peter Redpath Mu-
seum of McGill University. The first examination and analysis by Dr.

‘Thomson was rather imperfect as pointed out by Ur. Harrington (1)

but it has been thought advisable to reproduce the analysis, though im-

_perfect, for purposes of rough comparison. This analysis is as follows :

: RSI AMEE, Fes oat fe. 8 yalga'eeys Sens 2 ae 3 «+45 45200
oo LURTE 2 2 aS See «mene one 33°92

ESR {GSS COPS Et Ae eee See te Irae nee 4°32

line. .1, heed Sa ee Sie ee ee 8°04

WE EERSTE ae aa a, Reale ay fe

Tee SGI nr as ee ecto 4.16

97°96

The specific gravity, according to Dr. Thomson, is 2°8625. Under
the microscope the phenocrysts of the so-called “ Huronite” are seen to
be a decomposed aggregate of zoisite, muscovite, epidote, calcite, chlo-
rite and felspar. Occasionally there is a very narrow border of compa
ratively unaltered felspar surrounding these individuals, in which traces of
the very fine striation, due to multiple twinning, may be observed. Im-
mediately within this band, however, the decomposition products are most
abundant, and the original plagioclase is replaced almost altogether by
epidote, zoisite and muscovite, their relative abundance. being in the
order mentioned, while the interior of the crystals is composed mainly
of muscovite with a much less proportion of zoisite, epidote and felspar.

a (i) ‘Trans. Royal Society of ‘Canada, Section III., 1886, p. 82.

42 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

The epidote and zoisite occur in irregular, often somewhat elongated
masses or “grape-like” bunches which frequently show a more or less
definite arrangemenr in accordance with the structure of the original
felspar. Both minerals exhibit their characteristic high relief, the epi-
dote showing brilliant chromatic polarization colours, and yellow to
colourless pleochroism, while the interference colours of the zoisite, as
usual, are very low, dull bluish to yellowish. The sericite is of a very
pale green, and occurs in scales or aggregates of scales and plates, show-
ing customary brilliant polarization colours and parallel extinction. The
sericite has, likewise, often a definite arrangement, but sometimes occurs
in irregular or matted aggregates. The ‘ saussuritization ” of the origi-
nal plagioclase has been usually so complete, that only traces of the
twinning lamelle can be detected. The matrix in which these crystals
are embedded is a diabase, composed essentially of plagioclase and
augite. The plagioclase shows mote or less alteration, identical in cha-
racter with that of the larger phenocrysts so that it must have had a
similar composition. It occurs as lath-shaped, twin crystals, often con-
sisting of only two lamella, which pierce, and are often embedded in the
augite. The augite occurs in more or less irregular masses, filling in
the interstices between the felspar laths. It is light-brownish in colour:
exhibits a faint pleochroism, and the characteristic interrupted cleavages
in cross-section. It is partially altered into green trichroic hornblende,
and occasionally the alteration has been carried so far that chlorite has
resulted. This uralitization has only proceeded to a limited extent,
and is confdned to a narrow margin surrounding the irregular fissures
traversing the augite masses. Occasional twins were noticed, the
twinning plane being the orthopinacoid.

Ilmenite is abundant, but almost wholly converted into leucoxene-
The fragments have generally jagged and irregular contours, but occa-
sionally, some are seen which possess a rather perfect crystallographic
outline. The characteristic alteration along lines parallel to the faces
of the rhombohedron produces alternating bands of greyish white leu-
coxene, and black, unaltered ilmenite. The less altered portions of
the plagioclase and the augite show uneven or wavy extinction, the
“strain shadows ” induced in the latter being especially well marked,

—E———————————

EE es ee ee,

On Some Dykes Conrarnsinc HuRonITE. 43

and is a noticeable and interesting feature in connection with the rock.
Additional evidence of pressure is furnished by the frequent distortion
and even dislocation of both the plagioclase and augite individuals.

8. Locality.—About 4 miles N.W. Pogamasing Station, main line,
Canadian Pacific Railway, District of Algoma, Ont.

The specimen was obtained from a dyke, cutting the granitoid
_ gneisses of the Laurentian. The phenocrysts of ‘“‘ Huronite” have
generally a rude, rounded outline, the largest of which are about two
inches in diameter. Many of the smaller ones have irregular or jagged
outline, and occasional individuals exhibit some of the sharp faces of
the original crystal. The mineral is of the usual light, yellowish-green
colour, shows the glistening surfaces of the indistinct cleavage and occa-
sional faint-strie. It is sub-translucent, has a waxy lustre, and a some-

_ what “soapy ” feel. According to Dr. Harrington* “ the hardness is 54
} *Trans. Royal Soc. Canada, Sec. III, 1886, p. 82.

or a little over, fusibility about 5, and specific gravity 2°814.” An analysis
of some of the material composing these phenocrysts was made by Mr.
N. N. Evans, of McGill University, for Dr. Harrington, with the follow-
ing results :

SiG? aan tO oA cee emer gi” woot AR OF
PORPRERLET SPREE PETES DEST Seis wc wre S's 0 wis's's epee reals 32°49
ae CONC Cs a oe ares eee 0597
WARE a OS rt ems 13°30
OL AESIESTE ae > Sey iD 6. 8e ERR "CPCI REO 0°22
RAS res crag 5. > - 2°88
S602 4p kanes aS See ee A: 2°03
MSS OME ISHIION 3c. 0. 06s one oe 27D

10168

The matrix in which these crystals are developed is a fine-grained
dark green diabase, with abundantly disseminated particles of iron
pyrites.

‘Uuder the microscope the “ Huronite” is seen to consist of an
aggregate of epidote, zoisite, sericite and chlorite, but in the larger
crystals especially, considerable areas of -unaltered plagioclase exist
which are quite fresh and glassy, and exhibit the twinning lamellae
quite distinctly. The smaller pkenccrysts, however, are altogether

44 THe OrrawA NATURALIST.

decomposed so that there is little or no evidence of the lamellation of
the original felspar. The matrix in which these crystals are embedded
is an exceedingly decomposed grouidmass made up of felspar, epidote,
chlorite, hornblende and zoisite, with larger individuals of augite in a
more or less advanced stage of uralitization. The alteration to horn-
blende is mainly marginal and has proceeded very unevenly, the core of
unaltered augite, having thus a very irregular outline. The augite has
a brownish colour and exhibits the characteristic interrupted cleavages in
cross-section. The larger individuals are all twinned, the twinning plane
being the orthopinacoid. The rock isso decomposed that the original
ophitic structure is nearly, if not quite, obliterated. Very little trace, if any,
remains of the original plagioclase of the ground mass, and instead
small areas or fragments of a water-clear unstriated felspar (albite ?) are
present which are evidently secondary, as they contain minute embedded
needless of the secondary epidote. This water clear secondary felspar
has evidently been developed at the expense of the original plagioclase. (1)

A considerable amount of ilmenite was originally present, but is
now almost altogether decomposed to leucoxene. This greyish white
translucent mineral occurs in masses which are generally irregular or
have a rude rhombic outline, and frequently exhibits the very charac-
teristic alteration along lines or zones parallel to the faces of the
rhombohedron. The thinnest section shows the mineral to be made up
of an aggrega‘e of minute rounded grains with a high index of refraction
and showing brilliant interference colours. (2)

9. Lozality.—10 miles north of Lake Kawachagami, on the portage
route between the Rupert and Eastmain rivers, in the peninsula of
Labrador, Geo. Survey of Canada, Eastmain River. (3)

Macroscopically a dark greenish grey gabbro with yellowish green
phenocrysts of plagioclase. The phenocrysts have a tolerably sharp,
through irregular outline, the larger ones being over.an inch in diameter.

Under the microscope the rock is seen to be composed mainly of
plagioclase, augite and ilmenite. In places a coarse ophitic structure can

(1) Teall, British Petrography, p. 230.

(2) Notes on the microscopic structure of some rocks of the Quebec Group—
Frank D. Adams—Geo. Survey, Canada, Report Progress, 1880-82, p. 16, A...

(3) Reference No. 1, p. 12, Book II, 12/7/92, Low. as

4°

eee

See ie be et on el |

—— ——_—... - =

ee re a ee

On Some Dykes ConraAininc Huronire. 45

be seen and the specimen doubtless represents the “ granitoid ” structure
so characteristic of the centre portion of most diabase dykes which nearer
their margin exhibit the typical ophitic structure. The larger phenocrysts
show a marked alteration. Most of the sections of these crystals are
made up ot innumerable minute scales and fibres of light greenish seri-
cite arranged parallel to the polysynthetic twinning lines, and therefore
even where the alteration has proceeded farthest the direction of the
very fine striation may still be ascertained. Zoisite and epidote have
also been developed the former usually in more or less elongated
prisms or lath-shaped crystals, occurring either isolated or in irregularly
disposed groups. ‘The epidote is present in irregular grains or associ-
ated with calcite filling certain fissures in the crystals. Some portions
of the crystals which had escaped alteration hada distinctly reddish

colour and revealed the fine twinning strie. The crystals are precisely

similar to those decribed by Thompson as “ Huronite.” The specific
gravity of these crystals, according to Mr. R.A. A. Johnston, is 2°725
The augite has undergone more or less complete uralitization, although
in most cases cores of unaltered material remain. During this process
a certain amount of epidote present in the slide has been formed. The
plagioclase of the matrix shows the same alteration or “ saussuritization ’
as the larger phenocrysts, the decomposition products aggregating them-
selves towards the centre leaving a comparatively fresh periphery.
Ilmenite is a rather abundant constituent and occasionally shows
incipient alteration to leucoxene. Apatite is very abundant. The
interlamination of quartz and felspar, known as granophyre, is present
in considerable quantity.

10. Locality near Missinaibi Station, on the main line of the
Canadian Pacific Railway, District of Algoma, Ont.

The specimen examined was obtained by Dr. Selwyn from one of
several dykes which cut both the Huronian and Laurentian rock
exposed in this region. It is a medium grained dark greyish green
diabase whose ophitic structure is megascopically apparent. ‘The por-
phyritic crystals vary from a pale greyish green to a light yellow green,
weathering to a light grey on exposed surfaces. Very frequently they
have tolerably good crystallographic boundaries, although in most cases

46 THE OrrawA NATURALIST. ,

especially in the smaller individuals they have a rather irregular out-
line. The specific gravity of these crystals ascertaimed by Mr. R. A. A.
Johnston was 2°935.

Under the microscope these phenocrysts show a very advanced stage
of alteration and the original plagioclase is now replaced by an aggre-
gate of muscovite, zoisite, epidote, felspar and calcite. ‘There is little
or no trace left of the original twinning lamellae. The plagioclase laths
present in the enclosing matrix show a similar alteration, although not
to so large an extent. The augite originally present is now replaced by
hornblende (uralite) and often the alteration has proceeded so far that
chlorite has resulted. These resulting products of decomposition fill the
original allotriomorphic individuals of augite. These individuals as
now present usually exhibit a deep green border of strongly trichroic
hornblende, while the interior is occupied by an aggregate of interlacing
fibres of light green hornblende with more or less chlorite. Traces sf
the characteristic interrupted’ cleavages of augite are present in occa-
sional grains, but no unaltered cores now remain. The resemblence
to other uralitic hornblende is, however, unmistakable. (1) The hornblende
also bears a close resemblence to that present in the rock just described
(No. 9) in which cores of the original augite are still present. The
ilmenite present is more or less altered to leucoxene showing brilliant
polarization colours (compare No. 8 ante). A considerable amount of
biotite of a light brown colour on account of the “ bleaching” it has
undergone shows rather brilliant interference colours. ~ The biotite has
also been altered in many cases to chlorite. Granophyre structure was
also noticed. |

rr. Locaitty.— Lake Petitsikapow, about 15 miles below old Fort
Nascawpee. West branch Hamilton River. Labrador Peninsula. (2)

The dyke from which the sample was taken, according to Mr. Low,
is 200 yards in width, coarsely crystalline in the centre where the
porpbyritic individuals of Huronite are often three-fourths of an inch in
diameter. The dyke breaks through and alters sandstones, limestones

(1) Williams’ Appendix I., Part F., Annual Report, Geological Survey of
Canada, Vol. V., 1889-90, p. 60,
(2) Reference No. 4, p. 3¢, Bk. II. Low, 23/6/94.

es Sh Sl

Se eo

a,

On Some Dykes ConraAininc Hvronire. 47

and shales of Cambrian age, running almost parallel to their strike.
The specimen was taken from near the middle of this dyke, and shows
macroscopically a dark greenish grey, rather coarse grained diabase, in
which are embedded numerous phenocrysts of altered greenish felspar
(Huronite). The crystals of ‘“‘ Huronite,” though much smaller than
usual, are on the other hand much more abundant, so that it is often
difficult to obtain even a small chip of the finer groundmass, in which
they are embedded. The felspar of both the larger porphyritic indi-
_ viduals and those present in the groundmass show great alteration,
although the polysynthetic twinning lamellz may still be recognized.
The decomposition products are mainly sericite and epidote. The
specific gravity of these phenocrysts according to Mr. Johnston, 13
2.773. The augite when fresh (which is rarely the case except in very
minute fragments), is of a reddish colour, and shows distinct
pleochroison. A great deal of chlorite is present. The ilmenite
occurs in irregular grains as well as fragments, which have a more or
less perfect crystallographic outline and occasional perfect rhombohedra
were noticed. he alteration to leucoxene is very characteristic, this
resulting form of sphene frequently exhibiting its characteristic brilliant
chromatic polarization in thin sections. (1) Besides these larger frag-
ments small rounded grains of a brownish grey translucent mineral
occur witb high index of refraction, and show brilliant interference
colours. These occasionally show small granules in the centre of un-
altered titanic iron ore, and thus reveal their derivation. Apatite is
very abundant, and occurs in colourless prismatic needles which are
frequently bent, cracked and broken. Pyrite is also a rather abundant
accessory constituent.

ee ae

(1) Page 16 A, Report Geological Survey of Canada, 1880-2.

48 THE OrrawA NATURALIST.

HUNTING THE BARREN GROUND CARIBOU.
By FRANK RussELL, of the State University of Iowa.

Vague rumors had reached Fort Rae concerning the whereabouts
of the “deer” during the last week of October, but it was not until the
first of November that a party left the post to hunt them.

A few years ago the Barren Ground Caribou appeared about the
fort regularly upon All Saints Day. They were often killed from the
buildings, and throughout the winter might be found near the post. In
1877 an unbroken line of caribou crossed the frozen lake near the fort,
they were fourteen days in passing and in such a mass that, in the
through the

”?

words of an eye witness, ‘“‘daylight could not be seen
column. They are now seldom seen within several miles of Rae.

The ‘Fort Hunter,” Tenony, with seven of his followers was just
starting upon a seventy-five mile journey toward the north on the
evening of the first, when I learned of his intentions, and after agreeing
to furnish a few “skins ” of flour, tea, and tobacco, and to pay a skin a day
for a dog driver it was settled that I might accompany them into the
hunting grounds where another chief, Naohmby, had objected to my
going three months before, on the ground that all the game would
desert the country if pursued by a naturalist.

I loaded my sled with thirty white fish, three days provisions for
the dogs, and fifteen pounds of “dry meat” for the “boy,” while I
shared alternately with each of them during the trip, the rank, “ hung
fish” driving me to dried meat and the leathery slabs compelling me to
return to the fish.

As the “ brigade” only intended getting clear of the fort that even-
ing I preferred to remain and make an early start the nexf day. We
left the fort at daylight on the second, Yahty running before my dogs.
Our course was northward for twelve miles, to the end of the Northern
Arm of the Great Slave Lake, whence a channela hundred yards in
width called Willow River continues for half a milé*before expanding
into a small lake extending toward the northeast and connecting by a
number of “schnys” with Lac Brochet. » Following’ ‘the eastern shore
Of the smal} lake, we crosséd a short portage and traversing a narrow

6 mde dhe eh ee eee, 1 od eS

HUNTING THE BARREN GROUND CARIBOU. 49

channel for a couple of miles reached Sah-kah-tohn-tooh, the Lake of
the Bear’s Shoulder. This body of water must exceed twenty-five m:les
in length.

We did not succeed in overtaking Tenony but encamped near the
end of the lake with an Indian, who, with his ten year old son and three
miserable “ giddies”—Indian dogs—was also in quest of the caribou.
He carried a powder horn differing from any that I saw in the North.
It was made by boring or burning out a section of the bram ofa
caribou’s antler. He would smilingly beg for tea and tobacco, not
becoming in the least disheartened by repeated refusals. I was glad to
escape his importunities by leaving camp at 4a.m. The brisk trot of
our well-fed team soon carried us out of reach of the yells of the giddies
as the lash was unsparingly applied in his efforts to keep up with the

~ “ Mollah” who had such quantities of “lee tea” and ‘‘ tobah.”

Passing a couple of miles of short portages we reached another
large lake called by the Dog Ribs, Quem-tah-Tooh, the Lake of the White
Rock, where we found Tenony encamped.

The Indians had been argqused by their dogs greeting our approach
with barks and howls and were huddled behind a roaring fire with their
blankets, once white, now a dirty gray, thrown over their shoulders,
their hands outstretched toward the welcome blaze while they guarded
the few frozen fish which were thawing and burning at their feet.
Behind them a confused mass of dog harness, wrappers, and flat sleds
formed a barrier to keep out a score or more of giddies which were
crowding about the camp and fighting for an advantageous position
from which to watch for the few bones that escaped their master’s
teeth. After “drinking tea” we followed the lake shore toward the
northwest where a range of granite hills, called Sah-me-t’ ie-kfwa, rose
high above the general level of the somewhat rugged country about

them.
When close to the hills we discovered a small band of caribou

toward which the dogs started at their best pace, barking and straining
at their collars, and urged to greater exertion by the men who shouted
“ Ayee ecwoh, m’nitla” (There are the caribou, now, go!). The alarmed
caribou were dashing about in all directions yet managing to keep out
of range though several shots were fired before they entered the tim-

50 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

ber. Around us rose the precipitous snow covered mountains through
a gap of which a large stream entered the lake, its cascades giving off
clouds of vapor. High above us a bald eagle wheeled in majestic flight
with white head and crissum flashing in the light of the rising sun.
Cutting our way through a brulé we reached another lake upon which
there was an abundance of fresh tracks. An hour later I left the others
and started down the lake with the boy before the dogs. Three or
four bands of caribou, perhaps fifty in all, soon came out upon the ice.
Yahty ran toward the nearest of them followed by the dogs which
dashed past him at full cry as soon as they discovered the caribou. I
was seated upon tne sled while Yahty ran, holding the sled line in
cloud of snow which trailed out behind like the tail of a comet.

a

The caribou stood motionless until we were within a couple of |
hundred yards before making off; they soon stopped, side on, to sur- |
vey their pursuers, snuffing the air fora moment; they would throw
back their heads and leap high in the air, and again dash away at a
swift run, passing patches of smooth ice without a miss step. nee

The drifts were small, but the snow was well hardened making a
rongh surface for the swift flying sled. Just as I would be about to
pull the trigger after taking hasty aim a sudden lurch would nearly dis-
jodge me from my seat and perhaps send the muzzle of the rifle sky-
wards. I succeeded in killing two and breaking a fore leg of another
which ran with undiminished speed, in fact led the band as they
entered the timber and so escaped. ;

Placingarow of pine boughsat intervals of fifteen or twenty yardsquite
across an arm of the lake we concealed ourselves on shore, and waited
the appearance of the caribou. Only one band approached our barrier
which they followed some distance, but did not venture to cross; they
turned away before coming within range, but the following day we were
more successful in employing this, a common device of the Dog Ribs.

That evening we feasted until a late hour upon the first caribou
meat of the season. Several heads were skinned and hung from poles
before the fire by the mitten.cords. of the owners and willow hooks.
As soon as the outside was roasted the jaw was turned-back and the
tongue, one of the choicest bits ofall, slightly cooked. The dogs were

yy! io

<< gules §

RPMS Fg, Ka

eae ins

Hustinc THE BARREN Ground Caripsou, 5T

well fed for the first time in months; we gave them the quarters only,

and cracked the long bones for the marrow which, raw or roasted, is
one of the greatest of Dog Rib luxuries. Look down in pity upon
“the savage and his marrow bones” if you will, bet you might perhaps
relish that same marrow if you had “ hustled” for those bones yourself
as I had done, or you might after running fifty miles pass your plate a
second time for bouillon made of blood carried to camp in a caribou’s
stomach. [ven the tendons were eaten and the feet also, after roasting
them until the hoof could be knocked off.

Although I lived some time with the Dog Ribs and spent over a
year in their territory, I never knew of their eating the contents of the cari-
bou’s stomach as do the Eskimos. The unborn calf, the udder ofa

“milk-giving cow, the tongue, the marrow and back fat are the parts held
‘in highest esteem.

Tenony fulfilled his promise of returning after “five sleeps,” but
marched fifty miles against a heavy gale of wind upon the sixth
day to do it.

The caribou came but little nearer during the winter of 1893-84. I
made three other trips in search of them and travelled five hundred
miles in all, driving my own dogs after the first hunt with Tenony,
Out of a large number secured, | selected eight choice specimens, and
during the winter obtained the skin of an albino, for the museum of the
State University of Iowa. Albinism is of rare occurrence among the
Barren Ground Caribou. One of the oldest Dog Ribs assured me that
he had never seen a “ white deer.”

Authorities differ as to the time when the antlers are cast.

The new horn begins to grow late in April and the velvet is not all
cleared off until November. The old males shed their antlers in
December, While in the Barren Ground in March and April, I saw
large numbers of both sexes with antlers, and on the 5th of April I killed
a buck, four or five years of age, still bearing them. At that season we
saw thousands of caribou in the vicinity of Bathurst Inlet, which had
evidently wintered there and not approached the woods as in former

years. .
It is said that only the females reach the sea coast where they drop

their young in June. Yet I have seen both male and female caribou
wading in the shoal water of the Arctic Ocean south of Herschel Island

in July.

Or
Lo

THe Orrawa NatTuURALIsT.

TOWN BIRDS.
By W. A. D. LEES.

(Read before the Ottawa Field Naturalist's Club, rgth March, 1895.)

After a year or two with little opportunity to be in the woods or on
the waters where birds are most commonly found, one has not much to
report of their doings, and hence I am constrained to-night to confine
my remarks to “Town Birds.” Everyone of us may see something of
these as he goes about the city on his daily business, and to one who
has not given the subject much attention it is astonishing what a num-
ber of species are found even in the busiest streets.

For the student of birds, as well as for those who have only a very
casual acquaintance with them, there is alwayssomething new instore,even
among the town birds. Seven years ago yesterday, near the corner of
Maria and Metcalfe streets when I was only beginning, as they say with
children, to “ take notice” of birds, I came upona flock of Purple
Finches (I think the other name of Red Linnet, is a better one) and
was thrilled by the brilliant colour of their plumage, which to my un-
practised eye seemed as if stained by the rowan berries upon which they
were feeding. Less than a month ago, at the same street corner, I saw
my first flock of those erratic winter visitants the Bohemian Waxwings,
and I-do not think that either the lapse of years, or the number of birds
I have come to know since those first red linnets, in any degree les-
sened the thrill of pleasure with which I welcomed. another new ac-
quaintance to the list of my bird friends.

The rowan trees along the streets and in public and private grounds,
when in fruit, give us many opportunities of seeing birds which, like
these Waxwings, visit us from the far north. Most of you will remem-
ber how, some ten years ago, the Pine Grosbeaks came down in such
numbers, and were so apparently indifferent to the presence of man,
that they might almost be taken by hand as they fed upon the berries
dropped by their hungry comrades in the trees, upon the snow be-
neath.

Almost every neglected vacant lot with its crop of weed seeds
attracts in due time its roving flock of .Redpolls, or their near relatives
the Goldfinches, for these latter often spend the winter with us, escap-

.

—

Town Brirps. 53

ing, in their sober garb of olive brown, the observation of those who

q only know them in the brilliant black and gold of Summer. Pine Sis-

kins too may be looked for whenever and wherever the white cedars
have cones, in the seeds of which they seem especially to delight, and
wherever such small game abounds, one has not far to seek their hand-

- some and voluble but deceitful enemy the Shrike. Hawks too are more

or less common according to the food supply, and my note-boo gives
‘me both winter and summer records of the Sparrow Hawk in the busiest
parts of the city.

A hawk was captured alive last fall at the City Hall square, and
kept some time in confinement, but proving an undesirable pet, it
passed from one owner to another and at last made its escape. I did
not ascertain its species, but a remarkably tall legend connected with

its final disappearance might readily suggest the possibility of its having

been a Fish-hawk.

Even such a man-hater as the Ruffed Grouse, or as we commonly,
but I believe incorrectly, call him, the Partridge, occasionally pays the
city a visit, and has been known to fly through the glass otf a window
and land on the dining room table, a place to which, under the strin-
gency of the present game laws, he usually finds his way by a less d-rect
route, and, I might add, under a different name from either of the
above.

Turning now to the summer birds, many are almost too common
to need mention: such, for instance as the omnivorous and belligerent
House Sparrow, for whom the name English, or even European, is now
more of a misnomer than ever, since he has annexed the whole Ameri-
can continent. The Robin and the Song Sparrow may be heard and
seen in all parts of the city, and the Night Hawk and Chimney Swift,
in their season, are familiar objects to a'l who even glance upward.
One of the former seated on a flat roof forms the subject of a very good
photograph, edited (if I may use the term) by one of our members, who
was quick enough to take advantage of the situation from the back
window of a Sparks Street studio. Tree Swallows and Purple Martins
are only a little less common, bothspecies being regular summer boarders

_ at the Albion Hotel, which has long sinceceased toentertain other guests

54 THE OtTtrawsa NATURALIST.

than these occupants of its sky parlors. Many a period of enforced wait-
ting in an unattractive court room across the street has been pleasantly
relieved by these sam2 birds. From the windows of the same building
I have often caught other little glimpses of bird-life without, which were
in pleasing coatrast with the glimpses of man-life to be had within.
Here I have seen amongst others, Chipping Sparrows, Yellow Warblers,
Warbling Vireos, Downy Woodpeckers, and Cedar Waxwings ; a pair of
the last industriously ridding the ashtrees of caterpillars, andso close that
I could easily distinguish the red wax-like appendages to the wing-tips,
from which the bird takes it name. These birds are in due season also
industrious fly-catchers, working in exactly the same way as the true
Tyrannide, and so it is a question if, after all, they do not earn a right
to at least some of the fruit they so greedily consume.

Amongst other birds more or less common in busy parts of the city —
may be named Bluebirds, Vesper Sparrows, and Savanna Sparrows, and
even that handsome Woodpecker, from whose thirty or more names
the American Ornithologist’s Union has chosen “ Flicker,” appears in
my note-book as a town bird.

That surprises are often in store for the observer of town birds is
shown by such records as those of a Brown Creeper climbing a tele-
graph pole at the corner of Elgin and Queen streets, a Red-breasted
Nuthatch on another telegraph pole at the corner of Elgin and Nepeaa
streets, and a Wood Peewee in the back-yard of a Sparks street hard-
ware store. ;

It will be noticed that in the above paper I have made no mention
of the various small patches of wood-land in outlying parts of the city,
such as those about Patterson’s Creek, the old race-course, McKay’s
bush, and the like, where nine-tenths of all the birds that visit the dis-
trict may be noted by a careful observer, while the Lovers’ Walk and
Majo:’s Hill Park, in the very heart of the city will furnish records of
many of the rarest and most retiring of our wood-birds. Neither have
I mentioned another favorite haunt of the birds oa Sussex street
where the very shyest of them are so tame that they never leave their
perches, even on the nearest approach of man. I mean the Geological
Survey Museum.

OBITUARY. 55

SER TST SSeS: BT

James Dwicut Dana.

James Dwight Dana, one of the fathers of American Geological
Science, died at his home in New Haven, Conn., Easter Sunday, the 14th
day of April, 1895. He was born at Utica, N.Y., February 12th, 1813,
and was therefore in his 83rd year. He graduated at Yale when only
twenty years of age, and evinced great aptitude for the natural sciences
and mathematics. or two years he was teacher of mathematics in the
U.S. Navy. He is next seen as assistant to Prof. Silliman at Yale
Coliege. In 1838 he published “A System of Mineralogy,” which
won for him the admiration of the scientists of two continents as
mineralogist and geoloist. In 1838, he sailed for the Southern and
Pacific Oceans, with Lieut. Wilkes, in charge of the squadron, whose
expedition lasted four years. ‘4 Reporton Crustacea,” 1852-4. “ Report
on Loophytes,” 1846 ; *‘ Report on the Geology of the Pacific, 1849 ; besides
“ Science and the Bible,” in Bibliotheca Sacra, published in 1856-7,
occupied his time during the 15 years which followed his return from
the Wilkes expedition. In 1885 Dana succeeded Prof. Silliman. as
Prof. of Natural History and Geology at Yale. His first “ Manual of
Geology ” was puolished in 1863—this was followed by a ‘* Text Book

]

of Geology for Schools and Academies,” 1864, and latterly ‘‘ Corals and
Coral Islands” in 1872. In this year he was awarded the Wollaston
gold medal by the Geological Society of London. He was elected
President of the American Associaticn Ady. Science for the first
time in 1854, and was an honorary, corresponding or active fellow of
nearly all the Geological Societies of Europe und America. His con-
tributions and numerous writings in Silliman’s Journal as one of its
editors, in the Trans. Acad. Nat. Sc. of Philadelphia, in the Proc.
Amer. Acad. Sc. and Arts and in numerous other channels are too well
known to be commented upon in a passing sketch like this. He had
just completed the last edition of his ‘‘ Manual of Geology ” which had
been used so extensively as a text book in the colleges and universities
of America and Europe. His was a life of genuine usefulness to his
generation.

56 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

NOTES, REVIEWS, AND COMMENTS.

Geology.—Baitey, Pror. IL. W., M.A., Ph. "., F.R.S.C.—" Pres
liminary Report on Geological investigations tn south-western Nova
Scotia.” Being Report Q. of Vol. VI., Annual Report, Geological
Survey of Canada, 1892-93, published ¢895, 21 pp. .

Pending the publication of Dr. Bailey’s final report addressed to the
Director of the Geological Survey of Canada, the preliminary report here
referred to has been publishedand forms part of the 6th Annual Report of
the Geological Survey. The delineation of the granite areas in South-
Western Nova Scotia, the South and Blue Mountains, Tusket Wedge, the
Barrington area, the Shelbourne and Port Mouton areas are given and ©
the reader is referred to Sir Archibald Geikie’s descriptions of South-
Eastern Ireland as applying, almost word for word, to the granites of ©
South-Western Nova Scotia. The Cambrian Succession, as seen ~
in Queen’s Co., is carefully described and the possible existence of pre- ~
Cambrian rocks pointed out. As to the Devonian System our ~
knowledge was still incomplete. On pp. 14 and 15, a brief summary of ©
the palzontological results obtained by Dr. Ami after examining the col- —
lections in the Peter Redpath Museum and in the possesion of the —
Geological Survey is given. Most of the collections from Nictau point
to Eo-Devoniantime. The Triassic and Post-Tertiary system
are next Ciscussed, and the economic minerals receive considerable
attention. .
MatTHEw, G. F., Dr., M.A., F.R.S.C., “ Early Protozoa,” “ The Amer

can Geologist ”—Vol. XV., No. 3, pp. 146-153, March, 1895.

In this paper the author reviews Mr. L. Cayeux’s paper describing
certain so called Pre-Cambrian Radiolaria. No less than 45 different
kinds of rhizopods have been described and are figured on one plate.

Mr. Cayeux’s microscopic slides were examined both by Dr. G. J. ~
Hinde, of London, England, and by Dr. Riist, of Hanover, Germany.
These two gentlemen, whilst not agreeing with his (Cayeux’s) conclu-
sions, admitted that the forms were organic.”

WINCHELL, W. H., PRor.—‘“' The Stratigraphic base of the Taconic or

Lower Cambrian.”—“ The American Geologist,” Vol. XV., No. 3,

pp. 153-162, March, 1895.

Nores, Reviews anb ComMMEN'Ts. 57

This contains a general sketch of the history of geological investi-
ations, both in Great Britain and America, regarding the base of the
fossiliferous series—of the lower Cambrian. Tie views held by Sedg”
ick, Murchison, Dr. Hicks, by Barrande in Bohemia by Sir Archibald
Geikie are freely quoted—whilst in America those of Dana, Logan,
; Walcott, Selwyn, Ells, Van Hise and others are also cited. Director
" Howley’s work in Newfoundland is likewise referred to, as well as Dr.
-Matthew’s researches in New Brunswick.
Taytor, Frank B.—‘‘ The Second Lake Algonquin.” The American

Geologist, Vol. XV., No. 3, pp. 162-179, March, 1895.

This contains the concluding article by Mr. Taylor on the above
subject as elaborated from data obtained in the North Bay and sur-
rounding district around Lake Nipissing in Canada.

“The attitude of the deformed plane;” the order of changes
in Niagara and Lake Algonquin, the St. Clair Flats, evidence of recent

elevation and tiiting in contiguous regions——all are elaborately discussed.

er apy A Reena

aT a

Mr. Taylor sums up his conclusions regarding the rise and fall of the
_ waters in the straits and lake of Nipissing—of Superiur and Lake Erie.
The suggestive facts mentioned point,” naturally, ‘‘to a correlation with
; the eastward uplift which deformed the Nipissing plane with the elevation
_ of the north-eastern barrier of Lake Ontario and of the deposits of the
Champlain submergence, in the Champlain, Lower St. Lawrence, and
- Hudson Bay areas.

I Girty, Geo. H.—Development of the corallum of Favosites Forbisi, Var.

: ocetdentals.”—The American Geologist, Vol. XV., No. 3, pp. 131-
+ 146, March, 1895.
t Mr. Girty, who has carried on his researches at Yale, under Dr. C.

E. Beecher, describes “ve stages in the growth of the corallum of
the above species. He carefully describes the interstilial cells or buds
which can appear only when divergence of the older corallites permits—
ually “in the angles where the older corallites meet.”

Favosites spinigeurs, Hall, and F. contcus, Hall, both Silurian co-
s, have also received attention and study for comparison, likewise
. hemisphericus. Mr. Girty observes the noticeable fact that the initial
orallite in Favosites gives rise to buds which are (1) /owr in number,
d (2) all on one side (dorsal) of the corallum. Favosifes presents an

Kee tae

58 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

interesting form for the study of mural pores and their relations. The
affinities of this genus are likewise discussed amd seem to point to
Aulopora and Romingeria—rather than any other genera of the fer-
forata excepting Michelinia and Pleurodictyum. The first stage of
Pleurodictyum and of Favosites is an auloporoid stage represented
by the initial cell.

Geology of Aylmer—Onthe 27th of March, 1895, oneof our mem- |
bers, Mr. T. W. E. Sowter, delivered a lecture on the “‘Palzontology
and Geology of Aylmer at the Academy. The lecture proved to be
very interesting and was illustrated by a large suite of specimens con-
sisting of rocks and fossils, some new to science. We are pleased to
state that we expect to receive a paper from Mr. Sowter on the above
subject for the pages of the NATURALIST in the near future.
Zoology—TZunicata of the Pacific Coast of North America. —

1. Perophora annectens, n. sp. By WILLIAM E. Rivrrer. Proc. Cal. Acad.
Sc., Vol. IV, Part I, pp. 36-85, Plates I. II. and III., figs. 1-39. Sept.,
1894.

This is an interesting and exhaustive biological study of one of ©

those interesting species of tunicates which abound along the rocky
coasts and shores of the North American Pacific. The species here
described for the first time is from Monterey Bay, California. The
author gives first a general summary of our knowledge of simple and
compound ascidians, and points out that with the result of his researches,
the importence of this old classification becomes “ 72/.”

Perophora Hutchinsoni, from Australia, and P. vzridis from the New
England coast of North America are the latest forms brought under
Wiegmann’s genus established in 1835. Then follows a diagnosis of ~
the species with a general description dealing with the mode of occur-
rence of the ascidiczsoids in their colonies. Their histological charac-
ters are very ably described. This form is a particularly favorable one
to study owing to its wonderful transparency. The zes¢ and the origin
of its cells receives special attention. The results of Ritter’s work con-
firm those of Salensky and Kowalevsky on the same subject, showing
that the cells of the tunicate test are not derived from the ectoderm
but from the mesoderm. Dr. Ritter says: “I believe this to be due to
the fact that the cellulose substance of the test is here being formed..—
I have no evidence that the matrix or cellulose portion of the test is
produced as a secretion of the mesodermal cells imbedded in it......

_Nores, Reviews anp ComMENTs.

ensky also regards the processes present as having to do with the
mation of the cellulose substance.”

The musculature, the pharyageal apparatus, interesting notes on
he parasites of the tentacles, the branchial basket proper, the endostyle,
the sub-neural gland, the digestive tract and its parasites, each received
a share of careful description. Then the reproductive and circulatory
systems are discussed. The movements of the heart and the character
of the blood cells are also noted, some new light being thrown on the
latter although Roule has arrived at very similar results from his researches
on the simple ascidians from the Coast of Provence, France.
hree plates accompanying the paper. The figures were nearly all out-
lined by the author with the aid ofan Abbé camera lucida.—H. M. Amt.

Zoology—Verritt, A. E.— Distribution of the Echinoderms
of North-eastern America.—Amer. J. Sc. & Arts, Vol. XLIX, 3rd Ser.,
No. 290, pp. 127-140, February, 1895, also idid, No. 291, pp. 199-
3 212, March, 1895, New Haven, Conn.

The following species of Echinodermata from Canada and other
British possessions in North America are recorded in these interesting
papers by Prof. Verrill.

ASTERIOIDEA.
_ No. | Genera & Species. Author. Locality. Remarks.
Pontaster hebitus. .| Sladen. ....| Nova Scotia and New- '
foundland aon. 0 ies) son's Banks off thecoast.
Pseudarchaster in- 1
termadius....... Sladen... .:.- WNOXA: SCOCIAs, ie dees nee Acircum—polar
species.
Ctenodiscus crispa-
PERSE i feie,''e 3% Dub. and
orem, .1.]. bay of Hundy.-s a.0 es
Psilaster Florez . | Verrill...... Banks off Nova Scotia. .| Taken by Glouces-

ter fishermen.
Pentagonaster gra-
nularis ........ | Perrier. ....| Banks off Nova Scotia. .| Taken by Glouces-
ter fishermen,
Hippasteria _ phry-
BM se Bis oo Agassiz..... Bay of Fundy, Nova

Scotia’ \acucwesck «ar <d On hard bottoms.
Tremaster mirabilis} Verrill...... Banks off Nova Scotia!

and Newfoundland.. "|
Solaster endeca....| Forbes...... Bay of Fundy, banks off

mova Scotia. <.. <5. In 40 to 150 fath-

oms.

agg hie ee aw = 2
Le Sg ~ ‘en
*
60 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.
ASTEROIDEA—Continued.
= ed
No.| Genera & Species. Author. | Locality. Remarks.
9 |Solaster Syrtensis..| Verrill...... Banquereau, Nova Sco-
Lider: Beers careers 45 to 80 fathoms.
10 |Solaster Earllii....| Verrill.... .| Banks off Nova Scotia

Il

14
15

23

24

}
|
}

|

|
}

|
|
}
|

|

(allied to S. Daw-
soni Ver. from
coast of Brit. Col.

|Cros aster papposus

Pteraster pulvillus.

Pteraster militaris. .

Cribrella pectinata
Cribrella sanguino-
Kerio 5 Ieee es ec

Pedicellaster typi-
CUS Hae hens el

Stichaster albulus. .

Asterias vulgaris...

Asterias stellionura
Asterias enopla....
(a new species)
Asterias polaris... .

Leptasterias tenera.

Leptasterias Groén-
landi¢a: 0.35. 3.

Leptastenas _ litto-
FAILS bei cial 2 The

Hydrasterias ophi-

and Newfoundiand... .

Mill and
Troschel ..| Bay of Fundy, New-
foundlandts0 te oo oe
M. Sars....] Bay of Fundy, banks off
Nova Scotia and New-
foundlanad:... 2. 4.2 eee

Mill and;
Troschel ..| Bay of Fundy.........

Merle Bay; of Fundy. caanee
Litken =. 4 All along the eastern

COaS Oa =. cere emer
M. Sars ...} Gulf of St. Lawrence...
Vienrillersrtee: Bay of Fundy, and off

coast of Nova Scotia. .

Stimpson
MSS..... | Bay of Fundy, Labrador.

Perrier.... .| Banks off Nova Scotia. .
Vernlioace Off Nova Scotial. 2)...

Vierillivaeoee Anticosti, Gulf of St.
Lawrence, Labrador .

Verrille cies Bay of Fundy, New-
found lande sss one saree
Vernills s.. Gulf of St. Lawrence,

Bay, ofs Mundy. 25. <-

Verrillie.cse Coast of Nova Scotia,
Gulf of St. Lawrence. .

OduN...6. 40500 '| Sladens. 2 <al Offertalivexes cole eee

Odinia Americana,

Verrill, ....] Banquereau, Nova Sco-
tIAg aR Ici neon

From 170 to 300
fathonis.

an arctic species.

Common, Io to 50
fathoms.
Shallow water.

On hard bottoms,
ranges to Green-
land.

Ranges to the Arc-
tic Ocean.

Common, ranges
to Greenland.

Belongs to the cold
areas,

40 to 300 fathoms.

53 to 100 fathoms.

Large and abun-
dant on she La-
brador coast.

Possibly L.Compta

Ranges to the Ar-
tic Ocean.

Collected in 1,250
fathoms by the
“* Challenger.”

Attains a great
size.

H. MoAs

Crus Nores, Ere. 61

CLUB NOTES.

Annual Meeting—At the Annual Meeting of the Ottawa Field
Naturalists’ Club held on Tuesday, March 19th, 1895, the following
members were present: Dr. G. M. Dawson, C.M.G., F.R.S., president,
in the chair ; Dr. R. W. Ells, Messrs. R. B. Whyte, W. Hague Har-
rington, T. C. Weston, A. G. Kingston, Walter R. Billings, T. J.
MacLaughlin, Frank ‘T. Shutt, D. B. Dowling, Maurice Panet, R. H.
Campbell, Andrew Halkett and H. M. Ami.

The Sixteenth Annual Report of Council for 1894-95, was read by
the Secretary, Dr. Ami, and showed that the Club was in a flourishing
condition.* The following were then elected members of the council
for 1895-96, to which is added the name of the patron of the club, the
standing committees of Council and leaders.

Patron:
THE RT. HONOURABLE THE EARL OF ABERDEEN,

GOVERNOR-GENERAL OF CANADA.
President:

Marek. ke Saurr, MAS, Bc.

Vice=Presidents :
Mr. A. G. Kingston. Dr. H. M. Ami, M.A., F.G.S.
Librarian :
Mr. S. B. Sinclair, B.A.

(Normal School.)

Secretary : Treasurer:
Mr. Andrew Halkett. Mr. D. B. Dowling, B.A.Sc.
(Marine and Fisheries Dept.) (Geol. Survey Dept.)
Committee :
Prot, &.-E. Prince; B:A., F.L.S. Miss A. Shenick, B. Sc.
Mr. James Fletcher, F.L.S.,F.R.S.C. “G. Harmer.
Mr. W. F. Ferrier, B.A.Sc., F.G.S. *. sA.°M, ‘Living.

Standing Committees of Council:
Publishing: Dr. Ami, Prof. Prince, Mr. Dowling, Mr. Kingston, Mr. Ferrier.
Excursions: Mr. Kingston, Mr. Dowling, Dr. Ami, Miss Shenick, Miss Living.
Soirces: Prof. Prince, Mr. Sinclair, Mr. Fletcher, Mr. Halkett.
Leaders :

Geology: Dr. Ells, Mr. Ferrier, Dr. Ami.

Botany: Mr. Whyte, Prof. Macoun, Mr. Craig. :

Entomology: Mr. Fletcher, Mr. Harrington, Mr. MacLaughlin.

Conchology: Mr. Latchford, Mr. Halkett, Mr. O’Brien.

Ornithology: Mr. Kingston, Miss Harmer, Mr. Lees.

Zoology: Prof. Prince, Mr. Whiteaves, Mr. Small.

Excursions—The Excursion Committee and Council of the Club
have before them an interesting series of excursions for the summer.
The first general and spring excursion of the Club is to take place on
the afternoon of Saturday, the 18th of May, when Chelsea, on the out-
skirts of the Laurentide Hills, will be visited. It is needless to describe

*Full report published in the April number of the OrrAwA NATURALIST, pp.
15 to 18.

i

62 Tue Orrawa NaTurRALIST. |
the attractive features of the locality. Leaders in Botany, Geology,

Entomology, Ornithology etc., will be present and a profitable as well
as an enjoyable time is expected. The excursion (special) train will
leave the C.P.R. (Union) Station, Ottawa, at I.30 p.m., returning, leave
Chelsea at 6.30 p.m. Full round trip tickets can be obtained from
members of the Excursion Committee or of Council at the station or
previously —at the following rates :

Members - = - - 30 cents.

Non-members - - - CRE oe

Children : - - half price.

- Sub-excursions— At a joint meeting of the Council and Leaders.

of the Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club, held in the Normal School, 26th
April, 1895, it was unanimously agreed ‘“‘That sub-excursions be
arranged for Saturday afternoons, as in former years. Sub-excursion
parties will assemble at the City Post Office beginning Saturday,
May 4th, at 2.15 p.m. sharp—where leaders in different branches of
the Club’s work will be in attendance. Interesting localities within
easy reach of the electric car system will be visited, and special oppor-
tunities afforded to those who desire to study the flora and fauna of
Ottawa and its environs.

Fees—tThe new Treasurer elect, Mr. D. B. Dowling, Geological
Survey Department, Ottawa, calls the attention of the members of the
Club to the date which he has taken the trouble to place on the address
slips informing each member of the time of expiring of his or her subscrip-
tion. As the Naturalist cannot be published without funds, a prompt
payment of the fees now due by members of the Club, will enable the
publishing committee to carry on its work with greater facility and suc-
cess. Membership fee, comprising subscription to Ottawa Natura-
list, only one dollar.

The Ottawa District—For purposes of Natural History and
for more exactly defining the limits of the phrase “ Ottawa District,” it
was unanimously agreed at the last Council meeting of the Ottawa
Field Naturalists’ Club to limit the territury included, to that which is
comprised within a circle whose centre is Ottawa, with a radius of
thirty miles.

Meteorological Observations —The members of the Ottawa
Field Naturalists’ Club are particularly indebted to Mr. R. F. Stupart,
the new Superintendent of the ])ominion Meteorological Service at
Toronto, for a most valuable abstract of observations which we publish
in this number of the NATURALIST.

Ottawa Camera Club—At the first meeting of the Council of
the Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club, held since the annual meeting, it
was unanimously agreed to extend an invitation to the members of the
Orrawa CAMERA CLUB to attend our excursions at reduced members’
rates.

:
qv
:
£
é

i

j
|

}

rae METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 63

7 equency of the Different Winds from Observations at

*

z 7 a.m., 2 and 9 p.m., Ottawa, 1894.

N. |N.E| E. | S.Er| S. |S.W.] W..|N.W./ Calm. a

in dae =: ae

| iam

7 9 23 fo) 3 5 | 22 8 16 . he

2 3 17 fe) 8 12 12 10 20 Ke

eg

6 6 | 14 5 6 | 13 | 723 a Nae Mi

: 3

9 8 12 5 II 9 16 5 15 %

€

8 9 13 7 15 10 9 10 12 ;

3 3 8 3 11 21 24 8 9 4

3

4 4 4 3 13 21 16 5 23 ‘es

17 6 7 6 8 15 8 12 14 t *

; a.

I 4 12 7 Il 10 16 6 23 <<

I 8 20 i 9 15 20 5 8 ; =

7 4 A 8 Il 24 10 5 rc

5 3 23 bee 8 16 16 12 8 ‘i

—— ——_ | | — | | | —- | | | De

B

70 67 170 49 III 158 206 100 164 ‘is

a = <=
Heaviest snow storm of year, 29th January. Amount, 22 inches. a
Coldest day of year, 24th February. Mean Temp., 13.85. us
Last snow, 24th March. ae
First thunder storm, 4th April. “a

ast Frost, 15th April. 5:

‘Heaviest rain storm of year, 20th June. Amount, 1.64 inches. 2 as
Warmest day, 19th July. Mean Temp., 77.80. ~
First frost of season, 26th September. Thermometer, 29.5. |
First snow of season, 14th October. Not measurable. >,
Last thunder storm, 16th October. . bs
First measurable snow, 5th November. Amount, 1.5 inches. *
First record below zero, 26th December. “
x =
r “ ‘
ae
ie

64

WVAA

fe) fo) S I I oy |: fo) fo) I
fe) fo) I 1 £ Oe z z Co)
fa) I fo) I I oO: || x fo) z I
GSaer egies MOP Gow WSesh COL ulce way cere | Saw
Il 11 9 S ¢ I > > z $
Loy gZ 89 £9 99 ob 6S 9$ hy £9
Cy jac I FAG Pp Cle CO im a tap eke ae eae: gue we Ge exe,.. vena [ae a) i?
9°g- 1'o-| ovr-ltccc: : we ape 2 z‘S- £:9-
O91 C6 i . see oe Con erecta ni Piety enh tae . oe eee o'9
Ue 9 bi II 6 91 ZI $1 € 8
g1'0-| ¥o'0-\06'0+]| 6S-o0-| ZZ°1-o1'1+\S€'1+)Jo1°1+]| 19°0-| 11'0-
Reson Ova 008 || Iors |) oF WOZSE OS Sob S220) 4Soer
Opie eecavele Cer ||s Obes) St SSie i109) 2 Oo]! Sorry imabOS|AO4Oe
Sg gL £3 6L zl is gL Lo bl 06
€11'o |€€1°0 |gZz‘o |Z1b'0 [Soho |61S Oo |1Sz"0 |g6z'0 |zbz'o |Lor‘o
I€*V1) 19°Z1| 6S‘F1] be-iz| ob tz) 14°1z| SL°0z| g6"0z| 1g°1z| Of G1
GS -€1| So'€z; Z6°ob| $-6b) vg-1S| So°9S| 69°SS| 06: br] oz SC} ZE-Ez
9g Zz) SgSS| SS*SS| gf+1Z) o£ EZ! 09°64) bh°gZ| 69°S9) 10 2S) 99‘g€
EP coyAll TMoh I PF ite] eA oo Lal Coy Moicli-= eel MCHA Vdofell TAKS
G:tz-| Sr Sitti ApMCorall (aera xa) ZAieily erarefe le STS he (oynts ji GEts)
Song Old! SG ee eal Kors (OLl6) O LO|> SERIE wee. ie pS
ce-v+| LE°c-\1Z'2+ |SZ£°1+]| 69°S—| 65'1-|S2Z'0 +) 00'0 |12°9+/0f'¢8
€€-1z| €b 62) 1€°Lb) Sg°6S| 64:19] €0°go] S6°Sq} ob -SS| 66°Sb} oz 1°
Sait jZ€b'1 |$60'1 |zoo'1 |z6h"0 |t99'0 |gbg‘:o |£S6°0 |906 o |£L6'0
LSv: 6z cv 6z|Zzz" 6z|SgS ‘6z\obl6z|\€Sq6z\L1v 6z\zLb 6z\0gS 6z\geh 6
zbvg of |6bgof\zzF ‘o£|29S ‘of|ztz of |g1€ of |Sgz ‘of |6zbh o£ |ggh of| 19h: os
Sz1 of Sto’ of|gb6'6z\90'0f!zz0 of 946° 6z/0£6' 6z|156°6z\9L0 o£ gho’ of
‘09q | “AON | 3190 | dag | ‘sny | “Aqn[ | ‘ounf | “Avy | yudy| ep
La
“HINOW

eu

Ko}

‘uv

gg HES Re ba he ST aD, JaquIn Ay
“77 ***SuIO}S JapuNnyy jo raquinyy
reese recess *SBIOING JO Jar LUNAT
* (aj) purm jo Aywojaa advisay
poepnoys Ajaiayduuoo skep yo aaqain
parses Be papnolo Axs Jo advjuaoiag
“** mous jo Sep jo saquinyy
" AHVIOAV WOIY ADUaIDHIC]
sayoul UT MOUS JO JUnOWY
“* urea jo sXep yo raquny
“* QBVIDAL Woy AUAIAYyTIC,
"sess ss* SQyoUL UT ured jo JUROWY
juiod Map jo aanjesaduay asvsaay
ae dv ay. jo Qrpruny edvievw
ss +ess moda jo ainssaid atvuaay
so ee, Rup R vale asuvi \lep asuisaay
oanjyviadmay wunuiur advoay
ainqesaduiay wnwixea asvoaay
sasuvs {;yUOTW!
ainjesadwua} isaaory
anjwsadiuay ysayStpy
meeesss ss Q5RIVAV WO’ VDUAIaYIG
(* YB) are jo osamvsadwia) asvioay
“sss *sasuvi jenuuv pue <yyUOW
pe AS ieee “+s 1a}9WOINq IsaMoT
Ja awoILq ISaySipy

[aAa] VAS 0} paonpar pur
z€ jv adjatuoieq Jo JYSIay asvaaay

“POQI ARIA adi JO} PMR} IR SUOIPRAIISGQ [RIISoposoazaly fo yowuysqy

THE OTTAWA NATURALIST. Vol. IX., No.’ 3.

FEUD) -+<ton

ond “ave sTo s

oF
E =| Umer ment
“lrmeslones

Cat Head
4im es Tones

A Tow
Z Lowpemellea

LA Lorre bones
MS ser

|

SKETCH Map OF LAKE WINNIPEG,
Showing Sub-divisions of the Cambro-Silurian of Eastern Manitoba. :
1

~ Vow. 1X. OTTAWA, JUNE, 189s. No. 3.

Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

NOTES ON THE STRATIGRAPHY OF THE CAMBRO-
SILURIAN ROCKS OF EASTERN MANITOBA.
By, Ds B: -DowLinc, B: A. Se..

(By permission of the Direct:r cf the Geological Survey.)

Along the western edge of the great Archzean area which lies north

As early as 1819 they were recognized by Sir John Richardson,

_ who accompanied Sir John Franklin on his overland expedition, to be

_ similar in age to those of the Black River formation of eastern Canada.

_ Numerous papers have since been published on observations made in

other localities, and prominent among these is the report by Prof. H.

__Y. Hinde, of the Saskatchewan Exploring Expedition. ‘The general

Petals FP Tay eet

conclusions from all these reports and papers is, that there is a definite
series found in the district, which represents the Hudson River forma-

tion, but the beds in the lower part of the section have becorne rather

_ confused, owing toa lack of definite knowledge as to their sequence.

During the seasons of 1890 and 1891, Mr. J. B. Tyrrell, with the

writer as assistant, was engaged in a survey of the geclogical features of

Eastern Manitoba, having special reference to the exposures of the
rocks on the shore of Lake Winnipeg. A part of the writer’s duties
consisted in making an examination of the exposures on the islands and
western shore of the lake, in order to follow as closely as_ possible, the
sequence of beds and determine the probable thickness and extent of
the formation. The present paper is intended to give in outline, the
field relations of the several exposures visited and examined by either
Mr. Tyrrell or the writer. A full detailed account will be found in the

- forthcoming Report by Messrs, Tyrrell and Dowling in the Annual Re-

port of the Geological Survey Department.

66 Tue Orrawa NaturAList,
F
The fossil remains collected from these beds have shown many —

new forms, and many of them. have already been described by Mr. —
Whiteaves the Palzontologist of the Survey. But apart from the ©
paleontological evidence, which, so far, is not very definite, the series —
might provisionally be divided under the following heads, on purely
lithological distinctions.

Fludson River Shales consisting of reddish and yellowish lime-
stones, dolomites and shales.

Upper Mottled Limestones, Magnesian limestones.

Cat Head Limestones, fine grained cherty limestones. (Magnesian.)
Lower Mottled Limestones, very similar to the upper mottled.
Winnipeg Sandstones, friable sandstones with shaly bands.

These several divisions are represented on the accompanying
sketch map and section, and are seen to be exposed in regular sequence
from the lowest beds on the east, to the highest on the west. The
whole formation seems to have a slight dip, south of west which is.7
seen on Lake Winnipeg very plainly, by following the division between
the sandstone, and the overlying limestone beds. This line is quite

distinct, and the several measured sections in which it occurs, when

plotted, show that the surface of the sardstone or lower face of the

limestone, instead of being a plane, is gently undulating or waved, the

distance between the crowns of the undulations being from eight to

sixteen miles, while the variations in height run somewhere near twenty —
feet. ‘The direction of the axis of the folds is with the dip towards the

W.S.W., so that the intersections of this crumpled plane, with the hori-

zontal one of the lake, forms a waving line, extending from Elk Island

northward to near Dog Head.

SAN
Z
aft ntl : 2m

SKFTCH SECTION THROUGH S!ONEWALL, E.N.E., TO THE WINNIPEG RIVER.*

The floor on which these rocks were laid is the uneven surface of
the Archzan rocks, seen on the eastern side of the lake. In the

*For index of shading see sketch map accompanying this paper.

STRATIGRAPHY OF THE CAMBRO-SILURIAN Rocks or E. MAnrrosa. 67

southern portion, the general inclination of this uneven floor, is possibly
about parallel to the bedding of the overlying series, but farther north
it is more abrupt, asat Dog Head, where a narrow channel has been
eroded, and is kept free by currents in the lake, through the soft under-
lying sandstone, a depth of 112 feet has been reached at a-little over
on ha'f mile from the Archein rocks of the east shore.

THE WINNIPEG ‘SANDSTONE.

The basal beds of this series of Cambro-Silurian rocks, is, on its
eastern outcrop, a sandstone, which is probably a shore deposit of an
advancing sea, and therefore, not altogether similar in age, to
those to the south, at the base of the Cambro-Silurian in Minnesota,
but may possibly be a trifle later. The fossils found, so far, are rather
indefinite, and would seem to be much the same as species in the next
overlying series of limestones. Mr. Whiteaves, the palzontologist of
the Geological Survey, intends making a study of these in the near
future. The exposures on the lake show a thickness of about 100 feet
of friable fine grained sandstone with a few feet of dark grey green
shales toward the upper part of the section. The lower half resting on
the Archzan, is seen on the eastern end of Punk Island as a pure,clean
fine-grained sandstone, lightly cemented, and very friable. In several
places it is somewhat harder, and of a reddish colour, from a staining of
iron oxide, derived from the Huronion beds immediately underlying
portions of the island. On Deer Island, to the west of this, the upper
part of the sandstone is seen, overlaid by limestone. ‘The sand is in-
terbedded with shaly bands, and the sections exposed at several points,
show an irregularity in the deposition of this dark material. The
sections of this sandstone and shale at the several localities on the lake
are all near the eastern edge of this deposit, and probably near the
ancient shore line.

Comparisons with sections elsewhere made in Manitoba in drill
holes, show an increasing deposit of the shaly beds in the upper part
of the sandstone. For example, at Selkirk, the drilling extended 36 feet
below the limestone, through shales and soft rocks, before striking a
porous layer of pebbles and sand. Again at Rosenfeld,* a much greater

*On certain borings in Manitoba andthe Northwest Territories by Dr. G. M.
Dawson, Trans. Royal Society of Canada, Vol. IV, Pt. IV, 1886.

68 THe OtTtTraws NATURALIST.

distance from the eastern outcrop, 75 feet of shale is recorded above
the sandstone, which is there, 50 feet in thickness, thus it is probable
that these shales were being deposited at the same time as the upper
part of the Winoipeg sandstones. The localities at which examples of
these sandstones may be seen are, Elk Island, Black Island, Deer Is-
land, Punk Island, the shore from Little Grindstone Point to Grindstone
Point, the shores near Bull Head, and the lower part of the cliffs near —
Dog Head.

LOWER MOTTLED LIMESTONE.

Just above the sandstone, horizontal beds of thin bedded mottled
limestone form the principle part of the sections at Grindstone Point,
Dog Head, Black Bear Isiand, Tamarack Island., Jack Head Island,
and Swampy or Berens Island. The section given by these several
exposures amounts to over 70 ft. The lowest beds are those seen at
Deer Island and Grindstone Point, capping the sandstone. Immedia-
tely above are the beds occuring at Dog Head. followed by the upper
part of the Black Bear Island exposure. Those on Tamarack and Jack
Head Islands are evidently higher, but belong to the same series, and
form, altogether, a section of 65 feet. To the north of this line of ~
section, on Swampy Island and Little Black Island, just to the west,
small cliffs of this same mottled limestone occur. The upper part of
the cliff on Little Black Island seems to be more fossiliferous than
those previously seen, and are probably not represented in the foregoing
section, or fill the gap between the Tamarack Island and Jack Head
Island sections. This might possibly add a-few feet to the total given
there, making a total thickness for this series of 70 feet. The character
of the beds in this division is quite uniform and varies only ina slight
degree in color. The lowest beds are somewhat darker and contain
more earthy impurities, but they all have similar fucoidal markings on
the surfaces of beds and through the section dark brownish streaks and
blotches of finer grained material. The mass of the rock is made up
of the debris of shells, etc., many very badly preserved. At Grindstone
Point examples of a large cephalopod, probably a /véertoceras, have
been partially preserved in a vertical position so that frequently slabs of
the thin bedded limestone contain sections of the body chamber over

an)

4

STRATIGRAPHY OF THE CAMBRO-SILURIAN Rocks or E, Maniropa. 69

12 inches in diameter. These break out readily, forming circular discs
much resembling crude grindstones. The name for this prominent
point on the lake may possibly have been derived from the finding of
these ‘‘ grindstones ” on the shore as well as from the fact of there being
there the material (sandstone) from which grindstones could be manu-
factured.

CAT HEAD BEDS,

Above the lower mottled limestone are seen several sections of a
fne grained evenly coloured yellow dolomitic limestone with numerous
concretions ot dark coloured chert filling cavities, apparently left by the
decay of corais or soft bodied animals. Examples of these beds are
seen in the high cliff at Cat Head and along the shore to Lynx Bay.
At the western end of the section three miles west of Cat Head the
cherty concretions attain large dimensions. Several are over a foot in
length and one measured 2 feet by 10 inches. The lower beds are fine
grained, resembling lithographic stone and are very rich in fossil
remains.

The total thickness of these beds, as observed on the lake, is 68
feet. This includes the top beds of Cat Head and Outer Sturgeon
Island which are sim.lar in colour but coarser in texture, becoming finely
crystalline.

The area ontlined on the sketch match is proposed as a diagram
of the theoretical outcrop of these rocks, but owing to the mantle of drift
exposures arenotalwaysto be had,thusinthesouthern parteast ofSelkirkno
exposures of this. series at the surface so far are known, but the existence
of similar beds is shown below the Selkirk rock in the drilling made for
a well at Selkirk. Similarly no exposures west of Big Island are known,
but on the beach on the westward side south of Icelandic River numer-
ous fragments of the fine grained rocks are found. On Fisher Bay
loose fragments are found on the islands, but the shores are all low and
there are no rock exposures. The south point of Reindeer Island is
probably underlain by these rocks and fine grained yellow beds exposed
at the base of cliffs on the mainland southwest of this island may prob-
ably also belong to this series. The eastern end of Long Point is
covered with drift deposit, but near the northern end of the lake at the

70 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

‘“ First.” and ‘‘Second” ‘' Rocky Points” the upper part of the Cat
Head beds are plainly seen in the lower beds of the eliff.

UPPER MOTTLE]) LIMESTONE.

Just above the yellow limestone beds, referred to as the Cat
Head beds, there is found a series of mottled limestones somewhat
similar to the lower limestone member. At the north end of the lake
the beds are very much harder and more dolomitic than farther south. The
section there is- evidently much thinner, as between’the. base of the
cliffs at the first Rocky Point and the Silurian rocks ‘at the mouth of
the Great Saskatchewan there can be only a very thin section which
must include not cnly the upper mottled limestone but the Hudson
River shales, etc. Farther to the south the section is slightly altered,
the lower beds of these mottled limestones resemble those to the north,
but higher up in the section the beds become darker in colour and are
there only impure earthy limestones which are evidently grading up to
the shales of the overlying Hudson River series. These lower beds are
to be found at a point about nine miles north from Clark’s Point, while
at Clark’s Point are seen the upper earthy limestones which with those
at the mouth of the Little Saskatchewan River, form the transition beds *
to the Hudson River shales. The top of the upper mottled limestones
is thus somewhat similar in appearance and constitution to the lowest
member of the lower mottled and the top beds of the latter to the lower
beds the former. These upper beds are thus described by Dr. R. Bell*
as they occur on the Little Saskatchewan :—

“* At the head of the four mile rapid there is a small exposure of thinly bedded
fiat lying limestone; on the south side of the river and at the foot of the rapid, limestone
interstratified with shale is seen on both sides of the river. It is of yellowish and
greenish grey colour and has a magnesian character. I noticed a large obscure Ortho-
ceras in one of the beds and collected a tolerably well preserved Pleurofomaria and a
Riynchonella resembling the Hudson River form of 2. zzcrelescens (Hall).

On the Fisher River the only beds seen are near the mouth and
they appear to be near the base of the upper mottled limestones not
far above the Cat Head beds. They are light coloured mottled l:me-
stones very much like those at East Selkirk and Lower Fort Garry.

*Report by Mr. R. Bell, Report of Progress, G.S.C.. for 1874-5, pp. 38.

>

STRATIGRAPHY OF THE CAMBRO-SILURIAN Rocks or E. Mantrosa, 7

The exposures at the latter places have been frequently described and
the building stone from these quarries has been largely used in con-
structions in Winnipeg, they are therefore well known. The principal
difference between these beds and those of the lower mottled limestone

consists in the very white nature of the lighter portions, as also the
_ general soft or chalky texture of the uncrystalline particles scattered

throughout the whole mass leaving chalk or lime marks on the hands
after handling. The mottling is of a light brown and is in irregular
patches, but so general as to affect the whole of the beds giving them
a general yellowish tint. It dresses easily and makes very fine building
and ornamental stone. The papers by Prof. Panton* and Mr. Mc-
Charles* give graphic and full details regarding this stone. As to the
thickness of the formation here, we were at first obliged. to depend on
a calculation based on the known dip of the beds at Grindstone Point
of about 50 feet in six miles—assuming, however, that this dip is
approximately the same at the south, the thickness of the limestone
below Selkirk would be the total dip given in about 30 miles or 250
feet. Since the field work was finished a well has been drilled for the
fish hatchery at Selkirk West and the bottom of the limestone passed
through was found at 262 feet. Deducting then the thickness of the
lower beds seen on Lake Winnipeg leaves «bout rro feet of the upper
mottled rock of Seikirk. To this may be added about 20 feet for beds
between Selkirk and Winnipeg of the transition type as at Clark’s Point.
There is a strong probability that the beds at East Selkirk and Lower
Fort Garry are brought up by a small fault running east and west very
near the northern limits of the former.t ‘The amount of the upthrow
is very uncertain and we can assume that the main part of these expos-
ures are to be added to the thickness given in the drilling. I would
not hesitate therefore in calling the thickness of these beds down to the
recognized yellow beds of the Cat Head type, at least 150 feet, making
a total of 290 feet of the limestone series. ‘To the north the upper

*Transactions No. 15, 20 and 27, Man. Historical and Scientific Society, Win-
nipeg.

+The foot-steps of time in the Red River Valley by A. McCharles, Transactions
No. 27, Man. Historical and Scientific Society.

tS THe OtrawA NATURALIST.

beds are found to decrease greatly in thickness and as noted before
gradually thin out to less than one bundred feet north of the mouth of
the Saskatchewan. a 5)
Farther to the south at Rosenfeld, the evidence of drilling gives 2
thickness of limestone, undoubtedly the same series, of 305 feet,* thus
showing a slight tendency to increase in that direction. ce"

HUDSON RIVER BEDS.

Under the city of Winnipeg, red, impure limestones are reached in
drilling for wells. The surface of the underlying rock slopes very
abruptly to the east, the depths at which it is found varying from 60 feet
on the west, and under most of the city, but increasing suddenly to-112
feet at the outer end of Point Douglas + This seems to be about the
extent of these soft beds to the east. They extend west, and are to be
found at Little Stony Mountain in an undisturbed state, capped by beds
of an ashy coloured dolomite. The thickness of this part of the forma-
tion 13 indefinite, but part of the section has been recorded by Prof.
Panton, from the exposure at Stony Mountain. Here the dolomite
seen at Little Stony Mountain. appears at the surface on the top of the
hill, dipping slightly to the southeast, showing a tilting up of the under-
lying beds, and a consequent break in the section between this place
and Stonewall. The section recorded amounts to 11o feet.

+‘ The following is a vertical section of the rock, as observed during the digging
of a well at the southwest part, upon which the Provincial Penitentiary is located.”

1---20 feet solid hard stone like that at the quarrfes.

2—4 feet thin layers of the same.

3-2 feet solid rock.

4—-6 feet thin and broken.

5 —S feet yellowish rock. quite ochreous.

6 --10 feet reddish layer, fall of fossil shells.

7—60 feet, a mixture of yellow and red, containing some flinty material.”

Between the top of the Stony Mountain beds, and those at Stone-

wall, where the rocks appear to be Niagara, there are no expesures, but
at the latter place the section in the quarry seems to be very similar in

*Trans. Royal Scciety, Canada, Vol. IV. 1886.
+Transactions No. 27, Manitoba Historical and Scientific Society, Winnipeg.

+Transactions No. 15, season 1§94-5, Manitoba Iistorical and Scientific Society,
Winnipeg.

ia

STRATIGRAPHY OF THE CAMBRO-SILURIAN Rocks oF E. MaAnirosa. 73

some respects to the upper part of the Stony Mountain section, but the

fossils found are quite distinct. They evidently belong to a higher

horizon. The gap in the series is evidently made up of soft shaly beds

with pussibly some sandstone at the base of the Niagara.

The section given by Dr. G. M. Dawson for the Rosenfeld well*
I would be inclined to interpret as passing through the equivalent of
the Stonewall beds as well as the Hudson River, of Stony Mountain,
referred by him to the Maquoqueta shales of Wisconsin, and would
arrange part after the following :

7—limestone, - - - - 15 feet

8—red shale - - - - 6 feet

g—grey shale - - - - 10 feet > Niagara.

Io—limestone - - - - - 30 feet |

I1—fine grey sandstone, 40 feet.
fe far ie fect f Hudson River of Stony Mountain.
I14—cream colored limestone, 305 feet Winnipeg limestone, Trenton and Galena
15—red shales - - - - 75 feet\ Winnipeg sandstone and _ associated
16—soft sandstone - - - 50 feet/ Shales.

This would leave the Hudson River section with a thickness of
1go feet, which is not far from the probable thickness in the southern
part of the province as this formation thins out toward the north, and
is not seen in the section on either the Little Saskatchewan or Great
Saskatchewan rivers. If we had a series containing several successive
beds of limestone, there would, in a!l probability, be something seen of
it on the northwest shore of the lake, between Saskatchewan river and
Selkirk Island, where we have the Silurian or Niagara beds, and the
top of the upper mottled or Galena limestone. On the Little Saskatche-
wan the probable representative is in the shales recorded by Dr. Bell at
the head of the four mile rapid. A summary, then, of the several beds
could be placed in the form of a section, in decending order, giving the
total thickness for the Cambro-Silurian of this district, as less than six
hundred feet :

Hudson River Shales..:. 72... 5. 190 feet

Upper Mottled Limestone...... 150 feet

Cambro-Silurian 4 Cat Head Beds............... 70 leet
Lower ‘Mottled... .. <a es .. 70 féet

Winnipeg Sandstone..... - 22, LOO seet

580 feet

*Trans. Royal Society of Canada, Vol. IV, 1886.

74 THe OtTrawa NATURALIST.

THE WELL AT SELKIRK.

In the spring of 1894, a supply of water for the Selkirk fish hatchery,
other than that of the Red River, being required, a well was drilled and
a supply obtained after penetrating three hundred feet. The first or
upper part was through 97 feet of till, then toa depth of 264 feet in
limestone, reaching a dark shale, in which sandy layers, containing
gravel, gave a sufficient supply of water. The specimens obtained from
the drilling, show that the limestone through which the drilling. was
made, consists in the upper half of semi-crystalline light yellow beds,
similar in a great measure to those rocks exposed at Selkirk and Lower
Fort Garry.

At a depth of 185 feet, or 88 feet below the top of the limestone,
a series of beds about g fzet in thickness, were called by the drillers,
sandstone, but it is found from the specimens to be mostly a band of
fine grained limestone, through which cherty masses are scattered. The
percentage of silica is low, being under ten. Examples of this rock
are very probably to be seen at Cat Head, on the west shore of Lake
Winnipeg, where the cliff is of a fine yellow magnesian limestone, and
the lower beds well pitted with small cherty concretions.

The specimens from the lower part of the limestone in the well,
are allof a light colorued limestone, somewhat coarser in texture than at
the middle of the section, and are, no doubt. similar to the limestone
of the shores of the lake at Grindstone Point and Dog Head. The
thickness from the cherty layer to the base of the limestone was 79 feet,
or a trifle more than that measured on the lake.

EXCURSION No. 2., O. FLNoC.

Excursion to Galetta.—Arrangements are nearly completed
for the Club’s second Excursioa, which will be held on SATURDAY
afternoon, 15th June, 1895. Galetta, a charming village on the
Mississippi River, about thirty miles from Ottawa, along the Ottawa,
Arnprior and Parry Sound Ry., is the place selected. This is one of
the most interesting and newest localities visited by the Club, and col-
lectors of plants, insects, shells, rocks or other objects of Natural
History, will find Galetta a perfect treasure land. There is excellent
fishing, besides interesting outcrops of crystalline limestone and many
beautiful bits of woodland, fores. and stream scenery for members of
the Camera Club.

Rates, etc.— Excursion train with Naturalists’, ete., leave at 1.30
p-m., reaching Galetta at 2.30 p.m., return at sundown. Members
tickets, fifty cents; non-members, sixty cents; children, half-price.
Tickets to be obtained at the station or from members of the Council
or of the Excursion Committee.

|
|
|

ant |
we] |

THE Roya Society or CANADA.

THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA.

- The fourteenth meeting of the Royal Society of Canada was
held in Ottawa, May rsth, 16th, and 17th, under the presidency of Mr.
By. M. Le Moine, of Quebec. The meeting was full of interest. A large
attendance of fellows at the various sittings of the different sections for the
reading of papers, coupled with an unusually large attendance and in-

creased interest in the public lectures and entertainments, mark this
meeting as one of the most successful in the history of the Society.

The four sections of French Literature, etc., of English
Literature, of the Mathematical, Physical and Chemical
Sciences, of the Geological and Biological Sciences, met in the
Provincial Normal School. There were thirty titles and abstracts of
papers to be read before these sections, according to the programme,
viz: siain section I; eight in section II; zine ‘in section III ; and
seven in section IV.

Of the papers read, the following fall more or less directly in line
with researches carried on by members of the Ottawa Field Natura-
lists’ Club, and are here noted :

1. The Geology of the proposed Ottawa Ship Canal. _ By RK. W. Ells, LL.D., and
A. E. Barlow, Al.A.

The route of the proposed ship canal, via the Ottawa, the Mattawa and French
Rivers, and Lake Nipissing, is of great interest, both from the geological and com-
mercial,standpoint. It furnishes a comparatively short waterway between the great
lakes and the head of ship navigation on the St. Lawrence, and crosses, for several
hundreds of miles, the great series of Laurentian or Archzean rocks, nearly at right
angles to their strike. In the eastern portion of this Laurentian complex is included
the typical area described by Sir William Logan as the Grenville series, which in-
cludes foliated and stratified gneisses, granites, syenites, crystalline limestone, anor-
thosites, etc. Thesé extend westward along the Ottawa for nearly two hundred
miles, while in the western part of the section, these characteristic rocks have given
place to a great development of granites and syenites, in places, foliated, but fre-
quently massive. From their characters, as seen both in the field and under the
microscope, these latter are clearly intrusive, and in large part are more recent in age
than the crystalline limestone and associated gneisses which they have replaced.
Areas of Huronian rocks, known as the Hastings series, also occur, while the sedi-
mentary formations from the Potsdam to the Utica, both inclusive, have an extensive
development along the lower Ottawa, and occasional small outliers of fossiliferous
limestone are seen in the vicinity of Mattawa, and on the islands in the eastern portion
of Lake Nipissing. Heavy deposits of sand, gravel and clay also occur at various
points along the several river channels, and form an important geological feature.

2. Note on the occurrence of Primnoa Reseda on the Coast of British Columbia.
By J. F. Whiteaves.

P. reseda is a large tree-like Alcyonarian coral, which was known to Pallas and
Linnzus more than a hundred years ago. On the eastern side of the Atlantic its

76 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

ascertained geographical range is from the Cape de Verde to the Polar Sea, and on
the western side of that ocean a few specimens of it have been dred bens in deep water
in the bay of Fundy ond on St. George’s Banks, by the U.S. Fish Commission,
between the years 1864 and 1872.

Hitherto it has not been recorded as occurring in the Pacific. In the fall of-1894,
however, Mr. Otto J. Klotz, D.T.S., of this city, presented to the museum of the
Geological Survey Department a fine specimen of a coral, collected by himself at
Work Inlet, near Fort Simpson, B.C.. which Professor Verrill has identified with this
species. The specimen is upwards of three feet in height, and a little more than two
feet in the maximum spread of its branches. Another specimen of P. zeseda which
is said to have been collected on the north coast of the Queen Charlotte Islands, has —
recently been given to Professor Macoun by Mr. C. F. Anderson, of Comox, V.I.

3. ._ Note on Tertiary Fossil Plants from the vicinity of the City of Vancouver, B. C.
By Sir William Dawson, F.R.S., &c.

The paper relates to a series of beds holding lignite and vegetable fossilss
and estimated at 3,090 feet or more in thickness which occurs in the southern
part of British Columbia, between Burrard Iniet and the United States
boundary. These b2ds have been noticed in the Reports of the Geological Survey
24 Messrs. Richardson, Bowman, and by Dr. G. M. Dawson, and are believed to

e newer than the Cretaceous coa!-measures of Nanaimo and Comme and probably
equivalent to the ‘‘ Puget Group” of the United States geologi-ts in the State of
Washington.

Collections of the fossil plants have been made at various times by officers of the
Geological Survey, who are mentioned in the paper. and more recently by Mr. CG. F.
Monckton, of Vancouver, who has kindly placed his material in the hands of the
author, along with that previously entrusted to him by the Geological Survey.

The species contained in the several collections are mentioned in the paper, and
are compared with those of the Puget group, as de-cribed by Newberry and Les-
quereux, and with those of cther localities in British Columbia and the United
States. The conclusion as to the age of the flora is similar to that arrived at by
Newberry for the Puget flora, or that it is equivalent to the Upper Laramie or Fort
Union group. It thus intervenes in date between the Upper Cretaceous of Nanaimo
and the Oligocene or Lower Miocene of the Similkameen district, already noticed in
the Transactions of the ‘Royal Society, and is therefore of Eocene age, filling a yap
hitherto existing in the mesozoic flora of the West Coast. }

Much undoubtedly remains to be known of this interesting flora, and as the for-
mation containing it, which seems to be estuarine in character, extends over a wile
area in British Columbia and Washington, and is of considerable thickness, more
especially in its extension south of the Canadian boundary, it may prove to include
several sub-divisions representing the long interval between the Cretaceous and the
Middle Tertiary.

4- Account of Lnvzstigitions on the ps = hic developmnt of young animals, and its
physical cori elation. By Prof. 7. Wesley Alills, A1.A., M1D., ete.

The account of investigation on the psychic development of young animals and
its physical correlation, which was begun last year in a paper on the Dog, will be
continued in a series of papers, to be presented at the meeting of this year. These
will embrace reports of investigations on: I. The Mongrel dog, and the Mongrel and
the pure-bred dogcompared. II. The Cat. If. The Dog and the Cat compared.
IV. The Rabbit and the Guinea Pig. V. Birds.

In these papers the same plan will be followed as in the paper on 1 the Dog pre-
sented to the Society last year, z.e., after an introduction there will follow a diary or
daily history of progress in development, and final remarks on the latter, with some
of the main conclusions to be drawn from the facts stated in the diary. An attempt

will be made throughout to correlate physical development with psychie develop-
ment.

Tue RoOyAL SocIeTY OF CANADA. 77

5. Organic Remains of the Little R. Group, No. 4. By G. F. Matthew, D. Sc.

This is a short article describing the remainder of the air-breathers, so far
known, from the Plant Beds of the Little R. Group, to consist of one Insect, three
-Arachnids, and one Crustacean.

d The insect is a wingless one beloaging to the order Thysanura, and is related to
the modern Springtails. No similar insect of anything like such great antiquity has
~ been known hitherto.

Us Only one of the Arachnids is sufficiently well preserved to give a fair idea of the
_ structure of the animal ; in the other two only the abdomen is preserved. | The most
_ complete of these Arachnids is something like Anthracomartus of the coal-measures,
but has a wider and shorter cephalothorax.

The crustacean described is Amphifeltis paradoxus, Salter, which is referred
provisionally to the Isopods.

6. Note sur [ouvrage de J. Cornut, intitule: ‘‘Canadtensium Plantarum Historia.
Par Mer. J. K. Laflamme.

Valeur scientifique de cet ouvrage. Par qui les plantes étudiées par Cornut ont-
elles été transportées du Canada en France? Et, comme la plupart ont été décrites
_ daprés des échantillons vivants ; oi Cornut a-t-il vu ces échantillons !

7. Some Variations in Epigaa repens. By Mr. G. U. Hay.

8. The Chemical Composition of Andradite from two localities in Ontario. By Prof.
B. J. Hariington, B.A, Ph.D.

The paper gives the results of the examination of a black garnet, (Andradite)
which occurs in association with the magnetic iron ore of the ‘* Paxton Mine.” Lut-
terworth, Ontario ; and also ot a brown andradite which is present in the Nepheline
Syenite of Dungannon. The first was found to be free from titanuim, while the
latter is titaniferous.

g. The Present Tosition of American Anthropology. By Prof. Join Cample'l, LL.D.
10. On the Estimation of Starch. By Thomas Macfarlane, Chief Analyst of Canada.

11. Viscosity in Liguids, and Instruments for its Measurement. By Anthony
MeGul, M.A. Presented by Mr. Macfarlane.

NOTES, REVIEWS, AND COMMENTS.

Entomolozy.—Ormerod, Eleanor A. F., R. Met. Soc., et-.—Report of
Observations of {njurious Insects and Common Farm Pests, during
the year 1894, with Methods of Prevention and Remedy. — Eight-
eenth Report,

Our illustrious Corresponding Member gives evidence in this very
valuable report, of her continued devotion to the study of Economic
] Entomology, and of her excellent ability to clearly describe the results
_ of her investigations. A large number of the more injurious insects are
treated of at considerable length ; the report consisting of 122 pages

73 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

and an appendix of 62 pages, on the Warble Fly or Ox Bot fly, besides
index, etc. A very interesting chapter deals with the development and
injuries of four species of Eelworms, or Threadworms, and the account
of a serious attack of certain Ground-beetles, or Carabidz, upon straw-
berry plants, is most interesting, because insects of this family are, in

general, predaceous in their habits, and beneficial rather than
obnoxious.

The Caterpillars of two moths are described as apple pests, and that
of a butterfly, as attacking cherry. Currants suffered from the attacks
of the moth, Sesia tpuliformis, which is also injurious to this plant in
Ottawa, and the Red Spider infested the gooseberry. Mangolds suffered
from Millepedes of several species, and turnips from insects belonging
to several orders. It is regretted that a fuller synopsis cannot be given
of this admirable report, which will add to the reputation already gained —
by the author for reliable and thoroughly scientific work.—W.H.H.

Ornithology.—A WELL MARKED Birp Wave.—The White-
crowned Sparrow (Zonotrichia leucophrys) is a sparrow which generally
keeps well together in its northward migration, the interval between the
first and last observed individuals seldom covering more than 1o or 12
days, during the whole of which their pretty mating ditty can be heard
almost hourly. ‘This year the advance guard reached this region dur-
ing the warm spell which nade the second week in May seem so much —
like July. The first record was made on the 6th, and stragglers were
seen up to the 11th, when the sudden drop in the temperature repulsed
them wholly. Nota Whitecrown was seen or heard—except a solitary
one on the 16th—until Sunday, the zoth, when with a slightly warmer
and hazy weather, they suddenly re-appeared in full force. On Sunday,
Monday and Tuesday they literally swarmed about the gardens and
weedy vacant lots. Their song could be heard incessantly as long as
daylight lasted. Even the House Sparrows were outnumbered, and
their pugnacity overawed. The two species could be seen feeding
peacefully side by side, the first instance, perhaps, of any native bird
establishing a mo7us vivendé with this little bully.

‘In a solid body as they came, the White-Crowns appear to have
passed on to their northern breeding grounds: on Wednesday, the

ee ee ee eee

Nores, Reviews anp ComMEn's. 79

22nd May, two or three only were observed and since that nene. The

genus is represented here in summer by the white-¢hroated Sparrow or
Peabody bird. (Z. albicollis) whose full, pure song “Old... . Tom
Wet. Peabody, Peabody, Peabody” rising from ravine or moist
thicket, is so familiar all summer long. Another rendering common in
the Gatineau country is “Jim... Jim... . Sow-the-wheat, sow-the-
wheat, sow-the-wheat. The song of the White-Crown while bearing
some family resemblance to this, has not the same clearness and ful-
ness of tone, but approaches nearer to that of the Vesper and
Savanna sparrows.
A. G. KINGSTON,

Natural Science Association, Iroquois.— The Natural Science
Association, in connection with the High School, at Iroquois, Ont., has, of
late. come into immediate touch with several members of the Ottawa Field
Naturalists’ Club. This association has for its object* “ the encourage-
ment of original scientific investigation and mutual assistance in the
study of the Natural Sciences, by discussions, lectures, papers, and
Critical readings from scientific authors, and by the supply of such
periodicals, magazines, etc., as shall be deemed advisable.” Duriig
the past winter a very interesting and instructive programme has been
carried out. The association is really alive to the fact that natural
science studies help in developing the mental, moral, as well as the
spiritual and even the commercial side of man. The following are the
officers of the Association :

Honorary President, ARTHUR FORWARD, B.A.; President, J. A. JACKSON,
B.A.; Vice-President, Mary McGINN; Seerctary, JAMES WARREN, B.A.;
Treasurer, DAVID COLLIson ; Science Master, R. H. KNox, B.A.; Councillors,
HERBERT DONNELLY, Cyrus MUNROE, CARRIE MOORE; Curator. GEORGE
CLARKE; Patrons, JOHN Harkness, M.D., H. H. Ross, M.A., M.P., W. A.
WHITNEY, M.A.

*Sect. 1, Part 3, of the Constitution. Ircquois Nat. Sc. Assoc.

80 Tue Orrawsa NATURALIST.

Excursion No. I.—As announced, the first field day of the
O.F.N. Club for the season of 1895 was held on Saturday, 18th May.
It has generally been found that the country lying immediately south
of the first range of the Laurentides shows the effects of advancing ~
spring earlier than any other portion of the Offawa district and conse-
quently some point in that neighbourhood has always been in favour for
the May excursion.

This year Chelsea was chosen. A special train on the Ottawa and
Gatineau Railway, starting at 1.30 p.m., carried nearly 200 members of
the club and their friends. By invitation there were present several
members of the Royal Society of Canada, the annual meeting of which
had closed on the preceding day, as well as a large contingent of the
Ottawa Camera Club and of the students of the Provincial Normal
School. Upon reaching Chelsea, about 2 o’clock, the patty, as usual,
divided into several sections, each accompanying its own leader to the
point of greatest interest in some favourite branch of natural history.
The Geological section under Dr. R. W. Ells visited Old Chelsea and
a mica mine on the mountain side above that little village. The
Botanical and Entomological sections under Mr. Jas. Fletcher and Mr.
W. H. Harrington took the woods in the direction of the Gatineau ;
while the rocky gorge of that river and the picturesque rapids above —
Messrs. Gilmour & Hughson’s mills attracted most of the members of
the Camera Club.

Everywhere, vegetation, even the native plants and trees, showed
unmistakable signs of having suffered from the recent severe frosts,
following the treacherously warm spell of the sth to the rzth May.

The afternoon, though breezy, was pleasant; but unfortunately
the hour set aside for the examination and remarks of the leaders upon
the specimens collected was marred by a slight rainstorm. Many of
the party sought the shelter of the cars, but a fair audience braved the
weather on the open platform of the station, where short addresses
were delivered by Dr. A. R. C Selwyn, president of the Royal Society,
Prof. Goodwin, of Queen’s University, and Mr. Kane, of St. John, N.B.

The botanical specimens collected were then named and com-
mented upon by Messrs. R. B. Whyte and J. Craig, the insects by Mr.
J. Fletcher and the rocks and minerals by Dr. Ells.

The party returned to Ottawa about 7 p.m.

THE OTTAWA NATURALIST,

Vou. IX. OTTAWA, JULY, 189s. No. 4.

CILIA.
By PRoFEssoR EDWARD E. PRINCE, Dominion Commissioner of Fisheries, Ottawa

Anyone who has watched the minute organisms, seen in a drop of
pond-water under the microscope, must have been struck by the
extremely active motions of many of them. Simple in structure, and
destitute of limbs, they rush across at a furious rate, ur glide smoothly
and swiitly in serpentine fashion, or spin round and round in endless
gyrations. How are these astonishing movements produced? ‘They
are due to cilia, the simplest and most insignificant of all organs of
locomotion. ‘These organs are widespread in the animal kingdom,
though, curiously enough the Arthropods, that large class of animals
embracing crustaceans, insects, spiders, centipedes, etc., do not
possess them, so far as naturalists have been able to ascertain. As a
rule they are very small and abundantly scattered, but they may be
few and of considerable length, when they are then distinguished as
flagella, not cilia. A flagellum and a cilium are, however, structurally
and functionally the same. Flagella occur in plants as well as in
animals, and the spores of some algae are so active, when swimming
about, that they may be readily mistaken for minute infusorian animal-
cule. Certain bacilli, too, possess one or more flagella, and like the Monads,
the lowliest of all animal organisms, are able to progress with consider-
able speed. Noctiluca is a remarkable flagellate animal, like a small
particle of jelly. It swims through the water by means of its lashing
flagellum, and it often occurs in such countless myriads at the surface
of the sea, that being phosphorescent and able to admit light, the
_ waves are brilliantly illuminated over considerable areas. In contrast
to Noctiluca, we find that in Paramecium, the commonest of ciliated
infusorians, minute cilia occur thickly all over the surface of the body,

82 Tue Ortrawa NATURALIST.

and extend even into the funnel-shaped mouth. JVocit/uca is a good
example of a flagellate creature. Faram@cium is @ type of a ciliated
animalcule. In the latter the cilia serve not oniy to drive the creature
about, they carry food into its mouth. They perform this latter function
also in the bell shaped Vortice//a, and in Sfentor, the trumpet animalcule.
These microscopic animals are routed by a stalk, and the circle of cilia,
around the mouth-opening, sweeps in floating particles of food. When
Vorticella becomes detached the cilia, at once, carry it swiftly about
from point to point. Cilia, again, are chiefly food-carriers in those
lowly animal forms, the sponges. The substance of a sponge is
traversed by channels provided with waving cilia. While carrying in
food and aiding nutrition the cilia assist in respiration by maintaining
a constant circulation of water. Nutrition and respiration are also
accomplished in aquatic mollusca by means of cilia. The river mussels,
for example, inhale constant streams of water. These streams are pro-
duced by the countless cilia, with which the gills are covered. If a
fragment of a gill be torn off the cilia immediately carry it through the
water most vigorously. The intestine in these molluscs is also ciliated,
and in the pond snails the tentacles and various parts of the body are
richly so. Again, among the zoophytes cilia though present are of
inferior importance.. They stud the crown of tentacles and line the
digestive tract, just as they do in certain worms, notably the tube-
building species. In such marine annelids as Zereded/a, the gills, cirri, —
and tentacles, which form a crown around the head of the animal, are
ciliated and it has been observed that, when the tube is being built,
particles of sand and mud are driven along the tentacles to the pro
trusible proboscis by means of these cilia. The branchial cilia aid in
respiration.

While some worms are non-ciliated, others are s> abundantly
clothed with them, that the surface of the body exhibits a constant
shimmering appearance. Certain ciliated patches subserve sensory
functions, such as smell, etc., but the excretory or ‘‘ segmental ” organs,
characteristic of the Vermes, always possess a ciliated canal for ensuring
the outflow of waste products. The digestive tube also in these
creatures is observed to be lined with cilia, in most cases,

CILIA. 83

Important, however, as cilia are, in adult stages of the animals
referred to, they are not of inferior importance to the newly hatched
_ young. Sponges, starfishes, zoophytes, jellyfish, worms, etc., pass
through a ciliated larval condition, with rare exceptions, and the cilia
as in the active Infusorians aid in progressive locomotion.

It might appear that in the highest animals, provided with special
limbs for locomotion and with complicated respiratory and digestive
organs, there is no necessity for cilia. It is not so. They are often of
importance in the Vertebrates, although sometimes they may be
found to persist, when the necessity for them has apparently gone.
Thus Amphioxus, the lowest of fishes, possesses a ciliated skin, in the
young condition. Larval lampreys, too, exhibit delicate hairs upon the
external integument, a remnant no doubt of the ciliated condition,
though the hairs are now rigid. The usefulness of such cilia and brist-
les is difficult to discover. Similarly, the cilia which line the gullet
in newly-hatched fishes, such as the haddock, have no doubt merely an
ancestral meaning. No food passes down the gullet, for the creature is
mouthless and subsists by absorbing the contents of the yolk-sac. The
cilia soon disappear, though in many Vertebrates, such as the the frog,
the mouth, throat, air-passages, stomach, etc., are ciliated through
life. Nor are they absent from the highest animals, but even in man,
they occur in the nasal passages, the respiratory tubes, certain auditory
canals, the secretory ducts in the tongue and many organs, the ovarian
_ passages, and other cavities ; but their use now appears mainly to be
_ the expulsion of matters hurtful to the sensitive epithelial surfaces
referred to. The central canal in the human spinal cord is lined by
ciliated cells in childhood, but these cells are obliterated later. We
thus see how important is the part played by these minute and insignifi-
cant organs. ‘They are efficient for locomotion, they aid in securing
food, they assist in excretion, they act protectively by driving hurtful
matters away.

It remains to briefly describe cilia and their mode of action. A
cilium is simply a thread-like continuation of the protoplasmic cell to
which it is attached. Its base, under the highest microscopic powers,
differs optically from the tip ; but practically the cilium is merely a

ee ee

84 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

thread of undifferentiated protoplasm. From the surface ofa cell there
may project one to fifty cilia. This surface may appear like a hyaline
layer, but it is a false appearance, and is due to the swollen bases of
the cilia. Each cilium, indeed, is enlarged at its base, but narrows
immediately above. This narrow neck is succeeded by a swollen
portion which gradually becomes attenuated towards the tip. They
vary in length, those 1-3000th of an inch long being of medium size,
some are shorter, others longer. Vigorous lashing movements are
characteristic. of cilia. The movements are too rapid to be distinctly
seen, the vibrations being usually 700 to 800 per minute.

If a fragment of the ciliated lining, say the mucous membrane from
the roof of a frog’s mouth, be microscopically examined in normal salt
solution, the surface shows an unceasing shimmering appearance, com-
parable to a rapidly waving field of barley. Each cilium, it has been
found, is erect and straight. Then it bends rapidly on itself, and, very
much more slowly, resumes the straight condition. The force of the
vibrations is in one direction, and as successive rows of cilia do not
bend simultaneously; but in regular succession, the result is a progres-
sive rythmic undulation. When the cilia are arranged in a circle or
crown, as in a Rotifer, say J/elicerta, the appearance produced 1s
that of a swiftly rotating wheel. Hence the Rotifers have been
erroneously called wheel-animalcules.

The vibrations of the cilia coniinue for some time after death : but,
in an injured, feeble, or dying condition, they are abnormally slow, and
can then be best observed. Heat (up to 104° F.) increases their
vigour, carbonic acid gas arrests them, while under the influence of
oxygen, and of induced electrical currents, the vibrations may he
repeatedly revived. They are independent of nervous control. They
are automatic and as inexplicable as the inherent contractibility of
muscle. Ranvier’s experiments, indeed, show that the living protoplasm,
of which cilia are composed, is essentially the same as that of ordinary
protoplasmic cells.

ACETYLENE. ~ 85

-ACETYLENE, ‘THE NEW ILLUMINANT.
By Henry S. Marsu, A.I.C.,

Assistant Chemist, Central Experimental Farm.

The value of Acetylene as an illuminating gas is perhaps one of
the most important questions amongst the manyat present being discussed
by those concerned in the lighting of our houses and thoroughfares.

The preparation of Acetylene gas by the action of water on the
“ carbides” has been known for some fifty years, but probably owing to
our ignorance of the valuable properties of this gas, or the difficulty in
obtaining it pure and in quantity, Acetylene as an illuminant was

practically unnoticed until 1892. In that year, Maquenne _pre-

pared it by heating together, at a high temperature, barium
carbonate, magnesium and_ charcoal ;_ the resulting product
when treated with water yielding the gas Acetylene. In 1893, Travers
obtained Acetylene from calcium carbide, prepared by strongly heat-
ing together calcium chloride, charcoal and sodium, in a similar
manner to that already referred to. The product, calcium carbide,
evolves Acetylene when treated with water. (Proc. Chem. Soc., 1893.)
These results, however, while valuable and _ interesting as
scientific records, were of little commercial importance, owing to the
ex;-ense necessary in obtaining the materials of manufacture.
The possibility of producing Acetylene on a large scale and at a

_ reasonable cost, oy the process discovered by Wilson, has within the

past year been demonstrated by scientists and experts in both England
and America: Mr. T. L. Wilson made his discovery by chance,
as is very often the case. While aiming at the attainment of an
entirely different object, Mr. Wilson experimenting 1n_ his laboratory at
Spray, North Carolina, U S.A. (Jour. Soc. Chem. Industry, Jan. 1895),
obtained after one of his fusions, a black, brittle mass, which on being
brought into contact with water, rapidly effervesced with evolution of
Acetylene. On further investigation, he came to the conclusion that
the brittle, black mass was calcium carbide. It had been produced by
fusing together finely powdered lime and coke in an electric furnace

86 THe OrrawA NATURALIST.

with a current of 4,000 to 5,000 amperes. The equation which repre-
sents the action of water on this product, is as follows :—
GaC, + . BO: t= Cals ~ CaO.

Calcium carbide + water = acetylene + calcium oxide.

Calcium carbide (CaC,) is a dark gray, very brittie, porous-look-
ing substance with a Sp. gr. of 2°22 at 18 degrees Centigrade. It con-
tains 62°5 per cent. of calcium and 37°5 per cent. of carbon. On
being brought into contact with water, as above stated, a double
decomposition takes place, the calcium of the “carbide” combining
with the oxygen of the water to form calcium oxide, or, to speak more
correctly, owing to excess of water present, slaked lime; the carbon at
the same time uniting with the hydrogen of the water to form Acety-
lene (C,H.), which is readily recognized by its penetrating odour, closely
resembling garlic.

Acetylene is a colourless gas having a Specific gravity of
o-9t at normal temperature and pressure; 1‘1 volumes of the
gas are soluble in one volume of water. The gas when inhaled
possesses the same poisonous properties as carbon monoxide, but to a
greater extent. Prof. Vivian B. Lewes, of London, England, in a
paper read before the Society of Arts, says that, ‘‘ owing to the intense
richness of Acetylene, it can only be consumed in small, flat flame
burners, but under these conditions emits a light greater than that
given by any other known gas; its illuminating value, calculated to a
consumption of 5 cubic feet an hour, being no !ess than 240 candles.”

It may be liquified (according to Andsell) at a pressure of 21°5
atmospheres at zero centigrade. This property suggested to some the
probable use of liquid Acetylene for portable lamps, lighting of railway
carriages, etc., since thus a large volume of the gas can be stored in a
very smallspace. It has, however, been pointed out that a sudden shock
to the liquid or compressed gas frequently causes decomposition with
violence. Hence, this use of Acetvlene would probably be attended with
danger. The carbide of calcium might be used for the purposes just
referred to without any such risk, and consequently has been proposed
as a‘convenient and cheap form to be used where liquid Acetylene
would be desirable on the grounds of portability. Specially designed

Orrawa PHYLLOPODs. 87

lamps might be easily constructed for the production of Acetylene directly
from the carbide. The latter, for railway work, could be stored in steel
cylinders (the same in which oil gas in the Pintsch system at present is
compressed), and bya self-adjusting stopcock the water could be brought
in contact with the carbide, thus evolving the gas steadily, and illuminat-
ing the cars with a white, cool flame. The same principle, with minor
alterations in detail, has been suggested with regard to “‘ acetylene
lamps” for use where other gas could not be obtained, such as
country houses, etc. Such lamps would contain the carbide in the
stand or pedestal, and the water simply be allowed to drop on to it. The
gas so liberated could be burned from a small steatite “ hole” burner.
Another novel suggestion is its use for bicycle lamps and for camp
lights. However, the chief use of the gas would be in enriching water
gas or low grade coal gas, for which, providing its poisonous qualities
did not disqualify it, Acetylene would prove of the greatest value.
We have not as yet any precise data'as to the cost of calcium
carbide, although some authorities have stated its price at about $15 to
$20 per ton, and experiments carried out on a practical working scale
have shown that one ton of the carbide yields on the mere addition of
water between 10,000 and 11,000 cubic feet of Acetylene. Atthe same
time, about 1,500 pounds of lime are produced, a material of some
value in gas works.

A consideration of the marvellous illuminating power of this
gas together with its simple and cheap production, leaves very little
doubt but that its manufacture bids fair to become a very formidable
rival of the foremost gas-enrichment processes now in practice.

OTTAWA PHYLLOPODS.
By ANDREW HALKETT.

Two years ago, when examining a shallow pool near New Edin-
burgh, I saw some transparent little creatures actively swimming about.
Were they the larvz of some insect ? I caught a number of specimens and
on placing them in a glass jar and observing their structure and move-
ments, set about determ’ning what they were, as they were quite new

88 THe OtTrawa NATURALIST.

tome. Probably few Ottawa naturalists have had the opportunity of ©
studying these wonderful little creatures, and I venture, therefore, to
present a few notes on their structure and peculiarities.

They are crustaceans, of the order Phyllopoda, sub-order Branchi-
opoda. The body, which is of a glassy transparency, is about half an
inch long, the head being very distinct, though there is no line of
demarcation between the thorax and abdomen. ‘The eyes, antenr 2,
limbs, heart and forked tail, when examined through the microscope,
are very beautiful. They are typical Entomustraca, for the body is
divided up into segments. The anterior antennz are short and delicate
and difficult to distinguish. In the male the head is large, broad, and —
the posterior antennz are converted into claspers, having the base very
thick and massive, while the tip is knobbed or rather hooked. The
eyes are very remarkable and quite unlike any other crustacean, so low
in zoological position. Carl Gegenbaur, in his ‘‘ Elements of Compa-
rative Anatomy,” draws special attention to the unusually interesting
character of the eyes. The Entomostraca, as a rule, possess very
simple eye spots, but in the Phyllopods, as Gegenbaur staies, “‘ we mect
with a facetting of the inner surface of the cuticle covering the cye, the
facets corresponding to the crystalline cones.” “lhe German anatomist
further points. out ‘‘ by their power of movement. and their position
immediately below the chitinous carapace the eyes of the
Branchiopoda form an intermediate step towards those in which the
chitinous carapace takes a more direct share in forming the optic organ.”
Further, the position of the eye, on a stalk-like process (in Ar’emza and
Branchipus) presents a point of affinity to the higher crustaceans, such
as lobsters, crabs, etc., which possess projecting stalked eyes.

The last segments of the body form a long slender tail, the ter-
minal fork being exquisite in appearance, for under the microscope it is
like burnished gold, and studded with innumerable glassy hairs. In
front of the tail, the body is furnished with a large number of limbs, so
modified as to perform the double function of locomotion and respira-
tion. ‘They are virtually gill feet. The heart is a long tube, made up
of a series of chambers, and, as is usual in Arthropods, it is dorsal.
‘The circulation of the blood, driven by this pulsating heart tube in the

Orrawa PHYLLOPODs. 89

back, can be watched through the microscope. A number of specimens
were seen to be provided with a pouch immediately behind the limbs.
These were females. This pouch is continually swayed about from
side to side, and contains opaque, globular eggs. From these eggs
minute creatures, like small mites, emerge in the nauplius or larval
condition. As the shallow pools inhabited by these creatures are liable
to dry up, the eggs which drop to the bottom possess amazing vitality.
They can endure heat and dryness for long periods; but the young
hatch out immediately the ponds are filled by a rainfall. I have reason
to know this, for the pond from which I obtained the Phyllopods in
1893 was, soon after, dried up. I waited patiently for a year and again
_ visited the spot, but could obtain none. ‘The pond was dried up, and
if any Phyllopods had hatched out they had wholly disappeared. On
Good Friday, this year, I went to the place and found the water culd
and icy, so that there were few forms of life visible, and no sign of the
beautiful creatures I was looking for. Eight days later, however, I went
again. It was evening and the water was warm. They had now
appeared in abundance, and were swimming abcut in shoals, like tiny
minnows. They dart away when startled just as a fish does, but
soon tire and are readily captured. Several visits to the pond
enabled me to take a great number, sufficient for purposes of study; but
the pond soon dried up, and no more were to be had. They glide
about in a vessel of water aud are never for a moment still. If noticed
closelv, they are seen to swim back downward with the numerous feet

turned towards the surface of the water. No creatures could be
imagined more active, delicate and graceful in their movements. Their
structure and peculiar habfts of life and development are of the highest
interest, and they appear to be extremely local in their occurrence.

A closely related species is Artemia the Brine Shrimp which lives
in saline waters such as Great Salt Lake. Packard tells us that a
Russian naturalist found by experiment that it was possible to convert the
Brine Shrimp A7femia into the fresh-water Branchipus by reducing the
_ salty character of the water. This experiment has been much ques-
tioned, and it must be granted that such an alleged conversion of one
species into another is astonishing. At any rate Phyllopods in their
habits and breeding are unquestionably most remarkable creatures.

In conclusion I wish to express my indebtedness to Professor Prince
Dominion Commissioner of Fisheries, for suggestions in making these
notes upon this interesting crustacean.

90 THE OTTawsa NATURALIST.

NOTES, REVIEWS, AND COMMENTS.
RECENT GEOLOGICAL PUBLICATIONS.

tI. TAYLOR, FRANK B.—MWagara and the Great Lakes, Amer. J. Sc.
and Arts, Vol. XLIX., 3rd Ser., No. 292, New Haven, April
1895, Dp. 249 270. ‘

2. BEECHER, CHas. E.—Structure and Appendages of Triundeus, ibid.
Ppryo7-g27, AFI: Td.

3. CHALMERS, Ropert. —Ox the Glacial Lake St. Lawrence of Professor
Warren Uphams, ibid., pp. 273-275. ~

4. WriGHT, G. FREDERICK.— Observations upon the Glacial Phenomena
of Newfoundland, Labrador and Southern Co ibid., pp.
86-94.

5. Witiiams, H. S.—On the Recurrence of Devonian Fossils tn Strata
of Carboniferous Age, ibid., Pp. 94-I0T.

6., CoimMan,;, A,AP., Pu. “Di, Antholite from Ene Ontario,
Amer. J. Sc. and Arts, Vol. XLVIIL., 3rd Ser., No. 286, New
Haven, Oct. 1894, pp. 281-283.

7. Dana, JAMES D.—AManual of Geology, 4th edition, New York,
1895, 1,088 pages; contains 1,574 illustrations besides two
geological maps.

8. Horrmann, G. C.—Chemical Contributions, etc. Geological Survey
of Canada, Part Annual Report V., Ottawa, 1895. Contains a
large amount of valuable information on the geological resources
of all the Provinces of Canada and especially of British Columbia.

Entomology.—UnusuaL ABUNDANCE OF MELOoID Larvaé.— _
On Saturday afternoon, June 8th, near the steps leading down to ~
the Canoe Club House at Rockliffe Park, my attention was caught by
a number of small bees which were busy upon the blue flowers of a
Cynoglossum. These bees belonged to a common species, Hadictus
aiscus,waich is black, with white bands upon the abdomen, and somewhat
fulvous pubescence on the legs and thorax. The individuals which had
attracted my attention, however, had apparently a bright rufescent or
orange thorax, and I recognized immediately that they were carrying,
albeit unwillingly, numerous little larva, which are known as triungu-
lins, the first stage in the life of. blister-beetles. Continuing my stroll
along the river road eastward, I found that around every plant in
bloom, and especially around the abundant clumps of raspberry, the
swarming bees carried their load of the little active larvae. The bee

v

infested ; there did not seem to be an individual exempted. Several

%
a

Nores, Reviews anp ComMMENTs. 91

already mentioned was the most abundant and also the most generally

other species, however, had more or less adherents, those most con-
spicuous being Prosopis affinis and Ceratina dup/a. Several infested

_ individuals of a small wasp—Odynerus albophaleratus—were also

observed. On the other hand, some species of bees seemed to be

exempt. Honey-bees—AZis me/lifica—were very numerous about the

raspberries, but I could not find that one of these carried a larva, and
this was also the case with the large Ana’rena nivalis, which was abund-
ant. A careful ex.mination of the flowering plants disclosed only a few
of the larvz crawling about the blcssoms, but the number carried by

_ the bees was quite extraordinary. The larva lurks upon the blossom
_ until a bee visits it, and then crawling actively upon the unfortunate

pilferer of sweets, clings firmly to its thorax. It is a slender little thing,
orange-red in colour, except the black eyes, and somewhat pediculus-
like in shape. The legs are long and provided with long claws, and
these enable the larva to obtain a firm hold upon the hairs with which
the bees are more or less clothed, and it is then transported to the cells

_ constructed by the host tor its own future brood, and therein finding

suitable provision, lives as a parasite, and undergoes interesting changes
before it appears as a beetle, the natne of which I cannot give, for,
although I have often taken them, my knowledge of these larva is too
scanty for a determination of the species. The larvz, as’stated, attach
themselves about the thorax of the bee, and so numerous were they
upon this occasion that they seriously embarrassed the flight of their
unwilling hosts. Numerous bees could be seen dropping upon the
foliage and endeavoring to comb off with their legs the undesired swarm,

but in vain, so tightly did the intruders cling. Above and below they
clustered, at the base of the wings and among the legs, clinging to the
hairs of the bee or to one another. My estimate of the number carried
by each individual of Halrcrus discus was betweeen 40 and 50, and to
verify this I collected four individuals not more conspicuously burdened
than their neighbors. One of these I have pinned in my collection
with the swarm upon it, and the remaining three were found to carry 165
larvee, or an average of 55 for each bee. When we take into account

_ the hundreds, indeed I may say thousands, of these bees which were

similarly infested, we will get some idea of the immense number of the
larvee which had developed in the limited area examined.
W.. HSH.

92 Tur Orrawa NATURALIST.

ErebiA Discoipavis, Kirby.—Some years ago a few specimens
of this very 1are arctic butterfly were taken at Sudbury, Ont., by Mr.
J. D. Evans, on 12th May. Ever since that time the leaders of the
Entomological branch have made great efforts to obtain egys of this
species so as to breed the lar, through their different stages, to record
the life history,and to describe the appearance of the young caterpillars.
Although known to occur in comparative abundance at Calgary, N. W.

T., no one could succeed in getting the eggs until this season, when
Mr. T..N. Willing, the Provincial Secretary of the Botanical Society of
Canada for the Northwest Territories, and one of our members,
succeeded in obtaining eggs which he sent to Ottawa. The eggs were
laid on May 10th and hatched on the 29th. The small caterpillars fed
readily on lawn grass, Poa pratensis, and several kinds of fine leaved
sedges, Carices, and are now growing rapidly; the first moult was
passed on June 7th and the second onthe 18th. The young larvze were
2%4 millemeters in length when first hatched, 5 mm. after first moult
and g mm. after 2nd moult. The general appearance of these little
caterpillars may be thus described: Slender caterpillars, whitish in
colour, with a dark brown stripe down the middle of the back and three
lateral stripes along each side. “The uppermost of these is broken up
into separate elongated blotches, and the lowest has on its lower margin:
the small black spiracles. Below these is a wide, yellowish white,”
conspicuous stripe ; the lower surface is mottled thickly with reddish
brown, and bears a narrow white stripe along the sides, lying just above
the bases of the legs. After the first moult the colour is darker and
the skin has many more bristles than in the first stage; after the second
moult the body is so much darker that the general colour would be
described as brown.

fk

Ornithology.—A New Birp ror EasTERN OntTario.—Mr, F.

A. Saunders reports the appearance of a Dickcissel, Sp7sa americana,
’

at the Central Experimental Farm.

Previous to this, the only record of this species for Canada was
made at the most southerly point of the Dominion,— Pomnt Pelee, Lake
Erie. The presence of so distinguished a Southerner in Ottawa being

Nores, Reviews AND ComMMENTs. 93

worthy of a mark of special attention from the local students of bird
_ life, visits to the farm were made, on Mr. Saunders invitation, by Mr.
Ww. A. D lees and the writer, both of whom obtained very satistactory
‘interviews at close quarters. The bird is a male in fine plumage ; the
. sulphur-yellow breast, black throat patch and white chin are well marked,
as well as the ashy tracts on the sides of the head. Mr. Saunders has
_ seen it daily since 15th June, always haunting the same locality on the
farm, an area of not more than three acres, and singing almost all day
long. He has not been able, so far, to find either mate or nest, though
once or twice a bird has been seen which he hoped might prove to be
the female dickcissel, but which would not permit him to come near
_ enough for identification.

In the hope that they may be nesting it has been thought best not to
E collect ” the male bird. They will be protected on the Experimental
Farm, and possibly may return another year.

Since the above observation was made Mr. W. E. Saunders of
London, Ont., who was the first to discover the dickcissel at Point
Pelee in 1884, writes that he has seen several of the species this season
_ in the County of Middlesex. ; A’ GE:

The Air at Ottawa.—Mr. F. T. Shutt, F.I-C., President
of the O.F.N.Club and Mr. Anthony McGill have sent the Orrawa
NATURALIST a copy of their recent paper entitled : ‘‘ Some Observations
__ on the quality of air at Ottawa.’* In this paper the authors give some
_ of the results obtained by them in the work they undertook at the
instance of the Department of Public Works to examine the air of the
House of Commons Chamber at Ottawa. The methods employed are
described, and the results appear in the form of estimations of the
carbonic acid present in the air on Parliament Hill. The authors
say :—‘‘ It will be seen that the quantity (of carbonic acid) varied from
370682 volumes per 10,000 on the rith June to 3°7177 per 10,000 on
13th June.” The experiments were made in 1892 and the presence of
CO, was estimated by Pettenkofer’s Process. The mean amount of
carbonic acid gis (omitting the first estimation made) is 3°5918 volumes

p2r 12,022 Compared with results obtained in other cities the quality
_ of the air on Parliament Hill is excellent.—H.M.A.

*Trans. Royal Society of Canada, Vol. XII, Sec. HI, 1894.

94 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.
EXCURSIONS.

Excursion No. 2, Galetta.—Weather of the bright, exhilarat-
ing order; a large gathering of enthusiastic naturalists, and a region
rich in scenery and varied in the natural products, all combined to
make the excursion to Galetta on the 15th of June one of the most
enjoyable in the history of the Club’s outings.

About 140 excursionists gathered at Elgin street station at 1.45 in
the afternoon, from whence they were taken by the Parry Sound _rail-
way to Galetta, some 35 miles distant. The train slowed up at
McDougall’s and Graham’s Crossings, where the numbers were swelled
by the addition of parties from the Experimental Farm and Richmond
Road.

The railway passes through some of the finest agricultural districts
of Carleton County, now ‘in verdure clad” with the green of the
meadows and grain fields.

The village of Galetta is reached in an hour. Here the party is
met and cordially welcomed by Mr. G. C. Whyte, a brother of the well-
known enthusiast in botany, Mr. R. B. Whyte, at whose recommenda-
tion the locality at Galetta was chosen. The town hall was kindly
placed at our disposal, and was used as a storing recom for wraps and
lunch baskets.

The next move was to collect forces, designate leaders for the
various branches, and begin the serious business of the afternoon. It
was at this time that the unavoidable absence of such well appreciated
and willing leaders as Mr. Fletcher, Drs, Ami and Ells, was felt and
deeply regretted.

President Shutt then explained the geography of the district and
asked Messrs. Whyte and Craig to lead in the search for botanical
specimens ; while Prof. Prince, Messrs. Halkett, Whiteaves and Ferrier
represented the zoological and geological sections.

The principal exploring grounds lay along the banks of the Missis-
sippi, a tributary of the Ottawa, and in the vicinity of Chats Lake.

It may be interesting to note here that Galetta is situated on a
spurt of the same Laurentian formation which crosses the Ottawa River
at the Chats Falls. This ridge of gneiss crops out prominently at

EXCURSIONS. 95

: Galetta and adds much to the variety and beauty of the scenery by
causing a series of interesting falls at the point of intersection by the
Mississippi. ‘The power furnished by these falls is utilized to operate
grist and woolen mills in the village; the long lines of comfortable
looking frieze displayed upon the stretchers testified to activity in
business.

It may hardly be taken for granted that all the excursionists were
true field naturalists, and therefore came solely to pry into nature’s
secrets. From the happy uppearance of many interesting groups of
from two to a dozen persons who were not communing with nature it is
safe to say that secrets of another order were made, interchanged and
investigated during the afternoon. However that may be, it was a
_ well satisfied party which gathered at six o’clock at the call of the
President in Whyte’s beautiful grove ‘neath “the murmuring pines and
the hemlocks ”—in fact to hear an account of the different “finds” by the
leaders of the different sections.

It was much to be regretted that Geology and Entomology were
not represented owing to absence or modesty on the part of the
- leaders.

Prof. Prince, Dominion Commissioner of Fisheries, spoke interest-
ingly regarding some specimens which he had succeeded in capturing.
In the Botanical section an interesting collection was exhibited by
Messrs. Whyte and Craig.

Among the specimens collected were good representations of the
Wild Orange Red Lily, Z. P/iladelphicum, which Mr Whyte recom-
mended for garden cultivation, and the Carolina or thornless rose,
R. Carelina. Flowering branches of Poentilla fruticosa, shrubby five
finger, were also shown and described by Mr. Whyte as a most
desirable shrub and one whose beauty was enhanced by cultivation.

This region seemed to be particularly rich in climbing plants. as
Mr. Craig extolled the merits of four useful and ornamental species,
mentioning Virginia creeper, Amfelopsis guinguefolia ; Climbing Bitter
Sweet, Celastrus scandens ; Moonseed, Menispermum Canadense ; and

- Climbing Bindweed, Polygonum alinode. Several honeysuckles

were shown in fruit and in flower, the most beautiful at that time being

96 Tue Orrawa NaturRALIST.

the Hairy honeysuckle Z. A/rsufa, Eaton. ‘This was covered with its
charming orange yellow colored flowers, making it most attractive.
Others exhibited were the native Wolf Willow, E/eagnus, of the North-
west in fruit,and Saskatoon, Ame/anchier, in addition to representations
of our best conifers. .

President Shutt added some interesting remarks on the role of the
veguminosae in agriculture, and congratulated the club on its success-
ful outing. Mr. Sinclair, B.A., of the Normal School also spoke
felicitously of the benefit of such excursions. A number of members
of the Ottawa Camera Club who were of the party succeeded in getting
several interesting views of the Mississippi Falls.

The 8.30 train brought to Ottawa a cheerful and thoroughly
satisfied party of excursionists, each with a strong desire to say “Rah !”
for Galetta.

5 Rat

July and August Excursions.—Owing to the absence from
town of a number of the officers and members of the O. F. N. Club, it
has been decided not to hold any field day during July.

It is probable that the August NATURALIST will contain an announce-
ment of one, to take place about the middle of that month.

THE LATE PROFESSOR HUXLEY.

British Science has lost one of its foremost leadérs by the death of
Professor Huxley. He was recognized the world over as the greatest

of modern biologists and he was not only a profound original discoverer
he was also one of the best popular expounders of science. His con-
tributions to science were of a voluminous and varied character, and in
the field of Comparative Anatomy his work was especially brilliant and
successful. As a lecturer he had but one rival, viz. : the late Professor
Tyndall, and the interesting circumstance may be recalled at this time,
that both these scientists were, in the course of their career, candidates
for Professorships in one of our Canadian Universities (Toronto).
British Science may look with just pride upon the achievements of the
laté Professor Huxley.—E. E. P.

SEE STAT RR

THE OTTAWA. NATURALIST.

Vou. 1X. OTTAWA, AUGUST, 189s. No. 5.

*ARGON: A NEWLY DISCOVERED CONSTITUENT OF
THE ATMOSPHERE.

By BRANK T. SHUTT, M.A., F1.C., F.CS.

Our first knowledge regarding the chemical constitution of the
atmosphere may be said to date from Priestley’s time. In 1774 this
English chemist discovered Oxygen by the experiment, now historical,
of heating the red oxide of mercury by means ot the sun’s rays, collect-
ed and focussed by a burning glass. He worked out somewhat its
chemical properties and made known its essential characteristic as the
great supporter of animal life and of combustion. He termed it
* Dephlogisticated air,” because, as he said, “it is so pure, so free from
phlogiston,”—the hypothetical principal of inflammability of an obsolete
theory.

Two years previously, Rutherford, Professor of Botany in Edin-
burgh, had experimented with the residual gas produced by respiration
of animals in closed vessels containing air. He found it to contain a
gas (carbonic acid) that could be absorbed by caustic potash and further
a colourless gas, which could not thus be absorbed, that extinguished
the flame of a candle and did not support animal life. This was the
discovery of phlogisticated air or Nitrogen.

Scheele, a Sweedish chemist, was, perhaps, the first to recognize
clearly that the atmosphere consisted of these two gases. He confirmed
the results of Priestley and Rutherford, bringing them together and
establishing from them the dual character of the atmosphere.

So far, however, all the work was of a qualitative character.
Cavendish, another English chemist (1731-1810), was the one who
established by careful, thorough and skilful quanitative work the com-

*Read before the Toronto University Club of Ottawa, May roth, 1895.

98 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

position by weight and by volume of the atmosphere, This was in 178r.
It is supposed that Cavendish made no less than 400 analyses of the air.
The mean result of his labours was that roo volumes of air contain
20.83 parts by volume of oxygen.

Since that time Gay-Lussac and Humbolt, Davy, Thomson,
Kuppfer and, later by more accurate methods, Regnault, Bunsen,
Lewy, Stas, Dumas, Boussingault and others, have carefully analysed
theair. Their results serve practically to corroborate those of Cavendish.

‘It is now well known that the amount of oxygen in normal air
varies at different times and in different localities, but the work of all
the most careful investigators goes to show that the limit of variation
lies within 20.9 and 21.0 volumes of oxygen per too of air. Consider_
ing this, we may well marvel at the high degree of accuracy of this
quantitative work of Cavendish—more especially when we think of the
apparatus and methods of his day.

For: more than a hundred years then, it has been thought that the
atmosphere consisted chiefly of a mixture of the elementary gases,
oxygen and nitrogen. We have also for many years recognized as
present in the aerial ocean that envelopes our globe, small and variable
quantities of carbonic acid [3 to 4 volumes per 10,000] and vapour of
water. Under artificial circumstances, traces of sulphuretted hydrogen,
ammonia, nitric and other acids, organic matter, etc., are noticed.

We now have to chronicle a further step in our knowledge of the
atmosphere’s composition.

Lord Rayleigh, the eminent English physicist, and William Ram-
say, professor of chemistry at University College, London, at the meet_
ing of the British Association held in Oxford in August last, surprised
the world—scientific and lay—by the announcement that they had
discovered another atmospheric constituent. -

To give you some idea how these scientists came to make the
discovery of this constituent—which the weight of the proof
indicates to be an. element hitherto unknown—I shall make
free use of an abstract of a paper read by them before the Royal Society
on the 31st of January of the present year. Priestley had discovered
oxygen by chance ; the present discovery was the result of an elaborate

ARGON. 99

and careful series of experiments—extending over a period of several
years—conducted and repeated on thoroughly scientific lines, by means
of physical and chemical methods, the outcome of the combined labours
and knowledge of physicists and chemists of the age, which I think we
may safely say is the most brilliant, and withal the most accurate that
science has ever known.

Lord Rayleigh had previously proved that nitrogen extracted from
chemical compounds was about one-haif per cent. lighter than ‘‘ atmos-
pheric nitrogen.” Thus, the [mean] result for the weights of nitrogen
gas in the globe, prepared from the tollowing compounds :-—Nitric oxide,
nitrous oxide, ammonia nitrite, urea was 2.2990, while that for ‘‘atmos-
pheric nitrogen” prepared and purified by the best hitherto known
methods was 2.3102. Reduced to standard conditions, their figures
“give 1 2595 grms of ‘‘chemical” nitrogen and 1.2572 grms of ‘“atmos-
pheric” nitrogen per litre. This difference, though small, was quite
sufficient to arouse in the mind of Lord Rayleigh the suspicion that

?

‘‘atmospheric nitrogen ” was not pure nitrogen.

We may very briefly at this stage consider the details of one
method for the preparation of nitrogen, used in these investigations of
Lord Rayleigh and Prof. Ramsay: By the ignition of the metal
magnesium in nitrogen, a compound of the two is formed, (magnesium
nitride) which on subsequent treatment with water yields ammonia ;
from tbe latter by many methods the combined nitrogen may be
determined.

As magnesium nitride, nitrogen was extracted from the air, then
liberated with water and carefully estimated. The result obtained
proved that, prepared in this way, nitrogen—which in the first stages of
the method of preparation was part of the atmosphere—was practically
identical in physical constants with nitrogen from chemical compounds.

It was, therefore, conjectured that nitrogen separated from the
atmosphere by all the methods save the one just quoted, was not pure
nitrogen. What then was its impurity? In other words, is there not
another gaseous constituent in the atmosphere unknown ?

We have now stated briefly the grounds for suspecting a hitherto
undiscovered constituent in the air. In a review of this character tt is

100 Tue Orrawa NaTurRALIs?.

impossible to give an account of all the experiments these scientists
made in order to make sure that the discrepancy in weight already
referred to was not due to impurities. Suffice it to say that all possibility
of the ritrogen prepared from chemical compounds being a mixture, was
shown by varied and careful experiments to be without any foundation.

METHODS OF PREPARATION.

Of the elements that combine directly with nitrogen, magnesium
was chosenas the best. When nitrogen is passed over this metal in a hard
glass tube heated to redness, absorption takes place with incandescence.
The authors state that from 7 to 8 litres of nitrogen can be absorbed in a
single tube. The nitride so formed is a porous, dirty orange coloured
substance. Red hot magnesium therefore was used to absorb or get
rid of the nitrogen, while red hot copper was similarly used to combine
with the oxygen of the air experimented upon.

The method of Cavendish, by “ sparking ” nitrogen with oxygen in
the presence of an alkaline liquid, was employed by the authors in their
earlier experiments. This finally resulted in obtaining a small quantity
of residual gas, proportional to the volume of air operated upon, which
could not be further oxidised. Its spectrum proved that it was not
nitrogen. It was, in fact, the newly discovered element, argon.

The abstract then gives the details of an experiment in which the
oxygen of the air under trial was absorbed by red copper. This left a gas
of the density of 14.88. This, as the investigators say, while not con-
clusive, was encouraging. Then by passing backwards and forwards such
‘atmospheric nitrogen” over red hot magnesium they obtained after 10
days about 1500 c.c. of this heavier gas. This was treated with a large num-
ber of chemical absorbents to purify it, and as a result they had 200 c.c.
of a gas of the density of 16.1. Still further absorption yielded a gas with
a density of 19.09. This on “ sparking ” with oxygen eliminated the last
traces of nitrogen, the remaining gas having 20.0 as its density. This
showed, by spectrum analysis, lines not reconcilable with any known
element.

The method of atmolysis was then tried. Atmospheric nitrogen,
after separation of oxygen by red hot copper, was diffused through a
number of tobacco pipe stems, The nitrogen so obtained was denser |

ARGON. 101

than that of atmospheric nitrogen not so treated. This served to
corroborate their previous results and conjectures.

~The preparation of argon on a large scale is a tedious process. It
involves first the separation of the oxygen by red hot copper and the
drying by chemicals of the remaining gas. It is then passed several times
over magnesium turnings heated to bright redness. For this
purpose mercury gas holders and a Sprengel vacuum pump are used. It
takes at least two days to effect perfect elimination of the last traces of
nitrogen. ;

The density of this gas-—argon—as calculated trom a mixture with
oxygen, is 19.7, and on the assumption of its proportional amount in
atmospheric nitrogen 20.6. As prepared from Nitride of magnesium,
the average density from a number of determinatiens in 19.90. This
_ gas gave no spectrum of nitrogen in the vacuum tube.

It would avail little for me to give here a minute account of the
characteristic lines of the spectrum of argon. Mr. Crookes, whose
assistance as an authority on spectrum analysis was asked, has made a
careful record of the wave-lengths. Part of the evidence from this work
would seem to indicate that argon isa mixture and not an element,
Since two distinct spectra at different temperatures were noticed. We
however, know that the spectrum of certain elements is apt to vary with
the temperature and pressure under which the experiment is made.
Mr. Crookes concludes ‘‘that Lord Rayleigh and Prof. Ramsay have
added one, if not two, to the family of elementary bodies ”

Argon is about two and a half times as soluble in water as nitrogen,
It has been proved that dissolved gases from rain water furnish
“ nitrogen ” considerably heavier than true pure nitrogen. ‘This greater
solubility of argon has already suggested a method for its preparation.
To Professor Olszewski, of Cracow, was first assigned the task of
determining argon’s physical constants. His results are that it has a
lower critical point and a lower boiling point than oxygen. He has
liquefied it and, further, solidified it to white crystals. At ordinary tem-
perature it is acolourless, odourless gas.
The ratio of its specific heat, the result of a number of experiments,
calculated from the velocity of sound in it, is 1.66. That for diatomic
gases varies from 1.29 to 1.42. From the fact now recorded it appears to be

102 THE OTTAwa NATURALIST.

a gas in which all the energy Is translational ; in other words, its molecule
consists of one atom, and in this respect resembles mercury gas at a high

temperature.
All attempts—and they have been many—to combine argon with

other elements have failed. Conditions have been altered, but with the
same result. It, therefore, well deserves the name given it, which is
derived from the Greek and means inert. So far, its inertness
is without a parallel in chemical science. I ought to mention
that within the last month, M. Berthelot has announced that he has
by means of the silent electric discharge got argon to combine with
several organic bodies. Details of these results are promised at an

early date.
Avogadro’s hypothesis demands that the density of a gas should be

half its molecular weight. The density of argon is 20 [approximately],
its molecular we'ght must therefore be 40. The physical data go to
show that it is monatomic, z.e. the atom and tae molecule are identical,
hence its atomic weight, if it be an element, is 40. The definite physi-
cal constants obtained by Olszewski certainly go to prove its elementary

nature.
Finally, is there a place for a new element of such atomic weight

in Mendeleef’s periodic system? It does not appear so. The question,
therefore, arises, whether the periodic classification of the elements that
of late years has received no such attention from chemists, is altogether
a complete and accurate one. May there not be elements that do not
find a place there? Further work will no doubt throw light on this
important matter.

Argon has been sought for in mineral and vegetable matter, but so
far in vain. ‘lhe atmosphere, of which it constitutes about one one
hundred and twenty fifth part by volume, appears to be its only habitat.

It is altogether too early to ask regarding the commercial or
utilitarian value of this discovery. I have no doubt that ere long we
shall know of the part— perhaps a very important part—that it plays in
the economy of nature and probably in the arts and manufactures of the
day. This discovery undoubtedly marks the highest achievement
in the chemistry of the times, but it must not be forgotten that a very
large part of the work was plotted and successfully carried out by one
who occupies a first place among the advanced physicists of the day.

A Moryixa Amona Moose. 103.

A MORNING AMONG MOOSE.
By Pror. Epwarp E. PRINCE,

Dominion Commissioner of Fisheries, Ottawa.

Some months ago, when on an official tour in New Brunswick, a
very unusual opportunity offered itself of seeing a smal! herd of Moo-e
under conditions resembling in many respects those characteristic of
the wild state.

Everybody is familiar with the magnificent head of our largest
“native mammal, and the imposing palmate horns are a common orna-
ment about our houses and hotels ; but there are comparatively few
people who have ever beheld a living moose, and fewer still who have
seen this noble animal in his native haunts. It was with no ordinary
pleasure that, quite unexpectedly, I found myself one morning with a
few hours at liberty, and was thus enabled in company with a friend,
to take a drive of four or five miles with the view of seeing the moose.
We reached the small tract of forest country where, we had been in-
formed, the moose were located, and having found the owner, he most
willingly volunteered to show us his splendid captives. The personage

. : _ 4 K 9 ;
in question was a quaint character—a veritable Robinson Crusoe in

appearance and habits of life.

From his log hut he led us along a tangled forest path, through an
extensive wooded area covering some hundreds of acres securely fenced
in. We soon saw signs of moose. All the young shoots of certain
trees had been nibbled off, or rather had been sharply nipped off, as if
by a sharp, clean bite. In some places hardly a young leaf or terminal
bud could be seen. ‘lhe moose, as is well known, prefers above all
things the young green tender sprigs on the branches of certain trees.
We also noticed on the path at several points dung traces, quite unlike
those of the cow, horse or sheep, being in fact olive brown ovoid
bodies, not unlike nut megs in shape and size. ‘The trees now became
thicker and the foliage more dense, and our guide warned us to walk
more slowly and carefully, and to avoid treading on dead dry branches
Though partly domesticated the moose, we were informed, never wholly

104 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

loses the fear produced by unexpected sounds, and moves off in alarm on
hearing the cracking of dry branches in the distance, or other warning
noises. We were further warned that if we suddenly came upon one
of the huge “pets” of which we were in quest, it was advisable to
dodge immediately behind a tree. ‘‘ Always keep a tree between you

?

and the moose,” said our guide, for the instinctive habit of suddenly
striking out with his ponderous fore-foot is never got rid of. So power-
ful is the stroke of the sharp cloven hoof that, hke the slash of a sabre,
its effect is almost always fatal, as many a hunter has found to his cost.
As we advanced slowly and noiselessly our guide called in a soothing
tone, “ Coom,” ‘“‘Coom,” ‘ Coom,” just as a dairy maid calls her favourite —
calf, and ere long signalled to us to stop. Then our guide putting up his
hand pointed to a small clear space in the midst of large trees. Lo!
under the leafy roof we could just distinguish two large brown masses
on the ground. ‘There were a couple of moose demurely chewing the
cud in this shady retreat! The colour of the hide, a dark chocolate,
so perfectly harmonized with the shadows and tree trunks around, that
the outlines of the two animals could be discerned only with difficulty.
Both had their heads turned away from us, and the back alone was
visible, much of the body being hidden by the intervening undergrowth.
The explanation of the peculiar position in which moose rest during
the day is easy. The back is always turned towards the direction
whence the wind blows. As the wind changes the moose change their —
position. On this occasion the wind was from the north, and we were
moving south, so that a very slight wind blew towards them from us.
The moose is endowed with a sense of smeli so acute, that anything
approaching from the windward side is at once detected by them with-
out the aid of eyes or ears. The head being turned in the opposite
direction, the eyes and ears are thus able to detect any approaching
danger from that quarter. Such is the universal habit of the moose.
He detects danger by scent in one direction, by sight and sound in the
other direction. With his back turned towards the wind the moose is
able to detect danger from whatever quarter it comes. ‘This was soon
demonstrated, for, as we came nearer, one of them rose quickly and
turned round in our direction, eyeing us sullenly. He was a magnifi-

44

A Morning AMONG Moose. 105

cent animal with widespreading antlers and a height at the shoulders
of at least seven feet. His stout limbs of a pale ochre colour, like the
trunks of young trees, his sides deep brown, like faded foliage in
shadow, his head and back much paler and glistening as if frosted,
resembling a mass of leaves with the light glancing across them. We
| were able to view at eight or ten yards distance this kingly quadruped,
| always remembering the precaution to keep within reach of a stout
cedar or beech. There was no difficulty in noting the peculiar features
of the living moose soutterly unlike the crude and unshapely stuffed
skins which we usually see. The short deep body, the monstrous
towering shoulders surmounted by a bushy erect mane, the thick
abbreviated neck, the long and ponderous head, and, above all, the
gracefully curved snout, with pendulous upper lip, almost as mobile as
the elephant’s trunk, all combined to give a peculiar weird grandeur to
the animal. Itis impossible in a museum specimen to produce certain
graceful features in this uncouth giant. Thus the soft roundness ot
the ears ts always lost, and the elegant curve of the slit-like nostrils it is
impossible to preserve after death. The strange, somewhat “ lack-
lustre ” eye, to adopt Shakespeare’s expression, is ludicrously small tor
so large a creature. It is, it must be admitted, a wicked eye, very un-
like the large liquid eye in most of the deer tribe, nor has it the
benignant intelligence of that organ which we see in the elephant, or
the inoffensive inquiring look of the whale’s eye, as viewed at half a
dozen yards’ distance from a fishing boat: but it resembles rather the
suspicious ill-natured eye of the bull or the rhinoceros. The eye in
fact is dull, dark, and with hardly any indication of white. From the
throat of the bull hung the elegant tail-like “ bell,” a bushy appendage,
which reaches its full development only when the creature is adult.
The huge trumpet-like ears are extremely bushy, similar to the condi-
tion of the brown bear, and as mobile and rapid in movement as the
ears of a horse.

The living moose combines many of the general features of the
horse, the deer, and the pig. Indeed the young calf-moose is strik-
ingly pig-like in appearance, on account of the long snout, the large
pointed ears, small eyes and sloping back.

106 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

Our guide assured us that he had captured, when practically full
grown, the splendid bull-moose which we had the privilege of seeing,
and had brought it from the wild Quebec country, north of the Lower
St. Lawrence to New Brunswick on a rudely constructed raft—a mai-
vellous instance of a hunter’s skill, perseverence and success.

Taking a stout maple branch in his right hand he walked up to
his colossal pets, holding out a piece of turnip as a dainty bribe, and
uttering his cry “Coom,” ‘‘Coom.” The cow moose rose and readily
took the piece offered, but the bull was more reserved and only after
much persuasion condescended to accept a fragment of the turnip,
leisurely stretching out his head and seizing the piece with his elastic
lips after the manner of a horse.

Our guide patted the creature familiarly, and seemed to take no
such precautions as would be necessary for a stranger to take. It is
true he was cautious in approaching the bull at first: but the animal
was clearly semi-domesticated. When the cow rose, the absence of
horns and of the bell, and the meagre character of the upright mane
took away from her appearance. Her size too is rather smaller, and
the ears appear, if anything, larger and more prominent: but the
absence of horns may account for that. She lacks the impressive
giandeur of the bull. Soon a small calfmoose, about as large asa
12-hands pony, appeared in response to repeated calls. It was about a
year old and appeared quite tame, pushing its huge nose under the
armpits of its master, and exhibiting signs of affection. The lips are
far less pendulous and mobile in the calf. A further walk of a quarter
of a mile enabled us te see another cow, whose ears were crumpled and
shorn at the tip. This animal when newly captured, and tied about
the neck, head and ears with ropes, had been frost-bitten, and had lost the
tips of the last-named organs. Finally a fifth moose was seen, a calf born in
captivity, and so tame as to Jump over a fence at the command of its
master. It was a surprise to see a heavy, uncouth, almost unwieldy,
animal such as this, take a fence four or five feet high with greater
lightness and ease than a hunter Our guide not being pleased with
his juvenile pet’s performance, administered one or two blows with his
cudgel, whereupon the creature cried in a sharp, ill-natured manner,

A MorninG Amone Moose. 107

not unlike the cry of a horse in pain or anger, but less loud and strong.

such large dimensions. _ This feeble, ill-natured cry resembled strongly

the weak cry of the monstrous rhinocerous, the voice of which is so ill-

proportioned to the animal’s size.
It was interesting to note that our departure was watched with the
utmost keenness and suspicion by the moose. They followed us with

ears and eyes, turning round when necessary to observe our movements
as we hurried away. It was an impressive spectacle to see in the dis-

tance the two massive captives standing in their leafy retreat, the pale
grey horns of the bull rising majestically amongst the branches.

Cases of tame moose are familiar enough in Canada: but it is a
rare experience, except to the hunter, to see a herd of moose under
conditions so resembling the wild state. One gained some notion of

_ their appearance in the forest. One sad reflection only could not be

avoided, arising from the probability that in spite of laudable steps to
preserve these noble monarchs of our Caradian forests, the cruelty ard
barbarity of man is almost certain ere long to exterminate them. Not
merely pot-hunters, who slay the helpless mother-moose just before and
after bearing her young, but professed spoftsmen, have no mercy.
Their relentless efforts may ere long deprive our Dominion of the
moose in our forests as they have already robbed us of the royal
buffalo on our prairies, unless severe and righteous measures be effec-
tively carried out.

108 ‘ THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

LIST OF NATIVE TREES AND SHRUBS GROWING AT
THE CENTRAL EXPERIMENTAL FARM,
OTTAWA, JULY, 1895.

By W. T. Macoun.

Interesting and numerous as are the species and varieties of trees
and shrubs from foreign countries now growing at the Central Experi-
mental Farm, which by their beauty and peculiarities of form, leaf,
flower and fruit attract so much attention from visitors, it must be a
satisfaction to Canadians to know that a large number of our native
trees and shrubs play no small part in the pleasing effect produced by
the tasteful grouping of the various species and varieties on the orna™
mental grounds. In the arboretum many of our native trees and
shrubs may now be studied with much profit-by those interested in
botany and while more species are yet to be added, the local botanist
will see at the Farm many that are not to be found in the Ottawa
district.

It was thought that a list of the native trees and shrubs growing at
the Central Experimental Farm, in cultivation or otherwise, would
prove of some value to the members of the Ottawa Field Naturalists’
Club, and the accompanying list is herewith subinitted.

The classification is according to Prof. Macoun’s ‘ Catalogue ot
Canzd'an Plants.” The distribution of each species is given ; whether it
is a tree or shrub; its hardiness at Ottawa; and when ornamental
mention is made of the fact. A few woody climbers are also included.

There will be found in the list the names of 178 species and varieties.

I. RANUNCULACE4 —Crowfoot Family.

t. CLEMATIS, Linn. (Virgin’s Bower.) .
(1.) C. VERTICILLARIS, DC. Whorl-leaved Clematis.
Wnre:; Cnt. 5’ Manis si) Veta ees
Woody climber ; hardy; flowers ornamental.
(2.) C. VirGintana, Linn. Virginian Clematis.
W.o.; N.S.) Ones Ontey inn.

Woody climber, hardy ; flowers ornamental.

List oF Native Trees, Erc. 109

(3.) C. LicusticiFoLia, Nutt.
aren 52 .C,
Woody climber; hardy; flowers ornamental.

Il. MAGNOLIACEA— Magnolia Family.

17, LIRIODENDRON, Linn. (Tulip Tree )
- = (78). *L. Tuviptrera, Linn. Whitewood.

Western Ontario.
Large tree ; semi-hardy ; leaves and flowers ornamental.
" 18. MAGNOLIA, Linn. (Magnolia.)
479.) M. acuminata, Linn. Cucumber Tree.
Western Ontario.
Large tree ; semi-hardy; leaves and flowers ornamental.

IV. MENISPERMACEA:— Moonseed Family.

20. MENISPERMUM, Linn. (Moonseed.)
(81). M. Canapense, Linn. Canadian Moonseed.
Que. ; Ont. ; Man.
Woody climber ; hardy.

V. BERBERIDACEZ ~ Barberry Family.
21. BERBERIS, Linn. (Barberry.)
(84). B. Aguirotium, Pursh. Oregon Grape.
B.C.
Low shrub ; semi-hardy.
XIX. HYPERICACEA —St. John’s Wort Family.
_ 97. HYPERICUM, Linn. (St. John’s Wort.)
(344). H. Karmianum, Linn. Shrubby St. John’s Wort.
Ontario.
Low shrub; hardy ; flowers ornamental.

XXI. TILIACEA —Linden Family.

105. TILIA, Linn. (Basswood. Linden.)
(366). T. Americana, Linn. Basswood.
Que. ; Ont.; Man.
Large tree ; hardy.

110 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

XXIV. RUTACEA:—Rue Family.

-
112, XANTHOXYLUM, Colden. (Prickly Ash.)
(392.) X. AMERICANUM, Mill. Northern Prickly Ash.
Que. ; Ont.
Tall shrub; hardy.
113. PLELEA, Linn... (Hop Tree:)
(393-) P. TRiroviata, Linn. Shrabby T'refoil.
_ Western Ontario.
Tall shrub; hardy.

XXV. ILICINE4~— Holly Family.

115. ILEX,-Linn;. (Holly:)
(395-) I. VERTICILLATA, Gray.
NS: > Ques One.
Shrub ; hardy; fruit ornamental.

XXXVI. CELASTRACEA —Staff-tree Family.
117..CELASTRUS, Linn. (Stafftree.)

(379). C. SCANDENS, Linn. Wax-work. Bitter-sweet.

Climbing shrub; hardy; fruit ornamental.

118. EUONYMUS, Tourn. (Spindle-Tree.)
(399.) E. ATROPURPUREUS, Jacq. Burning Bush. -
Ontario.
Tall Shrub; hardy ; fruit ornamental.

XXVII. RHAMNACEZ:. Buckthorn Family.

120. CEANOTHUS, Linn. (New Jersey Tea.)
(401.) C. AMERICANUS, Linn.
Ontario.
Low shrub; hardy.
121. RHAMNUS, Tourn. (Buckthorn.)
(405.) R. ALNIFOLIA, L’Her.
-N.B.;. Ous. ; OnteS Manly ws 1.
Low shrub ; hardy.

List or Native Trees, Erc. 11]

XXVIII. VITACEA—Vine Family.
122. VITIS, Tourn. (Grape.)
_ (408) V. Lasrusca, Linn. Northern Fox Grape.
Western Ontario.
Climbing shrub; hardy.
(499.) V. corpiFOLIA, Lam. Frost Grape.
NS:; > Que.; Ont.; Man.
Climbing shrub ; hardy.
123. AMPELOPSIS, Michx. (Virginian Creeper.)
(411.) A. QUINQUEFOLIA, Michx.
Que. ; Ont.; Man.
Climbing shrub; hardy ; leaves ornamental.

XXIX. SAPINDACEA®—Soapberry Family.

124. STAPHYLEA, Linn. (Bladder Nut.)
(412.) S. rRiFoLIA, Linn. Amewican Bladder Nut.
Que. ; Ont.
Tall shrub ; hardy.
125. ACER, Tourn. (Maple.)
(414.) A. PENNSYLVANICUM, Linn. Striped Maple.
Pes Ns QOue.; Ont.
Small tree ;_ hardy.

(415.) A. spicatuM, Lam. Mountain Maple.
Moo poem 5 Oue.; Ont; Man.
Tall shrub ; hardy.
(417.) A. CIRCINATUM, Pursh. ‘Vine Maple.
BC.
Tall shrub or small tree ; semi-hardy.
(418.) A. GLABRUM, Torrey.
B.C.
Tall shrub ; hardy.
(419.) A. SACCHARUM, Wang. Sugar Maple.
N.S.; N.B.; Que. ; Ont.
Large tree; hardy; leaves ornamental in Autumn.

112 ; THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

NOTES, REVIEWS AND COMMENTS.

*CHAPMAN’S HANDBOOK OF BIRDS OF EASTERN NORTH AMERICA.

If supply may be taken as an index of demand, the large number
of books upon ornithology which have appeared within the last few
years furnishes an encouraging proof of a growing desire for closer
acquaintance with bird life, both on the part of the nature-lover and of
the scientific student. Probably no book that has appeared for a long
period is so well fitted to satisfy the needs of both these classes as the
one whose title has just been quoted. Accuracy and fullness of des-
cription, covering all external characters, including every phase of
of seasonal and sexual plumage in each species, have been attained
without an undue use of technical language ; and these specific descrip-
tions alternate throughout the body of the work with delightful sketches
of the habits of each bird. Many of the life-histories are from such
well known writers as Mrs. Olive Thorne Miller, Miss Florence Mer-
riam, William Brewster, Ernest E. Thompson, Bradford Torrey, etc.

The author is by profession a closet naturalist, but his chapter on
“ The Study of Birds out of Doors ” can only have been written by one
who is a lover, as well as a student, of birds, and whose acquaintance
with them must have begun at a period when professional méthods and
closet work were as yet matters of the future. Still the curator of the
museum comes to the surface in the following recommendation: “If
you would name birds without a gun, by all means first visit a museum
and with text-book in hand study those species which you have previouly
found [by reference to the nearest local list] are to be looked for near
your home. This preliminary introduction will serve to ripen your
acquaintance in the field.” One field student can remember how a
preliminary acquaintance with a row of mounted birds standing “at
attention” on the shelf of a museum has only served to deaden the

* Handbook of Birds of Eastern North America—with Keys to the Species and
Descriptions of their Plumages, Nests and Eggs, their Distribution and Migrations, &c.
&c. &c. By Frank M. Chapman, Assistant Curator of the Department of Mammalogy
and Ornithology in the American Museun. of Natural History, New York City, &e.
New York: D. Appleton & Company, 1895. 12 me., xiv. + 421 pp.

7. .

Nores, Reviews ANpD ComMMENTs. 113

interest that would otherwise have been felt in their living relatives.
n the otherhand, an illusive song, a few unsatisfying glimpses through
the leaves or over the distant tree-tops can awaken a keenness of hunt-
‘ing instinct that, following its object through thicket and marsh and
stumbling over two or three false identifications, will end in a knowledge,
born of deep friendship between tan and bird, that can be come at in
‘no other way. Sucha plan may be too slow for this end of the
century, but its results have a_ staying-power about them.
Afterwards when inspecting the museum specimens, the student
will know what points he should study most carefully ; and whenever
‘that song is heard again the leaves grow greener and the air fresher
and other things come back to mind that to miss would be loss indeed.

Among the most valuable features in the book are the Keys. They
‘are not, as is too often the case with natural history keys, so extremely
analytic and complicated that the student can only establish the iden-
tity of the specimen at the risk of losing his own. ‘I here 1s a short
‘systematic Key to the Orders and Families, and under each family a Key
to the Species. In the latter all systematic arrangement, in the
scientific sense, is abandoned. The author’s motto is: If the Keys will
identify they will have accomplished their purpose. For example, the
Finch family is divided into three groups :

I. Under parts with red.

II. Under parts with no red and without distinct streaks.
II1. Under parts without red and with numerous streaks.
Each of these groups is again divided by other prominent color
markings, until at the third sub-division the several species are reached .
This plan wi!l be found an excellent one for field identification, and by
checking results with the accurate descriptions in the body of the work,
all danger of error may be avoided. For some cf the larger families,
as the Finches and the Warbles, there is alsoa Field Key to the Adult
Males in Breeding Plumage.

Though not too large to be carried in the pocket, the work is a gem
-of the art of bookmaking. In addition to upwards of 100 cuts of bills,
feet, etc., scattered through the text, there is a colored frontispiece,
“*Bob-white,” a Color Chart, and 18 full page plates in “half-

114 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

tone.” The Color Chart is somewhat disappointing ; what should be
the brighter colors are altogether wanting in brightness. ‘Ihe half-tone
plates. however, are all that can be desired. The Clapper Rail, Spotted
Sandpiper and Young, Least Flycatcher and Phoebe, Meadowlark, and
Wood and Wilson’s Thrushes seem almost alive.

Al Glee

Archezology.—-NorEes ON THE ANTIQUITIES OF LAKE DESCHENES.

Along the shores of Lake Deschénes are many points of Archeo-
logical interest ; and it is in the hope that some of the members of the
Field Naturalists’ Club may devote their time to a more special investiga-
tion of this branch of scientific research that I now call attention to
some of them.

It is needless to say that the Ottawa River, of which this lake is an
expansion, was, during the French régime, the great highway between
the region of the great lakes and the French settlements on the St.
Lawrence. Indians and “coureurs de bois” engaged in the fur trade,
as well as governors of Canada, either in voyages of discovery or
expeditions against their Indian enemies, traversed the waters of this
river. It was at times, also, the objective point of war parties of hostile
Iroquois, who, after the subjugation of their Huron kinsmen, carried the
tomahawk, tn a war of extermination, far into the wilds to the north of
the Ottawa.

Some of the descendants of the Indians and voyageurs who took
part in these stirring scenes, connected with the pioneer days of New
France, are now living in Aylmer and vicinity ; and it would be well to
secure from them the traditions and stories attaching to points of local
interest before the present generation passes away.

On the Ontario shore of the lake, at Raymond’s point oj:posite
Aylmer, is the site of an old Indian workshop where flint weapons have
been fabricated. My attention was first called to it, some time ago, by
Jacob Smith of the Interior Department, its discoverer. Mr. Smith
shewed the writer some flint arrow heads, and a spear head of the same
material, which he had discovered at this place.

Nores, Revirws axnp ComMeEn'’s, 115

Narcisse Noel of Aylmer, in company with the writer, also found

_ some imperfect arrow-heads at this place, which appear to have been

rejected by the ancient workmen. For about roo yards along the
shore, between high and low water mark, the rocks are littered with
chips and shreds of black flint, which are also washed out of the gravel
at high water mark after heavy rains. ‘These flints resemble those
found in great abundance in the Trenton limestone at Hull, from which
place it is just possible they may have been taken. It is said that these
flint chips have also been found on Snake Island a short distance from
here, so that this locality seems to offer opportunities to the archaeolo-
gist that should not be overlooked.

Some years ago a quantity of human bones was found buried in

_ the sand on the Light-house Island just above Aylmer, which the late

Dr. C. M. Church, to whom tney were presented, regarded as typical
of the North American Indian.

A short time ago, at Pointe a la Bataille about 10 miles above
Aylmer on the Ontario shore of the lake, Joseph Leclaire of Aylmer

_ discovered a large “‘cache ” of bullets. As Mr, Leclaire bought home

nearly half a bagfull without exhausting the find, it does not appear
credible that so large a quantity of ammunition could have been
“cached” by hunters; but, judging from the name of the place, one
inclines rather to the supposition that this store had some connection,
in the past, with the movements of war parties, either white or
Indian, operating along the lake.

An interesting tradition, told by the old “ voyageurs” now living
in Aylmer, is associated with Lapoté’s and Sand Points lying respec.

_ tively to the east and west of Sand Bay at the mouth of Constance

Creek about 15 miles above Aylmer. ‘The tradition is a follows :—
Many years ago, during the French régime, a party of “coureurs de
bois” were encamped at the former point ; while Sand Point to the west
of the bay was occuied by a superior force of Indians, probably a war
party of hostile Iroquois. An encounter was imminent and it remained
to be seen which party would circumvent the other. The French fur
traders, whose daring and brilliant exploits at this period are a matter of
history, were not to be taken by surprise. Leaving their camp fires

116 THE Otrawa NATURALIST.

burning on the high rocky shore at Lapoté’s Point, to deceive their wily
enemies, the little band of intrepid Frenchmen traversed the forest to
the east of the bay, forded Constance Creek, passed beneath the shadow
of the pine groves on the sand hills to the north of the bay and fell
suddenly on the Indian camp on SandePoint. The encounter was
sharp and terrific and resulted in the utter defeat and route of the
Indians.

Wm. Baillie, of Avlmer, informed the writer that a great many
bones are scattered over this point; and Mr. Montgomery, who recent-
ly lived in the vicinity, stated that his two sons discovered, at this place,
an almost perfect human skeleton. Mr. Baillie also states that some
years ago, on the eastern shore of the bay, a number of copper kettles,
of ancient design, were unearthed. These facts would seem to cor-
roborate, to some extent, the above tradition and invite a closer
investigation of the subject. The weird Indian legends of prolonged
conflicts with Wendigoes, supposed to have inhabited the sand dunes of
Sand Point, should also be collected before the generation of old men,
now retaining them, have passed away.

The old Indian portage at the Chats should also be a point of great
interest to the archzologist. The remains of old bullets, badly decayed,
have been found by the writer in the crevices of the rocks at this place,
strongly suggestive of the times when these “carrying places” were
disputed, foot by foot, by hostile war parties. An old copper coin
and other ancient works of art, found on the lake shore at Aylmer, as
well as an iron tomahawk of peculiar design discovered by S. H. Edey
some two miles inland from this place, are matters of interest.

Finally, I might say that members of the Field Naturalists?
Club who wish to make a _ careful examination of places
alluded to in the above will soon be in a position to do so. Capt.
Davis will shortly have a steamboat running between Britannia and the
Quyon, which will enable us to make any of these places the objective
point of an excursion of the club. ‘Traditions and folk-lore stories
associated with Lake Deschenes should then be collected and recorded
before the hand of time has placed them beyond our reach.

T. W. Epwin Sowrer.
Aylmer, Que.,
July 29th, 1895.

THE OTTAWA NATURALIST,

Vor. IX. OTTAWA, SEPTEMBER. 1895. No. 6.

CRYSTALS.*

By W. F. Ferrier, B.A.Sc., F.G.S. Lithologist to the Geological Survey

of Canada.

I have nothing original to offer you on this subject, nor are my
remarks intended to constitute a lecture on crystallography, but merely
to bring to your notice some interes ing facts with regard to those won-
‘derful forms which we call crystals, and more especially to trace out the
progress made in the study of them since the earliest times. The sub.
__ ject is so vast that it will only be possible for me to call attention to some
of the more pro:ninent and interesting facts, which constitute, as it were,
— the milestones along the road of our knowledge of the subject.

At the outset we are confronted with the question ‘‘ What is a
crystal ?”

So many definitions have been given that it is somewhat difficult to
select one which is expressed in simple terms and at the same time is:
e comprehensive and accurate.

E. S. Dana says :—‘“ Structure in Inorganic nature is a result of
_ mathematical symmetry in the action of cohesive attraction. The
forms produced are regular solids called crysta/s ; whence morphology
is, in the Inorganic kingdom, called crystTaLLOLoGy, It is the science
of structure in this kingdom of nature.”

He subdivides the subject as follows :—

{treating of forms resulting from
oy sallography | crystallization.

treating of the methods of making
Crystallogeny =~ crystals, and the theories of their
origin.

_Crystallology

* (Read before the Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club, Dec. 20th. 1894.)

118 THE OTTawa NATURALIST.

Naumann’s definition of a crystal is a very concise and satisfactory
one. Itis this :—‘‘ Any rigid inorganic body possessing an essential and
original (primitive) more or less regular polyhedric (many-sided) form
which ts directly connected with its physical properties.”

This latter clause of the definition is very important as explaining _
why cleavage fragments, pseudomorphs &c. are not to be termed
crystals.

To the question zy calcite, for instance, should assume one form
of crystal, and garnet another, science can return no answer, but must
content itself with determining and describ:ng these curious and multi-
farious forms.

The word “crystal” is derived from the Greek word “Apvora@aAA0c”

»”

meaning “ ice The ancients first gave this name to the variety of
quartz which we call “ Rock-crystal,” because, from its transparency,
its usual freedom from color, and the way in which it was found to en-
close other bodies, they imigined it had been formed by the action of
intense cold on water, which thus became extraordinarily hardened.

The name was later transferred to pure transparent stones, such as
were after used for seals and engraved gems.

Some of the old writings on this subject are very amusing. Albertus
Magnus, inthe middle of the 13th century, gravely relates how the
jntense cold on the summits of some lofty mountains d/vzes the ice so
thoroughly that it becomes crystal. Even as late as 1672 the learned
Robert Boyle goes into a long dissertation to prove that crystal could
not be ice, adduciny as two of the strongest proofs of this, first, the fact
that ice floats on water and crystal does not, and, secondly, that Mada-
gascar, India, and other countries in the torrid zone, abound in crystal,
and he could not believe that any ice, however hard, could withstand
the heat of those-countries. Later the term ‘“‘ crystal” was applied to
any mineral naturally limited by plane faces.

It was not until 1669 that any important discovery
regarding the properties of crystals was made, and then it
was thit Nicolaus Steno, a Danish physician, discovered for the
first time the constancy of angles in Rock-crystal. But it is generally
admitted that Steno himself did not fully grasp the importance of his dis-

CRYSTALS. 11g

covery, which was more a deduction froin the mathematical form of the
particular body he observed thana broad generalization from a_ series of
observations ofdifferent bodies. Itmust bebornein mind that the ancients
knew and had described crystals of certain minerals as having a constant
number of faces (or planes) arranged in a farticu/ar way. But Steno
went further than this and shewed that another constant existed. He
cut a number of sections of variously shaped prisms of quartz (r.) at
right angles to the edges of the prism,and (2.) at right angles to the edge
formed by a face of a pyramid with a face of the prism and found in the
first case (see Fig. 1) that the angles of any one section were equal to each

2 2
Fig. 1.

other and also to every angle of the other similar sections, and in the
second case (see Fig. 2) he found that the sections had two angles equal

UG

Fig 2.

to 4 an] four angles equal to ¢c,except when the prism was absent in the
crystal, when the section was a four-sided figure with two opposite angles
equal to 4, as shewn on the left in Fig. 2.

His inference was that in all specimens of Rock-crystal correspond-
ing pairs of faces have the same inclination.

Thus was taken the first step towards the discovery of one of the
three great fundamental laws governing the formation of crystals, which
has been enunciated thus :—

THE LAW OF CONSTANCY OF ANGLES. Crystals of tae same substance,
whether natural or formed in the laboratory, are essentially constant in
the angle of inclination between like planes.

Fora whole century the law discovered by Sten9 was not elaborated until,

120 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

in the year 1772,Romé Delisle,a pupil of Linnzeus, shewed that the various
shapes possessed by crystals of the same substance, natural or artificial,
are all intimately related to each other. He formed a large collection of
natural crystals which he carefully studied and was particularly interested
by the fact that the same mineral often occurred in widely. different
forms. His studies led him to the conclusion that the shape of every
crystal of the same substance is such as can be derived by a particular
process from a certain fundamental figure called the Przmztive Form,
the shape and angles of which depend only on the nature of the subs_
tance itself. All the multitudinous forms which asubstance such as pyrite
(sulphide of iron) assumes, he found could be produced by replacing the
edges or the solid angles of the primitive form by single planes or groups
of planes, but always in sucha manner that the total alteration is
similarly related to all parts of the primitive form which are geometri-
cally similar.

Thus, as a simple example, by cutting off the angles of a cube it
may be converted into an octahedron. These planes of replacement were
,egarded by him as being secondary and more or less accidental.

Werner in his treatise “On the External Characters of Minerals ”
had employed the terms Adstumpfung = truncation, Zuscharfung = bevel-
ling, Zuspitsumg=acumination, in speaking of similar variations or
changes from the fundamental form of crystal, but it is thought that Delisle
did not knowof this at the time he wrote. Delisle set to work to determine
the primitive forms of all substances, which work was greatly facilitated
by the invention at this time of the goniometer. This instrument
was invented by a Frenchman named Carangeau, who prepared the
clay-models used by Delisle to illustrate his theory, It was designed
for the measurement of solid angles, particularly those of crystals, and
was of the form known as the common or contact gontomefer.

A much more elaborate and accurate instrument for the same pur-
pose is the reflecting goniometer of Dr. Wollaston, devised by him in 1809,
of which several elaborate modifications are now employed by crystallo-
graphers. Carangeau’s goniometer consisted essentially of a graduated
arc and two moveable arms. Its form may be learned by referring to
the figures given in almost all text-books of mineralogy. The great

CRYSTALS. 121

objection to it is that it is impossible to employ it in the case of very
small crystals, whilst the reflecting goniometer may be used to measure
accurately the angles of crystals only ,),th of an inch in size.

Romé Delisle, as the result of his researches, came to the conclusion
that the primitive forms of all known substances were only six in number,
namely :—

1. The cube.

The regular octahedron.

The regular tetrahedron.

The rhombohedron.

. The octahedron with a rhombic base.
The double six-sided pyramid.

ANE ON

These were announced in his treatise on Crystallography published
in 1783, in which he figures no less than 500 distinct forms of crystals.
The weak point of his theory was the fact that the whole series of
forms of any one substance could be derived not only from the

primitive form, but from almost any of the series, thus rendering it
impossible to lay down an exact rule as to which of these was to be
regarded as the true primitive form. He was guided in his choice by
the largeness of development and frequency of occurrence of particular
faces and the simplicity of the figure they formed. Thus he chose both
cube and regular octahedron, although, as we now know, these forms
really belong to one and the same series and may be derived the one
from the other. Many of his contemporaries doubted not only his
choice of primitive form; but the very existence of the series, and
Buffon’s objections, as set forth in his ‘‘ Natural History of Minerals ”
published ten years laier (1783), bore testimony to the difficulty of the
important step taken by Romé Delisle. It was far from being obvious
that all the crystalline forms of a mineral belong to one series.

As early as 1773, Bergman, a celebrated Swedish chemist, shewed
in his writings that he recognized the importance of cleavage, and by it
he tried to explain the relationship of the various forms assumed by
the same mineral, which had so interested and puzzled Delisle, who,
however, assigned little or no importance to cleavage, speaking, as he
does in the preface to his treatise mentioned above, most contempt-

122 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

uously of the ‘‘drtse-cristaux” or ‘crystalloclastes.” But Bergman did
not proceed far enough, and it remained for another to fully develop
the theory of the structure of crystals as indicated by their cleavage.

In 1784 the Abbé Haty made his remarkable discovery, which,
like Newton’s immortal one, was the result of a mere accident.

A six-sided prism. of calcite (carbonate of lime) had been broken
from a large group in the cabinet of M. Defrance, and he noticed that
the fractures were smooth and polished, not irregular as in the case of

ken glass. He then commenced splitting-up the crystal with his
knife and finally reduced the six-sided prism to a rhombohedron.
Extending his experiment to other minerals Hauy arrived at the con.
clusion that the kernel obtained from a mineral by cleavage was to be
regarded as its true primitive form.

E. S. Dana defines cleavage as the tendency to break or cleave
along certain planes due to regularity of internal structure and fracture,
produced, in addition to external symmetry of form, by crystallization;
and he states two principles :—

(1) In any species, the direction in which cleavage takes place
is always parallel to some plane which either actually occurs in the
crystals or may exist there in accordance with certain general laws.

(2) Cleavage is uniform as to ease parallel to all like planes. That
is to say that if it may be obtained parallel to ove of the faces ofa regular
octahedron, for instance, it may be obtained with the same facility
parallel to each of the remaining octahedral faces.

Haiiy’s primitive forms were ten in number, four more than those
ot Roméde l’Isle. They were :—

The cube.

2. The regular octahedron.

3, The regular tetrahedron,

4. The rhombic dodecahedron.

5. The rhombohedron, obtuse or acute.

6. The octahedron, with square, rectangular, or rhombic base.

7. The four-sided prism, with edges at right angles to the base, the
base being either a square, a rectangle, a rhomb, or merely a parallelo-
gram,

CRYSTALS. L2a

8. The four-sided prism, with edges inclined obliquely to the base,
the base being either a rectangle, a rhomb, or merely a parallelogram.

g. The regular six-sided prism,

10. The Gouble six-sided pyramid.

_~ He also grouped all these forms in a general way thus :-——
: 1. Figures bounded by parallelograms.

2. Figures bounded by eight triangles.

3. The regular tetrahedron.

4. The regular six-sided prism.

5. The double six-sided pyramid.

Haily was let by his study of cleavage to frame a theory regarding
the structure of crystals and to discover a second great law governing
their formation, namely the one which connects the secondary faces
with those of the primitive form.

He found that the kernels which he obtained by cleavage could be
split up,apparently indefinitely, into smaller fragments of the same shape,
and, not believing that this process could go on to infinity, came to the
conclusion that every crystal of the same substance could, theoretically
at least, be cleaved into minute bricks ofa definite size and shape though
two small to be separately visible, and therefore that with these bricks
a crystal possessing any of the forms in which the particular mineral
occurs, might be built up.

As the simplest illustration take the case where the bricks are
little cubes. The conditions to be produced are that the built-up
crystal must possess cleavage, and at all its parts the faces obtainable by
cleavage are to have the same directions, also that its outer surface must
consist of a series of plane faces.

A cube composed of these little bricks could be increased in-
definitely in size by adding layers of these bricks to each of its faces.
Conversely, it might be decreased in size by taking away the layers.

But suppose that the decrease takes place by the regular subtraction
of one or several ranges of bricks in each successive layer ; theory, by
calculating the number of these ranges required for a particular form,
can represent all known forms of crystals and also indicate fosstble forms
for a particular mineral which may not yet have been observed in th

124 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

natural crystals. Figs. 3 and 4 will serve to illustrate what we have
just been discussing.

Fig. 3. Fig. 4.

Fig. 3 illustrates a cube composed of little cubical bricks, some
rows of which are removed to shew the resulting step-like arrangement
of the layers. All the edges of the steps lie 1n one plane, as seen in
Fig. 4.

If we remember that the little bricks are supposed to be so minute
as to be separaiely invisible, it will be seen that the steps will appear to
lie wholly in the plane, which thus torms a secondary face equally in
clined to two faces of the cube.

Hat also shewed how a rhombic dodecahedron resulted
from the application of successive layers of these little bricks, each less
by one row all round, to the faces of the primitive cube, and of course
the same result may be obtained by subtracting rows in the same man-
ner, (See Fig 4.)

Fig. 5.
He also assumed in some cases that the decrease was parallel, nc¢
to the edges of the crystal, but to a diagonal, taking the angles as its

point of departure. His theory established the fact that the various

CRYSTALS. 125

forms of crystals are not irregular or accidental, but definite, and based
on certain fixed laws; and he pointed out that whilst certain forms are
derivable from a given nucleus, there are others which cannot occur.

Moreover he observed that when any change in a crystal took
place by its combination with other forms, all similar parts (angles,
edges and faces) were modified in the same way. Most important of
all, he shewed that these changes could be indicated by rationa/
co-efficients.

Thus Hatiy became the discoverer of two of the three great laws of
crystallography, namely, THE LAW OF SYMMETRY, and THE LAW OF
WHOLE NUMBERS. The other, THE LAW OF CONSTANCY OF ANGLES,
we have already mentioned.

Let us consider for a moment Hawy’s two laws, taking first :—

THE LAW OF SYMMETRY.

E.S. Dana enunciates this as follows: ‘“‘The symmetry of
crystals is based upon the law that either :

1. All parts of acrystal similar tn position with reference to
the axes are similar in planes or modification, or

11, Each half of the similar parts of a crystal, alternate or
symmetrical in position or relation to the other half,
may be alone stmtlar in tts planes or modifications.

The forms resulting according to the first method are termed
holohedral forms and those according to the second, hemzthedral.”

An easy experimental way of studying the symmetry of crystals is
to cut one, or the model of one, in two, and place the parts against
the surface of a mirror, which may or may not produce the exact mp-
pearance, of the original crystal. If it does produce the exact
appearance we have severed the crystal in a plane of symmetry.
By referring to Fig.6 it will readily be seen that a cube, for in-
stance, possesses #/ne such planes, indicated by the dotted lines.

Fig. 6.
In a sphere there would of course be an infinite number of these
planes.

126 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

Now with regard to the second law :— e

THE LAW OF WHOLE NUMBERS. The meaning of this is simply
that Hauy found that the secondary faces had only such positions as
would result from the omission of w/o/e numbers of rows of bricks
and from the layers having a thickness measured by some multiple
of that of a single brick. He actually proved by measurements that
the number of bricks in the width or height of a step rarely exceeds six
But. Hauy’s theory of the structure of crystals had many weak
points in it ~‘which speedily became _ objects. of attack.
One of his first critics was Weiss, Professor of Mineralogy at
Berlin, who translated Haiiy’s work into German, in 1804.

He shewed that Haity’s “ primitive forms,” as professor Nichol puts
it, “erred both in excess and defect,” and that the ‘‘ bricks” were not
needed at all to explain the facts observed, in fact, the planes, so-called,
built up of them, would not reflect light.

Bernhardi, a doctor residing in Erfurt, pointed out that the
dimensions of the ‘primitive forms” could not be determined from
themselves, their height depending on another form. Also that various
crystals, which he named, were much more readily explained from other
forms than those taken by Haty as their “ primitives”. In fact,
numberless objections were raised ; thus, it by no means follows that
because a crystal may be reduced to a certain form by cleavage, that its
growth has resulted from the grouping together of fragments having that
form ; again, some minerals have no cleavage, whilst others cleave only
in one or two directions ; again, it is hard to conceive of a crystal built
up, for instance, of little octahedrons, which, in order to have their
faces parallel to the cleavages of the resulting crystal, and be parallel to
each otlier, would have only their angular points in contact, thus form-
ing a most skeleton-like and unstable structure.

But Hauy’s theory, pointing asit did to the great importance of the
angles of the faces and cleavages of crystals, served to direct attention
to them, and led to their more accurate study and determination.

It was not so much Haity’s data that required correction, but the
substitution of a better theory to connect his facts was needed.

The development of the atomic theory of the constitution of

CRYSTALS. 127

matter furnished this, and, instead of “bricks”, we reason about
“atomic groups,” whose centres of mass are arranged in straight lines
and parallel planes, as were the centres of the “ bricks” in Hatiy’s
original theory. -

Weiss was the first, in 1808 to point out the importance of the axes
of crystals, although Haty had referred to them.

He says :—‘“The axis is truly the line governing every figure round
which the whole is uniformally disposed. All the parts look’ to it, and
by it they are bound together as by a common chain and mutual
contact.” These axes, it must be borne in mind, are not mere geo-
- metrical lines; but it is in reference to them that the forces work which
have formed the crystals.

Weiss proceeded to arrange Haity’s prémztive forms into four classes,
each distinguished by a purely’ geometrical character ; and then from
these four classes of sets of lines, he deduced all the przmetive forms by
the construction of planes passing :— -

t. Through ends of three lines.

2. Through ends of two of the lines and parallel to the third.

3. Through an end of one of the lines and parallel to two of them

That is, these pianes passed through the end of a line, or else did
not meet it at all. These axes were, in fact, the co-ordinates of the
crystal faces of the primitive forms of Hatiy. By taking points along
each of these lines at distances equal to twice, three times, four times,
etc., the original length, he found, constructing planes as before, that he
obtained a set including all the secondary planes described by Haty as
occurring in actual crystals.

Thus he was enabled to devise a very simple system of designating

the various faces of crystals, which also greatly facilitated the calcula-
tion of their angles.

Haiiy had attempted this in conformity with his theory, but his
symbols were complex and unwieldy.

It is a curious coincidence that at the same time as Weiss was
developing his system, Mohs, Werner’s successor at Freiberg, working
quite independently, arrived at the same division of crystals into four
classes, but by a very differen. process of reasoning. These four
classes he termed “ Systems of Crystallization.”

oy*

128 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

Mohs also shewed that since all the similar edges and solid angles
of his fundamental figures were to be similarly altered, the existence of
one derived plane necessitated, as in Romé Delisle’s theory, the
simultaneous existence of a number of others having definite positions.
Such a set of faces he called a szmfple form. If the faces of more than

one simple form are present, the resulting form was termed a
combination.

At this time Sir David Brewster was engaged in his wonderful
researches on the optical properties of crystals, and the results of his
experiments on the polarization of light brought out in such a remark-
able manner the intimate relations existing between their behaviour
with regard to light passing through them, and the number of kinds of
axes they possessed, that Whewell has justly said, “Sir D. Brewster’s
optical experiments must have led to a classification of crystals into the
above systems, or something nearly equivalent, even if the crystals had
not been so arranged by attention to their forms.”

Sometimes crystals were observed by both Weiss and Mohs which,
instead of being complete simple forms, like the regular octahedron,
presented only Za/f the regular number of faces, as, for example, the
regular tetrahedron, which may be derived from the regular octahedron
by suppressing its alternate faces. Delisle and Hat had regarded the
tetrahedron as a distinct kind of primitive form, but Weiss and Mohs
found it necessary to postulate that simple forms may not only be
complete, but semi-complete also, pointing out, however, that the
half which presents itself is not an arbitrary one, but can always be
derived systematically from the complete simp'e form.

The complete simple forms were termed Aolohedra/, and the semi-
complete ones hemthedral.

In 1822, Mohs added two more systems of crystallization to the
four already described by Weiss and himself; but Weiss brought forward
very strong objections to their recognition, and their independance was
not fully established until 1833, when the actions on light of crystals
belonging to these systems were first studied. They were what we now
call the monoclinic and triclinic systems.

The researches of Weiss and Mohs may be said to have given to

?
f
{
;

(CRYSTALS. 129

crystallography its present form, in all essential points,as a pure science,
and subsequent progress has been along the lines of working out details
rather than modifying its foundations.

The accompanying table, (page 130’, will shew at a glance the six
systems of crystallization now recogniz d, with their principle synonyms
and exam les of minerals for each system.

Very often crystals are met with in which one or more parts are
reversed with regard to the others, often presenting the appearance of
two crystals symmetrically united. These are termed zn crystals, but
the theory of their formation is too elaborate to be gone into in the
present paper. Time will not permit me, eithcr, to go into details
respecting the various methods of designating the faces of crystals by
numbers or symbols, and of calculating their angles. That of Naumann
is, perhaps, the one most employed. This subject belongs, however,more to
pure geometric crystallography, and will be found fully explained in the
text-bocks. I can only briefly mention here some of the many wonderful
physical properties possessed by crystals.

The researches of Brewster on polarized light have already been
referred to. The discovery that the shape of the cleavage-form is
intimately related to the action of the crystal upon light is due to him ;
and his researches, as already mentioned, confirmed the exisience of
the two additional systems of crystallization recognized somewhat doubt-
fully by Mohs.

One of the most remarkable discoveries of recent times was the
mathematical demonstration by von Lang, Quenstedt, and others, that
six, and ov/y six, systems of symmetry are possible for all crystallized
matter.

In 1822, Mitscherlich announced his discovery of tsomorphism, the
property which substances analogous in chemical composition possess
of crystallizing in forms closely resembling each other, and with only a
slight difference between their corresponding angles. A good example
is siderite and dolomite, the crystal form being a rhombohedron.
Mitscherlich also pointed out that the same substance (simple or
compound) may crystallize in two distinct systems (dimorphism ),or even
in three or more (frimorphism and polymorphism) Thus the sulphide of
iron crystallizes in the isometric system (fyrtt), and also in the
orthorhombic system (marcastte).

¢ ss ~~ - — F Pia a o
sf wat “ o < 4
- 3 # a ~~)
> ¥
130 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

SYSTEMS OF CRYSTALLIZATION. *

c I
NAME. AXES. PLANES OF. | Examphes,
SYMMETRY.

I. ISOMETRIC.—
Tessular, Mohs & Haidinger.
Tsometric, Hansmann.

Pessoal Manecanas Three, of equal length, : Fluor Spar.
Pe AWOL Ros intersecting e€ac h Nine. Galena.
ala : other at right angles. Pyrite.
Cubic, Dufrenoy & Miller.
Moanometric, Dana (early
editions. )
SS ee ee Jip SES —— a
II]. TETRAGONAL.—
Pyramidal, Mohs. Three, intersecting each rales
Zwei-und-einaxige, Weiss. other at right angles. Zircon. _
Tetragonal, Naumann. The lateral ones Five. Vesuvianite.
Monodimetric, Hausmann. equal in length ; the) Cassiterite.
Quadratic, von Kobell. | verticala varying one ;
Dimetstc,Dana (early editions)
| OE ——E ee
III. HEXAGONAL. HEX. proper.
Rhombohedral, Mohs. Four, the three equal} Seven; 3
Drei-und-einaxige, Weiss. lateral ones inter-| at 60°; one
Hexagonal, Naumann. | secting at angles of} normal to/Calcite.
Monotrimetric, Hausmann. | 60° and the vertical) these; three/Quartz.

Nore.— ThisSystemhasaRHOM-| one, at right angles) auxiliary.|Apatite.

BOHEDRAL DIVISION, which! to these, varying in} RHomM.Drv).
includes forms with only 3) length. Three at
planes of symmetry. | 120°.

IV. ORTH RHOMBIC,—
Prismatic or Orthotype, Mohs.
Ein-und-einaxige, Weiss.
Rhombic and Antsometric,

Naumann.
Trimetric and Orthorhombic,|

Three, of unequal
length, intersecting
each other at —

Three, at right) Barite.
angles _ to) Topaz.
each other.|Aragonite.

Hausmann. angles.
Trimetric, Dana, (early edi-}
tions. ) ae
V. MONOCLINic,—
Hemiprismatic and Llemior-
thotype, Mohs. Three. of unequal
Zwei-und-eingliederige, Weiss.| length, two inter- Aasite:
Vonoclinohedi al, Naumaun. i igh ugite.
Aw, f 3 z secting at night O Gypsum
Clino hombic, von Kobell,} angles and the third oo on la
Hausmann, Des Cloiszeaux.| intersecting one o). rthoclase.
Augitic, Haidinger. the others obliquely.
Oblique, Miller. |
Popes nielrtc, Groth. ’
VI. TRICLINIC.
Tetarto PRL AES Mohs.
Ein-und-eingliederige, Weiss.
1 iclinohedral, Naumann. Three, of unequal Anorthite.
Clinorhomboidal, von Kobell. length, all the in- None. Albite.
Anorthic, Haidinger, Miller,| tersections oblique. Cyanite.
& Des Cloiszeaux. eo

Asymmetric, Groth. i

CRYSTALS. 131

The magnetic and electric properties of crystals, and their relations
to heat, all shew the same intimate connection and dependence on
their crystalline form observed in the case of their optic properties.

For fuller details of the subject treated of in this paper I would refer
you to the many excellent text-books of mineralogy, and to the articles
treating of the various divisions of the subject in the encyclopceedias. A
most excellent little work is that by Mr. Fletcher of the British Museum,
_ from which I have freely quoted.

In conclusion I would call your attention to the fact that we
Canadians have in our own country a vast unexplored field of research
in crystallography. Canada has afforded the most magnificent crystals
of many mineral species, which the world has ever seen. I need only
mention the superb and unrivaled crystals of zircon, apatite,
phlogopite, sphene &c. which grace the museums of Europe and this
continent.

Many of our localities present unusually favorable conditions for
: _ studying the mode of formation of the various crystallized minerals, and
if my remarks this evening awaken in some of my hearers an interest in
the fascinating study of the wonderful laws governing structure in
inorganic nature, my object will be accomplished.

CLUB EXCURSION TO PAUGAN FALLS.

The last Excursion of the season will be held on SaturpDay, 14th
instant. to PAUGAN FALLs, on the Gatineau. The train will leave Union
Station at 9.45 a.m.; returning, reaching Ottawa at 8.00 p.m.

This is a new locality to members of the Club, and must prove of
H great interest, both as a collecting ground, and from its scenic beauty.
; Members will assist the Club by notifying their frtends of the
Excursion.

RatEs—Members, Adults, 60c. Non-Members, 7oc. Children,
half-price.

132 THE OTTAWA NATURALIST.

LIST OF NATIVE TREES AND SHRUBS” GROWING AT
THE CENTRAL EXPERIMENTAL FARM,
OTTAWA, JULY; 1895:

By W. T. MAcouwn.

For the first part of this Paper, see August number of the OTTAWA NATURALIST.

SAPINDACE-,,— (continued )

(419) ACER NIGRUM, Michx.
Ontario.
Large tree ; hardy.

(420). A. DASYCARPUM, Ehrh. Silver, or White Maple.
N:B:; -Que:*/ Ont.
Large tree ; hardy ; leaves ornamental in Autumn.

(421.) A. RUBRUM, Linn. Red, or Soft Maple.
Large tree ; hardy; leaves ornamental in Autumn.

126. NEGUNDO, Meench. (Ash-leaved Maple.)
(422.) N. ACEROIDES, Mcench. Box-Elder.
Ont2;) Mans NWF:
Tree ; hardy.

XXX. ANACARDIACEA:—Sumach Family.

127. RHUS, Linn. (Sumach.) :
(423.) R. TypHIna, Linn. Stag-horn Sumach.
N.S: 3 N.B. 7 Oue: 5 -Onr
Tall shrub or small tree ; hardy ; leaves ornamental in autumn.

(424) R. GLABRA, Linn. Smooth Sumach.
NS: 3 NB:; Oue.4 Ont
Tall shrub ; hardy.

(427.) R. ToxicopENDRON, Linn. Poison Ivy.
N.S. ; N.B: 3 Quet-3> Ont. 5 “Man. NWS eee
Small climbing shrub ;_ hardy. ;

List oF Native TREEs, &C. 133

(429.) R. aRomatica, Ait. Fragrant Sumach.
Ont. |
Shrub ;_ hardy.
VAR. TRILOBATA, Gray.
mae. 5 BC.
Shrub ;_ hardy.

XXXI. LEGUMINOSA:—Pea Family.

138. AMORPHA, Linn. (False Indigo.)
(480.) A. CANESCENS, Nutt. Lead Plant.
Man.
Shrub ; hardy.

(481.) A. FRuTICOsA, Linn. False Indigo
Man.
Shrub ;_ hardy.

153. GYMNOCLADUS, Lam. (Kentucky Coffee Tree.)
(566.) G. CANADENSIS, Lam.
Western Ontario.
Large tree ; hardy.

XXXII. ROSACEA -Rose Family.

155. PRUNUS, Tourn. (Plum. Cherry.)
(568.) P. AMERICANA, Marshall. Wild Plum.
Que.; Ont.; Man.
Small tree ;_ hardy.

(569.) P. MARITIMA, Wang. Beach Plum.
Ns. DB, 5
Shrub ; hardy.
(570.) P. pumiLa, Linn. Sand or Dwarf Cherry.
N.B.; Que.; Ont.; Man.
Shrub ; hardy.
(571.) P. PeNNsytvanica, Linn. Bird Cherry.
Reece, = QOne,; Ont.; Man.» N.W.T. 7 BE.
Tree ; hardy.

134 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

(573.) P. Vircrniana, Linn. Choke Cherry.
N.S.; N.B.; Que.; Ont. ; Man.; N.W.T. @B.C.
Tall shrub, or simall tree; hardy.
(575.) P. SEROTINA, Ehrh. Black Cherry.
Ned. SN B.e Ouer> Ons:
Tree ; hardy.
157. SPIRAZA, Linn. (Meadow-sweet.)
(577.) S. sALiciroLia, Linn. Common Meadow-sweet.)
JIN. S35 N.B.> Ques; Oat, 57 Manes ioe tc
Shrub ; hardy; flowers ornamental.
(578.) S. romenTosa, Linn. MHardhack. Steeple Bush.
NiS. = N-B; .Oue. 5). Ont.
Shrub ; hardy; flowers ornamental
(579.) S. BETULIFOLIA, Pallas. Birch-leaved Spirza.
WoWe-l. abe:
Shrub recently planted.

(580.) S. DouGrasi, Hook.
B.C.
Shrub; hardy; flowers ornamental.
(581.) S. DiscoLor, Pursh. var. ARI4FOLIA, Watson.
B.C. |
Shrub ; hardy.
158. NEILLIA, Don. (Nine Bark.)
(584.) N. opuLiFoLiA, Benth. and Hook.
Que. ; Ont.
Shrub ;_ hardy.

160. RUBUS, Tourn. (Bramble.)
(586.) R. oporatus, Linn. Purple, Flowering Raspberry.
Ns. 3) N.B. 37 Oues52One.
Shrub; hardy; flowers ornamental.
(587.) R. NurKanus, Mocins. White, Flowering Raspberry.
Ont.'; Matt =) INWe tag oe
Shrub ; hardy; flowers ornamental.

Puy Pes # os Sa. ed . CP

List or Native TTEEsS, Xc.

» (594.) R. STRIGOSUS, Michx. Red Raspberry.

Shrub ;_ hardy.

(596.) R. occrpENTALIS, Linn. Black Raspberry.
mer, ¢ Que.; Ont.

Shrub ;_ hardy.
(600.) R. vittosus, Ait. Thimble Berry.
Moses N-B: 5 “Que. ; Ont.

Shrub ;_ hardy.
172. ROSA, Tourn. (Rose.)
(659.) R. SETIGERA, Michx.
e , Ont.
Shrub; hardy ; flowers ornamental.
(660.) R. Caroina, Linn. Swamp Rose.
mee N.B.; Que.; Ont.

Shrub; hardy; flowers ornamental.
(661.) R. Luctpa, Ehrh. Dwarf Wild Rose.
Paes 6.5 Oue.; Ont.

Shrub ;_ hardy ; flowers ornamental.

(662.) R. BLaNDA, Ait. Early Wild Rose.
oe eont.; Man.; N:W.T.; B.C.
Shrub ; hardy; flowers ornamental.

(663.) R. acicuLaris, Lindl.
Man,; N.W.T.
Shrub ; hardy; flowers ornamental.

173. PIRUS, Linn. (Pear. Apple.)
(671.) P. coronaria, Linn. American Crab Apple.
Ont.

Small tree ;_ hardy.

(673.) P. ARBUTIFOLIA, Linn. Choke-berry
Pas > Ove.) Ont.;;
Shrub ;_ hardy.

See o.; One. ; Ont.; Man. ; N-W.T.; BC.

re.

136 THE OtrrawAa NATURALIST.

VAR. MELANOCARPA, Hook.

W-s-3-IN-Bv; Ques; Ont:
Shrub ; hardy.

(674.) P AMERICANA, DC. American Mountain Ash.

Noa: oN bos (Oue,< “Ontie Mane
Small tree; hardy; fruit ornamental.

174. CRATAGUS, Linn. [White Thorn. ]
[678.] C. coccingEa, Linn. Scarlet Fruited Thorn.
WS 3 Ques Ont ; Manz: DeWs-
Small tree ; hardy ; fruit ornamental.
[679.] C. TomeNTosa, Linn. Black or Pear Thorn.
NS; NB); Ouets Ont
Small tree ; hardy.
[681.] C. Crus-GaLui, Linn. Cockspur Thorn.
Western Ontario.
Small tree ; hardy; leaves and fruit ornamental.
175. AMELANCHIER, Medic. [June-Berry. ]
[685.] A. Canapensis, Torr. and Gray.
N.S: 5 N.B4~Ones (Ong.
Tail shrub or small tree ; hardy.

XXXIII. SAXIFRAGACEA —Saxifrage Family,

186. PHILADELPHUS, Linn. [Mock-Orange. ]
[744 | P. Gorponranus, Lindl.
B.C.
Tall shrud ; hardy; flowers ornamental.
187. RIBES, Linn. [Currant. Gooseberry. |
[749-] R. Cynoszati, Linn. Wild Gooseberry.
NB. ‘Ote: ;-Ont™3> Man
Shrub ; hardy.
[750.] R. LacustTRE, Poir. Swamp Gooseberry,

NS. 5; N.B. 5 Queé.3, ‘Ont: 5.oMan. NW. sae
Shrub ;_ hardy.

List or NATIVE Treks, &C.

[752.] R. RuBRuM, Linn. Red Currant.
Bee SN G.: Que: ; Ont.; Man.; N.W.T.: B.C.
Shrub ;_ hardy.
[753-] R. prostratuM, I Her. Tetid Currant.
oer; One. ; Ont.; Man, ; -N.W.T.; BC.
Low shrub ;_ hardy.
[757-] R. rLortpuM, L’Her. Black Currant.
N-S.; N-B.; Que. ; Ont. ;. Man.
Shrub ; hardy.
[760.] R. sanGuINEUM, Pursh. Red, Flowering Currant.
B.C.
Shrub; tender ; flowers ornamental.
_ [761.] R. aureuM, Pursh. Missouri Currant.
N.W.T.
Shrub ; hardy ; flowers ornamental.

XXXVI. HAMAMELACEA:—Witch Hazel Family.

19t. HAMAMELIS, Linn. [Witch Hazel.]
[775-] H. Vircintana, Linn.
Base .; Onue.; Ont.
Tall shrub ; hardy.

XLVII. CORNACEA:—Dogwood Family.

242. CORNUS, Tourn. [Cornel. Dogwood. |
[898.] C. FLoriIDA, Linn. Flowering Dogwood.
Western Ontario.
Small tree ; semi-hardy ; flowers and fruit ornamental.
[899.] C. NurraLtu, Audubon. Western Flowering Dogwood.
B.C.
Small tree ; recently planted ; flowers and fruit ornamental.
[g02.] C. STOLONIFERA, Michx. Red-osier Dogwood.
Pie... 2,3 Quer;Ont. ;5Man. :-NiW.T. Bex
Shrub ; hardy.

137

> seh

158 THE OTTAWA NATURALIST.

[oc6.] C. ALTERNIFOLIA, Linn. Alternate-leaved Cornel.
N.S. NR. 3 Ques ue e
Tall shrub or small tree: hardy.

XLVI CAPRIFOLIACE A~— Hon ysuckle Family.

245. SAMBUCUS, Linn. [Elder.]
[g09.] S. RAcEMosA, Linn. Red herrcd Elder.
N: WT. 3- BE.
Tall shrub; hardy ; fruit ornamental.
VAR PUBENS, WATSON.
N.S. ; N.B: 3. Que. ; Ont; Man.; -N-W.17-
Tall shrub ; hardy ; fruit ornamental.
[oro.] S. CaANaApENsIS, Linn. Common Elder.
N.S. ; NEB); Que *-Ont.5 “Man. 5: RW. 7.
Shrub ; hardy ; flowers ornamental.
246. VIBURNUM, Linn. [Arrow wood. ]
[g12.] V. cassiNorpEs. Linn.
NGS. NB. = Que-; Ont. “Man; NEWek:
Tall shrub ; hardy.

[913.] V. peNtaTuM, Linn. Arrow-wood.
Ont.
Shrub ; hardy ; leaves oanamental.
[914.] V. PUBESCENS, Pursh. Downy Arrow-wooed.
Que. ; Ont. ; Man.
Shrub ; hardy.
[o15.] V. acertFoLiuM, Linn. Mapie-leaved Arrow-wc od.
Que.-; Ont. : Man.; N.W.T.
Sirub ; hardy.
[917.] V. Oputus, Linn. High-bush Cranberry.
NS. ’; N.B.; Que: ;: Ont 3oifan: IN Wes.
Tall shrub ; hardy ; fruit ornamental.
247. LINNZA, Gronov. [Twin-flower. ]
[919.] L. BOREALIS, Gronov. Northern ‘Twin-flower
N.S.; N.B.; Qde.;-Ont,; Man. 5 NW. tae
Low creeping evergreen; shrubby; hardy; flowers ornamental.

cen

List oF NaTivE TREES, &c. 139

248. SYMPHORICARPOS, Juss. [Snow-berry. |
- [g2t.] S. Racemosus, Michx. Snow-berry.
eee Ni. : Oue.; Ont.; Man.; N.W.T.; B.C.
Shrub ; hardy ; fruit ornamental.
249. LONICERA, Linn. [Honeysuckle. Woodbine. |
[925.] L. SuLtivanti, Gray. (?)
Ont.; Man.
Twining shrub ; hardy; flowers ornamental.

{y26.] I. GLauca, Hill. Smooth Honeysuckle.
Ont; Man.; N.W:T.
Twining shrub ; hardy; flowers ornamental.
|927.] I.. invoLucrata, Banks.
Beene. Ont.; Man.; N.W.T.; B.C.
Shrub ; hardy.
[928.] L. ciniara, Muhl. Fly Honeysuckle.
eerie... (ue.; Ont.; Man.; N.W <1 .;, B.C.
Shrub ; hardy.
250. DIERVILL\, Tourn. [Bush Honeysuckle. |
[932.] D. rrRirips, Meench.
eo. &.; Oue.; Ont.; Man.; N.W.T.
Low shrub; hardy.

XLIX. RUBIACEA— Madder Family.
252. CEPHALANTHUS, Linn, [Button-bush. |
|934-] C. occipentauis, Linn. Button-bush.
Que.; Ont.
Shrub ; hardy.

LV. VACCINIACE A:—Huckleberry Family.

349. VACCINIUM, Linn.
[1355-] V. corymsBosuM, Linn.
Diem 1 iN 2B. 5 Que.
Low shrub ; hardy.
[1359-] V. Myrtitius, Linn. Whortleberry. Bilberry.
ie es Oe
Low shrub ; hardy.

140 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

Zoology.—The Scientific Results of the “ Challenger Expedition.
With text Illustrations and Plates II—XVII. Introduction, by E.-
Raya Lankester, F. R.S.

I: pg a ed and Navigation. By Staff-Captain T. H. Tizard, R. N.,
. RE wo
II. Broa Circulation. By H. N. Dickson.
III. Geology.

Coral-Reefs. By Professor J]. W. Judd, C.B., F.R.S., V.P. G.S.

Chemico-Biological Changes in the Ocean By Robert Irvine, F.R.S.E.,
iM CASE

_ Marine Deposits. By John Chumley, of the ‘‘ Challenger” Office.
IV. Botany.
The Marine Flora. By George R. M. Murray, F.R.S,E., F.L.S.
The Land Flora. By C. Baron Clarke, F.R.S., Pres. L.S.
V. Zoology.

(Introductory.) By Trofesser Ernst Haeckel, M,D., Ph. D., Hon. F.B.S.E.

Expectations and Results. By P. Chalmers Mitcheli, M.A., F.Z.S.

Foraminifera. By C. Davies Sherborn, F.G.S., F.Z.5.

Radio'aria. By Professor Ernst Haeckel and A.V aughan Jennings, F.L.S.,
RaG As:

Sponges. By Professor W. J. Sollas, M.A., D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S., with
note by Professor Haeckel.

Coelentera. By Professor S. J. Hickson, M.A., D.Sc., F R.S., Professor FE.
Perceval Wright, M.A., M.D., F.L.S., M.R.LA., P. Chalmers Mitchell,
and Professor E. Haeckel.

Echinoderma. By F. A. Bather, M.A., F.G.S., W. Percy Sladen, Y.P.L.S.,
F.G.S., Theodore Lyman, and Professor Hijalmer Tnéel.

Annelida and Nemertea. By Professor W. C. McIntosh, M.A., LL.D
PE Re os

Arthropoda. By Rev, T. R. R. Stebbing, M.A., F.L.S., F. E. Beddard,
M.A., F.R.S., T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., Dr. P. P. C. Hoek, Memb. R.
R:. Ac. Netherlands, R. I. Pocock, and G. H. Carpenter, B. Se.

Mollusca. By Professor Paul Pelseneer, D.Sc., and W. E. Hoyle, M.A.,
MERIGS Eo RSS Be

Brachiopoda. By A. F. Bather.

Lryozoa.

Hemichordata. By S. F. Harmer, M.A., B.Sc., F.Z.S.

Tunicata. By Professor W. A. Herdman, DSc o he

Vertebrata. By A. Smith Woodward, B.Sc., F.G. S., F.Z.S., R. Bowdler
Sharpe, LL.D., F.Z.S., Professor Sir William Turner, M. B.. LD
E.R-S.,, and Oldfield Thomas, erates

VI. Anthropology. By Professor A. C. Haddon, M.A., M.R.LA., F.Z.S.

Natural Science, Vol. VII, No. 41, pages 715s London, July I, 1895.
(Special ‘‘Challenger Number” of ‘‘ Natural Science” may be ordered from Rait,
Henderson & Co., Ltd., 22 St. Andrew street, Holborn Circus, London, England.
Price : One shilling nett.)

a NS Oye ee PM Pee ee, ah | er 7 a rn rs
} a =)" eee

- “ a
’ : . ~

OTTAWA, OCTOBER, 1895. No. 7.

» LIST OF NATIVE TREES AND SHRUBS GROWING AT
THE CENTRAL EXPERIMENTAL FARM,
OTTAWA, JULY, 1895.

By W. T. MAcoun.

.- Being continuation and completion of the paper which appeared in No. 5 and No. 6
of the Ottawa Naturalist for August and September, 1895.

(t364.) Vaccinium Vitis-Ipb@a, Linn. Cowberry, Cranberry.
Ree neh. ; Oue.; Man.; N.W.T.; B.C.
Low shrub ; hardy.

| 6353. ARCTOSTAPHYLOS, Adns. (Bearberry.)
(1370.) A. Uva-urs!, Spreng. Bearberry, Kinnikinick.
mee. bs. 3 QOues5-Ont..5 Man. ; N.W.T.5 B.C.
Low Shrub; hardy.

354. GAULTHERIA, Linn. (Aromatic Wintergreen.)
(1375.) G. SHALLON, Pursh. Salal.
British Columbia.
Shrub ; recently planted.

359. CALLUNA, Salisb. (Heather.)
-(1385.) C. vuLcaRis, Salisb.
25 5 N.B.
. Low shrub ; hardy.

362. KALMIA, Linn. (American Laurel.)
(1392.) K. Latirvoxia, Linn. Calico-bush.
Reported in Labrador.

Shrub; recently planted ; flowers ornamental.

142 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

(1393.) K. ancustiFo.ia, Linn. Sheep Laurel, Lambkill.
NCS 23. Bes One; Gat,
Shrub ; hardy ; flowers ornamental. -
364. RHODODENDRON, Linn. (Rose-bay, Azalea.)
(1400.) R. viscosum, Torr. Clammy Azalea.
Reported in Canada.
Shrub ; hardy ; flowers ornamental.
(1401.) R. NUDIFLORUM, Torr. Purple Azalea.
Reported in Canada.
Shrub ; hardy ; flowers ornamental.

LXI. OLEACEAE—Olive Family.

388. FRAXINUS, Linn. (Ash.)
(1455.) F. Americana, Linn. White Ash.
Niow5 NEE s- Ones Ont.
Large tree ; hardy.
(1456.) F. puBESCENS, Lam. Red Ash or River Ash.
N.S..; Que.5- Ont. f2Man:
Tree ; hardy.
(1457.) F. viripis, Michx. Green Ash.
Ont. ; Man.
‘Tree ; hardy;
(1458.) F. QuADRANGULATA, Michx. Blue Ash.
Western Ontario.
Large tree ; semi-hardy.
(1460) F. samurcrroLia, Lam. Black or Swamp Ash.
N:S); BBs One. sOnk
Large tree ; hardy.

LXXIII. BIGNONIACEA~—Bignonia Family.

464. TECOMA, Juss. (Trumpet-Creeper.)
(1740.) T. RADICANS, Juss.
Western Ontario.
Woody climber ; semi-hardy ; flowers ornamental.

List oF Native Trees, &c. 143
LXXXVII. LAURACEA — Laurel Family.

_ 524. SASSAFRAS, Nees. (Sassafras.)
(1919.) S, OFFICINALE, Nees.
Western Ontario.
Tree ; Semi-hardy ; ornamental.
525. LINDERA, Thunb. (Wild Allspice.)
(1920.) L. BENzoin, Meisner. Spice Bush.

Ontario.
Tall shrub ; semi-hardy, leaves and flowers ornamental.

LXXXVIII. THYMELA*:ACEA:—Mezereum Family.

527- DIRCA, Linn. (Leather-wood, Moose-wood.)
(1922.) D. paLustris, Linn.
N.B. ; Que. ; Ont.
Shrub ; hardy ; ornamental.

LXXXIX. ELAAAGNACEA—Oleaster Family.

528. ELAZSAGNUS, Linn. (Silver Berry.)
(1913.) E. ARGENTEA, Pursh.
ue, cut. - Man. ; N.W.T. ;B.C.
Tall shrub; hardy ; leaves ornamental.
529. SHEPHERDIA, Nutt. (Shepherdia.)
(1924.) S. CANADENsIs, Nutt. Canadian Shepherdia.
mae auc: Ont,; Man. ;:-N.W.T.; BC.
Shrub ; hardy ; fruit ornamental.
(1925.) S. ARGENTEA, Nutt. Buffalo-Berry.
Man. ; N.W.T.
Shrub ; hardy; fruit ornamental.

XCIII. URTICACEA.—Nettle Family.

535- ULMUS, Linn. (Elm.)
(1946.) U. ruLva, Michx. Slippery or Red Elm.
Que. ; Ont.
Large tree ; hardy.

- seit sth abate led

144 Tue OrrawA NATURALIST.

(1947.) U. AMericana, Linn. American Elm,
Nios NIB. } Oue, 2 Ont.° Mank. ae We
Large tree ; hardy.

(1948.) U. RaceMosa, Thomas. Rock Elm.
Que. ; Ont.
Tree; hardy.

530; MeRIGTIS: finn, V(Nettle. ines)
(1949.) C. OCCIDENTALIS, Linn. Sugar-Berry.
One. Ont.
Tree ; hardy.

539: MORUS, Linn. (Mulberry.)
(1952.) M. RuBRA; Linn. Red Mulberry.
Western Ontario.
Small tree ; hardy.

XCIV. PLATANACEA:.—Plane-Tree Family.

545. PLATANUS, Linn. (Button-Wood.)
(1963.) P. occIDENTALIS, Linn.
Western Ontario.
Large tree ; hardy ; leaves ornamental.

XCV. JUGLANDACEA.—Walnut Family. |

546. CARYA, Nutt, (Hickory.)
(1964.) C. aLBa, Nutt. Shell-bark Hickory.
Que Ont
Large tree ; hardy.

(1966.) C. porctna, Nutt. Pig-nut or Brown Hickory.
Western Ontario. -
Tree ; recently planted.

(1967.) C. AMARA, Nutt. Bitter-nut Hickory.
Que. ; Ont.
Tree ; hardy.

List oF Native Tress, Xe. 145.

547 JUGLANS, Linn, (Walnut.)
7 (1968.) J. CINEREA, Linn. -Butternut.
x Que. ; Ont.
: Large tree ; hardy.
(1969.) J. NiGRA, Linn, Black Walnut.
Western Ontario.
Large tree ; hardy.

XCVI. MYRICACEA:—Sweet Gale Family.

548. MYRICA, Linn. (Wax Myrtle.)
(1970.) M. Gag, Linn. Sweet Gale.
mesos Nb. ; Que. ; Ont. ; Man. ; N.W.T.; B.C.
Shrub ; Hardy.

XCVII. CUPULIFERA:.— Oak Family.

1 °F whan! thes

a

- 549. BETULA, Linn. Birch.
- (1974.) B. LenTa, Linn. Cherry or Black Birch.
N.S. ; N.B.; Que.; Ont.
Large tree; hardy.
(1975-) B. LuTEa, Michx. Yellow Birch.
feo.; N.B.; Que. ; Ont.
z Large tree ; hardy.
(1977.) B. PAPYRIFERA, Michx. Canoe Birch.
= mee > Oue, ;-Man. 5 N.W.T.; B.C.
Large tree ; hardy.

.¢

(1978.) B. occipENTALIS, Hooker. Western Birch.
mW L.; BC.
Tree ; hardy.
(1879.) B. pumiLa, Linn. Low Birch.
Mus..5 0.1. - Oue. > Ont. ; Man. ; N.W.T.
t Shrub ; hardy.
"550. ALNUS, Gartn. (Alder.)
- (1985.) A. 1ncana, Willd. Common Alder.
bd mad: 5 NB. ; Que. ; Ont. ; Man. ; N.W.T.
Tall shrub or small tree ; hardy.

vs wean. ‘

146 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

(1986.) A. viripis, DC. Green Alder.
N.S.4;N.B: 3 Que. ;“Ont.; Man. * N;W.1., Bae
Tall shrub ; hardy.
551. CARPINUS, Linn. (Hornbeam.)
(1987.) C. CaroLiniana, Walter. Blue Beech.
Que. ; Ont.
Tree ; hardy.
552. OSTRYA, Scop. (Ironwood.)
(1988.) O. Vircinica, Willd. Lever-wood.
N55 ON. b.o’Oue.5 One
Tree ; hardy.
333. CORYLUS, Linn. (Hazel-nut.)
(1989.) C. RosTRATA, Ait. Beaked Hazel-nut.
NS. 5) Ni Bs Que:.;! Ont.3. Man.5°N-W.d,;, Bae
Shrub ; hardy.

(1990.) C. AMERICANA, Walt. Wild Hazel-nut.
Ontss Man. > IN.W.a.
Shrub ; hardy.
554- QUERCUS, Linn. (Oak.)
(1991.) Q. ALBa, Linn. White Oak.
Que. ; Ont.
Large tree ; hardy.

(1994.) Q, MACROCARPA, Michx. Mossy-cup Oak.
NB. Que. Ont. = Man. ewe.
Large tree ; hardy.
(1996.) Q. Prinus, Linn. Rock Chestnut Oak.
Western Ontario.
Tree ; hardy.
(1997-) Q. pRiNoIDEs, Willd. Yellow Oak, Chestnut Oak.
Ontario.
Tree; hardy.
(1998.) Q. RUBRA, Linn. Red Oak.
N.S..; N.Bi; Que." Ont
Large tree ; hardy ; leaves ornamental in Autumn,

List or Native Trees, &e. 147

(1999.) Q. coccinEA. Wang. Scarlet Ouk.
Ontario.
Large tree ; hardy; leaves ornamental in Autumn.

(2000.) Q. TINCToRIA, Bartram. Yellow Oak.
Western Ontario.
Large tree ; hardy.
(2001.) Q. PALUSTRIS, Du Roi. Pin Oak.
Western Ontario.
Tree ; hardy
555: CASTANEA, Gertn. (Chestnut.)
(2002.) C. vuLGaRIs, Var. AMERICANA, A. DC.
Western Ontario.
Large tree ; hardy.
556. FAGUS, Linn. (Beech.)
(2003.) F. FERRUGINEA, Aiton. American Beech.
Poy 1¥.b:;:Que.; Ont.

Large tree; hardy ; leaves ornamental in Autumn.

ACVIII. SALICACEA:— Willow Family.

557. SALIX, Linn. Willow.

(2012.) S. cANDIDA, Willd. Hoary Willow.
Meese scont.; Man.; N.W.T.; B.C.
Tall shrub ; hardy.

(2015.) S.corpata, Muhl, Heart-leaved Willow.
Betas. b.5 Que: 7 Ont’; Man. ; N.W.T, ;-B.C.
Tall shrub or small tree ; hardy.

(2016 ) S. piscoLor, Muhl. Glaucous Willow.
Seas Nos. = One.; Ont.; Man. ; N.AWV.T.
Tall shrub or small tree ; hardy.
(2024.) S. HuUMILIS, Marshall. Low Willow.
g Mess NB. ; Oue.; Ont.
Shrub ; hardy.

148° Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

(2028.) S. Lucipa, Willd. Shining Willow.
N.S: :: N.B.;. Ques; Ont; Mans. *NWet. >
Tall shrub or small tree; hardy ; leaves ornamental.
(2048.) S. TRISTIS, Ait.
Nova Scotia.
Low shrub ; hardy.

558. POPULUS, Linn. (Poplar.)
(2053.) P. TREMULOIDES, Michx. Aspen.
N.S. = N.B. 3 Que.; Ont; Man.; NW.T. 5 Be:
Wree > hardy.
(2056.) P. ANGUSTIFOLIA, James. Black Cottonwood.
N.W.T:
Tree ; hardy.
(2o58.). P. MONILIFERA, Aiton. Cottonwood.
Que: ; ‘Ont.5 Man. 7 NOW:
Large tree ; hardy.

CI. CONIFERA:—Pine Family.

562. THUYA, Linn. (Arbor-Vite.)
(2062.) T. occCIDENTALIS, Linn. White Cedar.
N.S) > N.B.; .Oue: » Ont 3-Man: SWI
Tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
563. JUNIPERUS, Linn. (Juniper.)
(2067.) J. Vircintana. Linn. Red Cedar.
Nis. Quel. Gat,
Tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
(2068.) J. communis, Linn. Common Juniper.
N.S.:3 N.B. 3 Ques; Ont.4°Man. = N Wet eee
Shrub ; hardy.
564. TAXUS, Linn. .(Yew.)
(2071.) T. paccata, L. var CANADENSIS, Gray. American Yew.
q9.S. 3 N, Box Quen Ont, Bian
Shrub ; hardy.

_ List or Native Trees, Xe. 149;

565. PINUS, Linn. (Pine.)
(2072.) P. Srrosus, Linn. White Pine.
N.S. ; N.B.; Que. ; Ont.; Man.
Large tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
_ (2076.) P. REsINOS!, Aiton. Red Pine.
Biss Nd. 5 Que. ;- Ont.
Large tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
_ (2077.) P ponpeRosa, Dougl. Heavy-wooded Pine.
British Columbia.
Large tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
(2079.) P. Murrayana, Balfour. Black Pine.
mad. ; BC.
Tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
(2080.) P. RiGiDA, Miller. P.tch Pine.
me; Oue, ; Ont.
Tree ; hardy.
§66. PICEA, Link. (Spruce.)
“(2082.) P. nigra, Link. Black Spruce.
Bes 5; NiB?;-Quey; Ont; Man.; N.W.T.; BC:
Tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
_. (2083.) P. avpa, Link. White Spruce.
Pe. Nb. > Que:; Ont,;:Man.; N.W-T:

Tree ; hardy ; ornamental.

(2084.) P. ENGELMANNI, Engelm. Engelmann’s Spruce
Ws 5. B.C.
Large tree ; hardy ; ornamental.

567. TSUGA, Cass. (Hemlock. )

(2086 ) T. CANADENSIS, Carr. Hemlock.
PS. >, eB. 5 Que. ; Ont.
Large tree ; hardy ; ornamental.

150 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

568. PSEUDOTSUGA, Carr. (Red Fir.)
(2089.) P. DouGcLAsnu, Carr. Douglas Fir. -
NAW4 6 BG:

Large tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
569. ABIES, Juss. (Balsam.)
(2090.) A. BALSAMEA, Miller. Canada Balsam Fir.
N.S: N2B. 5 Oue-; Ont; Mans NWT:
Tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
(2019.) A. SUBALPINA, Engelm. Mountain Balsam.
INS Wied SBC:
Tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
(2083.) A. AMABILIS, Forbes. White Fir.
British Columbia,
Tree ; hardy ; ornamental.
570. LARIX, Mill. (Tamarack, Larch.) ;
(2094) L. AMERICANA, Michaux Tamarack, Black Larch.
NS: 5 NB One. ; Ont = Man: * Newer.
Tree; hardy ; ornamental.

EXCURSION NO. 3.

The last field day of the O. F. N. Club for the season of 1895 was
held, as announced, on 14th. September. The objective point was
the Paugan Falls on the Gatineau River near Low Station, about
40 niles from Ottawa.

About 120 members and friends of the club were present, but there
was a dearth of leaders of sections, and owing to this cause and the rapidly
advancing autumn, the collection of specimens made was unusually
meagre. Qa the reassembling of the party in the afternoon, however,
and after a short introductory address by the president, Mr. F. T. Shutt,
M. A, the leaders in Botany discussed the flowers and plants collected,
Mr. R. B. Whyte giving particular regard to the composite to which
order as he pointed out most of the autumn flowers belonged

Mr. Craig drew attention to the number and variety of the
coniferous trees standing near and made some interesting remarks upon
their nature and uses.

After a short address by Mr. R. H. Cowley upon the importance of
natural history studies in education, the train for home drew up, and
the party reached Ottawa at 8 p. m.

GEOLOGICAL Society oF AMERICA. 151

GEOLOGIGAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA, SPRINGFIELD,
MASS., 1895.

Abstracts and Titles of Papers Read at the August
Meeting.

1. On the Glacial Deposits of South-western Alberta, in the Vicinity of the Rocky
Mountains. By George M. Dawson and R. G. McConnell, Ottawa, Canada.

This paper presented the facts obtained during a recent examination of the
glacial deposits of a portion of the south western of the Canadian Great Plains, in
the foot-hills and along the base of the Rocky Mountains, where phenomena of par-
ticular interest are met with in connection with the relations of the western and
eastern drift. (Cordilleran and Laurentide.) A brief summary of previous ob-
servations is followed by a description of sections along two main lines of approach
to the mountains at relatively low levels and an examination of the conditions sur-
rounding the glacial deposits at the highest levels, found in the form of terraces with
rolled shingle at 5,300 feet on the Porcupine Hills. In conclusion, the observed
facts are briefly discussed, attention being practically confined to the particular

- region treated in the body of the paper.

2. The Champlain Glacial Epoch. By C. H. Hitchcock, Hanover, N. H.

The Champlain was a true glacial epoch, when the land was considerably de-
pressed. Glaciers from the north and south discharged bergs into an estuary. The
fauna was arctic. Moraines and both the marine and fluviatile clays covered till of
an earlier ice-sheet. It is possible to harmonize the conflicting theories of glacial
and ice-berg action by referring the greater ice-sheets to the earlier, and the floating
ice phenomena to the later, Champlain epoch.

3. Drumlins and Marginal Moraines of Ice-sheets. By Warren Upham, Cleve-
land, Ohio.

¢. The Glactal Genesee Lakes. By Prof. H. L. Fairchild, Rochester, N. Y.

The direction, inclination and extent of the Genesee Valley made possible the
production, during the retreat of the ice-sheet, of a succession or glacial lakes with
different outlets. The paper described, with the aid of a map, (1) the present topo-
graphy and hydrography of the valley, (2) the ancient drainage channels, (3) the
complex lacustrine phenomena.

5. The Archean and Cambrian Rocks of the Green Mountain Range in Southern
Massachusetts. By Prof. B. K. Emerson, Amherst, Mass.

Description of a series of Archean anticlines partly overturned aid cverthrust
westward, and of the uniformity of the Cambrian conglomerate gneiss upon the old
rocks.

6. The Triassic in Massa*husetts. By Prof. B. K. Emerson, Amherst, Mass.

The stages of deposition and deformation of the sandstones and the relations of
the effusive traps and tuffs and the intruded traps to the sandstones.

7. Notes on Relations of Lower Members of Coastal Plain Series in South Carolina.
By Mr. N. Darton, Washington, D.C.

152 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

8. Resume of General Stratigraphic Relations in the Atlantic Coastal Plain from
New Jersey to South Carolina. By Mr. N. A. Darton, Washington, D.C.
g. Cretaceous Plants from Martha’s Vineyard. Results Obtained from an Examz-
tnation of the Material Collected by David White in 1889. By Mi. Arthur
‘Hollick, New Brighton, N. Y. *

zo. On Asbestos and Asbestiform Minerals. By Dr. George P. Merrill, Washing-
ton, D.C. ;

The paper treats of the composition, mode of occurrence and mincralogical
nature of the various minerals commercially grouped under the name of asbestos,
and attempts to expluin their fibrous. structure as due to abnormal elongation of the
mineral parallel to the vertical axis, the individual fibres being in part at least.
by prismatic faces, that is by the planes of easiest cleavage. The primary cause of
this elongation is believed to be mainly dynamical, a result of shearing and other
earth movements such as are prcductive of uraltic hornblendes, schistosity or even
slaty structure and slickensided surfaces, where actual fracturingiakes place.

zz. Pre-Cambrian Volcanoes in Southern. Wisconsin. By Prof. Wm. H. Hobbs,
Madison, Wis. -

A preliminary report on the study ofa group of isolated areas of igneous rocks
which protrude through the Potsdam sandstone in the valley of the Fox River, Wis-
consin. Some of these areas represent local outflows of rhyolitic lava which exhibits
superb examples of spherulitic, peritic, fluxion, and breccia structures. The origin-
ally glassy ground mass of these rocks has become devitrified—-hence they are apo-
rhyolites, and they have been subjected to dynamic metamorphism and subsequent
infiltration of silica. They are intruded by dikes of both basic and acid rocks.
Specimens and photographic sections were exhibited.

12. A Geological Sketch of the Sierra Tlayacac, in the State of Morelos, Mexico.
By Paoy. A. Capen Gill, Ithaca, N. Y.

13. Syenite-Gnetss (Leopard Roch) from the Apatite Region of Ottawa bert
Canada. By C. H. Gordon, Beloit, Wisconsin.

The rock here described appeared in the exhibit of the Canadian Geological
Survey, at the World’s Fair under the title of ‘* Concretionary Veinstone,” from the
apatite region. It consists of irregular ellipsoidal or ovoid masses of feldspar. with
more or less quartz, separated by narrow. anastomosing bands of interstitial material
consisting chiefly of green pyroxene. The ellipsoidal masses are of all sizes up to two or
three inches in cross section, and several inches long. The field study at High Rock
Mine, Ottawa County, shows this rock to occur in dikes intersecting the pyroxenites
and quartzites. In some places the rock is very coarse with no indications of the
ellipsoidal structure, while in others it isa distinctly banded gneiss whose identity
with the ellipsoidal rock is evident from the anastomosing of the augite bands on a
cross fracture face. Ordinarily the rock has very little quartz and corresponds to a
pyroxene-syenite, but in some places the quartz is much more abundant thus allying
it tothe pyroxene-granites. In view of its gneissic structure and usually sparing
amount of quartz the rock is here referred to generally as syenite-gneiss, though
grading locally into forms which may more fittingly be regarded as granite-gneiss.

The presence of a distinct gneissic microstructure, taker in connection with
other facts appears to establish the conclusion that the peculiar ellipsoidial structure is
due to orographic forces acting upon a coarsely crystallized rock in which principal
constituents (feldspar and pyroxene) are more or less irregularly distributed. The
breaking of the rock under pressure has been attended by the recrystallization of the

MV
7
Be
F
=
4
i
f

a
i
f-

iz

GEOLOGICAL Society oF AMERICA. ‘163

augite and other constituents along the original fracture planes, which were probably,
in part, determined by the arrangement of the two chief constituents.

The points of interest brought out in the study are: (1) that this peculiar dis-
tribution of the pyroxene is due to dynamic processes, (2) the importance to be at-
tached to the process of solution and recrystallization in the formation of gneisses,
(3) the significance of the original character of the rock with reference to the product
derived from it by dynamic processes, and the differences resulting from variations in
the extent to which it has been affected by orographic agencies, and (4) the evidence
showing the derivation of a gneiss out of a syenite, and establishing the term syenite-
gneiss as the name of a distinct rock type. ;

44. The Titaniferous Iron Ores of the Adirondacks. Prof. J. Kemp, New York

City.

The paper opens with a brief statement of the characters of the two kinds of iron
ores which are attorded by the region, the merchantable magnetites and the titani-
ferous. The former are in gneisses; the latter in the gabbros and anorthosites of
the Norian, which are believed to be intruded through the gneisses, A list of
localities of the titaniferous ores is given and distinction is made between the smaller
bodies which are, so far as can be seen, basic developments of gabbro, and the enor-
mous ore bodies at the old Adirondack Iron works, in the heart of the mountains.
These latter are in massive, anorthosite, which is almost entirely formed of large,
blue-black crystals of labradorite. The largest ore body, which is the one crossing
Lake Sandford, contains numerous included labradorite crystals, each of which is
surrounded by a reaction rim 5-10 mm. across. It is further shown that the wall
rocks show no signs of the widespread crushing that is exhibited in the general
“*mortar-structure’’ of the Adirondack and Canadian anorthosites but are plutonic
rocks, free from evidences of dynamic metamorphism. The argument is then made

‘that the ores are segregations from an igneous magma formed during the process of
cooling and crystallization.

15. The Decomposition of Rocks in Brazil. By J. C. Branner, Stanford, Unt-
versity, Calif.

46. The Bearing of Phystography on Uniformitarianism. By Prof. W M. Davis,
Cambridge, Mass.

The conditions and processes postulated in the physiographic study of land
forms—Geomorphology of some authors—are among the cardinal principles of uni-
formitarianism. The success in.the interpretation of nature by means of this kind
of study confirms the correctness of its postulates, and thus brings to the support of
uniformitarianism a large class of facts, whose bearing on this theory was not at all
perceived when its early advocates announced it.

17. Analysis of Folds. By Prof. C. R. Van Hise, Madison, Wis.

As ordinarily treated folds are considered as simple flexures in two dimensions.
As they occur in nature folds are compound flexures in two dimensions. The anal-
ysis of simple folds given by Margerie and Heim is summarized. For the sake of
simplicity folds are first treated in two dimensions. A composite fold is produced
by the combination of various simple folds. Composite folds include both normal
composite folds and abnormal composite folds. The genesis of each is discussed, and
each is classified into upright, inclined, and overturned anticlinoria and synclinoria.

When composite folds are cross folded, these are called complex folds. The
character and origin of complex folds are discussed. Rules are given for observation
in regions which are folded in a complex manner. The use of folds in the discovery
of unconformity and the secondary changes which accompany folding are summarized.

ina

154 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.
NOTES, REVIEWS, AND COMMENTS.

Entomology. —*FraiL CHILDREN OF THE AiR. Another
of Mr. Scudder’s delightful books has just come to hand, with the above
pretty title. It isa tastefully bound 8vo. of 279 pages. containing 31
short chapters, 9 plates, on the habits and structure of butterflies,
written in a graceful, but clear and popular, style, which will make the
book entertaining to many who have never taken any special interest
in butterflies and will, we believe, realise the author’s hope, expressed in
the preface, ‘gain for our butterflies a deeper interest and closer |
attention on the part of the observing public.”. This is really an
excellent selection from a series of papers which ran through Mr.
Scudder’s large and costly work, ‘“‘ The Butterflies of the Eastern
United States and Canada,” and, although forming a ‘consistent
whole,” each chapter is complete in itself. The following titles of
some of the subjects treated will give a slight idea of the scope of this
attractive little volume: —Butterflies in Disguise, Butterflies as Botanists,
Butterfly Sounds, The Eggs of Butterflies, How Butterflies pass the
Winter, Protective Colouring in Caterpillars, The Procession of the
Seasons, Some Singular Things About Caterpillars, The Friends and
Associates of Caterpillars, Butterflies of the Past.

J. FLETCHER.
Geology.—RECENT PUBLICATIONS :—

1. CLAYPOLE, Pror. E. W.—‘ Giactal Notes from the Planet Mars.”
American Geologist, Vol. XVI, No. 2 pp. 91—100, August, 1895.

2. UPHAM, WARREN.—“ Correlations of Stages of the Ice-Age in North

America and Europe.” Ibid, pp. 100—113.
. Jameson, Cuartes D.—“ Portland Cement,” “a monograph.”
The Transit: Vol. III; No. 1, 192 pp. Iowa City, 1895.

4. RANSOME, Pror. F. LESLIE.—‘‘ On Zawsonite, a New Rock-
Jorming Mineral from the Tiburen Peninsula, Marin Co.,
California.” Bull. Dept. Geol. Univ. Calif. ; Vol. I, No. 1c, pp 301
—312, pl. 17; Berkeley, May, 1895, f
Lawsonite is nained in honor of Prof. A. C. Lawson, M.A., Ph D.,

etc., etc., Professor of Geology in the University of California, and

formerly on the staff of the Geological Survey of Canada.

WwW

*Frail Children of the Air—Excursions into the World of Butterflles—By Samuel
H. Scudder, Cambridge. Mass. $1,50.

Nores, Reviews aND CoMMEN’s. 155

7 5. VocpEs, A. W.—“ A Supplement to the Bibliography of the Paleo-
zoic Crustacea.” Extr. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sc., Ser. 2, Vol. V.,
Pp. 53—76.

6. MatTHeEw, Dr. G. F.—Oxn the Organic Remains of the Little River
Group, Nos. ILand III. ‘I'rans. Roy. Soc. Can. Section IV, pp.
89—111, plate 1, figs. 1 to11. Eight new species and one new
genus are herein described for the first time from the “ Devonian ”
ot New Brunswick, as follows :

INSECTA :
1. Homothetus erutus, n.sp.
MYRIAPODA :
2. Palzocampa (?) obscura, n.sp.
3. Euphoberia atava, n.sp.
4. Eilaticus (?) antiquus, n.sp.
5. Hyodes (?) attenuata, n.sp.
6. Chilopus dubius, n.g. et. sp.

ARACHNOIDEA:

7. Paleophorus arctus, n.sp.
PULMONIFERA ?

8. Pupa primzva, n.sp.

Besides the above Dr. Matthew also fisures: Loscorpius carbon-
arius, Meek and Worthen, from the Carboniferous of Illinois :
Paleophonus nunctus, Yhorell and Lindstrom, from the “ Silurian” of
Sweden, and a species of Luphoberia, from Plant Bed No. 2. The
whole is a most valuable contribution to science. .H. M. Amt.

7. WINCHELL, Pror. N. H.—‘ 4 Rational View of the Keweenawan.”
Amer. Geol., Vol. XVI, No. 3, pp. 150—162, Sept, 1895. This
forms the seventh article of a series on ‘‘Crucial points in the
Geology of the Lake Superior Region” by Prof. Winchell.

8. BEECHER, Dr. CHARLES E.—‘‘ The Larval Stages of Trilobites.”
Lbid., pp. 166 to 1y7, Plates VIII—X.

In this important contribution to our knowledge of the trilobites in
their earliest stages, Dr. Beecher shows that ‘‘all the facts in the
ontogeny of trilobites point to one type of larval structure.” To the
earliest larval stage, the name “ fvofaspis stage,” isgiven. Then follows
a review of larval stages of trilobites, derived from such forms as
' Solenopleura robbi, Hartt; Liostracus ouargondianus, Hartt ; Ptycho-
paria lunnarssoni, Walcott; Ptychoparta kingt, Meek; Sao hirsuta,
Barrande ; TZriarthrus becki, Green; Acitdaspis tuderculata, Conrad ;
_ Arges consanguineus, Clarke; Proétus parviusculus, Hall; Dalmanttes
_-socialis, Barrande.

a |

rea

156 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.
Conchology. — A large land shell, new to the Ottawa

list, was found at Casselman on May 23rd. It is Helix palliata.
Three specimens were found, one west of «the South Nation
river, and two on the east side, below the falls, in the woods
where the beautiful Ph/ox divaricata was then in full bloom.
H, palliata is about three quarters of an inch in diameter, and —
differs from 1. dentifera, which it most resembles in general appearance,
in having the upper lip prolonged inward at two points into what are
commonly called ‘“‘teeth”. A similar process is formed upon the body ~
whorl. These projections permit the soft tissues of the builder to pass,
but oppose a pearly barrier to beetles and other enemies who would
intrude upon the dweller within. The three teeth on the shell of &
palliata and other American land shells have been considered a
peculiarity sufficiently distinctive to warrant the grouping of such
species in a sub-genus, under the name Z7zodopsis. The study of the
inhabitants of the shells grouped under this term has shown that many
are less closely allied to other ¢rodopses than they are to the mesodons, —
or shells of which H. albolabris and H. thyroides, also found at Cassel-
man, may be regarded as the types. The shell alone can, in fact, be
seldom relied on in arranging a natural classification of moliuscs.
CASSELMAN SHELLS—A mere list of names is dry reading
at best, and is of little interest to the general reader. In years

to come, however, THE NATURALIST will be referred to, to
ascertain what plants or shells at a particular time occurred in

certain places. Any record, therefore, is likely to be of some —

use: At Casselman on May 23rd and 24th, a number of shells
were noticed. No great effort was made to collect anything but what
caine in the way of a few members of the Club, while on a botanical
excursion. This may account for the absence from the following list of
such shells as 4. dentifera and H7. thyvides, which are known to occur
at Casselman. ‘The species noted were :— Helix albolabris, HZ. sayt,
H. palliata, H. alternata, H. concava, H. monodon, H. nitida, H.
arborea, H. radtatula, H. fulva, H. striatella, H. pulchella, Hl. binney-
ana, Succinea ovalis, S. obliqua, Vitrina limpida, Limax campestris, Teb.
Carolinensis, Vertigo ovata, Fer. subclindrica, Carychium exiguum, Gon.
livescens, Camp. decisum, Limnea palustris, L. caperata, Physa heteros-
tropha, P. billingsit, Planorbis trivolvis, Pl. bicarinatus, Pl. parvus,
Aucylus parallelus, Unio complanatus, U. luteolus, Anodanta fluviatilis,
Sphaerium sulcatum, S. occidentale, Pistdium abditum. L.

Tue OtTrawa NATURALIST.

VoL. IX. OTTAWA, NOVEMBER, 1895. No. 8.

HOW ROCKS ARE FORMED.

By R. W. Exts, LL.D, F.R.S.C. of the Geological Survey of Canada.

Before taking up the general subject of rock formation, which in
the limited time at my disposal, can only be touched upon in the
' briefest possible manner, we may for a moment glance, first of all, at some
of the theories which have been put forth to account for the formation
of the earth itself, in order that we may obtain a good starting point or
‘acquire some idea of the conditions under which the foundations of the
earth’s crust were laid down, upon which the many thousands of feet of
rock material which are known by the names of sandstone, slates, shales
and limestones have been deposited.

Many theories have been put forth to explain the formation of the
earth and to account for the tmany changes which transpired thereon
before it became fitted for the advent of animal and plant life. Of
these some are of interest from their legendary character, while others,
regarded from the standpoint of modern science, present many features
not reconcilable with the knowledge of the present day, and are of value,
chiefly as illustrating the crude ideas that prevailed on this subject,
prior to the advent of the present century. But few of the propounders
of these theories made any attempt to approach so complicated a prob-
lem from a purely scientific standpoint. It must be borne in mind that
the scientific study of the earth’s crust is a matter of comparatively
recent date, and our present knowledge is the result of very careful
study, both in the field upon the rock masses themselves and in the
laboratory, in which the science of chemistry and the microscope have
played very important parts.

According to the theory now most generally accepted regarding
the formation of the crust of the earth, viz., that of Laplace, there un-

158 THe Orrawa NATURALIST. _

doubtedly was a period in its history when rock structure, as we now

know it, did not exist. This theory, which is commonly styled “ the
nebular hypothesis,” most completely satisfies all the Conditions required__
and may be briefly stated thus. It supposes that in the beginning the
universe existed simply in a state of cosmic ether ; that this in process
of time gave off immense masses to which a rotary motion was imparted
through various forces ; that from these whirling masses large rings were
separated, which by rupture and gradual condensation gradually assumed
a spherical shape, as a consequence of the rotary movement, till at
length the solar syste-n, with its central sun and accompanying planetary
bodies was evolved.

The cosmic matter, in process of time cosled down sufficiently to
produce a crust, composed of various mineral constituents ; and the
cooling and hardening of the earth’s mass proceeded either from the
centre as a nucleus outward or by a gradual thickening of a first formed
crust inward. Several theories have been proposed to explain this
stage of the earth’s history, but the greater number of physicists and
geologists at the present day regard the globe asa more or less solid mass
with areas of liquid matter at various points throughout the interior. Be
that as it may we can Safely say that the first rock material was produced
by the gradual decrease in temperature of the original nebular mass,
and in this way a foundation was laid down for the subsequent
deposition of rock material, for the introduction of living organisms, and —
finally for the advent of man himself. |

From a careful examination of many portions of this crust which
have been brought to the surface either by denudation of overlying
formations or by the extrusion of liquid matter, as in the case of
volcanoes, it has been ascertained to be composed of a number of
simple or undecoraposable substances or elements of which about
seventy have now been recognized. Of these the greater part
apparently exist in very limited quantity, while the main mass of the
crust is made up of a few easily recognized compounds formed from
the union of two or more simple elements. The most abundant of
these is silica which is the result of a chemical union of silicon and
oxygen, and this constitutes more than half the mass of the earth’s

rust. ‘The other principal elements which enter into its composition
re carbon, sulphur, hydrogen, chlorine, phosphorus and fluorine. All
these are styled metalloids while among the metals are aluminum,

a: Icium, magnesium, potassium, sodium, iron, manganese and barium.

Having thus secured a solid rock floor, of which we have most
excellent illustrations in the range of Laurentian hills to the north of
the river Ottawa, great portions of which presumably represent some of
» our first formed rock, the next development presumably was the precipita-
tion of water,through the chemical union of the oxygen and hydrogen
which entered largely into the composition of the gaseous envelope
surrounding the newly created earth. From the geologist’s standpoint,
this may almost be regarded as our next rock formation ; for throughout
e whole subsequent history of the earth’s devlopment, down to the
present day, water has played a very important part. Gradually the
watery envelope increased till, possibly, it swept resistless around the
entire globe. By degrees, through the cooling and shrinking of the
Tust, ridges would be produced which formed barriers against which
the mighty waves beat with the terrible force of the primeval ocean
surge, tearing down and grinding to powder the newly formed coast
line, and in this way the conditions were furnished by which the great
thickness of the sedimentary formations which form so instructive a field
of study to the working geologist, was laid down.

Taking this then as our starting point in geological time we may
ay that the greater part of the subsequent formations, as we now know
them, was produced through the agency of fire or water. _—‘ By the first
we mean that certain portions of the earth’s crust have been brought to
he surface by means of volcanoes or great fissures in its surface, through
which the liquified interior rock issued. ‘These rocks are therefore
known as igneous or volcanic, and are styled intrusive when the liquid
has solidified before reaching the surface as in the case of granites,
syenites &c., or eruptive when the intrusive matter has cooled or
hardened after reaching the surface. Among these latter are the
didrites, traps and volcanic ejectamenta generally. There is however
a manifest difference in the character and composition of these two
groups, the latter being ofen darker hued and finer grained, the

160 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

difference in texture being probably due to more rapid crystallization
or cooling just as in the case of solutions of salt, sugar, alum &c.,
where we find that the slower the cooling the larger the grain of the
crystal. These rocks, since they penetrated the oldest of the sedimen-
tary formations, by which term we mean those which have been laid down

by the action of water in some form may be regarded, as representing |
in some cases at least, certain portions of the original mass or crust of
the earth.

The sedimentary or aqueous rocks are composed largely of grains
of sand or often of pebbles, cemented together by sandy or calcareous
particles. These grains of sand and pebbles have been derived from
pre-existing rocks which in the first place presumably formed the first
floor, and which have been broken down and reduced by the action of ©
the elements, such as the force of waves, the rush of streains, the infil-
tration of rains or the action of frost. In addition to the beds of
sandstone and conglomerate, others, composed largely of calcareous
matter, in which the presence of organisms, as shells, plants, etc., can
be recognized ; as can be seen in the inany quarries in the vicinity of
this city, where they extend over large areas, while yet others, com-
posed of fine material, such as mud and silt, now occur as shales,
and are easily recognized in the dark brownish or greyish material which
is dug up in many of our streets or seen along the banks of the Rideau
and Ottawa Rivers.

The manner in which many of these sedimentary rocks have been —
produced can be readily seen by any one who has ever studied, in the
slightest degree, the action of water upon our sea coasts, lake shores,
or along our river courses. Thus it will be observed that a coast line —
is generally composed of masses of rock jutting out here and there in
the form of cliffs or projecting points. These are separated by stretches
of beach or low shore in which rock ledges are frequently absent,. but
which are composed of sand, gravel, mud, clay or boulders. These
have been produced by the long continued action of wave or current
against the rocky barriers, the force of which, by mechanical impact, .
tends to break down the mass of the cliff into scattered blocks and
distribute them about its base. Subsequent rolling and dashing

Be eM
4 - ’ ~

How Rocks are Formep. 161

ag ainst each other gradually reduce these to a state of sand or clay, and
in this way are produced the materials which make up the sands’ones
‘and conglomerates. These, by the various changes which are taking
‘place in the earth’s surface, become buried under other deposits
and are acted upon by the agencies of heat, pressure and other causes
till they become firm and enter into the solid constituents of the earth’s

crust. The softer muds and silts of the beach also undergo a change.

and pass into shales. This material is deposited under quieter con-
ditions, in sheltered bays or creeks, where the finer earth particles held
in water, are gradually deposited. Shales pass into slates through the
‘formation of cleavage planes which have been induced by pressure in
the shaly mass, and by hardening through metamorphic agencies.
Wherever organic life has existed on the beach or shore, these remains
gradually become entombed and we now fird the impression of the long
extinct bird, fish, plant or insect, often so perfectly preserved that the
‘most delicate points of structure can be readily determined. These
Organic remains are found to vary in character at different horizons, so
that what are found in one rock series often do not appéar in others more
recent; and upon this peculiarity of distribution, paleontologists
and geologists have built up a scheme of rock formations, which com-
prises all the sediments from the Laurentian time or the original deposi-
tion of the earth’s crust, down to the present day, each division of
which is distinguished by certain fossil forms peculiar in large part to
itself. In this way we can depict the whole life history of the globe,
from the advent of the first forms, through plant, fish, bird, reptile, etc.,

to the mammalia, and up to the highest type of all the genus Homo, or
7 man himself. )

While, however, sedimentary rocks are deposited as sands, clays or
calcareous matter in generally horizontal attitudes, such as we see in
the strata surrounding this city, very frequently these strata are tilted at
all angles, and in some cases completely overturned. This change in
position is accompanied often by a change in the character of the original
sediments, and is due to some agency, either of contraction or shrinking
of the crust or to dislocations which have produced crumplings,
upheavals, displacements, etc. In this way sandstones have been

ch oe ie «ie il as ie ale SMe ail Me le tly 7
‘ A ~ * as et 4 . 8 A

162 THE Orrawa NATURALIST. ~~

frequently changed to hard quartzites, shales to cleaved slates, and
limestones to a crystalline condition, as marbles. Often all the altera-

tion is directly due to the presence of heated masses of intrusive rock,
as granite, syenite or diorite, which have ascended from the heated
interior along lines of fracture or least resistance, and the heat has
deprived the rock in contact of much of the contained moisture,
changing the texture and altering its character for a considerable
distance from the line of contact of the intrusive mass.

As regards some of the more important mincrals found in the
stratified rock, their formation has proceeded on somewhat similar lines.
Thus if we study the early history of the coal beds, some of which have
a thickness of from thirty to forty feet, we find that they have originated
probably from swamj:y deposits somewhat of the nature of our present
peat mosses, ard that ihe growth and decay of vegetable matter went
on for very long periods. On the basis of eight to ten feet of peat or
swamp mud being required for every foot of coal produced, a thirty
foot coal seam would have required a swamp of enormous depth to
have furnished the material necessary for the formation of such a coal
bed. That the coaly matter has been derived from the decomposition
of plants, such as tree ferns and other allied forms, which grew in the
marshes of the Carboniferous time is very clear, since the remains of
the coal-plants can be found well preserved in the shales which overlie
the coals ard in the clays which form their underlying strita, as well as
in the tissue of the coal itself. It would appear that the woody or~
interior tissue gradually became destroyed, while the carbon of the —
bark principally formed the mass_of the coal itself. These masses of
swamp or peaty matter, gradually by submergence become overspread
with sand, gravel or silt, which by continued increase in thickness
acquired sufficient weight to press down the mass of bog, until by long
continued pressure and other causes it became transformed into the
coal which we tnine and burn to-day.

Somewhat similar changes and conditions are going on at many
places at the present time in our own peat deposits. Thus at the great
bog near the city known as the “ Mer Bleu” which is a great expanse
of peat cf from 8—10,000 acres in exient, the surface is covered with

ee een ) ts em 4 yee
Tes ° “ -

How Rocks Are Foren. (163

green moss, ferns, shrubs and stunted trees, the whole forming a light

colored layer of two or three feet in thickness. Beneath this the

contents of the bog gradually become dense and darker colored; the

green living vegetation has disappeared, but its remains yet exist in the

form of rootlets, stems &c. Still lower down the bog presents a still more
homogenous aspect, the vegetable matter is almost entirely decomposed,
and the mass is of a uniform dark brown or black color and of a very
considerable density, forming a very excellent fuel when dug out and
dried. Where this material is subjected to great pressure it furnishes a
material known as compressed peat which can be so manufactured as
to have all the density and calorific power of coal itself, and thus is able
to furnish a material of very great value for all the purposes for which
ordinary coal is now applied. There is therefore a manifest resemblance
between these modern bogs and those from which our beds of mineral
fuel were derived ; with this exception, that the character of the growing

- vegetation, and the nature of the animal life which inhabited these were
widely different ; while the presumption is strong that if these peat bogs
could be subjected to the same conditions which affected those of the
Carboniferous time, the resulting material would be a coal of somewhat
similar character. Coals of an intermediate character are also found as
in the great lignite deposits of the Saskatchewan and Souris areas, where
the mineral still retains to a marked extent its original woody fibre. On
the other hand when the bituminous coals have been subjected to the
action of further heat and pressure, the result appears in the form of
authracite or hard coal, in which much of the volatile matter has been
driven off. A still further alteration results in the formation of
graphite. Beautiful illustrations of this latter condition are found in
some deposits in southern New Brunswick, where the coal is graphitized
anthracite, the containing rocks being thrown on edge and much
altered.

Other kinds of rock masses may be mentioned, such as rock-salt,
gypsum, shell-marl, infusorial earth, chalk, iron ores of various kinds,
petroleum and petroleum-bearing shales. Of these, rock-salt has
probably been formed by the evaporation of saline waters in enclosed
basins, a process which has been going forward at many stages of the

a)

a 6 ett

164 THe OTrawa NATURALIST.

world’s history, and is seen at the present day in nature in the Great
Salt Lake of Utah, as well as at all points where salt is
produced by solar evaporation or action. Gypsum isformed principally
as a chemical precipitate from solution in water, as well as by the action
of sulphurous vapours from volcanic vents upon calcareous rocks. Shell
marls are mostly of organic origin, formed by the accumulation of the
remains of shells in the bottoms of lakes or ponds, often seen underly-
ing peat bogs, as is also the case with certain of the limestones where
the mass of the rock is made up almost entirely of organisms. Certain
of the limestones, however, are formed by chemical action, by deposition
of calcareous matter in solution, in which case they are frequently
highly siliceous and devoid of all trace of organic life. Chalk is formed
like shell marl, only differing in its being of marine instead of fresh
water origin; the mass of the deposit being principally calcareous,
while with infusorial earth which is formed from portions of diatoms,
the mass is chiefly siliceous. This substance although requiring a high
power of the microscope to detect the traces of the organisms is often
found in deposits of many feet in thickness.

The deposits of iron ore, which form a very important portion of
the economic products of the earth’s crust, owe their origin very largely.
to the action of certain organic acids, which have been produced by the
decomposition of vegetable matter upon the ferruginous minerals found
in many rock masses, and which thus pass into solution with water.
These solutions rapidly decompose under certain conditions and the
iron salts are precipitated, and become mixed with sands and clays,
gradually forming beds of what is known as bog iron ore. This material
in certain areas constitutes deposits of very great extent as in the St.
Maurice district, where these ores have been mined and smelted for
over 150 years, and are still as abundant as ever, at many points. The
other ores of iron, such as limonite, hematite, magnetite &c., which
frequently occur in immense masses have also been regarded by some
chemists, and geologists as owing their existence to organic agencies,
and their present condition is supposed to be due to the great metamor- —
phoses to which they have been subjected -during the great lapse of
time since their deposition. It seems however probable from the

How Rocks are Formen. 165

associations of many of these deposits with clearly intrusive rocks that
their origin is more closely related to these latter than to any organic
agencies as is the case with the recent iron cre deposits.

Of late years the microscope has come to the aid of the field
geologist and has been of wonderful assistance in solving the problem
pertaining to the structure and origin of many rocks, concerning
whose genesis much doubt had long existed. By the increased light
_ thus furnished, many new facts have been adduced which have, on
certain lines, almost entirely revolutionized our earlier ideas as to rock
structure and by the union of the forces of the field and the laboratory
much more satisfactory conclusions have been reached, It may be
safely said that by this means, the progress in accurate geological
investigations during the last ten years has been far greater than in any
previous similar period, and the results obtained have been much more
_ teliable.

The vicinity of Ottawa is excellently adopted for the study of many
rock formations. Along the line of the Gatineau railway many beauti-
ful sections of the early crust are exposed in the form of granite, gneiss
and crystalline limestone, and their intersections by dyke-like masses of
deeper seated rocks are well seen, as syenites, diorites, pyroxenes, felspars,
etc. The Ottawa, Arnprior and Parry Sound andthe Canada Atlantic Rail-
ways both traverse areas occupied by the lower Palzeozoic rocks and many
instructive outcrops of sandstone, shale and limestone are easily avail-
able to the geological student. Some of the strata of the Chazy and
Trenton are wonderfully rich in organic remains. The former of these
two great rock divisions illustrate the conditions which prevailed when
the earliest ocean waves dashed against the oldest outlines of our con-
tinent, and strewed the debris of sand and pebbles throughout the
Ottawa area, while the limestones and shales of the Chazy and Trenton
show the prevalence of deeper water conditions and the abundance of
the animal life even in those early days of the world’s history. The
most recent deposits of clays, sands and gravels can also be studied at
many points along the river Ottawa as well as over the country adjacent
on either side, and their contained organisms, in the shape of bones of
seals and fishes, as well as marine shells, are familiar to many of the

166 "Pax Orrawa NATURALIST. ;

members of our club. These shell deposits are found at many points —
along the hills around Ottawa and away up the river to the west at
elevations of hundreds of feet above present sea level, and show that the - |
deposits of these portions of the present crust of the earth were due to
the series of rhythmic pulsations which seem to be constantly going on,
and by which at one time, the surface is raised to a considerable eleva-
tion above tide water and then gradually becomes submerged till a
ocean waves wash the sides of our highest hills.

It will be readily admitted by everyone conversant with the study
of Geology, that, like all other branches of science, it is extremely. pro-
gressive in its tendency ; but though the new facts acquired year by —
year, through our recent sources of knowledge, have led to many changes
of view as to the origin, history and manner of formations oi the com-
ponent parts of the earth’s crust, it should not be assumed that as a
consequence any discredit should attach to the conscientious work of
the pioneers in the science, but rather the greater credit should in many
cases be given, in that they, with such poor materials at their disposal and
such a lack of facilities at their command for investigation, shculd have
-been able to accomplish so much, and to obtain results so generaily

satisfactory to those who have since studied the rocks in the light of

modern science.

Reporr oF GEOLOGICAL BRANCH. 167
REPORT OF THE GEOLOGICAL BRANCH, 1894 95.

(Read December 20th, 1894.)

To the Council of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club :

The following notes on geological work carried on in this vicinity
by members of the Club and others indicate clearly the interest which
still prevails in the study of the geological formations about Ottawa.

: Considerable geological work was done at the three general excur-

sions held under the auspices of the Club

The following table shows the various places visited and the geo-
Jogical formations noticed and reported upon either orally at the
excursions by the leaders, or in the NATURALIST* :—

Saxicava sand,

|Fossils abundant. fSands and gravels, clay, &c.
era Leda clay.
Boulder clay.
CHELSEA.
Archzan. Gneisses, limestone, ophite,
diorite, &c.
6
a Leda clay. No fossilscollectedjMarine clay and_ boulder
aA No. 2. Boulder clay. clays, glaciated rocks.
=
S |Wakeriecp. 5 —
= Archzean. Gneisses, pegmatites, &c.
a TO REO
{Marine Fossils in
No. 3. Pleistocene. the gravel pitattChrondrodite limestone,
| Carp Station. syenite. &c., overlain by
GALFTTA. ar marine clays and sands.

Archean, &c.

Besides the three general excursions, above mentioned, there were
held a number of sub-excursidns in which various members of the Club
and others interested took part.

These are some of the localities visited :—

1. PorTEr’s ISLAND, RipEaAu River, Ottawa In April, 1894,

*(a) Vol. VIII., No. 3, pp. 42-43, 1894.
(b) Vol. VIII., No. 5, pp. 74-75, 1894.
(c) Vol. VIII., No. 7. pp. 109-110, 1894.

168 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

the writer, together with Mr. B. E. Walker, F.G.S., of Toronto, Mr.
N. J. Giroux, C.E., Mr. J. C. Reichenbach, and others visited this
island, where extensive excavations made by the cigic authorities had
brought to view the fossiliferous strata of the middle Utica. Large
blocks of black bituminous shale were examined and a perfect harvest
of interesting forms obtained.

Slabs covered with the remains of graptolites of the genus Lepfo-
graptus, beautifully preserved and showing the hydrothece and other
points of structure wonderfully well; colonies of the sponges recently
described for the writer by Dr. Hinde as Stephanella sancta, together
with remarkably well-preserve | specimens of Zriarthrus spinosus were
found in tolerable abundance.

A complete list of the species collected on Porter’s Island will be
published in a future number of the NATURALIST, if desired.

2. HuLL, Que. The quarries at Hull both north and south of the
C. P. R. track, were again visited and as usual yielded a number of
interesting forms, especially crinoids.

On one occasion, in two hour’s search the writer and two friends
secured no less than 3c heads of crinoids besides a large number of
beautiful examples of Zvematzs Ottawaensts, Billings and an undescribed
bryozoary.

3. BESSERERS, Ottawa River.—g miles below Ottawa City. In
company with Mr. Lambe of the Geological Survey the ‘writer spent a
day collecting in the Post Pliocene marine clays of this locality during
low water in September. Besides some f/¢y specimens of fossil fishes
—Mallvtus villosus, Cuvier, collected on this occasion—there were
obtained remains of shells and plants in tolerable abundance. Some
fifty specimens of plants were sent to Sir William Dawson and include
remains of algz or seaweeds, mosses, equisetacee, fruits, grasses, sedges
and leaves of trees and flowering plants.

Two fossil feathers were also collected. The first specimen of a
fossil feather from those marine clays discovered as far as we know
was that obtained by the Marquis of Lorne at Green’s Creek, during his

Report oF GEOLoGIcCAL BRANCH. 169

term of office, about 1881, and is now on exhibition in the Pleistocene
_ case at the Geological Museum on Sussex street.
Several papers bearing on the Geology of this district have appeared
from time to time in the Naruratist during the past year.
The Director of the Geological Survey of Canada (Dr. Selwyn) has
undertaken to publish a series of Geological maps of this portion of
Canada and entrusted this work to Dr. Ells who is also one of the
leaders in Geology of our club. I have no doubt that he will find useful
and interesting material in the published records of the geology of
Ottawa or in the unpublished notes of the leaders in geology.
Records and notes have been kept during the past fifteen years at
least, an amount of useful information which will be useful in preparing
a more detailed and accurate geological map than has heretofore been
published. Early in the spring of ’94, one of your leaders, the writer,
_. issued a chart of the Geological formations of Ottawa and its environs
extracted from a paper published in 1888 on the formations of this
district. ;
- What is now required is a good topographical map of this district
upon which to lay the geological features. | Considerable difficulty has
been met in the fact that the surveys on the Ontario side do not
correspond with those on the Quebec side of the Ottawa and require
to be corrected at numerous points. Considerable progress however
was made in this direction by the late Mr. Scott Barlow, Chiet Draughts-
man of the Survey, and this branch of the Club’s work looks forward to
the time when such a map will be prepared for the Ottawa district.

In the meantime a great deal remains to be done in geology about
Ottawa The structure and composition of the older crystalline rocks
at our very door, their origin and age are only begining to be studied
and understood, whilst the fossiliferous rocks always prove to the
diligent searcher that many forms new to science are still awaiting to be
discovered.

In conclusion we trust that good results will long continue to be
forthcoming in this branch of the Club’s work.

(On behalf of the leaders) H M AMI

170 THE OTTAWA NaruraList. ; xm
NOTES, REVIEWS, AND COMMENTS.

Glacial Deposits in Europe and America. —In the April-
May issue of the Journal of Geology, Vol. III, No. 3. pp. 241-269, James
Geikie contributes a valuable paper entitled :— ‘“‘The Classification of
European glacial deposits.”

It is a clear and conscise résumé of the evidence gathered by one
whose intimate acquaintance with the facts of the case enable him to
present the various stages which characterized glacial times in Europe-
From the earliest glacial deposits of northern Europe—the Scanian—to
the latest, the Upper Turbarian or sixth glacial period, Dr. Geikie notes
five interglacial periods and six glacial periods, which he designates
as follows :—

EUROPEAN GLACIAL AND INTERGLACIAL STAGES.

XI. Upper Turbarian—Sixth Glacial Period. ,

X. Upper Forestian—Fifth Interglacial period.

IX. Lower Vurbarian—Fifth Glacial Epoch

VIII. Lower Forestian—Fourth Intergiacial Epoch.

VII. Mecklenburgian—Fourth Glacial Epoch.

VI. Neudeckian—Third Inter Glacial Epoch.

V. Polandian—Third Glacial Epoch.

IV. Helvetian—Second Interglacial Epoch.

III. Saxonian—Second Glacial Fpoch.

II. Norfolkian —First Interglacial Epoch.

I. Scanian—First Glacial Epoch.

This admirable paper by Dr. Geikie is followed by another on
“The classification of America’s glacial deposits” 270—277, (loc-cit.)
by Prof. T. C, Chamberlin in which the latter points out the relations
which exist between the stages mentioned by Dr. Geikie in his paper on
European glacial deposits and the stages in America. Prof. Chamberlin
remarks: ‘‘Our knowledge of the formations that were deposited
during the advancing stages of the glacial period in America is ~
extremely imperfect.” ‘This strikes the key-note to a series of careful
investigations which ought to be made in the lowest glacial deposits Of
North America and specially in British North America such as wil
enable the correlations of the different stage in Europe and America to
be more accurately established. Prof.Chamberlin attempts to correlate the
Kansan formation with the Saxonian of Europe owing to their striking

ot Np ee oe eS 3eey AS ‘an Se ee — =~ oe

-

Nores, Reviews AND CoMMEN's. 171

similarity, in that they “‘al:ke repre sentthe greatest extension of the
ce-sheet. The A/fontan and the Helvetian are then compared
dicating a retreat of the ice-sheet.

Then the /owan formation of Dr. McGee — which Chamberlin
co-relates with the /o/andian with some doubt.

The Zorento formation correlated with the ANeudeckian (?) ;
the Wisconsin formation with the AMecklenburgian (?) and the
later deposits are compared with the Forestian and Turbarian
deposits of Europe.

‘These two papers are most interesting contributions to glaciology.

H. M. Amt.

Botany.—Rare MAaniropan Piants.— I beg to note the finding
of the following plants at Stony Mountain, Man., on August 12th 1895.
(1) Gerardia tenutfolia, Vahl. var. asperula, Gray.

This was recorded trom the same locality by J. M. Macoun.

Many years ago I noticed it northwestward towards Lake Manitoba.
This would seem to confirm the conjecture made in Prof. Macoun’s
Catalogue that G. aspera of Douglas, should be referred here.

(2) Bouteloua racemosa. Lag. This grass is very rare in Canada,
it was found in the same locality by Mr. Fletcher in 1883.
(3) Pellea atropurpurea, Link. On limestone rocks. This is
the first record for Manitoba, though there are several for the North
West Territories—Rev. W. A. BurMAN, Winnipeg, Man.

c ASPLENIUM RUTA-MURARIA, L:—In the Orrawa NATURALIST for

November 1892, Dr. T. J. W. Burgess, F. R. S. C., records the first
discovery in Canada of this rare fern by Dr. P. J. Scott, of Southampton,
Ont., on Flower-pot Island, near Tobermorey, Bruce Co. Ont.
In locking through some botanical specimens collected by the
Rev. W. A. Burman, of Winnipeg, at Banff, Rocky Mountains, in June
1894, I find some good fruiting fronds of this fern. This is the second
locality in Canada so far recorded.—J. F.

Zoology.—THE Common House Mouse, Mus musculus, L.
Two specimens of a mouse taken by the Rev. J. H. Keen, at Fort
Simpson, Northern British Columbia, were forwarded for identification
to Mr. S. N. Rhoads, of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia
Pa., who reports that they are the above speciés, and, that the capture
so far north is of interest.—J. F.

Entomology.—Pampuita Prckius, Kirby.—This pretty and
‘common little Skipper, of which there is normally but one brood in the
year at Ottawa, the butterflies appearing in the latter half of June, has
this year been practically double-brooded. During the hot weather we
had last September numerous specimens were seen darting about
the beds of Phlox Drummondii at the Experimental Farm. In
_ previous years an occasional specimen has been recorded in the autumn
but this year the species was abundant.—J. F.

z ; ; <° <a
172 THE OtrawA NATURALIST. : ‘2

SPHINX LuUScITIOSA, Cram. A fine male specimen of this rare
Hawk Moth was taken by Mr. William Ellis in the Conservatory at the —
Experimental Farm on June rsth. It was flying by diy-lizht and was
watched for some time sipping the nectar from the flowers of some
Cattleyas and other orchids. Many years ago a single specimen was
taken at rest in New Edinburgh by Mr. Harrington and later Mr. F. W.
Warwick of Buckingham, P. Q. took two females at Lilac flowers. An
interesting record of this species is that ofa specimen taken by Mr. A,
W. Hanham at Winnipeg on rst. July last. It was at rest beneath some ~
loose bark on a fence post. It may be mentioned in case anyone
should be fortunate enough to get the eggs at any future time that the
food plant of the caterpillar is willow.—J. F.

PROGRAMME OF WINTER LECTURES IN OTTAWA.

Under the joint auspices of the Ottawa Literary and Scientific
Society and the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club a special Soirée Com-_
mittee Meeting was held in the Normal School on the afternoon of,
Wednesday, Oct. 30th, 1895, when the following programme of lectures,
etc., for the ensuing season of 1895-1896 was decided upon :—

1895. PROGRAMME OF LECTURES, SOIREES, ETC. 1806.

1895. J
NOV. z6th. Conversazione. On this occasion addresses will be given by Dr.
MacCabe, F.R.S.C., Dr. R. W. Ells and Mr. F. T. Shutt, M.A.,
F.I.C. During the evening objects of special interest will be shown
under microscopes and in cases prepared for the evening by
various members of both societies. Music, vocal and instrumental,
will also form a part of this opening entertainment. 3
DEC. 5th. 1. The value of Botany in Agriculture. By Prof. John Macoun,
M: Ac ES: 4
2. A Naturalist in British Columbia. By Prof. James Fletcher,
F.R.S.C., etc. Illustrated.
DEC. 12th. A Greek Tragedy. By Prof. MacNaughton, M.A., of Queen’s
University, Kingston.
1896.
JAN. oth. Longfellow. By the Hon. Dr. Montague, M.P.

‘* 23rd. Extinct Monsters. By Mr. H. M. Ami, M.A., F.G.S. Illustrated by
lantern slides and views.

‘* 30th. Labrador. By Mr. A. P. Low, B.A.Sc. Illustrated by lime-light
views.

FEB. 6th. Howto Study Botany. By Dr. T. J. W. Burgess, of Montreal.
Illustrated.

«« 20th. Pompeii, a Roman City of the first century. By Prof. Frank D. Adams,
M.A.Sc., Ph.D., of McGill College, Montreal. Illustrated by
lime-light views.

MAR. 5th. 1. Eggs and Nests of Fishes. By Prof. E. E. Prince, B.A., F.L.S.,
Commissioner of Fisheries for Canada.
2. Bacteria, their functions in Nature. By Mr. F. T. Shutt, M.A.,
F.C.S. - Both papers to be illustrated by specimens.

Lectures at 8. p.m. sharp, in the Lecture Hall of the Provincial
Normal School, Cor. of Elgin and Lisgar Streets. Admission Free.

THE OTTAWA NATURALIST.

Vou. IX. OTTAWA, DECEMBER, 1895. No. 9.

THE LAND AND FRESHWATER SHELLS OF ALBERTA.
ByYoOREV. GEO. W. TAYvior, F. Ri S! €. (Nanaimo, B.C.)

Very little has been published up to the present time on the
Mollusca of the District of Alberta.

The .first naturalist to pay any attention to the subject was, I
believe, Dr. G. M. Dawson, who, 20 years ago (1873-74), was acting as
naturalist to the British North American Boundary Commission, and
who published (in 1875) as an appendix to his report, a list of the land
and freshwater shells that he had obtained during the progress of the
boundary expedition.

Though most of his shells were collected in the neighbourhood of
__ the Lake of the Woods and in other places in Manitoba and Assiniboia,
Dr. Dawson obtained a few species in Alberta, the most notable being a
fine variety of Patula strigosa which was found near Waterton Lake
at the base of the Rocky Mountains and just within the boundaries of
the district. At the time this shell was thought to be an undescribed
_ species and was named by Dr. Dawson Hed/tx fimitaris.

Since the date of Dr. Dawson’s explorations Alberta has on several
occasions been visited by members of the staff of the Geological Survey
and I have seen in the Museum at Ottawa some interesting species
collected by them ; but as no record of these shells appears to have
been published, and I am ignorant of the precise localities whence they
came, I do‘not like to include them in the present list.

Three years ago Mr. T. E. Bean, the well known lepidopterist of
Laggan (which place is close tothe Western boundary of Alberta) began
_to investigate the shells of his neighbourhood and very kindly gave me
Specimens of all the species he observed. In the autumn of 1893 1°
had the pleasure of spending two days at Laggan in Mr. Bean’s

Ne THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

company and was successful in finding several species that had escape
his notice.

The result of our joint collections was published in the ‘‘ Nautilus ”
for December 1893 (Vol. VII. p. 85.) | Nineteen species (14 land and
5 freshwater) are enumerated in that paper and two other land shells
should also have been included viz. Puja simplex and Vertigo ovata of
both of which species Mr. Bean had taken.specimens.

During the past three summers (1892-3-4) Mr, A. O. Wheeler. D.L.S.
(now of the Canadian Topographical Survey, Ottawa) has been
surveying in different parts of the district. While in the field he has
always, most kindly, kept a sharp lookout for shells, and at the close of
each season has very liberally sent his collections to me. As a result
chiefly of Mr. Wheeler’s industry and success as a collector I am now
able to presenta list of 44 species of land and freshwater shells

"inhabiting this little known part of the Dominion.
The first of Mr. Wheeler’s collections was made in the summer of
- 1892. Shells were obtained in the Battle River at a point where the
Calgary and Edmonton trail touches the river, about 60 miles south of
the last named town. From this locality came five (5) specimens of
Anodonta lacustris, two of Margaritana complanata, one of Unio luteolus
and two of the large heavy form which in Canada goes by the name of
Unio subovatus ; also, three valves of rstdium abditum and a single
valve of a Sphaertum which Mr. E. W. Roper has pronounced to be
probably |S. fada/e.

A few shells were also collected in a creek and a slough both near
Egg Lake, twelve miles south of Victoria (a Hudson Bay Post) on the
Saskatchewan River. In the creek were obtained Planorbis trivolvts
and Limnea stagnalis; and in the dried up slough Segmentina
armigera (one specimen,) Limnea palustris, Sphaertuu solidulum (four
valves only) and twelve specimens of a Swccinea which I think must be
S. Grosvenort.

Mr. Wheeler’s next collection was a much larger one made
in 1893 while he was surveying 30 or 35 miles east of Red Deer on
the Calgary and Edmonton Railway. Among the land shells, which

were mostly collected in dried-up sloughs, were numerous specimens of

a a

eee eT ee ee ee

+9 Setinti autos eit &

~ "
o Aue =e y

LW A BTN Nan se ee ned Le eT eae 2

,
]
j
:
F

Tue Lanp AND FRESHWATER SHELLS OF ALBERTA. 175:

the widely distriouted Witrina limpida, Hyalina arborea, Hyalina
radiatula, Conulus fulvus, Patula striatella, Vallonia costata (form
gracilicosta) and Ferussacia subcylindrica. Besides these there are
specimens of three species of Pupa, namely P.armifera (19 specimens,)-
P. Blandi,(4),and P. Holzingeri,(2) all collected from drift by the Red
Deer River. Lastly, there were specimens of 3 species of Succtnéa
which, throughout this paper I have called S. avara, S. ovalts and
S. Grosvenort. 1 must say however that though usiug these names I am
of opinion that the first two are applied to shells specifically distinct
from the eastern shells that are so called.

Of freshwater shells Mr. Wheeler collected 13 species ; the
ubiquitous Limxea palustris and L. stagnalis, Planorbis trivolvis and
Physa heterostropha, Bulimus hypnorum and Pisidtum abdttum; also the
less abundant Limnea destdiosa L. czperata and L. reflexa, Segmentina

_ armigera, Valvata tricarinata (Red Deer River) and lastly a number of

specimens of Planorbis nautileus var. cristatus, which | begin to think must
be indigenous to North America. These last named shells were found
in moss from the bed ofa muskeg in township 39, range 23, W. of 4th.
meridian. Specimens of ZL. reflexa in this collection are the largest I
have ever seen, attaining a length of 42 mm.

The latest of Mr. Wheeler’s collections was. received in January
dast and contains the shells collected by him during the summer of 1894
in Southern Alberta in the neighbourhood of MacLeod and the Little
Bow River.

There are not so many species in this as in the former collections
but among them are three notable additions to our list, Plaxorbis
umbilicatellus (2 specitnens), Limnea bulimoides and Spherium
Jayanum, The first named appears to be quite distinct from P. parvus
with which, judging merely from the original description and figure, T
was formely inclined to unite it. This interesting shell was described
as Planorbis umbilicatus by Mr. J. W. Taylor inthe English ‘‘ Quarterly
Journal of Conchology” Vol. iv, p. 451 (July 1884), from specimens
collected by Mr. R. M. Christy, near Brandon, Birtle and Rapid City in
Manitoba. The name being pre-occupied it was changed to
umbilicatellus by Mr. T.D.E. Cockerell in the ‘“‘Conchologists’ Exchange”

-. quite distinct from all forms, that I have seen, of that very variable

176 ; THE OTTawaA NATURALIST.

November 1887, p. 68. The species was not again noticed, I think, until
Mr. Homer Squyer quite lately found a single speeimen in river drift
near Mingusville, Montana as recorded by him in the “ Nantes for
October 1894 (Vol. viii. p. 95-)

The second addition to our list from this collection is a small
Limnea which is probably the Limnea bulimoides of Lea. Though
allied to, and in this instance collected with, Zimnea palustris it seems

species. The largest of the 28 specimens collected is only 8x 5 mm.
but is quite mature and has a thickened red-edged outer lip and also a
second red line, marking a former stage of growth, about 13 mm. within
the aperture.

The third addition is Sfherium Jayanum and the shells I refer to |
this species are from Crow Lodge Creek, Mosquito Creek and Little
Bow River. .

The other shells contained in this collection are Conulus fulvus —
Patula striatella, Succinea avara, Pisidium abditum, Limnea palusiris,
L. stagnalis, L. caperata, L. destdtosa, Flanorbts trivolvis, P. parvus;
Physa heterostropha and Bulimus hypnorum, all common and widely
. distributed species.

It will be seen that Mr. Wheeler’s collections have added twenty
two species to the twenty one already known from Laggan and if we
add also Dr. Dawson’s Patuda strigosa we shall have 44 as the grand ;
total of the land and freshwater Mollusca of Alberta as at present
known.

No doubt this list will some day be considerably extended and an-
examination of the list of Montana shells lately published in the
“Nautilus ” by Mr. Squyer and the other Manitoba and Assiniboia lists ~
of Dr. Dawson, Dr. Bell, and Mr. R. Miller Christy, will give us a good
idea of the species that may be expected to occur also in Alberta.

In the list that follows the three collections of Mr. Wheeler, the
Laggan shells of Mr. Bean and myself, and a small collection
received a few days ago from Mr.T.N. Willing of Olds, Alberta, through
the kindness of Mr. James Fletcher, are tabulated, Patu/a strigosa, as.

iy

* Tre Lanp AND FRESHWATER SHELLS OF ALBERTA. #177

‘mentioned above, is added on the authority of Dr. Dawson although it
has not occurred in any of the collections I have examined.

; IsT OF THE LAND AND FRESHWATER Santas OF THE DISTRICT OF
ALBERTA.

)
j

Bean
&
Taylor
heeler,
1892
1894

LAND SHeLLS

Wheeler,
1893
Wheeler,

c

—-§ ——————__ +

1 Limax hyperboreus,

Vitrina limpida, Gould
Hyalina arborea, Say sp
H[yalina_ radiatula,

PRIMER SD: ras. --. - -
~§ Conulus fulvus, Drap.sp
Po ang strigosa, Gould

Boss)

nA Aw AAA -

os BaD $a Sea Waterton Lake

P. atula striatella,
Anthony sp......... x
Vallonia pulchella,
Muellersp. form graci-
licosta, Reinh.......
Pupa Hoppii, Mueller.
to Pupa Blandi, Morse, . liek
11 Pupa armifera, Say .. fae
t2 Pupa Holzingeri, Sterk. x
13 Pupa pentodon, Say sp
14 Pupa simplex, Gould
15 Pupa alticola, Ingersoll

16 Vertigo ovata, Say..
17 Vertigo ventricosa,
IM OISO Ts Finesse wos sie x

18 Ferussacia subcylin-
drica, Linn, sp..-.... x | x
19 Succinea avara, Say.. x x x ~
20 Succinea ovalis, Gould x x
21 Succinea Grosvenori,
nt ee x x

mm

et ad

‘FRESHWATER SHELLS.

Ae |
_ 22 Valvata sincera, Say..| x
23 Valvata tricarinata, Say
™ Limneastagnalis, Linn,
|

25 Limnza reflexa, Say .

26 Limnza palustris, Muel-
RRs cls. «sis <5 « x x

27 Limnza bulimoides Lea

28 Limnza desidiosa, Say

29 Limnza caperata, Say

jo Physa _heterostropha
ON Ag Oa Ane ee : x x x

6

178 Tue Orrawa NaTuRALIST.

1892.

Remarks.

Wheeler,

-

ape

FRESHWATER SHELLS. ee ma
A

31 Bulimus —_hypnorum, s
inp Apoecsekodoe x
32 Planorbis trivolvis, Say} x x | x
33 Planorbis parvus, Say! x
34 Planorbis umbilicatel-
lus, Cockerell..... >|
35 Planorbis nautileus, |
Linn, var cristatus. . . x
36 Segmentina armigera,
Oe (Say .Spiuenc eee eee x x
37 Spherium — solidulum, |
Prine Feria ae 5 ~
38 Spherium fabale,!
Mali@acepad Stod- xo
39 Spheerium fe
Relive, ssc ops GoUcur is EX ac
40 Pisidium abditum,
Haldeman per eee x x aes: x
41 Unio luteolus, Lam...) x
42 Unio subovatus, Lea. .|
43 Magaritanacomplanata
Baynes nae ote ioe ei
44 Anodonta lacustris, Lea! om

REPORT OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL ee 1894.
Read, February 12th, 1895. - .

To the Council of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists Club: ;
It is with pleasure that the Leaders report to the Club the

prosperous state of this branch. A great deal of good work has been
done during the past year, not only in collecting specimens in the
various orders of insects, but also in working up material accumulated
in previous years. In this way many names have been added to the
lists of insects recorded as having been found in the district. A few
the more interesting finds have been recorded in the Oftfawa
Naturalist, and the others have all been recorded for publication in”
the lists, from time to time, as these are thought sufficiently complete.
During the year, two supplementary lists of local Hemiptera have beer
published by Mr. Harrington. In addition to the work done by the
leaders individually, the opportunities of interesting members of the
Club at the excursions were taken advantage of with the good resu

Report oF THE Enromonocicat Brancu, 1894. 179

that some good species were secured by members not specially interested
in Entomology.

At the first excursion in the spring, we were pleased to welcome
Dr. Scudder, of Cambridge, Mass., the eminent American entomologist,
and also our fellow-member, Dr. Bethune, of Port Hope, the editor of
the Canadian Entomologist, and well known for many years as an
active Canadian naturalist. Dr. A. H. Mackay, and Prof. J. Fowler, of
Kingston, experienced botanists, were also with us, and helped to make
a most successful and enjoyable excursion, particularly for the

~ entomologists and botanists.

Some of our members made interesting collections in the west; not-
ably Prof. Macoun, at Crane Lake, and Messrs Klotz and Simpson, in
Alaska.

LEPIDOPTERA

On the whole the past season cannot be said to have been a very
good one for insects, although, as is always the case, careful search and
constant watchfulness added several desirable species to our cabinets.

Some good work has been done in working out the life histories of
some of the native butterflies and moths, a most fascinating study, and

an excellent means of securing good specimens for the cabinet. The

_ following species have been partially or completely reared from the

_ egg:—Papilio Bairdit, (= Oregonia,) Colias Elis, Colas Nastes,
Chionobas Jutta, C. Macountt. The first from eggs sent from Colorado,
by Mr. W.H.Edwards, and all but the last, from eggs collected at Laggan,
in the Rocky Mountains by Mr. T. E. Bean. From eggs obtained at

_ Ottawa : Chrysophanus Thoé, Colias Eurvtheme, C. Philodice, Pamphila
Metacomet, P. Cernes, and P. Mystic have been reared.

COLEOPTERA.

: Considerable additions have been made to the Ottawa lists of
beetles, but some of the species are yet unidentified. Among those
: determined may be mentioned Oéestodes tenuicollis and Conotrachelus
_ anaglypticus. Three specimens of the rare Sfapy/inus erythropterus,

5
;

_ only once previously recorded in America, were taken in Dow’s Swamp.

180: THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

HYMENOPTERA.

A large collection, especially of the smaller species, was made at
various points in the vicinity of the city, of which may be noted, Kettle
Island, the Old Racecourse, Beechwood, the Beaver Meadow and
Russell’s Grove, near ELull, the Experimental Farm and Dow’s Swamp.
The Aculeata, or sting-bearers, numbered about 125 species; Phyto-
phaga, or leaf-eaters, 70 species ; and Parasitica, at least 200 species,
of which a number will probaoly prove to be undescribed, while many
of the others are new to our lists, or of very rare occurrence and special

interest.
J. FLETCHER, |
W. H. HARRINGTON + Leaders.
Te? MCnae en ial

SER a TIE IY A IE TOS IAS ID
OBITUARY NOTICES.

1.—Dr. GEoRGE Lawson, PH.D., F.R.S.C., ete., etc., professor of
Chemistry and Botany, in Dalhousie College, Halifax, well known to
many of the members of our club, with which he has been connected
for eleven years, breathed his last at his home in Halifax, Nova Scotia,
November 11th, 1895.

At the time of his death Dr. Lawson was President of the Nova
Scotian Institute of Science, Halifax, an active member of Section IV
of the Royal Society of Canada, of which Society he had the honor of
being its President, and in Section IV,where he read valuable papers, chief
amongst which is his ‘‘ Monograph of the Ranunculacee.” Dr. Lawson
was born in 1827, at Maryton, a beautiful village on the banks of the
Tay, in Scotland. In his early days he was apprenticed toa solicitor in
Dundee, with a view to enter the legal profession. But he had
strong tastes for botany and natural history studies. These he pursued
vigorously, and came in contact with many scientific men of the times,
notably in Edinburgh. In 1849 he was elected to the position of Asst.-
‘Sec’y and Curator to the Botanical Society, and to a similar post in the
Caledonian Hoticultural Society. In 1850 he published a work on
‘‘ Water Lilies,” and was appointed secretary and editor of the Scottish
Arboricultural Society. He edited the transactions, of this last named

PT APRs OPE Ew re ET he 5,

a4 fF

aoe h)

ee

~*
.

PCL ase

26entT Ue a eo ere

eT eee aes

OBITUARY. 181

Society up to 1858, when he was called to the Chair of Chemistry and
Natural History in Queen’s College and University, Kingston, Canada

_ West, which position he held for many years, until he accepted the

appointment in Dalhousie College, which position he held at the time
of his death, Dr. Lawson’s genial spirit and kind demeanor won for
him many staunch friends and admirers. He was one of the foundation
or charter fellows of the Royal Society of Canada, and was chosen as
an authority on numerous occasions by his province and country.
His loss will be greatly felt by all whose researches had thrown .
them into communication or acquaintance with him.

2.—Don ANTONIO DEL CastTILLo, F.G.S., F.G.S.A., founder and
director of the Geological Survey of Mexico, died on the 27th day of
October, 1895, in the City of Mexico. Don Antonio had taken a wide
interest in matters geological throughout the world. At the time of

his death he was a fellow of the Geological Societies of France>

Belgium, London, Berlin and America, a member of the Geographical
and Statistical Society, Director of the National School of Engineering,

‘and an active member of the American Institute of Mining Engineers.

Notice of the death of this distinguished geologist reached the Ottaw4
Field Naturalists’ Club early in November, and to the members of the
Geol. Surv., of Mexico, who kindly sent the news, the Club tenders its
deep sympathy and regret.

a R'E
NOTES, REVIEWS AND COMMENTS.

Geology.—Tue Sacurenay Gorce.—An interesting discussion*
has arisen between the Rev. Mgr. Laflamme, A. Buies, P. Horace
Dumais and others, as to the geological history of the gorge at the
entrance or mouth of the Saguenay.

Mgr. Laflamme and Mr. Dumais both agree in the view that the
gorge is an old fjord resembling those of Norway of to-day.

GEOL. Soc. or AMERICA——The Eighth Winter meeting of the
Geological Society of America’ will be held in Phila-

*Naturaliste Canadien, Chicoutimi, 1895.

182 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

delphia, Penn. U. S. A.; probably at the University of Pennsyl-
vania buildings. The meetings are called to order at 2 p.m. Dec. 26th.
Prof. Joseph I.e Conte of Berkeley, California is president.

The meeting promises to be unusua!ly interesting and important.

Entomology.—I. The editor of the Ortawa NATURALIST is indebted
to Mr. J. B. Tyrrell of the Geological Survey Staff for one copy
each of two important contributions to the Natural History of
Canada, viz. :-—

(1.) ‘* Canadian Spiders.” By J. H. Emerton, (with four plates); from
Trans. of the Connecticut Academy, Vol. IX, July, 1894.

(2.) Nordamerikanische Hydrachniden, von F. Koenike, Abhand!ungen
des Naturwissenchaftlichen Wereins zu Bremen. XIII., Band 2.
Heft. pp. 167-226. Bremen, 1895.

I. CANADIAN SPIDERS.

The collections of spiders examined and reported upon by Prof.
J. H. Emerton, comprise the following :—

1. Rocky Mountains, lat. 49° to 52°, from 3,000 to 5,000 feet, J. B. Tyrrell,
1883.

. Rocky Mountains, near C.P.R., from 5,000 feet, at Laggan, up to 8,500 ft.
on the neighbouring mountains. A large collection by Thos. E. Bean.

. Alberta Territory, lat. 51° to 54°, long. 110° to 114°, J. B. Tyrrell.

. Saskatchewan River, S. H. Scudder.

Lake Winnipegosis, D. B. Dowling, 1888.

Lake of the Woods, A. C. Lawson, 1884.

- Ottawa, Ontario, J. B. Tyrrell.

. Montreal, Quebec, J. H. Emerton.

_ Interior of Gaspé Peninsula, R. W. Ells, 1883.

. Anticosti, Magdalen Islands, and several ports around the Galf an St.
Lawrence, from Port Hawkesbury to Mingan Harbour, Samuel Henshaw,
1881.

11. Labrador, Bonne Espérance, lat. 51° 24’, to Triangle Harbor, 52° 50’, John

Allan, 1882.

1S)

OO SNOWED

Lal

Exactly 100 species of Canadian spiders are described in this
interesting report and Prof Emerton states that “as far as can be
jndged, from the present collections, the spiders of Canada, differ little
from those of New England.” Out of 61 species, from Labrador to
Manitoba, 56 species live in New England ; and out of 48 species from
the Rocky Mountains, 27 have been found in New England. Among
‘the spiders of Canada are several species that live but little south of its
‘boundary, and there only at high elevations. The most conspicuous of
these is Lpeira carbonaria, which lives on the Alps in Europe, in the

*

Ae it ls eh

Nores, Reviews AND CoMMENTs. 183

White Mountains in New Hampshire, and on the Rocky Mountains as
far south as Colorado, in all cases above the tree line. In Labrador
the same species was found by Packard near Square Island, where the
mountains are 400 to 1000 feet high, and bare at the top.

Pardosa Groenlandica has been found as far north as Disco

“Island, Greenland, and along the coast to the Gulf of St. Lawrence.

It is common on the White Mountains, above the trees. In the
Rocky Mountains it occurs at 5000 feet, at Laggan and in Colorado at
8000 feet. It is also among the spiders from the Lake of the Woods,
andon the Pacific Coast it was found at Portland, Oregon.” |

»

““ Among the rarer species in these collections,” Prof. Emerton
says: ‘‘ there are two Epeiras of the angu/ata group; one: E&. nigra,
resembling the Z. so/etaria described in ‘‘ New England spiders ” ; and
the other, a small variety of &. Nordmanni. Lattey’s pallida belongs
to a genus new to the northern part of North America.” Prof.
Emerton states that the Afide were determined for him by Mr.
Peckham and include one new species: Hadrocestum montanum from
the Rocky Mountains and those from the Polaris Arctic Expedition were

sent to Prof. Ermerton by Prof. Packard.

The bibliography of spiders is also discussed and the reference
given on pp. 401 and 402. Emerton, Peckham, Hentz, Keyserling,
Thorell, Cambridge and Blackwell being the authors who wrote from
1846 to the present time.

Four excellent lithographic plates accompany this paper, drawn
from nature by Prof. Emerton himself, and show clearly the crucial
and distinguishing characters of the numerous species in question.

Spiders are best collected in small glass bottles and preserved in
dilute alchohol. Systematic collecting in the Ottawa district would no
doubt reveal a large and important addition to the species named in
the list.

=
184 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST. oy
Catalogue List of Canadian Spiders described by Prof. J. Hu. Emerton.
No.| Genus and Species. Author. Locality. Province or
District.
I Epeira DSTA ween aes INESSyos cael Laggan, Rocky Mts..... Albers
2 Nordmanni....... N2 Spree Gaspé. wim cen tee vee Quebec.
Sa [/- SANE NETSTERN S45 Sa nloe Hmetton® .|Gaspesn, 2. tece es eee
AO |r Marmerea): seer Thorell ...|Lake of the Woods ...... Ontario.
Gaspé. [22 ~bceeeee yee
5 Se = tritolium ey .-|Hentz ....|Rocky Mts., poe ....-|Alberta.
ss CSE OR oa ee eas De oss eee Quebec.
Entry Island, Guif of St.
Lawreice...2.) Ame 3
Golite + = edisplicatarer cr =e Hentz ....|/Rocky, Mts., Laggan... .|Alberta.
ANTCOSt i. 2 a\.:0%.- © aes Quebec.
7il|on ee pataciatal yee eters Thorell-.) <a Flector. <2c eee eee -. Br. Columbia.
Lake of the Woods...... Ontario
Saskatchewan R..<.-..-1. NOWat
Montreal, Anticosti...... Quebec.
Triangle Harbor........- Labrador.
3 pss e esclopefarian so. 456 Clark.i-% Ottawa... ote eee Ontario.
9 Mie SUITS «et Poona a eke Hentz ....|Northern part of.......- Alberta.
Gasper ee Quebec.
Lake Winnipegosis ...... Manitoba.
LOM ere CLIVALEACA ters, eric. Keyserling.|Lake Winnipegosis...... | ae
II ce asoacwleatal. Ser.c eee Emerton. . Laggan, 52... .c2 st astemee | Alberta.
124) “°° carbonaria —~.0<.-. Kochi en Rocky Mts., Laggan..... | eum
eabradon. + 3-2 eee
Tou|Cullaanantantiss x. sox}. G."Koch: =.|Ship Harbor. =-- =.= Nova Scotia.
14 |Singa variabilis ........ Emerton . |Ellis Bay, Anticnsti...... Quebec.
15 |Argiope transversa ...... Emerton: ...| Ottawas. 2. .246--8e- = |Gntario.
16 |Tetragnatha extensa ....|Linné..... }Anticosti, Entry Island. . a
Saskatchewan R......... N. Ws TE.
17 |Pachygnatha brevis. ....|Keyserling.|Montreal............... Quebec.
18 |Theridium sexpunctatum |Emerton —.|English Head, Anticosti | *
Ig |Steatoda guttata........ (Reuss) .. |Bryon I., Gulf of St. Law-|
Thorell.. .- rence ; Mapisca..... Que. & Lab.
20 fs borealis ......|/Emerton .. Montreal , Shiau See Quebec.
21 a matmorata. : .;.|Emertonycai 995° | oveaee eer Se
22 5 fusca. o25 cl Nee Dae Laggan’... eee 'Rocky Mts.
23 |Theridula spherula...... Emerton . .|St. George's Cove, Cast ‘Quebec.
24 |Euryopis funebris . ....|/Emerton .|Bet. Lat. 49° and 52° ....jRocky Mts.
25 |Ceratinella brunea ...... Emerton’: /Ottawa: ..5'. cs. <0 nee Ontario.
Rocky}, Miss(?)c soe eee
26 “ NEB PAY seer ctf ores Emerton ..|Ottawa, peat bog. ...... a
27 s letabilis -<......|Emerton..]|~ ** .S\) eee 2
28 Me rept) ec ee Emerton..| *‘ ‘tahoe ie
29 es laticeps........ IN 3 Dion ache Near Laggan........ -.../Alberta.
30 |Lophomma cristata .... |Emerton .. | Montreal, under leaves. . .;Quebec.

Nores, Reviews AND COMMENTS. 185 —
Genus and Species. | Author. Locality. Province or
District.
Lophomma elongata .. ata ....|Emerton .|Ottawa, peat bog........ Ontario.
Lophocarenum decem- |
oculatum....... ‘Emerton . .|Laggan, 5,000 ft ........ ‘Rocky Mts.
“* oculatum. . Emerton .-|Peat’ Boo, Ottawa-....5..\1 ‘Ontario.
Spiropalpus spiralis... ... [Emerton .. LOGha 6925). eehes ok so Rocky Mts.
Tmeticus plumosus...... ‘Emerton ..|Moutreal 25. 020.0. <.. a ‘Quebec,
$5 pectinatus .... IN. Spas -uilanpaicy tcc e ey ae ‘Alberta.
Linyphia humilis........ PO. Sie e ans SF pel ens nah Rocky Mts.
Linyphia phrygiana ..... C. Bach.;.2(Recleg:- Mts ¢ auc. 2. ee
GasBen Set ates 3 wa histo set | COU Dees
Stemonyphantes bucculen-)
1S Copa eee (C. Crick) [Lat ag taiser..s- an. os cm Alberta.
|\Thorell....}Long. 110° to 114° ......
Diplostyla nigrina ...... \(Westr.)...{Perroquet I.......... ..|Labrador.
: PRO pre
= concolor..... }Emerton:, . {Montreal <2 22.65 saeeu- 2 Quebec.
ss Canadensis ..|Emerton.. BT phan eas ears epee as s
Microneta viaria ........ Emerton .. ban aint Sent Seale dle os
E quinquedentata Emerton .. NR aE A iridaee ic “s
Amaurobius silvestris ....| Emerton ..|Near Laggan ...... ....|Rocky Mts.
Lake of the Woods...... ‘Ontario.
Gas pO Sige tele dead eee Quebec.
Titanceca Americana .... |Emerton . |Above Laggan (6,700 to}
$3, 500i) ie eet aera Rocky Mts.
Lathys pallida..........| Wapource. Near Lappany se. ct ae ac | a
Tegenaria brevis........| emer Ve(CRASDC > (Ue as etna Quebec
i derhamii .... (Scopoli) ey EM Sine ee
: |Thorell.
Hahnia bimaculata... .. Emerton . |Lake Winnipegosis ..... Manitoba.
** cinerea ... ....|Emerton ..|Peat bog, near Ottawa... .|Ontario.
Agalena nevia.......... Walck. and
BOR cst. Lake Winnipegosis ..... Manitoba.
Bryon I., Gulf of St. Law-
TEN CGy ae oe 15 eee Quebec.
Agroeca repens ........ Be Sp. - os Lagpant ooettere on cae ees Rocky Mts.
Phrurolithusalarius...... Emerton . .|Lake of the Woods ...... Ontario.
Peecilochroa variagata_..|Emerton. ig = .
Gnaphosa conspersa ....|Thorell ...|Near Laggan ........... Rocky Mts.
Lake of the Woods ...... Ontario.
- brumalis...... Thorell .. |Laggan (abou 5,000 ft.) ..| Rocky Mts.
Strawberry Harbour ..... Labrador.
Elbs Bay accrcens ote Anticosti.
Drassus coloradensis ..../Emerton .|Near fe a freee Wace Rocky Mts.
Pee RODUSEUS.. ..../. >... Himenton..: |) ' **" Wo Rien ue ers =
Micaria constricta ...... IN Spe in: EE Faerie See Be
Some PITMAN 5% oo sor ahe Emerton ..|Below Laggan .......... es
Prosthesima atra........ Emerton . .
Clubiona ornata ........ Emerton... (Gaspe. . . ux aad ease as Quebec,
«© Canadensis ....|Emerton ..|Gaspé, Montreal ........ =
Xysticus ferrugineus ....)N. Sp. .../Near Laggan ........... Rocky Mts.
triangulosus ..../N. Sp..... ag ee +
> bimacolatus ....|N. Sp..... Above Laggan..... see +

186

Tue OrrawsA NATURALIST.

No.

93

Genus and Species. Author.
|Xysticus pulverulentus. |N. Sp.....
|Cariarachne versicolor Keyserling
Oxyptuia conspurcata....|/Thor......
Misumenia vatia AUIS cont
ae aleatoniae = so) Emerton ..
= asperata...... Emerton ..
Philodromus bidentatus..|Emerton ..
oe inquisitor ...|Thorell.. .
Tibellus Duttonii ...... KEYS ses)
Thanatus coloradensis. ...|Keys.....-
|Phidippus tripunctatus ...|Emerton .
Dendryphantes zstivalis .|Peckham..
militaris . |Emerton .

Reis amit ratus 7. cnc Veckham.
\Neon nellii.............|Peckham..
itdsypalluStriscr .. sue. Peckham..
Habrocestum splendens. |Peckham. .
Salus pulexeese ses Peckham. .
Habrocestum montanum.|Emerton ..

(N. Sp.)
Tale peak fumosa (N. Sp.)..|/Emerton . .
Beanii (N. Sp.)...| Emerton
«¢ quinaria (N. Sp. :: Emerton ..
ce a POMas tt.) cae Emerton ..
oP ipratenSis 7. <jaan9 ete Emerton

“ec

albohastata(N Sp.)|Emerton . .

Pardosa groenlandica ....|Thorell.. .
ss placialis®: 2.2 <.0% Thorell....
tS TNCACA, starters = Emerton ..
Ht tachypoda. ..... Emerton ..
‘s luteola (N Sp)...|Emerton ..
? lapidicina */<..\.. Emerton . .

Dolomedes tenebrosus.. .|Hentz.....

ce sexpunctatus ..|Hentz.....

Locality. T'rovince or
District.
Near, Wagount. nee Rocky Mts.
.|Collected by Mr. Tyrrell,
LSS pr as nw iavanniaa ome ¢
Peat bog, near Ottawa... .|Ontario.
lA EICOSUlnge roots me enters Gulf of St. L.
Me oan ee Alberta.
Gaspé "orc: gore s epee Quebec
oe oc
6) LEN eee Sie ae Hac A
Path to L. Agnes, 6,70c
6,900: fh a5 Rocky Mts.
Lagoa gece eel eee =
Lake of the Woods ..... Ontario.
BUS) Bay yon <a ....|Anticosti.
Mr. Bean’s and Mr. Tyr-
rell’s collections. .... Rocky Mts.
Lake of the Woods ..... Ontario.
Box Bay: 2 ¢= ss<a32 soe Anticosti.
Fox Bay and Lake =
NIPeROSIS) = ass as *
Near Ottawa eT oe Alberta.
See cai oe Ontario.
Bliss Day soe tee os
Shipyhlar bor. sess t oe ee Anticosti.
Near Ottawa. eee Nova Scotia.
Gerry tars hemenes gob ce Ontario.
No loc. indicated .. ...-.
sas oaninet, cet neta Rocky Mts.
Loc. not. ind. Alberta.
Bagpanier+ Soc acacm eke Rocky Mts.
LaAGgan aie 5. sae emir £S
Lake of the Woods ....’.. Ontario.
GASPGle hn ere ee Quebec.
Anticosti State ates 4
Port Hawkesbury ....... Gulf of St. L,
Wap oan...006hr seen Rocky Mts.
Babrador sere ester cree
AMLICOSE ee. see Quebec
Lake of the Woods...... Ontario
Wa goa nn ete =e pte nei Rocky Mts.
Port Hawkesbury........ Gulf of St. L.
| Deitee) WP R mes io ISS Rocky Mts.
Bryon oo ick eee Gulf of St. L.
[alee i oy «ance veces...) Rocky Miss
Loc. not indicated
ee “e
Gaspes x. sent ee eee Quebec.
Lake of the Woods...... Ontario.
ae

Norges, Reviews anp COMMENTs. 187

Mr. Tyrrell, whose researches in hydrachnide, sarcoptide, etc., are
well known to the members of our Club, has kindly prepared the following
notice of Dr. Koenike’s paper on “ Nordamerikanische Hydrachniden”
for the NATURALIST.

II. NortH AMERICAN WATER-MITES.

This report of sixty octavo pages contains a clear and exhaustive
description of a collection of Canadian Water-mites, made by Mr.
Tyrrell, of the Geological Survey Department, in this city. partly in the
vicinity of Ottawa, and partly in the lakes and streams of the Rocky
Mountains, between the Canadian Pacific Railway and the Inter-
national Boundary line.

Dr. Koenike here describes thirty species, belonging to fourteen
different genera, sixteen species and one genus being new. The
descriptions are illustrated by seventy-two beautiful figures, arranged
on two folding and one single plate. The paper will be a classic in the
literature of these minute and usually bright coloured inhabitants of
clear water, as it contains the first full and systematic description of a
collection of Water-mites from North America.

The species of more particular interest to the Naturalists of Ottawa
are £y/ais extendens. the small red mite so often seen swimming among
the weeds in quiet water. JA/:deopsis orbicularis, with its clear yellow
body, and light red band down the back, was found in Patterson’s
Brook, near Bank street, on the 2oth of January, 1883. TZyrre/lia.
circularis, a reddish-brown water-mite, 4 inch in length, with oval
or almost circular dorsal outline, found crawling on the mud in
a pond at Deschenes, on one of the Field Club Excursions on
the 2nd of September, 1882. ‘This species is the type of the new
genus Tyrrellia. Zzsmnesta anoma/a, a rather large mite, with sky blue
legs found in Meach’s Lake. <A/ax yfstlophorus parasitic in the gills
of Anodonta fragilis. Atax'ingens, a milk-white form, as large as a
pea, found parasitic in the gills of Anodonta fragilis and Unio com-

planatus from Meach’s Lake. <Afax /ossu/atus parasitic in the gills of
Unio luteolus from the Rideau river.

Most of the specimens supplied were coilected in Alcohol, but
water-mites, soft-bodied and generally brightly coloured creatures, are
said to be best preserved in a three per cent. solution of Chloral Hydrate.

5
b
%
;
:
5
:

ee ee Ty

21 ei.”
: - <e
188 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.
Genus. Species. Ottawa, Ont. Rah jy a PRE eine gn Mts.
Eylais Rylais.. _extendens, O. F. Mueller.;.-.....:,4 4). OL TAM NGHeE Serra eet x
Arrenurus lautus, M.SP-+-- 2... ees ee ee eee eee <1
" interpositus, N.sp......... Pan Any one : x
" Setgen; MeSPs cee aes crema ee ere x
" krameriimispers. mos sie ete ee eae x
Aturus scaber,’ Kramens<):<5 0 oe eieeaeee <x
Mideopsis orbiculatis),O-7n) Muellere ees. ee x
Feltria minuta, Koenike...... ... See x
Thyas pedunculata, misprs. eee phe Ee x
" Stolli ne sps eee meres ants ee eee eo x
eataphractaycsp.G.co.c se Nee x
Tyrrellia circularis, N.Sp..........-+--+---+0- x
Lebertia tau-insieuita, Lebert : 2.7... 70 ae x
Sperchon glandulosus, Koenike............... x
" PaLMatis; Usp <2... 2.10 =) os Sees eee x
" tenuipal pis; *n-Sp.. 2 <2, Sale tee ee x
Limnesia undulata, ©; bMueller..-- = oe x
" koenikei, PiGISIgy. FL, 9 se cise oe eae ee x
" anomala,saisprescs. << serge oe oo ree x
Curvipes fuscatns;sHermdann? =. oes © oases x
" guatemalensis, Stoll. . HR ees me
Atractides Gvaligi Roéemke. Snot. 2 os bee x
Hygrobates longipalpis; Hermannen. 2.2. 2c. k> soe x
" @xilis, MISPao sea nee ae WEE Se Sete } x
" decaporas; miSpseeeeeere s.r x
" MUultiporus; DiSPss seks {o-iee'-1 ss ee x
Atax ypsilophorus,Boazse--.-- en ese ere x
4 vermalis,; Mueller=aee =. s25to% 2 tare x

a INSENS) NSP at Sa ees et see = eee
i fossulatus;"nisp sneeee ooo Se ee eeee x

“

(1) FLETCHER,; JAMES, F.LS., F.R.S.C., “ Practical Entomology,”
being tae presidential address delivered before the Geol. and
Biological Section of the Royal Society of Canada, May 15th, 1895.
Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., Second Ser., Vol. 1., Sec. LV., pp. 3-45-, T895.
This paper, the first published in the new series of the Transactions

of the Royal Society, contains a succinct account of the value of scien--

tific knowledge to the practical] problems of every day life. The history
of economic entomology from, the days of Aristotle and Pliny the

Elder to thoseof Muffet in 1634 isgiven downtothe present time, including

Linneus, Fabricius, Latreille, Curtis, Westwood, Capper, Yeates, Bar-

but, with Kirby and Spence who followed each other and raised a monu- ~

ment which enables us to ascertain the fundamental and permanent
relations which exist between plant and insect iife. The work done by

John Curtis, founder of the Royal Agric. Society of England, by Miss

E. A. Ormerod, one of our Corresponding Members, by Mr. C.;White-

cay 1g. c a lel ea ’ i ae

Nores, Reviews anp ComMENTs. 189

hea dare also noticed, after which the interesting digest of work done in
economic entomology in Canada is carefully considered.

How tocontroll injurious insects by remedies, by natural enemies,
by vegetable parasites, 1s then considered at length and the
excellent work done by Giard in France, by Snow in Kansas, by Forbes
in Illinois, by Thaxter in Massachussetts is recordeu. ‘This interesting
as well as useful address closes with methods of treatment from an
agricultural standpoint and an appeal for systematic co-operation.

(2) The “WVaturaliste Canadien” is doing good work in distributing
useful information in economic entomology. Many of its articles are
profusely illustrated by wood-cuts and some of our garden and farm

pests can be readily identified by the readers.
H. M. A.

. Pictou Academy.—The Academy building, Pictou, Nova Scotia,

was struck by lightning in the night of Oct. 29th. and destroyed by fire.
We regret to have to chronicle this loss to education and science.
All the original collections of fresh-water sponges, snakes, as well as
minerals, which Dr. A. H. MacKay had made and stored in the
Museum and laboratories of the Academy, perished in the flames. We
heartily sympathize with Dr. MacKay and with the principal, staff and
trustees of the Academy in this loss. We learn with pleasure that the
Academy is to be rebuilt with modern improvements. It is earnestly
hoped that the building will be a fire-proof one, so that some of the
valuable collections of books and specimens which were saved from the
flames will not be subjected to such risks.

The collections which we had the pleasure of examining in the
Academy, in October 1895, only a few days before the fire, were most
valuable and reflected great credit upon Dr. MacKay and the Pictou
people who had worked so energetically in building up one of the most
important local museums in the country. Donations to the new
Academy Museum will soon be in order.

190 THE OrrawaA NATURALIST.

FOSSIL INSECTS FROM THE LEDA CLAYS OF OTTAWA —

AND VICINITY.
By H. M. Ami.
(Read before the Club, Dec. 20th. 1894.)

Fossil Insects are of rare occurrence in the calcareous
nodules or concretions of the ‘ Leda clay’ formation (Pleistocene) about
Ottawa. So far, we know of only /our species, all of which were
described as new species by the eminent authority, Dr. S. H. Scudder
of Cambridge Mass. to whose facile pen the world is greatly indebted
for valuable contributions to Palzeo-Entomology. Zree of these species
were discovered by the writer and one by Sir William Dawson. ‘They
all came from nodules collected along the south bank of the Ottawa
River, below Ottawa City, and form an interesting series to which
will no doubt be added a great many nore when the fauna of these
rocks is better understood.

The first three species of fossil insects described by Dr. Scudder
were (Coleoptera.

(1) Fornax ledensis, Scudder. This species was the first fossil
insect found in the calcareous nodules of Green’s Creek and was
described by Dr. Scudder in one of the reports the Geological Survey
of Canada published in 1894. *

It was associated with J/a//otus villosus, Cuv. or capeling, the most
abundant fossil fish in the nodules at the same mae

(2) Tenebrio calculensis, Scudder. t

This species is compared with Zenebrio molitor which occurs in
North America from Nova Scotia to Mexico and is also found in
Alaska.

(3) Byrrhus Ottawaénsts, Scudder. ¢

(4) Phyrganea ejecta, Scudder. . The fourth fossil insect
discovered in the “‘ eda Clay” belongs to the Neuroptera. It isa

caddis-fly found by the writer in a nodule at Green’s Creek, Ottawa R.,.

and has only just recently been described by Dr. Scudder in the
Canadian Record of Science, Montreal.

I am indebted to the Editor of the Can. Rec. of Science for
advance copies of the description of this fossil insect, also for the block

*Contrib. to Can. Pal.; Vol II, pt.2. p. 39, Pl. ITI, figs. 3 and 4, Ottawa, 1894.
+ loc. cit. p. 31. Pl. IIT, figs. 1 and 6
} loc. cit. pp. 40 and 41, Pl. II, figs. 6 and 8.

Nores, Revinws ANp ComMMENTs. 191

which accompanies the description and serves to_ illustrate the
venation of this insect. The description given by Dr, Scudder runs as

follows :—

“* The few insects that have been hitherto found in the Leda clays or in similar
horizons in America have all been Coleoptera. The present specimen, of which a
figure is here given, enlarged six diameters, is a cadis-fly, one of the Neuroptera. It
was found by Dr. Henry M. Ami, of the Geological Survey of Canada, in the nodules
of Green’s Creek and sent me for examination. . It is of a glistening, dark, smoky
brown color, with black veins which are
followed with some difficulty, especially
where two wings overlap. The clearest and
most important part of the neuration is in
the upper portion of the fore-wing ; but un-
fortunately it exhibits in full only the princi-
pal cells. These are enough to show that it
is a caddis-fly, and that it falls near, if not in
the genus Phryganea proper, but it difters in
important points from all the species I have
examined in the Museum of Comparative
Zoology at Cambridge, containing the large
collection of the late Dr. Hagen. The
difference consists principally in the great
length of the thyridial area and of the median
cellule, so that the distal termination of the
lower cellules is much farther removed from
the base of the wing than is that of the upper.
It represents a tolerably large species, the _

f preserved fragment being 10 mm. long and
t the probable original length of the fore-wing
at least 15 mm. It may be called

Aryganea ejecta.”
Phryganea ejecta, Wi. Sp. Phryganeaee

THE MICROSCOPICAL SOIREE.

The opening Conyersazione and Exhibition of Microscopical
objects and Natural History specimens took place on Uuesday evening
26th. November last in the large Assembly Hall of the Normal
School, Ottawa, on which occasion there were upwards of 200
persons present. An address of welcome by Dr. J A. McCabe, M.A.,
F.R.S.C., Principal of the Provincial Normai School opened the
proceedings, after which Dr. R. W. Ells on behalf of the Ottawa
Literary and Scientific Society, of which he is president, read a short
paper on the future work of societies of this kind in Ottawa in which he
strongly urged united effort and advocated the scheme of lectures now
carried on in Montreal, known as the “‘ Somerville Lectures” endowed

192 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

by the Rev. Jas. Somerville some fifty years ago and requiring only
about $5,000. 6

Mr. F. T. Shutt, M. A.. F.I.C., president of the Ottawa Field
Naturalists’ Club followed in a short and neat address in which he
described the good work carried on by the Club in Ottawa, not losing
sight of its educating influences in the community. Mr. Shutt’s
paper it is hoped will be published in exfemso in a forthe
issue of the Orrawa NATURALIST.

Dr. Ami, was then called upon to describe the various specimens
on exhibition both in the cases and under the various miscroscopes in the
room.

The following gentlemen had charge of the microscopical part of
the entertainment :— Prof. Wm. Saunders, F. R. S. C., Prof. £. E.
Prince, B. A, F.L.S., Mr. W. Babbington, Mr. D. B. Dowling, B.A.Sc.
Mr. Walter Odell, Mr. Andrew Halkett, Mr. W. J. Wilson, Ph. B., Dr.
H. M. Ami, Mr. Marsh, B.A., F.C.S. Besides the microscopes, Mr.A.
McGill, B. A., B. Sc. had on view and in excellent working order a
fine Gerhardt spectroscope from Berlin, Germany.

Mr. and Mrs. Beddoe, Miss Lamb and Mr. Miller favoured the
audience with vocal and instrumental music during the evening. The
musical parts were admirably rendered and appreciated by all.

The winter course is thus open for the season 1894-1895
and if the attendance at the last meeting is an earnest of what it will
be at the forthcoming soirées, the success of the whole course is
secured.

To the Ottawa [Electric Co. and to Mr. Wm. Scott especially we
are greatly indebted for so generously putting in the electric wires and
lamps for microscopical work grafvs. |The display was most elaborate
and satisfactory.

Announcement.—Prof. Macoun and Mr. James Fletcher will
take charge of the next meeting or Soirée to be held in the same _ hall
on Thursday, 5th December, 1895. ‘“The value of Botany in Agriculture”
will be discussed by the former, and Mr. Fletcher will read a paper on the
subject. “ ANaturalist in British Columbia.” These two papers will be
“copiously illustrated with specimens. A large attendance is expected. °

THE OTTAWA NATURALIST.

Mays <br. . OTTAWA, JANUARY, 1896. No. 10.

ERYTHRITE; STILPNOMELANE var. CHALCODITE; CRYS-
TALLIZED MONAZITE ; AND PLEOCHROIC APATITE
FROM SOME CANADIAN LOCALITIES.

By W. F. Ferrier, B.A.Sc., F.G.S., Geological Survey of Canada.

(Communicated by permission of the Director.)

Erythrite.

This minera! was detected by the writer in some rock specimens
collected in 1893 by Mr. A. E. Barlow of the Geological Survey on the
-west shore of Rabbit Lake, District of Nipissing, Ont. It occurs in
thin earthy crusts, of a dullish peach-red color, lining fissures in a
diabase which cuts the Huronian rocks of the locality, and is accom-
panied by a green mineral, apparently containing nickel and arsenic,
which may be the hydrous arsenate of nickel, annabergite, but the
available material was not sufficient for a satisfactory determination of
its true character to be made.

In composition erythrite is a hydrous arsenate of cobalt contain-
ing when pure 38 4 % arsenic acid, 37.6 { cxide of cobalt, and 24 % of
water, but the cobalt is nearly always repiaced in part by nickel, iron,
and calcium.

When abundant it is a valuable ore of cobalt, and its occurrence in
Canada has been so seldom noticed* that it was thought desirable to
place on record this new locality discovered by Mr. Barlow.

As the mineral almost invariably accompanies other ores of cobalt
(sulphides etc.), from whose alteration it is frequently derived, a further
examination of the locality is to be wished for, which, even if it did not
reveal the mineral in workable quantity,as from its mode of occurrence is
scarcely to be expected, might bring to light other compounds of cobalt
and nickel of interest to the mineralogist.

* It occurs in thin coatings at Prince’s Mine, Lake Superior, Ont., and in some

quantity at a new locality discovered by the writer and described by him in the forth-
coming Summary Report of the Geol. Survey of Canada.

-

194 THE OrtrawA NATURALIST.

Stilpnomelane zav. Chalcodite.

In 1893, amongst some specimens of hematite from the Wall-
bridge Mine in the township of Madoc, Hastings county, Ont., given to
him by Mr. John Stewart, the writer found a mineral which has proved
to be identical with that described by C. U. Shepard in 1851 under the
name of Chalcodite.*

Shepard’s mineral was from the Sterling Iron Mine in Antwerp,
Jefferson county, State of New York, where it occurs coating hematite
and calcite, and associated with the sulphide of nickel, millerite.

It is a hydrous silicate of iron, aluminium, and magnesium,
belonging to the Chlorite Group of Dana’s system of classification, but
its precise composition is still uncertain.

The material available in the case of the Canadian specimens was
not sufficient to admit of a quantitative analysis, but it is hoped that
more will be obtained so as to enable this to be carried out. From
its physical characters, however, and the results of the
qualitative examination there can be no doubt as to the identity of the
species. Its name, from the Greek word ya HO, brass or bronze, refers
to its characteristic color which has been well described as resembling
that of mosaic gold.

The Madoc mineral, like that from the State of New York, occurs
in cavities in the massive hematite, coating small crystals of specular
iron and associated with calcite, but millerite has not yet been observed
at the locality. It forms rosettes of small foliated plates with a submetallic
lustre, some of which are rudely hexagonal in outline. Its color is a yellow-
ish bronze. In the closed tube it yields much water, it is almost completely
soluble in hydrochloric acid, and before the blowpipe readily reacts for
iron and fuses to a black magnetic globule.

The occurrence of this mineral in Canada has not been hitherto
recorded.

Monazite.

Some three or four years ago whilst at the Villeneuve Mica Mine
in Ottawa County, Quebec, the writer was fortunate enough to finda

* Trans Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci. Vol. VI, p. 232, 1851.

Eryrarite ; STILPNOMELANE var. CHALCopITE, Ere. 195

good crystal of this rare and interesting species which, in its massive
_ form, had been recorded in the Annual Report of the Geological Survey
for the year 1886.* An analysis was also published by the late Dr. F. A
Genth in 1889 t

The crystal to which I now refer measures about 12 x 8 mm., is
flattened parallel to the orthopinacoid, as is often the case in monazite,
and is of a clove-brown to reddish-brown color with a decidedly resinous
lustre on fractured surfaces. A blowpipe examination and qualitative
tests shewed its general composition to be that of monazite.

The faces of the crystal are too rough to admit of precise measure-
ments, but the following planes were determined with a tolerable degree
of accuracy: —

oo PH, «0 Peo, 0 P3,0 P2, Po, Po.

The crystal was isolated, imbedded in albite, and was readily

broken out from its matrix.

Apatite.

It is a fact not generally known amongst mineralogists that at many
of the phosphate mines along the Du Liévre River, Quebec, beautiful
translucent to transparent specimens of apatite are to be found which
possess the property of pleochroism in a most marked degree.
In an almost transparent cleavage piece measuring 13 x I5 mm.
which now lies before me, the color, viewed in the direction of the -
principal axis of the crystal, is a bluish-green, whilst in a direction at
right angles to this it isa rich oily green, the contrast being most marked.

Little cubes } in. and more in diameter have been cut from similar
cleavages and serve to illustrate pleochroism, for teaching purposes, to
perfection. The only mention of similar crystals from a North American

locality which has come under my notice is a short note by Mr. Geo.
F. Kunz { on a fragment of an apatite crystal from near Yonkers in the

State of New York.
*Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Can. 1886, Part T. p. 11.
+Am. Jour. Sci., Vol. XXXVIII, p. 203, 1889.
t Am. Jour Sci., Vol. XXXVI, p. 223, 1888.

196 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

NOTES ON THE FLORA OF ONTARIO.

By JoHN MACOUN. M. A., F. L. S.™

I

The Geological Survey Department has published, during the past

ten years, a catalogue of Canadian plants in six parts. The scope of
this catalogue was restricted to a bare record of the localities at which |
our Canadian plants were know to occur with an occasion il description’
of a new species or a note on specific or varietal differences, peculiarity —
of habit, etc. I had hoped for many years that some botanist residing
in Ontario would make a special study of the plants of that province,
and give the results of his work to the scientific public. Nothing
of this kind has been done, however, and apparently nothing is —
contemplated. At the repeated solicitation of those who feel the
need of such work, I have decided to utilize my holidays and such time
as can be spared from my regular duties, in studying and collecting the
flora of Ontario. Much has, of course, alrady been done, but next —
spring I shall set to work systematically to accumulate material and
describe our plants in such a manner that the field botanist may —
eventually have a field book for field work. Should I not be spared to
complete the work, the result of my labors will be kept in such a con-
dition that any competent botanist can continue and complete what I

.

have begun.

My experience as a teacher of botany and the difficulty I have often
had in determining plants from descriptions alone, have shown me that
amateur botanists and botanical students have a much greater excuse
than they themselves suppose, for their frequent inab.lity to name
correctly the plants they collect. This difficulty almost invariably arises
from inadequate or misleading descriptions and a failure on the part ot
those who write them to clearly state the essential differences between
the species they describe and nearly related ones; old names and old
descriptions are also frequently made to include plants they were never
intended to cover and which should be re-described and occasionally
re-named,

ADDRESS RY THE PRESIDENT OF THE O.F.N.C. 197

In a hurried compilation of the flora of Ontario I have enumerated
1633 species of flowering plants and ferns as being found within the
borders of the province and the tabulated statement below shows the
numerical relation between the plants of Ottawa and its vicinity and
the Province of Ontario. It is not pretended that all the species in
either region is given but the estimates are under, not above, the actual
number. The Ottawa destrict is intended to included an area of 30
miles around Ottawa.

TOTAL NUMBER OF ONTARIO. OTTAWA.
RI os on oc ie lac arn aos ie 1633 968
femeaecons Flants:... -/2..-.....2% 1409 821
MEME E feiste'. 2. se ares ee ioe 139 96
PRM, 5) Ess ie oa hes oe igra ee 85 51

In future numbers of the NATURALIST notes on critical species and
_ the results of some of our studies wili be printed, and Western Quebec
will, on account of its close proximity to Ottawa, be also confidered.

ADDRESS BY THE PRESIDENT OF THE OTTAWA FIELD
NATURALISTS’ CLUB—MR. PRANK T. SHUTT,M.A.,F.I.C.,F.C.S.

AT THE CONVERSAZIONE HELD IN THE ASSEMBLY HALL OF THE NORMAL
SCHOOL, 26th Nov., 1895.

Mr. Chairman, Ladies and Gentlemen.

We decided—and I think wisely—that this the first evening of our winter
programme should take the form of a conversazione: an occasion when ample
opportunity would be affordei our members for friendly intercourse and the
consideration and enjoyment of the many and varied objects of Natural History
displayed. It is not my intention therefore to speak at any length to-night. In the
few words I have to say, however, it is my wish, with your permission, to bring
before you the objects and functions of the Society of which I have the honour to be
president—THE OTTAWA FIELD NATURALISTS’ CLUB— pointing out the advantages
to be derived by those members who take a real interest in her work and asking you
to consider the claims which our Society, as an educational institution, has upon the
citizens of Ottawa.

The principal object of the Club is, I take it, to inculcate a greater love for and
interest in Nature as she is manifested in the plant and animals about us, fostering a

198 THE OTTAWA NATURALIST.

closer and more systematic study of the many forms of life with which this earth teems,
and of the earth which gives them a habitation. The chief funetion of the Club is to
assist in this study al] deserving help, by lectures, by our publication, by field
excursions and by such evenings as the present, when the wonders of the earth and
sky and sea are revealed under the searching power of the microscope.

It would seem to me that a society fulfilling such an object, performing such a
function —and I trust I am sincere in saying that the club is striving to do both —is
doing a great and a good work. And perhaps more especially in these latter times
is this a noble work, for it appears to me that now-a-days the majority of people
divide their time between the getting of money or position and the following of the
lighter recreations. While undoubtedly both of these should find a place in the
programme of one’s life, it is certainly a grave mistake to allow the serious matters
of life and what I may term its evanescent pleasures to control all our energies, to
absorb all our time and talent, I would make a strong plea for the study of the Natural
Sciences— Zoology, Botany and Geology—not from a utilitarian standpoint, though
on that score it could be urged with a good deal of enphasis—but for the reason that
it is a study of great educational value, improving and developing as no other branch of —
learning can, the faculties of observation and deduction—faculties that expand the mind
improve the memory, sharpen the critical power and stimulate good judgment. Itisa
study that not onlystores our mind with useful and interesting data of great service in this
eminently practical age, but one also that opens new avenues of real and lasting
enjoyment : vivifying the imagination and awakening our admiration in the revelation
of the wonderful but often hidden phases of life that everywhere abound. These
avenues are closed as with a five-barred gate against the money getter and
that chip of humanity that floats, tossed here and there on the sea of frivolity. Further,
I believe that the study of the life habits and life mechanism, and function of plants and
animals hasa distinct ethical value; but of this, I must not allow myself to speak on this
occasion. May I sum up my arguments by saying that the study of the Natural Sciences
is worthy of a place side by side with the Classics and with English, as an educator not
only of practical value but also as one leading to the best and truest culture.

Our club had a small beginning some sixteen years ago, but its growth has been
steady, its progress and development very satisfactory. Instituted by a few earnest
enthusiastic gentlemen determined tu study Natural History and to help one another
in their work, it has now grown to a Society of no mean standing. It can point to
an honourable and valuable record in its journal of the progress that has been made by
her members in the study of the flora and the fauna and the geology of this district.
We have a membership roll of between 200 and 300 and an annual and entirely —
free course of lectures on Natural History subjects; we have during the summer months
field excursions in the environs of Ottawa—which are opportunities for practicaj
work when the assistance of our leaders is always available for the determination
of the specimens collected.

ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT OF THE O.F.N.C. 199

At the present time we are looking to an increased membership, in the hope of
being able to still further improve the “‘ Orrawa NaTuRALIsT,” our official organ.
Both in appearance and make up, it is now deserving of the highest commendation ;
but we are anxious to enlarge it and its scope. To mention but one feature—we
should like to devote a number of pages monthly to the review of current work in
Natural Science the world over. In our present condition, such an advance is
impossible. We are entirely self-sustaining, Le it remembered. The Club receives
no grant or annuities; we must therefore look to a further co-operation on the
part of our citizens before we can take this next step forward. I may be allowed to say
as one who knows the workings of the Society intimately, and certainly not in any
sense of boastfulness—that I do not know of any association in Canada that has more
to offer for its annual subscrtption ($1.00), or of any society in the country that has
unaided done more fro fono publico than the OrrawA FIELD NATURALISTS’
CLup.

Our inembership is by no means restricted, as might be thought by some, to
those who in the professional sense of the term man be called scientists. We are
certainly particularly fortunate in having among our members many who are devoting
their time exclusively to the study of scientific problems. We are glad that those of
the scientific branches of the Government service as well as those in the various
educational institutions of the city,are with us in our work, taking an active interest in
the Club’s weliare and extending always a helping hand to the novice, a feature which
I feel sure you will recognize as characteristic of our Club. Nevertheless, we invite all;
for are we not all learners? The old and the young alike may find an interest in
the fascinating study of Nature. We have on all occasions extended a warm
welcome to the Students of the Normal School, and they have always
responded well to our invitation. May we not confidently hope that by their
attendance at our meetings we have sown good seed that will bring forth fruit in many
a distant corner of the Dominion. The Club’s influence for good, therefore, extends
far beyond the confines of the Capital.

But, whether I have said enough or not to induce our friends to join us, I wish
it to be distinctly. understood that all—non-members as well as members—are
invited to this course of lecture that we inaugurate to-night—all are welcome. In
the fullest sense of the word the lectures, as they always have been with the Field
Naturalists’ Club, are free. We hope for and expect large attendances. By
your regular attendance you may accrue a benefit otherwise unattain-
able; by your presence here you will show your appreciation of the
efforts of those who have of their generosity placed their time and talent at our
disposal in preparing and delivering the addresses. The programme is one of unusual
merit, embracing subjects of great interest. The lectures throughout will be of a
didactic character, and many of them will be illustrated by lime-light views. Our
lecturers are those whose names are well known in Canadian science and literature.
Let us see to it that we show them our appreciation by our attendance and attention.

200 Tue OrrawA NATURALIST.

If we will do this, I can promise a successful season and one that we can —
look back upon as one of the pleasantest and most instructive in our history.

With an expression of thanks to those who are assisting us,- I will bring this
short address to a close. First, to the chairman of the evening, Dr. MacCabe, Principal
of the Normal School, one who has for many years past taken an active and real
interest in the work of the Club and to whose kindly office and influence with the Hon.
Minister of Education we are indebted for the permission to use the Assembly Hall
for our winter course of lectures. And then to Mr. Scott and the Ottawa Electric
Light Co. for their generosity in supplying on such a magnificent scale the brilliant
illuminant that we are using to-night to light up our microscopic objects. No little
of the success and éc/at of this conversazione is due to the fact that these gentlemen
put at our command the electric lamps which to-night serve such a useful and
ornamental purpose. And lastly I may be allowed to tender our thanks to those
ladies and gentlemen, Miss Lamb, Mrs. and Mr. Beddoe and Mr. Miller, who of
their goodness have made our programme so entertaining by vocal and instrumental
numbers. We have enjoyed and appreciated their efforts on our behalfand I know I
may assure them not only of our sincere thanks but also that,they have very materially
added to the pleasures of the evening.

ADDRESS BY DR. R. W. ELLS,

President of the Ottawa Literary and Scientific Society.

At the Conversazione given by the Literary and Scientific Society and the
Field Naturalists’ Club, at the opening meeting of the joint lecture course for the
present season, Dr. Ells, the president of the former, in a brief inaugural address
touched upon the work and aims of the two societies represented. In the course of
his remarks he said :—

‘* The inauguration of the present lecture course, under the joint auspices of the
Literary and Scientific Society and the Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club naturally calls
for a word of explanation. For some years the feeling has existed and has been
frequently expressed by many members of both societies, that their interests, and
those of the public generally, or at least of those who have been our patrons
in the past would be better served if some scheme of federation or affiliation could be
arranged, by which the erergies of both societies could be concentrated, and the interest
in the lecture courses could be maintained to the end of theseason, rather than
that it should diminish, as has been unfortunately too often the case. For it will, I
think, be conceded by everyone interested in the question, that so many lecture
courses are given in the city every winter, by societies and church organizations, that
the public interest in these is apt to grow weak and the attendance poor, except in
very exceptional cases. In view of this fact it seemed advisable to the boards of
management that the two societies here represented, should amalgamate the lecture

Appress BY Dr. R. W. ELts. 201

courses, hitherto separatety gi ven by each, every winter, and to give one really good
course of eight lectures which shall be made as attractive as possible.

While we are happy to be able to number on the membership rolls of both these
societies, many names, distinguished both in literature, science and art, it must be
admitted, as indeed is the case unfortunately in many other societies, that the part
taken by many of these is not so active as could be desired.

The advantages posssessed by a city like Ottawa, for becoming the centre of
literary and scientific life and thought for our Dominion, have not, I believe, except
by a comparatively few, been fully appreciated. The presence of the Geological
Survey is sufficient guarantee to show that a large number of men, proficient in
all the branches ef natural science, are available, while in the other Government
Departments are many men of world-wide reputation in the various departments of
science, literature and art. When to these we add the large staft of highly educated
men and women who control our numerous schools, and those who enjoy widely
extended fame in the professions of law, medicine and theology, we have a list of
names, such as, if their varied talent could be brought into our society, would render
that society unsurpassed anywhere in Canada at least.

For several years a movement has been on foot, tending towards the federation
of all the existing societies, in so far at least as that by joint action, some suitable
building might be provided which would constitute a home or head quarters for all.
So far, I regret to say, the movement has not been successful. This, I feel, is
greatly to be regretted, since now we have this unfortunate state of affairs, that some
ten or twelve socicties, several of which have similar aims, have to hold their regular
meetings in as many different places, often under very considerable disadvantages
and under conditions which seriously interfere with united action on their part.

The Literary and Scientific Society is among the oldest of the societies in
Ottawa. Founded in 1869 it has always maintained a somewhat prominent place in
the affection of the Ottawa public. It now has a very good library of over 3,000
volumes in which nearly all the departments of science and literature are represented,
with a well supplied reading room, where the leading periodicals and journals can be
found. The membership of the society is now about 300, but this, with its low
membership fee of only $2.00 per year for all its privileges, is sufficient to meet the
necessary running expenses, only by the exercise of the greatest economy, even with
the addition of the small grant of $400.00 a year which it receives yearly from the
Ontario Goyernment.

The society is also badly handicapped in not being able to secure suitable rooms
for its operations, which must be central and easy of access, and also furnish space
for our lecture courses. And though eftorts have been made year after year to obtain
proper permanent quarters, so far we have not succeeded. For some years, through
the generosity of one of our life members, the late Col. Allan Gilmour, the funds and
corresponding usefulness of the society were greatly aided by his donation of $500.00

202 “Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

annually by which means our library shelves were largely replenished. Since his
death we regret, to say, this donation has not been renewed, and as a
consequence great care in the management has been mecessary lest, in
discharging oar obligations to our members, serious financial difficulties be met.

In the City of Montreal, the Natural History Society, which has been in
existence for nearly seventy years, has been doing work on very much the same lines
as our own societies. It has this great advantage, however, that it has a local
habitation as wellasa name. It owns a fine building, containing museum, library
and lecture hall, which, purchased years ago when property was cheap, has now
become a very valuable asset indeed. That society, however, enjoys the further
advantage of having an endowment for lecture purposes. In 1837 the Rev. Jas.
Somerville, of Montreal, at his death left the sum of £1,000 currency to maintain an
annual course of lectures in connection therewith, which should be free to the
general public. As a result a special course of six lectures, called after his name, the
Somerville course, is delivered each winter, principally upon scientific subjects, which
have become a regular feature of the society’s work and by their excellence these have
secured an average attendance which is highly gratifying to the institution which has
the matter in charge. Such an endowed course should be established in our city
through the generosity of some of our large-hearted and wealthy citizens,
so that the best talent available in this direction might be secured. If,
indeed, this result could be accomplished by the Literary and Scientific Society, the
advantages to that institution would be very great indeed, and the society instead of
being, as at present, largely a reading room and a medium for circulating light
literature, would be foremost in the matter of furthering the interests of the highest
education. Such a course of lectures should be free to the public, and it is to be
hoped that before long we shall see arise in our midst a Canadian Carnagie, who,
having made a fortune in our city, shall become impressed with the desire to benefit
his fellows ; some Ottawa Carnagie who, following the example of the Pittsburg
magnate, will erect and endow a magnificent library, music hall, and art building, in
which all our societies can find a home; where art exhibitions, conversaziones, lectures,
musical recitals, etc., shall be given, whereby such an impetus would be given to the
development of a taste for literature, science and art, as would make the name
of Canada’s fair capital illustrious throughout the entire continent.

In the meantime, however, our warmest thanks are due to the Principal of the
Normal School, I'r. MacCabe, and to the Minister of Education for Ontario, for their
courtesy and consideration in extending to us, for the present course of lectures, the
use of this fine hall. and thus enabling us to present our several evenings’ entertain™
ments in the most favorable manner, not only to our own members but to all
interested therein. It is neédless to say that all the entertainments and lectures are
free of charge, and that all the students of the Ottawa Normal School are most
cordially invited to be present whenever it is possible for them to do so.

‘A’ vont BY Dr. R. W. ELLs.

I would also, on behalf of the Literary and Scientific Society, tender vur most
hearty thanks to our worthy member, Mr. Wm. Scott, and to the Electric Light Co,
for their kindness and liberality in providing us the present beautiful arrangement for
lighting our microscopic exhibit, thus making our evening so much more pleasan! and
attractive.

There is one other item in connection with the proposed scheme of affiliation

-which I would like to mention before I close, viz., that of the publication of a
scientific and literary journal. The only publication of the kind now in Ottawa is
that issued by the Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club, which has now appeared reguiarly
for about fifteen years. As however, this journal is published simply through funds
derived from membership fees in the society, at a nominal price of only $1.00 a year,
the possibilities of its expansion aré not great, though many excellent papers
pertaining to most of the departments of natural science have appeared from time to
time in its pages. It ought to be possible, however, in a city like this, possessed of
such a varied array of talent, to issue not only the best journal in Canada, but one
which shall equal any in the adjoining republic. A journal which would embody
the results of the operations of the large staff of explorers in the Departments of the
Interior and the Geological Survey would be of the greatest possible value in bringing
to the knowledge of Canada and the world at large, the extent, physical features and
resources of our own country, and would thus make widely known a vast store of infor-
mation much of which is now locked up in the Archives of the several Departments, or
appears from time to time in some blue book, in which form, it is allowable to say, it
does not always receive the publicity it demands. In this way also could be made
known the most interesting points in connection with the hfe history of our insects,
birds, plants, fishes, etc., the development of our mineral resources, the geographical
structure of the country, or the elucidation of many problems of a more strictly
scientific character ; while the discussion of literary subjects could also be taken up
and our most important lectures permanently recorded. For all this we have a store
of information and a staff of workers in this city unsurpassed anywhere on this
continent. At the present time, however, owing to lack of facilities for publication
here, many papers of great value are written for and published in foreign journals,
either in England or in the United States, and consequently Canada is, to a large
extent, deprived of the credit she should receive in this connection. Much of the
* proposed improvement in existing conditions could be brought about if a scheme of
centralization and fusion of all our forces could be effected.

I trust I have not wearied your patience by too lengthy explanation of this
scheme, and I hope the time is not far distant when some of our kopes or dreams in
this direction muy be realized. In the maantime, on the part of the Literary and
Scientific Society of Ottawa, I most cordially welcome you all to the present
conversazione, and trust that this hall will be well filled at each subsequent meeting
of the joint course of lectures throughout the present season.

204 Tue Ottawa NATURALIST.
“CANADIAN SPIDERS.” *

In looking over his collection of Canadian spiders, a few days ago,
Mr. J. B. Tyrrell, of the Geological Survey Department, Ottawa»
noticed quite a number of interesting Canadian localities for certain
forms which had been carefully named by Prof. Emerton—but inad-
vertently omitted in his paper noticed last month. In this connection
Mr. Tyrrell nas very kindly furnished the following note for THE
OTTAWA NATURALIST :—

“The following localities shou'd be added to the list of those
given in the Review of Prof. Emerton’s “Canadian Spiders” in the
December NATURALIST :—

No. Genus and Species. Author. 5 Locality. Collector.
| {

4 Epeira marmorea ...... Thorell:... ,|Ottawa- 5-3. ee Tyrrell.

en cee) CEO. =< ..|Hentz ....|Ottawa........<...,..5. “S

Wey oie *p s patapiata, +. ).1\s-eae (Ghoxell...~|Oltawa —s2- eae sg

14 Singa variabilis ........ Emerton’...'Alberta 222 ooo r ec ree
20 Steatoda borealis ......|Emerton..|Rocky Mts....... ....- on

52 Agalena nevia.......... Walck. and|

Bose® >. | Gaspesct.. ee ee Ells as eeen

56 Gnaphosa conspersa ....]Thorell . .jAlberta..... .......--. Tyrrell. eee
62 Prosthesima atra........ Emerton ..|Lake of the Woods...... Lawson. =.=:
88 ‘“ Beanii(N. Sp.)..~|Emerton .. Lake of the Woods......)/Lawson.....
94 Pardosa glacialis........ Thorell....|Rocky Mts......... .- '| Tyrell Se
96° tachypoda ...... Emerton)... |Gaspe... ; So<- por eee Bls\-a eee

——— EEE EEE

PECKHAM, GEORGE W. AND E izaBetH G.—“ Aftide of North-
America.” Trans. Wis. Acad: Sci. Art. and Letters, Vol. VII. pp. 104
with 6 plates, Madison. Sept. 1888. 4

In this paper the authors give an excellent résumé of the family
Attidz, or jumping spiders, after which they give a table showing the
distinguishing characteristics of the different genera.

The authors then identify or describe 69 species belonging to 31
different genera, collected from different parts of the United States and

*See OTTAWA NATURALIST, Vol. IX., pt. 9, p. 182 et seq., Ottawa, December, 1895.

Nores, Reviews anp ComMEnts. 205

- Canada. The species of more especial interest to Canadian readers
were collected by Dr. A. C. Lawson on Lake of the Woods, and by Mr.
J. B. Tyrrell in the vicinity of Ottawa. They are shown in the following
table :

List oF ATTID2% FROM CANADA.

Phidippus morsitans, ............. Walck.< ote foc Lake of the Woods.....
PRPS ATIS os... ce ee WWentz.s ccs ees Ottawa. sigs. Wa ee eae
Dendry phantes capitatus........... entz 2 ceiet ee eee ee
‘* flavipedes, (N. Sp.) erecknagic. sce. Otiawa:ts ...c cou acetates

OS RS Pientzc\ su5- seas ONaws.. 250s sc eee
Habrocestum cristatum............ Plentz.35.- tease Lake of the Woods, ....
ve So) LG GS Saree Peckhant.- 7<.0s) (QS ass on
Sait) Ue Hentz 30-4225 2 ooo aii cl Se ee

meen. (10. Sp.) . 6. en oes ss Peckham, 222° o. “

NOTES, REVIEWS AND COMMENTS.

Biology—Witson, Epmunp B,, Ph. D., etc. with the co-operation
of Edward Leaming, M. D. F. R. P.S. “An Atlas of the Fertilization
and Karyokinests ef the Ovum.” Columbia University Press, Macmillan
& Co., New York City, 4to with ten plates. This work isan admirable
contribution to science, with special reference to the early history of
the ovun: of the American sea-urchin ( Zvxopneustes variegatus). After
difficult experiments in the selection of a reagent which would
preserve, as Prof. C. S. Minot remarks, (Science, N.S., Vol, 11. No. 47.
p- 695.), “‘the living organization of the ovum with a minimum of
change, hundreds of these minute eggs, all in the same stage, were
imbedded at once, and sectioned together, leaving chance to determine
that some of them be cut in favourable planes. ‘The sections were
made as thin as practicab'e and were colored by Hardenhain’s iron
haematoxyline stain.” The “ reagent was a m:xture of 80 parts of
concentrated aqueous solution of corrosive sublimate and 20 parts of
glacial acetic acid.” Two hundred micro photographs were taken of the
’ best sections and forty have been selected and reproduced as photo-
types.

In his interesting review of Dr. Wilson’s work—Prof. Minot, (/oc.
ail. supra), says: —“ the forty phototypes, by themselves, suffice to give a

206 THE OTTAWA NATURALIST.

complete history of the maturation, fertilization and early segmen-
tation of the ovum,” and continues by pointing out that although less
clear than published drawings—they are absolutely accurate and free
from that element of personal interpretation which is unavoidable in
every drawing no matter how conscientiously made

The work is most welcome to all students of biology in whatever
department or field of research they may be working ; and the authors
can congratulate themselves upon this most important contribution to

eT

pure science.

Geology—Wuireaves, J. F.—‘‘ Notes on some Jossils fone the
Cretaceous Rocks of British Columbia, with descriptions of two species
that appear to be new.” Can. Rec. Science, April, 1895, 5 pp. Plate IL.
Contains descriptions of three species of Cretaceous fossils from [1ornby
and Denman Islands, in the Straits of Georgia. They were collected by
Mr. Walter Harvey of Comox, V. I. and sent to Mr. Whiteaves for
determination. The species are :-—

(1) Antsoceras Vancouverense, Gabb—sp.—a species closely related
to Hamites Fremontii, Marcou, and also to Axntsoceras armatum of
Sowerby. Mr. Whiteaves further states ‘‘that the fragment from Comox
described and figured by Meek as Aeteroceras Cooperi, is probably a
small piece of the abruptly bent part of Azésoceras Vancouverense.

(2) LHeteroceras Hornbvense. This provisional name is given to the
broad turbinate and dextral shell from Hornby Island, B.C. discovered
by Mr. Walter Harvey in 1894. In discussing the relations between
ffeteroceras and Antsoceras Mr. Whiteaves states:— ‘It is, perhaps,
doubtful whether the distinctions between Heteroceras and Antsoceras
can be maintained. In the one the earlier volutions are said to be
in contact while those of the other are described as separate and as
forming an irregular open spiral.” .... It is also suggested that
H. Hornbyense Whvys., may possibly be the early stage of large
individuals of the preceding species.”

(3) Heteroceras perversum. A sinistral shell— but in other
respects similar to AZ. Hornbyense, Whvs.—from Hornby Island, B. C.
collected by Mr. W. Harvey, 1894.

Norges, Reviews AND ComMENTs. 207

Accompanying this paper is plate II which contained a process cut
of Antsoceras Vancouverense, Gabb sp., four-fifths of the natural size.

WHITEAVES, J. F.—“ Descriptions of eight new species of fossils from
_ the (Galena) Trenton Limestones of Lake Winnipeg and the Red River
Valley. Can. Record of Science, July, 1895, 11 pp. Montreal, Que.
As the title implies, this paper contains descriptions of eight new species

_ of Trenton fossils from the Manitoban region of Canada. It is printed
in “advance of an official report on the fossils of the Cambro-Silurian
rocks of Lake Winnipeg and its vicinity.” The following species are
therein described :—

ALG&. MOLLUSCOIDEA.
1. Chondrites patulus, 5. Rafinesquina lata,
Wa: E> cupressinus, MOoLLusca.
zz: es gracillimus, 6. Ascoceras costulatum,
CC@LENTERATA. 7. Cyrtoceras laticurvatum,
4. Streptelasma robustum, 8. Eurystomites plicatus,

They were obtained for the most part by various officers of the
Geological Survey of Canada who have visited those regions at different
times—and include forms ccl!ected by Messrs Tyrrell, Weston, Dowling,
Lambe and Bell.

CoLeMAN Pror. A. P., F.R.S.C., etc.,—“Glactal and Inter-glacial
acposits near Toronto.” Journal of Geology, vol. 111, No 6., pp. 622 —
645. Sept.—Oct., 1895. In this paper Dr. Coleman gives us the
result of his studies on one of the most interesting sections of glacial
deposits to be found in eastern Canada. He begins with a description of
the excellent sections exposed for nine miles and a half along the north
side of Lake Ontario from Victoria Park to the mouth of Highland
Creek. Inthe lower stratified clay are found numerous fossil remains
including boreal species of mosses and swamp-loving trees associated
with a remarkable extinct insect fauna. ‘Twenty-nine species have
already been recorded by Dr. Scudder from these beds. In the over-
lying sands two species of shells were found: one freshwater and one
land. On p. 634 section of the quarry at Taylor’s brickyard, Don

a. oe rs 77 "0 Ee?

208 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

Valley Toronto, is given, showing at the base, the Hudson river shale ;
dark or lowest till; fossiliferous stratified sand and clay; middle till ;
lastly, upper stratified unfossiliferous clay.

In a former paper on the “/nterglactal fossils from the Don Valley,
Toronto” by Dr. Coleman,* that author presents to his readers the extinct
faunas and floras of the various formations in that district and indicates
the work done by Sir Wm. Dawson, Prof. Penhallow, Dr. W: H. Dall
and Mr. C. T. Simpson, the last two, of the Smithsonian Institution,
Washington. ‘This paper and the one under present consideration are
important contributions to a most interesting section of cenozoic
geology.

Apams, Frank D.—‘ A further contribution to our knowledge of the
Laurentian;” American Journal of Science, Vol, L. Art. VII,
pp. 58-69, with plates 1 and 2, New Haven, July 1895.

This timely article by the well known professor of Geology of McGill
University brings forward a summary of results obtained from observation
and study both in the field and in the laboratory of the Archean rocks ex-
posed in the region to the north of the city of Montreal. The information
was chiefly obtained while acting as field geologist on the Geological
Survey of Canada, the facts and deductions acquiring additional weight
from the author’s well known ripe petrographical knowledge and a
varied experience with the various problems connected with the com-
position and genesis of Archean rocks.

This paper opens with a general description of the delimitation of
the two great subdivisions of the Archean—Laurentian and Huronian
—as developed in the Dominion of Canada. The origin and composition
of the gneisses constituting the Laurentian are the chief points considerd
and the various facts relating thereto obtained by a careful examination
in the field as well as a critical microscopic study of one hundred and
sixty typical specimens representing as far as possible all varieties of the
rocks occurring in the district. The region in question lies to the east
of that examined by Logan and later by Ells and comprises an area
composed of 3500 square miles underlain by the crystalline rocks of

* American Geologist, Vol. XIII, pp. 85—95, Feb. 1894.

SURRY Pa er eee a

(ete

PETA Vicg wets

ee bee

+
&
a!
;
“2
7
,
t
4

Nores, Reviews anpD COMMENTS. 09

which about rooo square miles is anorthosite occurring as a series of
great intrusions,

As a result of the various petrographical examinations undertaken,
Dr. Adams has divided the rocks occurring there into four classes.

1. Anorthosites and granites of igneous origin.

2: “Augen” gneisses, granulites and foliated anorthosites, gene-
tically connected with the last group and _ largely if not exclusively of
igneous origin also. ‘The structure characteristic of this class is the
cataclastic or granulated structure formed by the mechanical breaking
down of the web of the rock under movements induced by great
pressure, which movement produced in the rock a foliation more or less
distinct according to their intensity. By ‘‘ leaf gneisses” are understood
very finely foliated gneisses very rich in orthoclase and containing
numerous thin leaves of quartz—they are usually almost free from iron-
magnesia constituents. ;

3. A series of crystalline limestones and quartzites together with
certain geneisses usually found associated with them and which are
probably wholly or in part of sedimentary origin. In these rocks the
granulated structure is very subordinate or entirely absent. They are
characterized by a very extensive recrystallization with the development
of new minerals, they also differ from the rocks of classes 1 and 2 in
chemical composition.

4. Pyroxene gneisses, pyroxene granulites and allied rocks whose
origin is as yet doubtful.

In regard to class 2. there can be no doubt as to their origin as all
possible gradations may be seen from the massive variety in which the
structure is that of an ordinary plutonic rock to those perfectly foliated
were the rock is seen to be in an advanced stage of granulation.

The quartzites included under the ¢Aird c/ass referred to as forming
part of the Laurentian are entirely crystalline and nothing has been
detected which distinctly proves them to be of clastic origin although
so eminent an authority as Professor Rosenbusch is quoted as saying
that the specimens from one locality present structures which indicate
that the rock was originally a sandstone.

210 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

The gneisses which are as a general rule intimately associated
with the limestone are quite different from those»of the second class
they are almost all highly garnetiferous and frequently consist essentially
of garnet and sillimanite. Quartz and othoclase are present in subordi-
nate amount, some of them contain pyroxene, scapolite and other
minerals. These gneisses show no granulated structure, the minerals
constituting them have crystallized under the influence of the pressure
which has granulated the gneisses of class 2, and are not in any marked
manner deformed by it.

These rocks are generally well banded ; this structure being much
more pronounced than the foliation, and graphite, which does not
occur in the igneous granulated gneisses of class 2, is very frequently
present and often abundant. 4

Complete analyses are furnished of four specimens of these gneisess
from various localities throughout the district under examination. Two
of these have the composition of ordinary roofing slate; a third, highly
quartzose, bears a very striking resemblance in composition to the
more silicious bands so often found in slate quarries. The fourth of
these gneisses (from Rawdon) differs entirely from-the others and if it
is an altered sediment it is one which has suffered very little leaching
during deposition and must have been of the nature of a tufaceous
deposit or one formed from the rapid disintegration of an igneous rock
having the composition of a basic trachyte or syenite.

The gneiss of Trembling Mountain like many others including
some in the Grenville series has undoubtedly the composition of an
igneous rock being simply granite which has. undergone deformation
by pressure.

It is impossible in the brief space allotted to a review to even
mention all of the important results obtained from these studies but a
careful perusal is recommended to every worker, and sudent interested

in the difficult problems of Archzean geology.
A, E. 5B:

Our Club has just received from the author a most interesting book
entitled “‘The History of Mount Mica of Maine, U.S. A. and Its Won-
derful Deposits of Matchless Tourmalines” by Augustus Choate Hamlin,

Nores, Reviews anp ComMEN’s. 211

M. D., who, in 1873, published a smaller work dealing largely with the
same subject under the title ‘* The Tourmaline.”

The present work, consisting of 72 pages, is divided into seven
chapters and illustrated with portraits of the author and his son (lately
deceased, and to whom, jointly with the author’s father, the book is dedi-
cated), two views. and two diagrams of the locality, anda series of 43
superb coloured plates of the wonderful tourmaline crystals which have
been found there.

The subject matter is divided into seven chapters, of which the
first five give a detailed account of the development of the locality from
the time of its accidental discovery by two young students, E. L. Hamlin
and E. Holmes in 1820, down to the present year; the sixth chapter gives a
description of the deposits and the occurence of the tourmalines etc.,

_ with remarks on their forms and colours; and the seventh chapter explains

the various excavations which have been made and describes the colored
plates.

Some of these plates represent restored crystals, but in these
instances outline plates are also given shewing the actual appearance of
the broken crystal.

Scientists in general and mineralogists in particular owe a debt o¢
gratitude to Mr. James A. Garland of New York, whose liberality, the
author tells us, has not only placed many of the choicest crystals of
tourmaline in the cabinet of Harvard University but has also rendered
possible the production of the superb coloured plates with which the
work is illustrated.

_As one who has repeatedly visited Mt. Mica, collected its wonder-
ful minerals, and enjoyed the privilege of examining many of the match-
less specimens described, the writer of the present notice can cordially
recommend this little book as most interesting and delightful reading,
dealing as it does with subjects which are of interest not only to the
mineralogist but to every lover of nature.

WF

Marsu, O. C. Pror. (2) “On the affinities and classificatiou of the
Dinosaurian Reptiles.—1r, “Restoration of some European Dinosaurs,
with suggestions as to their place among the Reptilia.” American

212 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

Journal of Science, Vol. I, pp. 483 and 498 ; (1) plates V-VIII; (2)
plate X, New Haven, Nov. and Dec. 1895.

These two admirable papers contain a large amount of most
’ valuable and timely information on a group of “‘ Extinct Monsters,” the
affinities of which are fast becoming better known as more perfect and
ample material is forthcoming in the remarkable discoveries of recent
years. ~~

Ornithology —sLUE-BIRD—DICKCISSEL—I see by a recent nunt-
ber of the Orrawa NaTuRALIsT that the Blue-bird, (.Sialia sialis) is
no commoner in Ottawa this year than it is in Western Ontario. Very
early in the season murmurs of a shortage began to arise, and it was
the 23rd of May before I saw one at all, though one pair was known to
be nesting near town before then, and four were all I saw during the sum-
mer. Observers near Lake St. Clair write that there were a few in that
region, and the reports of others c»incide with my own observations in
noting quite a number in the fall migration in October.

Recent reports in “ Forest and Stream” state that the Blue-birds
died in Georgia by hundreds in the severe fro-ts of last winter, and an
editorial footnote to a recent letter about the Blue-bird, said that a
friend in South Florida sent the information that, contrary to the
customary order of things, the blue-birds remained there during the
year, nesting in great numbers.

Coupling this with the observation of occasional flocks from the
North this fall, one is led to hope that they will not beso rare next
year as they were this summer.

An interesting problem arises about which one can do little but
theorize. Ina given area, say a square mile, let us grant that there
were in 1899 one hundred pairs of Blue-birds. These laid 4, 5, & 6
eggs per pair, and probably each pair brought an average of at least
three young to maturity In June then, there were 500 Blue-birds where
in April there were but 200. In the following year there were but 100
pair again, for Blue-birds have not been growing in abundance nor have
they been materially extending their range. Therefore, there had been
a mortality, approximately of about 60% of all the birds between June

ty Norrs, Reviews AND ComMENTs., 213

18g0 and April 1891. Accident, carnivorous birds, man, disease, and
other foes had accounted for more than half of them. This was repeated
in ’91'92,'93, and’g4; but in ’95 that square mile had probably not more
than ro birds in June. It is an interesting speculation whether the
old ratio of mortality will hold good, or will a greater proportion of
Blue-birds escape this year than nsual. Asan offset of this loss, it seems
you have the Dickcissel (.Spiza americana) at Ottawa this year. About
the middle of June I had a card from Mr. Robert Elliott, stating that at
Mr. Beck’s farm, about 12 miles from London, there was a nest of the
Dickcissel with 5 eggs, and asking me to come and see it. As it was
the first record for our county, I dec.ded I would go. On June 2ist I
left London about 5 a.m. and had not ridden three miles when I heard
a Dickcissel along the roadside, and, dismounting, heard another
immediately. Two males were singing in an orchard, and after looking

in vain for the females who were doubiless on their eggs, I finished the
. journey and found the pair of birds on Mr. Beck’s farm with eggs nearly
ready to hatch. Mr. Beck is a lover of birds and had spent a good deal
of time watching the strangers and finding their nest. Of cliff swallows,*
which are quite rare all through these western countiés where they were
formerly so abundant, Mr. Beck has a fine colony of perhaps 50 nests,
one or more being placed on every building and shed on the farm,
save one. His skill with the rifle and shot gun, coupled with a genuine
Canadian hatred of the English sparrow has leit him with this fine
colony of swallows while his neighbors are bereft of them.

It was curious that on my return home at noon, I should receive
the first notice of the Ottawa birds, and still more curious that on the
next day, 7 miles west of London, I should hear another male singing
beside the railway track. Later on I found another one twenty miles
south and I have been wondering ever since if I had been deaf to
Dickcissels in the early spring.

When I reached Ottawa on July 12th the chief Dickcissel on the
Experimental Farm greeted me on my arrival with his monotonous song,
which he kept up till the r5:h, but after that date he was not heard.
The clover, in which the nest was probably placed, had been cut and
possibly the home had been destroyed. It is to be hoped that their

* Petrochelidon lunifrons.

214 Tue Orrawa NaTURALIST. . ow

visit will be repeated next year. It can hardly be that they will not
return to London, as they have always come so near us before that we
have for years been on the point of having them with us in the breccia .
season._-W. E. SaunpDErRs, London, Ont.

KreEN SicHt oF Brrps—On May 23rd 1894, I was an
eye-witness of a little scene in the marsh at Rondeau that

impressed me with the extreme care that wild things have to take of |
themselves. I had shot a Dowitcher, J/acrorhamphus griseus, and one
or two common birds,and wishing to skin them I approached a patch of —
semi floating rushes, mud, and déoris to hold the canoe while I did so.
I saw on the other side of the moss a Redbacked Sandpiper, (Zvimga
alpina pacifica and was rather surprised that he did not fly when I
came near, but he was tame, and I set to work. For probably an hour
he spent his time within from ro to 30 feet from me, pruning and
feeding. He worked with little dabbles of his bill in quite a peculiar —
way unlike anything I had previously seen. Once, when I glanced at him
I saw him stop as though afraid of me—he looked steadily. and shrank |
down flat on the ground where he lay perfectly still.

I looked carefully for a hawk or gull but could see none; yet he
stlll remained prone. At last after perhaps half a minute, he turned his
head and seemed to be looking over to the northeast. On turning —
that way I saw against the cloud, an eagle still approaching, flying away —
up so far that without the assistance of the cloud I could not have
found him; but the Sandpiper saw him quickly and prepared for ~
business.

After the eagle hid passed, the sandpiper arose and continued his —
repast, keeping, no doubt, a keen eye for the next intruder. Asall this
occurred within fifteen feet of where I sat, and the bird took merely —
the slightest notice’of my motions it shewed how much less dread a bird
has ofa man than of a bird otf prey. Before leaving the spot, I
experimented with the bird to see that he was not wounded, andit took
a good deal to make him fly, and when he flew it was only fora few =
feet when he settled and fairly defied me to scare him again.

W. E. Saunprrs, London, Ont.

ne?

ms
’

*

¥
Nores, Reviews anp ComMENTSs. 915

The Scientific African.—The Sctentific African is a new
monthly journal which will contain popular scientific articles on South
African Animals, Plants, Rocks, and Minerals, containing not only
accurate dnd illustrated descriptions, but also the habits, uses, and
occurrences of them in South Africa and elsewhere.

All the industries of South Africa, in the Colony, Transvaal, Free
State, Rhodesia, etc., will be described, also the workings of Mines and
Collieries, Bridges, Harbour Works, and other engineering matters by
which the wealth of South Africa is being enhanced.

All the latest news in the scientific world will be recorded, and the
columns of the paper will be open to the discussion of scientific matters
that interest and concern all classes in South Africa.

The Scientific African is to be published monthly and will appear
simultaneously at Cape Town and Johannesburg, on the 1st Nov. 1895

NOTES ON SOME FOSSILS FROM THE TRENTON OF
HIGHGATE SPRINGS VERMONT NEAR THE
CANADIAN BOUNDARY LINE.

By Henry M. AMI.

In the Spring of 1893, in Company with Dr. R. W. Ells of the
Geological Survey of Canada, I had occasion to examine the fossiliferous
rocks occurring in that most interesting and classic region about the
east shores of Missisquoi Bay, both north and south ofthe international
boundary line.

The geological structure of this district had been carefully studied
and described by the late Sir William Logan and the late Mr. E.
Billings and further contributions to the geological history of this
district were published in 1831 by Prof. Jules Marcou* and
later by Prof. C. H. Hitchcock in an early number of the Bull. Amer.
Museum of Natural History, New York City.

On page 855 of the “‘Geology of Canada,” Montreal, 1863. fig.
444—Sir William Logan gives a “ section at Highgate Springs, Vermont”
indicating clearly the various antict’nal folds and other flexures and
faults of that locality. The relation of the Utica, Trenton, Bird’s Eye
and Black River, and Chazy formations to one another are therein
indicated and described whilst the fossils which characterise the forma-
tions are mentioned in the text.

It is not my purpose in this paper to discuss the various
problems which centre around the ‘‘ Quebec Gronp” and “ Taconic”
controversies at this point nor yet to combat or assist in proving the
theory of “colonies ” of Barrande supported by Marcou, but simply to
give a list of the species of fossils collected by Dr. Ells and myself at
Highgate Springs from the limbs of the denuded Franklin House
anticline and flexures of the ‘Trenton formation.

*Bulletin de la Soc. Géol. de France, Extrait, Paris, 1881.

te Ee Te ees Whe. eye ees

216 Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

List OF GENERA AND SPECIES OF FossILS FROM THE TRENTON OF
HIGHGATE SPRINGS, VT. '
ECHINODERMATA.

2. Crinoidal columns and fragments, too imperfect for identi-
fication.

BRYOZOA.

2. Prasopora Selwyni, Nicholson. This is the most common
Trenton massive or hemispheric bryozoary ; usually referred
to this species as described by Nicholson in his “ Pal.
Corals, Monticulipora,” and called Favosites lycopedites by,
Vanuxem, and by other authors: Stenopora petro; olitana
Pander, or Stenopora lycoperdon, Say.

3. 4. 5. Several branching forms of Monticuliporide requiring
micro-sections before identification.

BRACHIOPODA.

6. Plectambonites sericea Sowerby.

7. Dalmanella testudinaria, Dalman.

%. Orthis tricenaria, Coniad. A small variety of this species.

g. Dinorthis pectinella, Emmons.

10. e sp., cf. O. Meeki, Hall.

tf. Strophomenoid shell resembling Strophomena incurvata,
Shepard sp.

(Streptorhynchus fililextum, Hall.
PTEROPODA.

12. Conularia Trentonensis, Hall. A very large and tolerably fine
example of this characteristic species.
GASTEROPODA.

23. Bellerophon bilobatus, Sowerby.
CEPHALAPODA.

14. Orthoceras bilineatum, Hall.
Les = sp. without annulations but showing longitudinal
flutings and finer lines parallel to the longer axis of the shell.
TRILOBITA.

16. Proetus sp. cf. P. parviusculus, Hall.

17. Calymene senaria, Conrad.

18. Asaphus megistos, Locke, (Isotelus gigas, DeKay).

19. Trinucleus concentricus, Eaton. Numerous examples of this
species which present the same characters as those of the
Trenton -limestone of Montreal Island, Montmorency
Falls and other typical localities in the Province of Quebec.

20. Harpes Ortawaénsis, Billings. A fine example of this rare but
beautiful species occurs in the collection,

THE OTTAWA NATURALIST,

Vou. IX. OTTAWA, FEBRUARY, 1896. No. 11.

NOTES ON THE FLORA OF ONTARIO.

By JouN Macoun, M. A., F. L. S.
II

NOTES ON THE SPECIES OF RANUNCULACEA OCCURRING IN ONTARIO
OR WESTERN QUEBEC.

Within the above limits we have fifteen genera and forty-four
“species. Many of these occur under diverse conditions and in peculiar
habitats and are seldom observed except by botanical collectors. It is
the purpose of these notes to enumerate them all and in this way enable
members of the Ciub and others to look out for them when opportunity
serves.
. The genus Clematis has with us two representatives which are
very unlike in appearance and habit. The more common species is
C. Virgintana which grows along all our rivers and_ brooks and climbs
over alders and other bushes where its fruits of long-tailed achenes
make it a prominent object in the autumn. In July and August its
greenish white flowers are quite attractive and when carefully examined
it will be found that the staminate one is the more beautiful as the
filaments of the numerous stamens really make up the flowers.
The Afragene, (C. verticil/aris) is rather rare in the settled parts of
the province but on the rocky slopes of the Laurentide hills it is not
uncommon and when seen is not easily forgotten, its violet sepals, from
one to two inches long, being seen early in the season when flowers are
more attractive than they are later. Kingsmere mountain is the nearest
station to Ottawa.
The genus Anemone is represented by six species though two of
them do not occur in the settled parts of the area under consideration but
have their homes along Lake Superior and northward.

Se et PURSE ETC TS oe CR ee ae ee ae he
-— o iF % 5% 7 “ * agile

218 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

The Small-flowered Anemone, (A. parvifora, Michx.), is found in
the crevices of rocks around Lake Superior and will very likely be
detected both westward and northward in the province, as well as at
the sources of the Ottawa and Gatineau rivers. This species seldom
grows more than six inches high and has a séngle white flower.

The other rare species, A. multifida, Poir., has been collected
at Pic River, Lake Superior and it, too, may be looked for both north-
ward and westward. It is easily distinguished from the preceding by
its dull crimson to yellowish-white flowers, deeply cut leaves and one
to three flowered stems.

Two species A. cylindrica, Gray, and A. Virginiana, Linn., are
rather common throughout the province and by collectors are very
often mistaken for each other. The former, however, always grows on
dry ground, whereas the latter, which is much less common, is found
in rich moist soil, in fence corners and borders of woods. The easiest
way to distinguish these species is by the fruit, which in the former is
cylindrical and an inch or more long and in the latter ovate or oblong ;
if young or in flower only, the involucral leaves on the stem in the first
are from 3—g9, while in the second they are from 2—3.

Canadian Anemone (4. Canadensis, Linn. or A. dichotoma Linn.)
grows in river bottoms throughout the province. It is seldom found
over a foot high and grows in masses in low meadows where its white
sepals are very conspicuous in June. In fruit, this species is easily
recognised, as its achenes are nearly smooth and gathered into a round
head.

Our species of Wind Flower, 4. guinguefolia, L. or A. nemorosa,
as it is generally named isa graceful little plant found in rich moist
woods throughout the province but quite local. ‘The little stem termi-
nated bya single flower is seldom over eight inches high and has a
whorl of 3—5 leaflets immediately under the flower. The sepals vary
from white to violet and blue. ‘The four last-mentioned species are
common in the Ottawa district.

Following the Anemones we have IJepatica represented by two forms
now -admitted as species. These are #. ¢riloba and H. acutiloba,
so well known to all, young or old, as ‘* Mayflowers.” The former

Nores ON THE FLORA OF ONTARIO. 219

has round-lobed leaves and the latter acute-lobed ones and these con-
stitute the chief point of separation unless the fruit be examined.

The next genus Anemonella includes only one species A. thadic-
troides, the Thaliutrum anemonoides of Gray’s Manual. ‘This is a lovely
little plant, growing in clumps from fascicled tubiform roots, and is well
worthy ofa place in our gardens. It iscommon in open woods, in rocky
places and in fence corners from ‘Toronto westward and southward in
the Niagara Peninsula.

Following this is the genus Zhadictrum with three species, two of
which are quite common, the third being rather obscure may also be
common but being selcom collected is considered rare. The common-
est species is Z: drotcum found in all rich woods throughout the province.
In the woods around Ottawa this is a lovely thing in early spring. As
its mame indicates the stamens are on one plant and
the pistils on — another. The panicles in the male
plant are greenish purple. The stamens have long drooping filaments
and fuscous anthers which when grouped make prominent objects in
the bare spring woods.

Another species 7: folygamum, Muhl. (7. Cornutt, L.) is found in
river bottoms and around springs and by brooks throughout the country.
In the neighbourhood of Ottawa, especially along the Rideau River
above Billings’ Bridge, it grows into a large bushy plant over five feet
high. It flowers late and is seldom collected with ripe seeds.

Our other species is 7. purpurascens, which has much the same
general appearance but does not grow so tall nor in as damp soil. The ©
stem of 7. polygamum, is mostly green and glabrous and the flowers
white, while that of 7. purpurascens is purplish and a little glandular,
and the flowers are purple or rarely whitish. These two species should
be collected in fruit and carefully preserved as it is necessary to work
out the distribution of the latter. The only authentic locality in
Ontario known to the writer is on Dunning’s farm, near Drummond-
ville, Niagara Falls. Dr. Burgess has collected it near London. The
specimens collected along the Ottawa by Dr. Ami are doubtful as they
are without fruit.

220 THE OTTaAwa NATURALIST.

Our next genus is AZyosurus, (Mousetail), represented by one
species MZ. minimus, ZL. This isa very remarkable and inconspicuous
little plant but most interesting withal. It is a very small annual with
entire, linear leaves in a radical tuft, and simple one-flowered scapes.
After flowering the carpel-spike becomes elongated an inch or two
which gives the name Mouwusetat/. ‘The only recorded localities in
Ontario are in the vicinity of Belleville where it was found many years
ago in damp places subject to overflow, on limestone shingle west of
Albert College and at the Ferry House in Prince Edward County
opposite Belleville.

Following this is the large genus Ranunculus which is represented
by nineteen species, three of them introduced from Europe. This genus
takes a multiplicity of forms and grows in all kinds of localities.

In our waters we have at least two species of White-flowered
Crowfoots. One, R. circinatus, Sibth., is apparently uncommon in
Ontario but very common in Manitoba and westward. The leaves of
this species are sessile and are orbicular in outline and do not collapse
in the least when taken from the water. We have this form from
Patterson’s Creek, Ottawa (Mr. Wm. Scott), and from Wingham (Mr. J. A.
Morton). |

The other, &. aguatilis, L. is very variable and takes many forms
both in America and Europe. This species unlike &. avctmatus has
petioled leaves which collapse more or less when taken from the water.
One form, var. ¢richophyl/us, Gray, represents those specimens with
rather short and slightly rigid leaves. We have this from Belle
ville, Owen Sound and Port Arthur. The second, var. flaccidus, Pers.»
has much longer, soft and capillary dissected leaves all collapsing when
withdrawn from the water. This is the deep water form and is no
doubt plentiful in many of our streams, yet in our herbarium we have
no Ontario specimens.

R. Cymbalaria, Pursh, is a low glabrous species that is at home
along the sea coast or on the margin of brackish pools in the prairie
region. but is occasionally found in mud along river margins —
where possibly there is saline ooze. Collected along the Ottawa at

Notes ON THE FLorRA OF ONTARIO. 231

Thurso, at Wingham, Ont., and at Fort William, near Port Arthur, Lake
Superior.

The next is a water species with bright yellow flowers, 2. mu/tifidus,
so named from its very much dissected leaves. ‘Three forms were
formerly included under this species but a better knowledge of their
characters has been obtained and they are now easily separated. This
species is always found in slow-flowing or stagnant water and when
flowering has floating elongated fistulous stems and showy yellow
flowers.

The var. ¢evrestris, Gray, is a series of shallow water or wet soil
forms which creep, rooting in the mud, with shorter stems and emersed
coarsely dissected leaves and flowers and fruit smaller. Both the above
are general throughout the province but seldom collected. This form
is abundant in Malloch’s Bay near the C. P. R. station, Ottawa.

A very peculiar species, 2. Lapponicus, was described, as
Anemone nudicaults by Dr. Gray (see Manual, Page 38) from imperfect
specimens, which were without flowers. Prior to that time it had been
collected in a peat bog where Port Arthur now stands by the Rev. J. K.
McMorine and in 1884 in peat bogs, Nipigon river by the writer.

A small and interesting species, R. Flammula, L. var. reptans, E.
Meyer, is found creeping amongst gravel in, or close to, the water on the
shores of all lakes and large streams throughout the country. It may
be easily known by its creeping habit, linear or lanceolate leaves and
small yellow flowers. Very common at Paugan Falls on the
Gatineau.

Following this little species isa tall robust one, &. ambigens,
Watson—nearly two feet high, rising from a decumbent base. Its leaves
are lanceolate, acute, generally serrulate, 3 to 4 inches long and from one
fourth to half an inch wide. This species has been gathered near Port
Colborne and should be looked for in the marshy country on the
Welland Canal.

Our next species, 2. rhombotdeus, Goldie, has had a variety of names
as it begins to flower when hardly an inch above the ground, just as
the snow disappears and continues in bloom for two months. This isa

292. Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.

common species in central and western Ontario, delighting in warm
sandy soil.

A common species in rather damp woods and along old woodland
roads is R. abortivus which might be taken for the above but it is quite
smooth, more branching and has inconspicuous flowers. This has a
var. micranthus, Gray—which may be found in our limits. It may
be distinguished from the species by being more or less hairy, having a
glabrous receptacle, or having some or most of its radical leaves three- -
parted.

An annual species-- R. sceleratus, L. closely related io R.

abortivus but with dissected leaves and succulent stems is a common
species in boggy places or in the mud of ditches in many parts of the
province but more especially west of Kingston. It has been found
at Borthwick’s Springs in the vicinity of Ottawa.

Another woodland species—A. recurvatus, Poir.—has no relatives
on this side of the continent and being found in all rich woods is a
common species. Easily distinguished by its reflexed sepals and petals,

and in fruit by its round head and the long recurved beaks of the carpels.

R. acts Lane ae
bulbosus, L. The former is very common by roadsides and in old damp

Following this are two introduced species

pastures while the latter is either very rare or seldom distinguished from
‘acris. Only two characters are necessary to distinguish these species.
The latter has a globose, solid, bulbous base or corm, the former has not
this base ; inthe former the sepals are merely spreading, in the latter
they are reflexed.

R. Pennsylvanicus L.—is common in boggy places amongst weeds
and grass. It is seldom over a foot high but is stout, and branching
and has small flowers with reflexed calyx lobes andan oblong or almost
cylindrical head.

Now follows a group of five species that require careful examination
in the field, and good fruiting specimens for the herbarium. When
Part I of my Catalogue was published, we had little information regard-
ing them, but now they are easily separated. R. repens L., remains as
I had it, and my var. Aispidus becomes R. Macounii, Britton., but is
still retained in Gray’s Manual as 2. Aispidus, Hook. (page 43-)

Novres ON THE FLORA oF ONTARIO. 223

R. repens being an introduced species is always found in the settled
parts of the country, generally by ditches or in boggy pastures. It is
perennial, and creeps extensively, lies prostrate on the ground or
nearly so, forming mats ; its leaves are often spotted, and usually very
hairy.

R. Macounti grows in boggy places usually amongst grass, is
ascending or declined, seldom or never rooting at the joints, and is not
perennial. Our most eastern specimens are from Lake Nipigon, but it
is certain to be found farther east.

The two following species are included in the &. /fascicularts of
Gray’s Manual (page 43), but are separated in Dr. Britton’s Revision
and in Vol. I, Part I of the Synoptical Flora of North America just -
published. The species are 2. hispidus, Michx. (not Hook.), and 2.
- fascicularis, Muhl. Both grow in woods and flower early, but
the former prefers the drier ground. Both have large flowers but the
former is much the taller, and has fibrous roots, and the pubescence
of the lower parts is spreading, while in the latter the roots are tuberous-
thickened or fusiform, and the pubescence of the lower part of the stems
is appressed. We have the former from Wesley Park, Niagara Falls,
which is the only known locality but the latter species extends from
the Bay of Quinte westward.

Closely related to these is &. sepfentrtonalis, Poir., which has a
wide range in the province, and seems to claim the alluvium along our
rivers and smaller streams for its habitat. We have specimens from
Manotick and Casselman and westward. ‘This species is stouter than
either of the others, is often stoloniferous, has large yellow flowers, and
is seldom very hairy. It may be taken for 2. Macounti, but is easily
separated by its fruit, which is rather gradually contracted into a long
flat beak. In M/acounti the beak is short and straight, and formed of
the whole flat, subulate style.

Following Ranunculus is the genus Caltha with one species—
C. palustris, L. the well known “ Cowslip ” of the people or the Marsh
Marigold of the books. This species is found hy the margins of rivers
and brooks and in wet places everywhere. Its early and bright-yellow
flowers make it an attractive object in spring,

bo
bo
~

THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

Isopyrum is a genus of low perennials which is represented in the
province by one species J. dt¢ternatum, Torr. and Gray. Our only record
of it is from London where it was found by Mr. J. Dearness. In
general appearance it resembles Azemonel/a but the fruit is a two to
three seeded follicle, whereas in that genus it it is an achene.

Gold-thread, (Coptts) is represented by one species C. /rifolia,
Salisb.—which is found in cedar swamps and on hummocks in wet

.

woods throughout the province. The yellow rootstocks and white star-
like flowers amply distinguish it from all other swamp flowers.

The Columbine (4qguilegia Canadensis, \..) is one of our lovely
spring flowers and is found in dry places amongst broken rocks in all
parts of the country. It is a curious circumstance that all the native
Columbines, and we have six, grow amongst the debris of broken
rocks.

No native species of Delphinium grows in the province but one. -
D. Consolida \.., the common Larkspur of the gardens is often found
by roadsides on waste-heaps or as a weed in gardens, and another ;
species less branching—D. Azacis— has been found at Lake Scugog by 3
Mr. W. Scott of the Normal School, Toronto. The pods are the best
character by which to separate them. In the first the fcllicle is smooth
and in the latter, pubescent. ‘

Black Snake Root or Black Cohosh, (Cimuicifuga racemosa, Nutt.)
is arare species and is only found in the southwestern part of the
province extending from Galt to the Niagara peninsula. It is a tall
plant with straight and stiff racemes of flowers often over a foot long.
We have nothing else like 1t and once seen, its general appearance will
not be forgotten. .

The Baneberry (Acta) has two representatives in our rich wood- |
iands which are difficult to separate when in flower. These are A. 3
spicata, L. var. rubra, Ait. and A. alba Mill. In general terms, one is
said to have red berries and the other white but this is not a fact as
each species has berries of both kinds. Both grow in damp woods in
rich soil and both have white flowers and very little difference in the
form of the raceme. In fruit, however, they differ widely no matter
what the colour of the berries, the pedicels in A. spicata

— re a ee ees a

Tue Busuy-Taitep Woop Rar or Brit. CoLtumsia, 225

are long and slender, those of 4. a/éa are short and stout and almost
as thick as the peduncle.

Yellowroot (Hydrastis Canadensis, 1..), is only occasionally met
with and may be considered very rare. It grows in rich soil in woods
and has been collected at Prescott and from Niagara westward to
London. Owing to its large peltate leaves it might be taken at first sight —
for small specimens of VPodopfhyl/um but the situation of the flower
dispells the illusion. In spring it sends up a stem and a single long-
petioled peltate leaf. ‘The stem has two leaves near its summit, one of
these is petioled, the other sessile, and from this leaf rises a short
peduncled white flower, followed by a red fruit resembling a raspberry.

SOME ACCOUNT OF THE BUSHY-TAILED WOOD RAT
OF BRITISH COLUMBIA (NeroToMa CINEREA, ORD.)

By C. DEBLOIS GREEN, Osoyoos, B. C.

In the interior of British Columbia there lives a small animal
which is more destructive and more annoying than any other animal
pest I know. It is the Bushy-tailed Wood-rat or Bush-rat, an animal rather
heavier than the Norway Rat and having a tail not unlike that of a
Flying Squirrel but not so well developed or silky. The whiskers are
very long and coarse, the colour of the body is gray, and the hair is finer
and longer than that of the Norway rat.

Its natural home is in the mountains among rock slides and broken
rocky hilisides and where possible it protects its hole by collecting
cactus and storing them in quantities all around its home, probably to
keep coyotes and other enemies at bay. So long as it contents itself
with this kind ot life, it is bearable, but when it finds that a cabin is in
the neighbourhood, the rock slide is not good enough for it.

The first warning one has of the objectionable presence of this animal
in a house is hearing a series of heavy blows struck on some_ board
as with a quirt. This is done with the tail which is kept going when-

226 THE Ottawa NATURALIST.

ever this fiend is thinking of what deviltry it can be up to next ; it is
evidently bent on finding a suitable place for a nest. ~ That is the very
first consideration, and it will probably choose a corner of the cellar
or the attic. They will build theiz nest steadily for a week and make
it of everything one would think utterly useless for the purpose. For
mstance, the first nest we discovered was made of old clothes asa
foundation, plentifully nixed up with knives, forks and spoons, about a
bushel of old corn cobs, three dried cow’s tails, a few books and some
lumps of mineral, quartz, etc, evidently this rat was a prospector.
Having built their nest, which seems to be for living in as much as for
rearing a family, they then proceed to make sleep at night utterly
impossible for the inmates of the house. One would imagine that some
large animal was making hay in the kitchen, bang ! and down goes the
bread pan, then a tray,then thump, thump, thump, and over goes the stove
—at least you think so—but it is only the stove pipe; you sit up and
throw a boot, and silence reigns for five minutes, by which time the boot is
down in the cellar or up inthe attic. At the end of that time one of
the rats perhaps runs right across you face, and in striking at it you
knock all the skin off your knuckles and then hear the same old thump,
thump, thump, inside the wall.

The smell of this animal is vile, and very few cats will fight one ;
those who do have a heavy contract in hand, for they are even stronger
than they look,—or smel!. A figure 4 trap, with a weight of about 60
pounds (not less! !!), will hold a Bush-rat down. There are only two baits
that are sure, one is dried apple, but better by far is a bait of a looking
glass ora tin toy of some sort. Even the cut-out top of a milk tin
makes a good bait, while a silver spoon is simply irrisistible, as they seem
to think that the nest always needs a little more ornamenting. These
rats are not so destructive in what they eat as in what they carry off, and
the only case in which I have heard of one being useful, was that of a
man who had lost a twenty dollar gold piece in his barn ; he knew that
he had lost it somewhere in the stock yard, eit her in the stable, pigstye
or barn, and some weeks afterwards went out prospecting for 6 months,
next winter he returned to his cabin, and lo! the $20 piece was on the
corner of the dining table ornamenting 2 Bush-rat’s nest, together with

a ’ d le - ee fl ak

Tue Busny-TAitep Woop Rat or Brit. CoLumsta. 227

other things from the pigstye, and stable etc. which are carefully avoided
by all but Esquimaux dogs and Bushy-tailed Wood-rats. Wood-rats
object to being caught in the common spring traps, but I don’t think it
hurts them very much from the way in which they will drag a trap about
with a ten pound weight attached to it and by another sign of their
apparent insensibility to pain which has come under my notice.

I camped one stormy night forty miles from the nearest inhabited
house, in a trapper’s old deserted cabin; of course there was the inevitable
rat to be considered and the first thing he did was to take my soap off the
table and carry it off to his nest. I found it there and next day took it
to the stream roo yards away left it there for safety, but next day
sure enough, there it was back again in the nest

Well, this Bush-rat gave us no rest atall. He was like a devil
turned loose all night, and I sat on my blanket in the middle of the floor
trying to shoot him by the light ofa flickering candle with a Lee-
Metford rifle. A friend was trying to sleep ina bunk in the hut.
At last I got ashot and made sure that I had hit him, bnt I could not
find his body, as he seemed to fall down a hole. Fifteen
minutes later my friend cried out that he had him between his
knees. As you may very well believe, I lost no time in squaring our
account and was not surprised to find that my shot had cut off one front
leg high up at the shoulder. Yet that rat for five minutes before his
capture was racketing round over every thing just as though nothing
was the taatter with him.

Every trapper and prospector in the mountains has many and
extraordinary. stories to tell of the Bushy-tailed rats and I find no
difficulty in believing all I am told but perhaps some of the stories
would not go down in the east.

This year I had to leave my house tor a few months and four Bush-
rats got into it. The state of that house after a montb with them for
tenants was indescribable on my return

There were six four-gallon coal oil cans full of cactus taken out of the
dining room; there were remains of hundreds of specimens of my butter-
flies which had been left neatly packed away in paper envelopes
scattered all over the floor, down in the cellar, up in the attic, in fact

228 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

everywhere ; there were four nests in the house, constructed of white
blankets cut up to suit—while huckaback towels cuf into cotton rags,
curtains, books, carpets, clothes, cartridges, pictures, work-baskets,
groceries, wheat, cutlery, children’s toys, cactus, bones of deer, dried
cow dung, doils’ tea-sets, about roo empty tins and 5000 prunestones,
carefully brought a distance of sixty yards from the rubbish hole. I have
not enumerated half the things in those nests but only a few that occur
to me. In conclusion, I may say that the Bushy-tailed rat evidently
considers that he owns any house in which he takes up his abode ; for
him any human intruder is the only part of the fnrniture to be avoided ;
but if cornered and brought to bay, he will not avoid even man but
will act on the defensive and die fighting like a tiger.

NOTES, REVIEWS AND COMMENTS. :

Geology :—Dawson, Sir Witiiam.— Zhe animal nature of
Lozoon, Geological Magazine, Oct., Nov. and Dec. 1895. 17 pp. with
eight illustrations.

This is a ‘‘ review of the evidence for the animal nature of Hozoon
Canadense.” Few are the geological subjects which have attracted
more attention or have been discussed more freely than the question as
to the animal nature of Eozoén. The purport of the present paper is
to correct ‘“‘some misapprehensions ” which as Sir William says ‘ seem
to have arisen in regard to points well established and which independ-
ently of any question as to the nature of Eozo6n, belong to the certain
data of geology.” Protest is also made “against that mode of treating
ancient fossils which regards the most obscured or defaced specimens
as typical.” This contribution is divided into three parts :—

1. Historical and stratigraphical. 2. Petrographical and chemical.
3. Structural and Biological.

In reviewing the evidence adduced during the last;thirty seven years
Sir William says: “I confess that in the intervening time I have seen no
good reason to induce me to doubt the essential validity of the work

Nores, Reviews anp COMMENTS. 229

embodied in the paper entitled, “On the Occurrence of Organic Re-
mains in the Laurentian Rocks of Canada,” a paper published con”
jointly, but prepared independently by Sir William Logan, Dr. T. Sterry
Hunt and Principal (now Sir William) Dawson.

- After pointing out the latest views held on the lowest Laurentian
by Dr. G. M. Dawson, Dr. Ells and Dr. F. D. Adams, Sir William
summarises the facts and states that “in the case of the Grenville lime-
stone” we have ‘to deal with a formation which indicates that in the
early period to which it belongs regular sedimentation was already in
full operation.”

Sir William then describes the mineralization of Zozoon and meets
the objections raised by Moebius “that the canal-systems of Zozoon and
its tubes present no regularity, “ by alledging that “good specimens

and decalcified specimens are required to understand the arrangement ”

of these tubes and canal systems.

Dr. Carpenter’s. views regarding the combined Rotaline and
Nnmmuline characters of Hozoon are again quoted by Sir William as
practically unassailable.—H. M. A.

Botany.— Canadian Wild Flowers. Painted and lithographed
by Agnes Fitz-Gibbon (Mrs. Chamberlin), Fourth Edition, 1895.

_ This new edition of a beautiful and well known book which first
appeared in 1869 will be welcomed by ail lovers of Canadian wild
flowers. It is rather remarkable that with the many lovely wild flowers
we have in our Canadian woods there is no work, with the exception of
the one under consideration and Mrs. Traill’s “ Plant Life in Canada,”
now out of print, where accurate figures and descriptions of the many
charming denizens of our woods can be found. A noticeable feature
of this work is that it is essentially Canadian, not only were the
drawings all done from nature by the talented artist, but also the litho-
graphing of the plates and their subsequent colouring by hand, an
undertaking simply gigantic in its proportions. ‘The title page and ten
plates upon which groups of some of our more showy native flowering
plants are displayed in a most tasteful and artistic manner, are by Mrs.
Chamberlin, an honoured member of our Club. The literary part of

230 THE OTTAWA NATURALIST.

the work, in which all the plants figured are described in a delightful
way, is by the weli known Canadian authoress, Mrs. C. P. Traill, who,
although now 94 years of age, still continues, unabated, her labour
of love, collecting the floral treasures of the picturesque islands near —
her home in Rice Lake and Stony Lake, and charms her friends ™
writing delightful observations on her favourites.

The binding and printing of this new edition by William Briggs,
of Toronto, are all that can be desired. The work is a well bound and
handsome 4to. of 88 pages, and I think the only fault that will be
found with it will be that it is all too short.

We trust that this edition may meet with so ready a sale that the
authoresses will teel encouraged to issue a second and similar selection
from Mrs. Chamberlin’s large collection of water-colour paintings of
the wild flowers of Ontario.—J. F.

Ornithology.—During the fall of 1895, the Editor of the Orrawa
NaTuRALIst had the good fortune to meet Mr. W. A. Hickman, a
most enthusiastic and ardent ornithologist as well as naturalist in the
town of Pictou, Nova Scotia. Mr. Hickman’s zeal can be more readily
estimated when we take into consideration the fact that in the course
of his preparation of the notes recording the migration, stay, dates
when first and when last seen on bird-life in the Pictou district of Nova
Scotia—he has walked the long distance of 2,600 miles and travelled
4,000 miles by steamer during the season of 1895.

In obtaining records of observations on bird life the year previous,
1894, Mr. Hickman travelled in all 3,500 miles. The number of birds
seen, the time when first seen, when last seen, whether the bird
breeds in the locality in question, together with interesting remarks on
the scarcity or direction of migration, etc., form some of the questions
which occupy his attention. To facilitate his observations, Mr. Hick-
man has a lovely yacht at his disposal, and is an expert rider on the
bicycle.

We venture to hope that we may soon receive additional material
for publication from Mr. Hickman on bird or animal life in Nova
Scotia.

Nores, Reviews AND CoMMENTs.

231

_ The following list of birds observed at Pictou for the first six
months of 1895, gives an idea of the thoroughness in which Mr. Hick-
man does his work. This jist has been submitted to our associate
editor, Mr. A. G. Kingston, dept. of Ornithology, who has prepared the
manuscript for the printer, and our best thanks are due to Mr. Hickman
for this interesting contribution from the east.

LIST OF BIRDS OBSERVED AT PICTOU, NOVA SCOTIA,
FROM FIRST OF JANUARY TO FIRST OF JULY, 1895.

By W. A. HIcKMAN, Pictou, N.S.

SPECIES.

Northern shrike, Zanzus borea-
NS Il

Arctic 3-toed woodpecker,
Picoides arcticus........

5 Peres
American golden-eye, G/aucio-) 5),

netta clangula americana.
Glaucous gull, Larus glaucus.

Canada goose, Aranta Cana- ich!

densis
Dusky duck, Amas oiscura....

American scoter, Ozdemia
OS a
Buffle head, Charitonetta
EME SB. aei> | sual «0

Whitewinged scoter, Ozdemia

Ca a Sen ee
Ivory gull, Gavia alba.......
American surf duck, Ozdéemia

WEPSPICEULG 5. ee ss
Song sparrow. MMelospiza fas-
Ol 5 ier
Eider duck, Somateria dres
- US AS aaa a

Brant, Branta bernicla......

Slate-coloured snowbird, Junco

MMEEED ssa Wy xs ois) = 2

Shore lark, Ofocoris alpestris..

Common crossbill, Lovia cur-

FIRST WHEN LAST |

SEEN.

Jan

se

ae

ee

oe
oe

ee

ee

‘ Apr.

ae

30

un

COMMON

SEEN.

Apr. 20

.| Jan.

21

Feb.

dS) 0) OB ie se ene eae
se 13
|
«19° Apr 26
Sp Be | Mch. 23
Apr. 5|June 3
SAG} she aoe
te ZON vse wags
‘* 15 | June 9
Mcii. 30 |+...05 »
Apr. 8 | Apr. 14

May 7|

REMARKS,

|

jnot common, northern

/ migrant.

‘rare northern migrant.

very common n. and s.

migrant.

rare n. migrant.

very common n. and s.
migrant.

breeds, very common,

../common, s. migrant.

lcommon, n. and s. mi-
grant.

jcommon, n. and s, mi-

grant.

rare, n. migrant.

\very common, n. and s,

| migrant.

|breeds, very common,
n. and s. migrant.

common. n. and §s, mi-
grant.

very common, n. and s.
migrant.

.. \breeds, s. migrant.

common, n. and s. mi-
grant.

not common, n. and s,

migrant.

. lrare, n, and s. migrant.

232 THe Orrawa NATURALIST. a

a FIRST WHEN | Last | @
SELCIES: SEEN. |COMMON] SEEN. i rca

—_—— - ———

Red-breasted merganser, Jer- breeds, very common,

ganser serrator . ee Ss. migrant. |
Snow lark-bunting, Plectrophe- :

max nivalis...... Sif terse cota aspera ae Apr. 6 |common, n. migrant.
American robin, Merula mi- -

FOU LOT II ene os onee ore je ee S62 .GuADY, 9040 eaeree breeds, very common. —
Am. Herring gull, Larus

argentatus smithsonianus.| ‘“* 8} “* 18]....... en S 5
Am. Scaup Duck, Aythya) «. ve Apr. 22 [Common n. and s. mi-

SNOTLIGRUCAT CCD ne atin s| a eel | me grant.

Pigeon hawk, Falco Colum-

(LUT SD Ce BS POE és 103) Apron 2 4]. 2a, DLeCGss common.
Cormorant, Phalacrocoraxcarbo|} ‘“* 10| ‘“* 21}....... Ec
Fox-coloured sparrow, Passer-) .. 5, | « q 3| May 7 common, n. and s. mi-

CUR MELIOLD. SS tered te aoe grant.

Marsh hawk, C7z7veus hudsonius) ‘‘ 11 pen) Cy Wet, is breeds, common.
Rusty grackle, Scoleophagus :

COV OUIILUS, eros raat ethers Apis i220) Api. 200 cere ‘* _very common.
Green-winged teal, das caro-| .. not common, n. and s.

LUREHSTS HIT ae Smee is I sat ace oe Bek, kn S, migrant.

Field sparrow. ‘Azzella pustlla.| ‘* 13 | Apr. 27 |......-- breeds, very common.
Great blue beron, Ardea hero-

LES SO -@ RAR A EOP ae aL > 20) |r es a =e age
American Woodcock, Philohe/la :

TELUOE ae hte, is eie EEE SENETG: ig eo es2 Sule ie eee ‘* common.

Pine grosbeak, Prrzcola enu- very common, n. mi-

GLEDEOR vy. Car Naiaiat ae EN tere eo eee | Meats Apr. 16 grant.

Bronzed grackle, Qzzscalus

guiscula enzus . .. +A pre 167|eMay M10 |c.-eance breeds, very common.
Wilson snipe, Gal/inago delica-

Lili. gioco See seri Loyal io) arto ant RS be
Red-tailed buzzard, Buteo bore-

LED er I i BPI FE Dre ahr the) [aoe oc se ‘< —-not common,
Gannet, Sz/a bassana........ CCE ZO hee tere its ieee not common.
White-bellied swallow, Zachy-

CUNELD MHECDIOT = weierae elon $6 120i), Apr: 20 aly saree breeds, very common.
Pied-billed grebe, Podilymbus) « 4,5 ‘Aviosee and s. migrant, not

SPODLCEDRY, «15 Soni Fe oe |e | eit common in spring.
Am. bittern, Botaurus lentigi-

MOSUS eet a peat oie PLE ES. 25") May. FO" seer ..|/breeds, common.
Goosander, Merganser amert- Apr. 22 [Very common, n. mi-

CHIUS ois wee 3 Seek oee Sh are aii grant.

Kingfisher, Ceryle alcyon..... ADPY.c24 Pg eka| eee breeds, very common.
Purple finch, Carpodacus pur-

PUTEUSSEN,. 3) han tae 5 PE gee ie” Vim ea 7 fe * =m
Savanna sparrow, <Awmmo-

dramus sandwichensis sav-

DIENG. Ti Riws ciel eele ake = idea A$ [5 Sse ace ee oe “ common.
Common tern, Sterna‘hirundo.| ‘* 26) May 7|...-.... ‘* -very common.
Atctic tern, S. paradisea.: |) 20)| Peet 2) were «common.
Golden-winged — woodpecker, :

Colaples auratus........ ‘¢ 26 Apr. 27 [so c0« eel) oy) MO RmCGRIIHnaE

SPECIES.

Olive-backed thrush, Zzrdus
ustudatus swainsoni?.....
Swamp sparrow, AMelospiza
georgiana
Great-northern diver, Urinato7|
ME eR es 8 a5 wes
Yellow redpoll warbler, Den-
drotca palmarum hypoch-
Lr 2 ee
Long-tailed duck, Changula
00 0 a
Redpoll, Acanthis linaria....
White-throated sparrow, Zov0-
trichia albicollts.........
Yellow-rumped warbler, Den-
adroica coronata
Solitary sandpiper,
0 ore ee
Hermit thrush, 7727:/us aonal-
aschkae pallasit
Barn swallow, Chelidon eryth-

Totanus

REM REEET e205, 51vin, 018 <0 5s
Chipping sparrow, Sfzzel/a
One a an
Red-throated diver, Urinato;
CLT ee
Spotted sandpiper, Actztis
C0 Ta
Humming bird, Zrochtlus
POBAUES © orks Ss.
American coot, Fulica amert-
TINS 5 re
Semipalmated plover, giali-
tis semipalmata........
Cliff swallow, Petrochelidon
ETON. oe vB: oan. > 2
_ Sparrow hawk, Falco sparver-
TS eee
Yellow warbler, Dendroia
BANNERS fetarehe ciel 6.05 3/0

a

American osprey,
haliaetus carolinensis... .
Red-eyed viree, Vireo olivaceus
Black-throated green warbler,
Dendroi ENB ig 3s 15
King bird, Tyrannus tyrannus
Ruby-crowned kinglet, Regu-
lus calendula

lager if w4 » —— 3 Lhd Pal sl peck at
? - ¢ (rang 7
Fa bey . %
~1
wy
Nores, Reviews AND ComMEN’s. 233
FIRST | WHEN LAST
SEEN. | COMMON] SEEN. a ;
.
Apr. 26 v9) Soe.) ieee ee i: < a
Tr ON owen, eae cee ne not common.
AS ly ei ANTE Bol eagemrcaceee ‘* very common.
ce 28 oe I ee oe “oe oe se
PR «rset Oe are Apes 28-[% Seats | ae -
grant.
Pad > hee | Sete reas are ‘© 28 \rare northern migrant.
Apt. 20)|\May 4.l\seee es breeds, very common.
es 30 oe | Bae ee “e se “e
May. Ti: “4ilece wae: ‘ " “
2% Sheed Pueceen ‘* common.
1; ), ag #- Vel te eee $ FE
eS) BCE Pine ere ‘* very common.
“3 May 20] May 30 very common, n. and s,
migrant.
ee oT Re ra Re a seco breeds, very common.
breeds, very common,
ay (a pata 00 > 2 first appearance very
early.
PSB) Ts rete sarsia pte aa breeds (?), not common.
> Me y very common, n. and s.
9 ¥ 15 | May 28 migrant.
FP aOliae a2) aman breeds, very common.
ot: || eee “* not common.
SS: LO. MAY 24) one cee «* very common.
aa ran ay | eiteraeg es common.
comet a Mee y eye SEs - es
oo TEL of ore ees ‘* very common.
SS 12 |. «20 Vaden ge Pak bots “S
“ee 12 ae 22 a R a “e ae se

234 Tue OtTrawa NATURALIST.

SPECIES.

American goldfinch, Spinus
LFTHAS Cae A Shee Naeger
Blue-winged teal, Anas dis-
COTS cs Sc Dee a 2
Pintail duck, Dajila acuta....
Leach’s petrel, Oceanodroma
VEULCOTHOU 7. hee eee
Least Sandpiper, Tringa
TATU, es Boye ce Na oh
Piping plover, 4yialitis melo-
(hie tee eee erie
Oven bird, Sezurus aurocapil-
US oA eo ie Fae eee
Golden plover, Charadrius
dominicus ....
Black-bellied plover, ‘Chara-
drius squatarola........
American redstart, Setophaga
TULLOCH Lorde oe Spo eee
Wilson thrush, Twurdus fusces-
CONE SAO ae i ease bee
Bobolink, Dolichonyx orizi-
POPU. cae 2 Bae eee Se
Wood pewee, Contopus virens.
Bank swallow, Clivicola ripa-
CT ie Ne 5 ROTARY AD
Black and white warbler, Mnio-
Cilia? OOFIO oop F eA he
Hudsonian titmouse, Parus
RUABOTACUE © on ok «2 aes
Yellow and black warbler,
Dendroica maculosa....
Greater yellow-legs, Totanus
melanoleucus.. ........
Lesser yellow-legs, 7'otanus
flavipes: See aise s soe as
Little green-crested flycatcher,
Empidonax virescens....
Golden-crowned kinglet, Regu-
USB SOE OUPIE «seis eRe
Bay-breasted warbler, Den-
droica castanea ........

Eskimo curlew, Nwimenius
DORCAS A <a. 5 demi aes

Turnstone, Arenaria interpres

Wood duck, Azz sponsa.....
Maryland yellowthroat, Geo-
thiypis trychas Ri siete ;
Purple martin, Progne subi.

FIRST WHEN LAST
SEEN. |COMMON| SEEN.

May

oe

ee

ee

ee

ee

io

ESM iviaye Ailes eee breeds, very common.
: not common, n. and s.
ala aie hte ate ; entowerit?
LON ke Peet heen Seyi rare n. and s. migrant.
Ticats ell eeacete tae breeds, not common.
very common, n. and s.
15 | May 17 | May 28 migrant.
jl WA Ns ES oh breeds, very common.
LF ie Fi 2G |e eyecare ** quite common.
17) | se steta cers May 17 |rare, n. and s. migrant.
not common, n. and s.
yal eye ee et, er |
LOM) Mayie2 bili sts breeds, very common.
rod at ee ee = ge aa x2
POA eee 20)| or een ee * “
EO, cee Syn axeeteeers ‘* common.
EQ) | er “2S | epee ‘© very common.
3) ers oF . |breeds (?), not common.
very common, n. mi-
ayaa hele owes May 20 grant.
22 Maye25iltcckm es breeds, very common.
very commonin autumn,
22) ea as ee n. and s. migrant.
verycommon in autumn,
gcse hs Si, n. and s. migrant.
22:1 May 307. o.— 6 a breeds, common.
rT eS fe a May 22 |"°O Com ae
grant.
DSi ain. ee pace Rear breeds, not common.
n. and s. migrant, com-
DA Nica Seem May 24 mon in autumn not,
in spring.
not common, n. and s.
Bia. sx «Poms 3 heat setenee migrant. : 5
ZA eke ckewat Mcpd tye breeds, rare. “
27)| May120'lk. 1. “* very common.

Fune «2 )fune< 8 {7s

REMARKS.

** bec’mg common.

i

Nores, Reviews anp CoMMENTs.

FIRST | WHEN | LAST
—_ SEEN. |COMMON| SEEN. REMARES:
Cedar waxwing, <Ampelis
MOUNT. 2. ay oo ws oe June © 5. PanesnE tess cs ** quite common.
Night hawk, Chordeiles virgi-
ESE ey i ear oe ONS Setar “* very common
Black-billed cuckoo, Coccyzus
erythrophthalmus....... i) Ca lees C-: ‘© common.
Louisiana water-thrush, Seiu-
vues Mmolacilia,........... el 2-34 fetes eres), | eS & Pee ** not common,
Warbling vireo, Mareogslctas| “= 20a sted so praciava dels ‘© rare,
Worm-eating warbler, Hel-
eeerertis vermivorus....|' ©" '20.).....e.e)carewes- «) '¥are;
Loggerhead shrike, Lanius
tudovicianus ........... Ry QUA Tos sae feet ora rare, s. migrant.
Pee. Spina pnus.... |.-....-.| 2. 0c--s)eescenss generally common, not
seen this spring.
Winter wren, J’roglodytes hy-
PRIME 2S SS oes Via vw cao oe Lc, te bake |e sometimes seen in fall.
Great-black-backed gull,
RMD UTMARTAE oe ot, 2s soi hocade ten) s10:} tums ayes 2 nc eee aoe resident, very common.
Canada grouse, Dendragapus ‘* becoming less
RIE Meet oe Mian Pe ce ayes <n, we < miwllone etanelgtete common.
Ruffed grouse, Bonasa umbel-
-) ou: Mex lly GREER SEs) Sar eas barre ‘* very common.
American goshawk, A ccipeter
2 LE Oe Mera (Cece orien ee sec ‘* not common.
Barred owl, Syrnium nebu- | ‘* our commonest
i et ilies peor Corer br. wine mie 4
Acadian owl, N yctala weurlienl: o>... |t <2 : ; Ayes Pe .|resident, rather rare.
Great- horned owl, Bubo vir-
RS neo | oss wie co | one noe os fg e e ‘« ver; common.
Northern hairy woodpecker,
Dryobates villosus leu-
es Coe Pee ed eee ee ** not common.
Hairy woodpecker, Dryobates
SE ero cst [ke « isi of etine a2 Peete P ‘¢ very common,
Downy woodpecker, Dryobates
0 ros Crea) Remind Porn io ss “ ot
Pileated woodpecker, Ceoph-
Veeus pileatus..... 1.02.0) eeeeeceelecee ee eelaeeeees ‘© rare.
Blue jay, Cyanocitta. ered |Me.. ii (sacs cetelegroee ‘very common.
Canada jay, Perisoreus cana-
OST ta A Sa RAN sen arte br eae trp cs € “
American aa Corvus corax
Oe Pena Pree eee ec ye “ 2 <
American crow, iceus ameri-
9 i Saat ERAN RReairaees Pcirareery rier ir) es ma be
European house sparrow, Pas-
PETQOMESUCUB:, «5.152 222\ 0-0 ET ome ad acta a “ts ss
Brown Creeper, Certhia fami-
liaris americana........ Ha diosdis ais Recenter ae ere ae nae ** not common.
White-breasted nuthatch, Sitta
Se CePee rere Cee oe ‘* common.
Red-breasted nuthatch, Sifta
CONOENEIE oc 5 oc ww aircalens os SARE A Wad wnt ‘« very common.
Black-capped titmouse, Parus
PTACOTUIUB 5 sis dele's dle at |e iss CRE Coe ae) Coe ss fs ‘

236 THE OrrawA NATURALIST.

Zoology :—-MerriAM, C. Hart.—z. Revision of the American
gencra Blarina and Notiosorex. 2. The long-tatled shrews of the Eastern
Onited States. 3. Synopsis of the American shrews of the genus Sorex
forming pt. No. 10 of ‘* NortH AMERICAN Fauna,” Dec. 1895.

The first and third papers are by our Corresponding member, Dr.
C. Hart Merriam, and the second by Gilbert S. Miller, jr. Together,
they contain 100 pages of letter press accompanied by twelve plates of
illustrations. The history, non:enclature and descriptions of the genera
and species of North American long-tailed and short-tailed shrews are
given in the two first-named papers. Many ot the species described or
recorded are from Canada and these are noted for the sake of reference.

I, One Canadian Genus and Species of Short-Tailed Shrews.

1. Blarina brevicauda, Say, (Sorex talpoides, Gapper.)
Vicinity of Lake Simcoe, Ontario. Rat Portage, Lake of the Woods,
and Ottawa,Ont. are all given as Canadian localities, besides Digby,N.S.

Ll. Long-Tailed Shrews, from Canadian localities.

1. Sorex Hoyt, Baird. Belongs to the new sub-genus : Microsorex,
Baird. Recorded from New Brunswick and Nova Scotia.

2. Sorex palustric, Richardson. Locality: between Hudson Bay
and the Rocky Mts. precise loc., South Edmonton, Alberta. This
species is referred to the sub-genus /Veosorex, Baird.

3. Sorex albibarbis, (Cope.) Can. loc, Lac aux Sables, Quebec, and
Nova Scotia,

4. Sorex Richardsoni, Bachman, Manitoba west to Alberta.

5. Sorex fumeus Miller, N. Sp. Nova Scotia, New Brunswick and
west to Ontario and the great lakes.

6. Sorex personatus, Saint-Hilaire. The male specimens recorded
came from South Edmonton, Alberta.

< Notes, Reviews anp ComMENts.

4
LIL. Canadian species fiom the Synopsis of the American shrews of the
genus Sorex.*

In this synopsis by Dr. Merriam the following species of Canadian
_ shrews are recorded by that author and the synonymy is also given
besides the exact locality and the synonymy is also given besides the
exact locality were the specimens thus recorded were found or captured,
bit will be seen that some of the species here recorded also occur in
_ Mr. Miller’s previous list (see above), but they are given as described
_ by Dr. Merriam with the precise localities whence they were obtained.

1. Sorex personatus, Saint Hilaire. Loc : Brit. Columbia : Glacier,
Field, Cariboo Lake, near Kamloops, Sicamous Mount Baker.
Assa:—Indian Head. Alberta :— Sth. Edmonton, St. Albert, Island
Lake, Banff, Canmore. Manitvba :—Carberry. Onéario :—Rat Portage,
’ Ottawa, Parry Sound, Sand Lake. Mew Brunswick :—St. John.
Quebec :—Godbout. _

2. Sorex personatus Streatori, (sub-species nov.)—Brit. Columbia :
—Glacier. Alberta :—Sth. Edmonton. Quebec :—Godbout.

3. Sorex Richardsoni, Bachman. Recorded from four Canadian
_ localities. Adbesta:—Sth. Edmonton, St. Albert, Island Lake.
Assa.:—Indian Head. Saska¢.:—Wingard. Manttoba :—Carberry.

4. Sorex sphagnicola, Coues. This is the so-called Sorex Bells,
_ Dobson, and is interesting not only since the type came from Canada,
near Ft. Liard, Brit. Columbia, but also because Dr. Dobson described
the same species from a specimen collected by Dr. Bell from Flayes
River, Hudson Bay, in 1885. Dr. Bell’s specimen is said to have been
the totem of an Indian chief, who, when he found out that he
_ missed the totem, went on the war path. Precise locality :—Shamatawa
River, Hayes R., Hudson Bay. Specimen in the Museum of the
of the Geological Survey, Ottawa.

5. Sorex vagrans, Baird. Occurs in Brit. Columbia at Port Moody,
Sumas, and on the Mt. Baker Range.

7. Sorex Vancouverensis, (Merriam) N. Sp. Type from Goldstream,
Brit. Columbia, a species closely related to Sorex vagrans, Baird.

a

*p. 57:

237

238 THe Orrawa NATURALIST.

8. Sorex obscurus, Merriam, Abundant in Brit. Columbia. Occurs

at the following localities :—Nelson, Ward, Field, Glacier, Golden,

Kamloops (Cariboo Lake), Sicamous, Goldstream, V. I., Sumas,
Comox, and Port Moody. In Alberta, at Henry House two specimens.

9g. Sorex Hoyt, Baird. A Microsorex. Recorded from Quebec :—
Godbout. Nova Scotia:—Digby. Manitoba :—Red River Settlement.
British Columbia :—Stuart Lake.

Entomology.—THE CampripGe Naturat History. Vol. V.

Macmillan & Co., London and New York. 1895.

This is the second published volume (Vol. III treating of
Mollusca having previously appeared) of a series now being issued under
the able editorship of S. F. Harmer, M. A., Superintendent of the
Cambridge Uuiversity Museum of Zoology, and A. E. Shipley, M. A.,
University lecturer on the Morphology of Invertebrates. The series of
ten volumes when compieted will constitute a work indispensable to
the library of any one interested in Natural History, and will form an
authoritative condensation of the present knowledge of animals in
all branches. The present volume contains in the first place a

twenty-four page account of the genus Peripatus, a curious slug-like

creature, which “stands absolutely alone as a kind of half-way animal
between the Arthropoda and Annelida.” The species are few in
number, but have an extended distribution occurring, in South Africa,
Australia, New Zealand, South and Central America and the West Indies.
This interesting and complete account of their structure, development
and habits is by Adam Sedgwick, M. A., F. R. S., who had previously
monagraphed the group, (Quart. Journ. of Mic. Science, Vol. XXX V/I1.)
The Myriapoda are next treated of by F.G. Sinclair, M.A., whose article
covers some fifty pages, and is an admirable sketch of these many-
legged creatures, which are generally looked upon distrustfully because
of the dread inspired by the section known as centipedes, and our 1anate
aversion to any crawling, wriggling creature that delights in darkness
and concealment.

Nores, Reviews AnD ComMENTs. 239

The remaining five hundred pages of the volume are devoted to a
discussion of the Insects by D. Sharp, M. A., who will require another
volume to complete his account of this most prolific of all the classes of
animal life. Nearly one hundred pages are occupied by a very complete,
although necessarily concise description of the anatomy, embryology
and development of insects in general. This is followed by an outline
of the classification and it is noted with pleasure that Dr. Sharp has not
followed the propensity of some authors to divide the insects into a
large number of orders, but has limited them to nine; viz. Aptera,
Orthoptera, Neuroptera, Hymenoptera, Coleoptera, Lepidoptera, Diptera,
Thysanoptera and Hemiptera. The first order contains
Thysanura and _ Collembola, the little creatures, mostly
found in damp localities, known as “springtails.” The chapters
_ dealing with the Orthoptera will attract the attention of many readers:
from the numerous interesting forms which are mentioned, whose
great diversity of structure and orramentation are so well depicted by
beautiful illustrations of many of the remarkable genera which inhabit
tropical regions. The Neuroptera, though not yielding such strangely
developed and fantastic insects, are perhaps more interesting from their
greater variety of habit, arising partly from the fact that so many of the
species are aquatic in their early stages. This order also contains the
familiar Termites, or so-called white ants, in which the social life has
developed great variations in the forms and functions of different
individuals and results in the construction of sometimes really wonderful
erections. Each of these two extensive orders requires about one
hundred and fifty pages for its exposition, and the remaining eighty
pages treat of the Hymenoptera, (in part), the most interesting in many
ways of all the orders of insects.

The portion of the order dealt with in this volume, includes the
Sessiliventres (Saw-flies and Horn-tails) and the parasitic families of the
Petiolata. Fine illustrations are given of several species which occur
at Ottawa such as Oryssus Sayi, Tremex columba, Thalessa lunator and
Pelecinus polyturator. All the illustrations throughout the volume are
_ most excellent, and the figures, of which there are 371, have been in
gréat measure drawn especially for the work, which is beautifully printed,

.

240 Tue OrrawAa NATURALIST.

and neatly bound in cloth. It is a work which cannot be too highly
recommended to the students desiring to have any accurate general
knowledge of the animal kingdom, and the appearance of the next
volume will be awaited with great interest. Dr. Sharp has pointed out
that in Fig. 333, p. 490, fis called a division of the metanotum, whereas _
it belongs. to the mesonotum. This error in writing the description of the —
figure will be corrected in the next volume; which will commence with
the aculeate hymenoptera.—W. HacueE HARRINGTON,

LECTURE COURSE.

Judging by the attendance at the lectures this winter the Councils
of both societies have reason to congratulate themselves. Owing to —
circumstances over which the Societies had no control the lecture which
was to have been delivered by the Hon. Dr. Montague, M. P. &c. was
indefinitely postponed.

Extinct Monsters.—On the 23rd of January Dr. H. M. Ami —
of the Geological Survey Department gave a very interesting and ‘-
instructive lecture on “‘ Extinct Monsters.” The material with which —
Dr. Ami illustrated his lecture consisted of a series of very carefully —
prepared lantern slides which he had obtained in Europe last summer, ~
together with others specially prepared for himself in’ Ottawa from
works bearing on the subject. Upwards of sixty magnificent lantern
slides were thrown on the screen by means ofan excellent oxy-hydrogen —
lantern, skilfully handled by Mr. Dunn of the Inland Revenue Depart-_
ment, Ottawa. ‘These views illustrated the works of Cuvier, Sir Richard —
Owen Marsh, Cope, Huxley and others. y

The most interesting and best known Amphibia, Reptilia, ~
Dinosauria, extinct birds, Mammalia (including fossil elephants and —
horses), the sea-cow, and a large number of the most recently discovered —
specimens -were described and _ shown to a large and apprecaaay ig
audience.

Labrador.—On the 3oth. of January Mr. A. P. Low of the same
department gave a most graphic and charming description of his:
explorations in the Labrador peninsula. The various routes traversed, —
the character of the country, the trees, the inhabitants, the mineral
resources of that region were all presented in sucha manner as to elicit a
profound attention and frequent applause. Mr. Low’s lecture was
illustrated with numerous views of that little known yet very interesting
Peninsula.

A very animated discussion followed the reading of this paper in —
which Dr. Selwyn, Dr. Thorburn, Prof. Macoun, Dr. Sandford Fleming, “
Mr. Tyrrell, Dr. Wicksteed and Mr. Anthony McGill took part. ;

Announcement.—The lectures for February under the joint .
auspices of the Club and of thé Ottawa Literary and Scientific Society will
be held in the Normal School as follows. As

February 6th.—Dr. T. J. W. Burgess, of the Royal Society
cf Canada, Montreal, will lecture on: “How to study Botany.”

February 2oth. —Dr. F. D. Adams of McGill University, Montreal
will illustrate and describe ‘‘ Pompeii.” Dr. Adams has with hima very —
interesting series of lantern slides to illustrate that ancient city wher
such Saath excavations have heen carried on in recent vears. ' ©

3)

THE OTTAWA NATURALIST.

——— —

VoL. 1X. OTTAWA, MARCH, 1896. No. 12.
NOTES ON THE STUDY OF BOTANY.
By T. J. W. Burcess, M. D., F. R. S. C. &c. (Montreal, Que.)

Read before the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, Ottawa, 6th February, 1896.
Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen :—

The highest and most important object of all human science
should be mental improvement, and the study of natural history, in
_ particular field-work, when properly pursued, is assuredly adapted to
strengthen, discipline, and develop the mental powers. It robs the
mind of contracted ideas, induces us to take close as well as compre-
hensive views of objects, and teaches us to argue from facts, not from
fancies. ‘Though the study of nature in any of her forms is calculated to
bring about these results, none of the natural sciences is as good for be-
ginners as botany, the materials being everywhere abundant and inex-
pensive. ‘To the average student, plants, possessing life, are more in-
teresting than minerals, while animals, though affording the most
striking marks of designing wisdom, cannot be dissected and examined
without painful emotions.

One of the most apparent of the many advantages to be gained by
the study of botany is that it systematizes the mind, by imprinting on
it and establishing habits of order and exactness. It thus gives all the
benefits of mathematics or logic without the drudgery which debars so
many from pursuing the study of these sciences. System is essential
not only in science, but in conducting any kind of business and in the
most trivial affairs of every-day lite ; thus, the very logical and systematic
alrangement prevailing in botanical science cannot but induce in the
mind a habit and love of order, which, when once established, will

operate in even the minutest concerns. The methodical habits of

- = Fe

942 THE Orrawa NATURALIST.

thought, by which alone plants can be properly examined, must
necessarily be inculcated, and will prove invaluable in any vocation of
lite. Nor is it essential that the study (to be of uses a training for
the mind) should be carried to any great length— ve cannot all hope to
be Darwins, Grays or Macouns—the elements of the science alone are
sufficient as a means for the practice of this training to habits of
methodical thought.

The taking of notes in a neat and systematic way, by which alone
the results of examinations and discoveries can be recorded in a manner
ready for reference, begets a concise style and an accurate use of exact
words ; while in the very collecting of material to form an herbarium,
the faculty of observation is cultivated and developed, and the power to
discriminate between species, thus to appreciate minute differences
is obtained. Most important of all things to the botanist are these
faculties of observation and comparison. Many persons have a natural
acuteness in perceiving details of structure and in generalizing results,
while others are very obtuse in such respects. Yet, in all, these powers
can be cultivated and strengthened, and herein lies one of the great
educational uses of botany, that it trains us to see and to think.

But in addition to the direct benefits to be gained by the study of
botany, there are others of a more general nature, and man’s great aim
in life being the pursuit of happiness, I would place first the added
pleasure it gives to life. To one not trained to an inquisitive appre-
ciation of Dame Nature how comparatively few are the beauties she
displays.

‘A primrose by the river’s brim

A yellow primrose is to him,

And it is nothing more.”
Very different is it when he has the slightest knowledge of botany
Then, in even the humblest of the vegetable creation, he can note the
structure, take cognizance of the relationship borne by the several parts
to each other, see the marvellous way in which each organ is adapted
to serve a certain end, and in all admire and do homage to that All
Wise Being at whose creative fiat all things first were made.

Last but by no means least of the advantages to be mentioned is,
that the pursuit of the science, leading to exercise in the open air, is

Notes ON THE Stupy or Booaxy, 243

conducive to health and cheerfulness. Botany is not a sedentary study,
which can be followed in the house, but one the love of which compels
its devotees to seek their amusement out of doors, thus to breathe the
pure air where the objects of their search are to be found ; in the fields,
along the winding brooks, on the mountain side, or in the cool depths
of the forest. In every pursuit a certain amount of recreation and
exercise is necessary for the maintenance of health, and walking is the
means commonly employed to procure this. A walk taken merely asa
duty is wearisome, but when indulged in with a definite and pleasant
end in view it becomes delightful. As soon as one in his rambles
begins to search for and collect any special class of objects he becomes
interested, and marvels how he could formerly have been blind to so
much that is curious and beautiful. To those who know anything of
out-door life what a source of enjoyment it is to wander through the
fields and woods. Each step brings some object of interest, or some
new discovery ; a flower not hitherto noticed, or some familiar one
showing variation from the common form; a rare bird flitting from
branch to branch; or some brilliantly colored insect pursuing its erratic
flight.

During the past thirty years the methods of teaching botany have
undergone a radical change. As formerly pursued the study consisted
mainly in learning from some book, the names of the different kinds of
roots, stems, leaves and flowers. If plants were obtainable the scholar
was perhaps made to run superficially over a few of them, and by aid
of an artificial key determine their names. The terms used were hard
and unfamiliar and there were no specimens to illustrate the lessons.
Was it any wonder then that pupils acquired a disgust for the science ?
Little or no field-work was attempted, and no thought was taken to
promote habits of close observation, or to secure a knowledge of the
mysteries of plant-life. By the new system of teaching, the Special
design of which is the training of pupils to fit them for original work,
objects are studied before books, and the student is at once set to
investigating and experimenting for himself.

To give you an idea of this modern method of teaching botany, I
have made a short resumé of a paper on the subject by Professor Beal.

244 THe OrrawaA NATURALIST.

Before the first lesson each pupil is furnished with, or told where to
procure, some specimen for study. If it is winter, and flowers or
growing plants are not to be had, each is given a branch of a tree or
shrub. The examination of these is made by the pupils themselves
during the usual time for preparing lessons, and for the first recitation
each tells what he has discovered about his specimen, which is not in
sight. If there is time. each member of the class is allowed a chance to
mention anything not named by any of the rest. If two members dis-
agree on any point, they are requested to bring in, the next day, after
further study, all the proofs they can to sustain their different con-
clusions. In learning the lesson, books are not used, nor are the pupils
told what they can see for themselves. An effort is made to keep them
working after something which they have not yet discovered. Fora
second lesson, the students review the first lesson,—report on a branch
of a tree of another species which they have studied as before,—and
notice any points of difference or-of similarity. In like manner new
branches are studied and new comparisons made. ‘Time is not con-
sidered wasted in this. No real progress can be made till the pupils
begin to learn to see; and to learn to see they must keep trying to form
the habit from the very first ; and to form the habit the study of specimens
is made the main feature in the course of training. The use of technical
names is not avoided, nor are these “thrust upon a student.” They are
learned as they are needed, a few at a time, from the teacher or a text-book.
Afterf rom four to ten lessons on small branches, the following points, and
many others, are brought out. Is there any definite proportion of active and
dormant buds in any year? Where do branches appear? Is there any
certain number of leaves in a year’s growth, or any definite proportion
between the length of the internodes? Is there any order as to what
buds grow, and what remain dormant? etc., etc. The pupils are now —
ready for a book-lesson on buds, branches, and phyllotaxis, and will
read it with interest and profit. In like manner any other topic, as
roots, seeds, stamens, leaves or petals is first taken up by the study of
specimens. Very little stress is placed on investigating a number of
chapters in the definite order as given in a text-book. For example, it
makes very little difference whether a pupi! begins with the study of

a > a |

_ Nores on THE Srupy or Borany, 245

; petals or stamens, buds or roots, leaves or pistels; but it is desirable
after beginning any topic, not to abandon it until many of
‘of the various forms have been thoroughly studied. After a day, two»
three or more of study of the specimens pertaining to one topic, comes
the study of the book. <A young man of eighteen begins and pursues
the same conrse as a child of ten, only he will progress faster and go
deeper. As students advance, subjects for descriptive compositions are
assigned them. Each pupil. studies the living plants for himself and
makes his own observations, experiments and notes, the only help
afforded him being brief hints as to how to set to work intelligently.
For instance,—one studies and writes upon the arrangement -and
development of the parts of the flower with reference to its self-
fertilization or fertilization by birds, insects, wind or other means ;
another the climbing of virginia-creeper ; another the times of opening
and closing of flowers; and so on ad tufinitum. When completed the
theses are read in the class-room. Throughout the academic year full
three-fourths of the time is given to object lessons, books serving only
for reference. But little time is occupied with lectures, short talks of
ten or fifteen minutes being occasionally given. In the whole course
there is kept constantly in view how best to prepare students to acquire
information for themselves with readiness and accuracy, in other words,
they are trained more than they are taught.

This, or some modification of it, is the system of teaching botany
now most in repute, and wisely so. [| agree fully with Prof. Beal that
the great object should be to put students in the way of becoming
independent and reliable observers and experimenters, and that the
method of study pursued should be primatily objective, and based upon
the actual examination of appropriate material. To my mind, however,
a certain, though slight, amount of knowledge gained by the old system
is necessary before much can be accomplished by the new, and I would
prefer, if teaching, to first of all give my pupils some idea of what plants
are, how they grow, the nature of their structure, and the number of
their parts. This to be done in a short series (three or four) of familiar
talks, made as simple as possible, with each point illustrated by drawings,
models, dried specimens, or, best of all, freshly gathered plants. With-

246 > THe OTrtraAwa NATURALIST.

out some faint idea of plant life, to plunge a pupil headlong into the
depths of the study, were to me like setting him to solve some abstruse
mathematical problem prior to his learning the meaning of addition and
subtraction. Mr. Beal, too, in his paper, whatever he may do in practice,
makes no mention of a point which I deem ofvital importance, viz., that
every student in botany, from almost his very entry on the subject, should
be urged to start and taught how to make an herbarium, or collection of
plants, for himself. Field-work is of the greatest importance in promoting
familiarity with habitats, and in solving most of the problems of plant life,
and to induce pupils to engage actively in field-work there is nothing
equal to starting them to form an herbarium, for in no other way can such
an interest be excited. In my experience, young people can best be
stimulated to take an interest in any branch of study by giving them
something to do in connection with it.

But it is not alone in the excitement of an interest in the study of
botany that the value of an herbarium lies. The ultimate end of any
scientific study being the mastery of all that can be learned concerning
it, the formation of a collection of plants in a manner most convenient
for reference is a necessary part of the science of botany.

But enough has been said to give you an idea of the general
"principles on which botany is now usually taught in colleges and
schocls. Let me next devote myself to telling you what / consider the
best way for you to enter on the study. The first step is to procure a
text-book on structural botany. For choice I would name Gray’s
- “ Lessons in Botany.” It is not too complicated and yet is extensive
enough, except for advanced students who wish to devote themselves
specially to the study. A work on systematic botany is also essential,
and I know of none better than the ‘‘ Manual of the Botany of the
Northern. United States,” which covers our Canadian flora in great
measure. I would advise any one purchasing to get the ‘‘ Lessons”
and “Manual” bound together. In this shape, the books are not only
cheaper but more handy. We have in combination excellent works on
both departments of Botany, Structural and Systematic, no small -
desideratum to the beginner, who, in naming plants by the latter, will

Norges ON THE Stupy or Borany. 247

- from time to time meet with unfamiliar terms, for the meaning ot which
he will require to refer to the former.

A text-book secured, comes what is generally looked upon as a
rather dry part of the study, viz, the reading of it. Many words are
met with which are strange and difficult to remember, but let me tell
you that the labor of learning technical terms is usually much .over-
estimated. With practice they soon become familiar, while the dis-
cipline taught the mind in learning them is worth all it costs. There
is no royal road to soiving the problems of nature any more than there
is to deciphering the mysteries of mathematics or metaphysics, but at
each step the way becomes easier till at last what was a wearisome task
becomes a pleasant and absorbing recreation. ‘The so-called drudgery”
is greatly lessened if the reading be pursued in a proper manner, and
especially if the reader has before hit the proper material to illustrate
the more important points in each topic as it is taken up. He who
has some older botanical head to advise him what material to provide
beforehand for each chapter, is greatly blessed,* but, whether he has
specimens to examine or only the plates in his text-book to guide him,
I would strenuously advise him to make no effort to commit all the
terms he meets to memory. Let him try toread slowly and under-
standingly, but let him bear in mind that the object of this primary
reading, is only to get a general notion of plants and their parts, and to
learn the meaning of a few of the most material technial terms, so as to
be able to start collecting and naming plants for himself. Thus, in the
first reading, he will gain an idea of the life-history of a plant, and dis-
cover that as a rulea miniature plantlet, the embryo, exists ready formed
in the seed. If now this seed, say that of the maple, be placed in the ground
and allowed to germinate, the miniature plantlet will soon be seen to
develop in two opposite directions; downward into a root or
descending axis, and upward into a stem or ascending axis, The stem
as it reaches the surface of the ground will be seen to beara pair of
narrow green leaves, the seed-leaves or cotyledons. Soon between these
seed-leaves will appear a little bud, which shoots upward intoa second
joint bearing another pair of leaves, which, however, differ in shape

248 aa5 Orrawa Naruraust. : :

fom the first pair and. ees those of the maple _ as s usually. seen.
Later,.a. third joint shoots. up from the. summit of the second, “bearing ata
third pair of leaves, and so on until the plant likeness.ot the seed be- >
comes a Ne dergroped. tree. The Ae prbans root, stem, and leaves,
menial. organs “or “organs or vegetation, ‘polauds ‘they have for thélic
object the “development cand | nutrition of the plant ; while all the parts
which succeed the leav es, such as the flower and its organs, ate only
modifications of. them designed for a special purpose, and are called the
organs of teproduction, since on them depends the increase of the plant
in numbers, _or the continuance of the species.

Proceeding onward with his reading the student will obtain some “&
general. knowledge. of the various sorts and forms of these two sets of
organs,-and-afterward will get an insight into the life of plants, and the
mode in: which, they. do the work of vegetation. He will discover that
all plants.possessing leaf-green (Chlorophyll) as the pigment which gives
‘the.green:color.to the leaves is called, possess also the power of assimil-
ation; that.is:of, making starch and similar organic compounds out of
inorganic elements, such as water and carbonic acid; which trans-
formation, -briefly,. speaking, is thus effected. The plant through its
roots, by the process known as osmose, takes in, dissolved in water,
“various compounds _containing carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen and
other materials, _The pressure exerted by the liquid as it comes into
‘the. Troois, “together with the attraction exerted by a constant process of
“evaporation f from ‘the leaves, causes the “sap,” which is the plant food,
tori rise, and gives us 3 what is known as the plant circulation. When, by
this osmgtic action, the sap finally reaches the leaves, it, in conjunction
with, carbonic acid derived from the air, is converted, in the chlorophy?l
grains. under the influence of sunlight, into organic materials, which —
; Pa, into a whitish granular liquid called protoplasm, and are used in “4

or, owth,” that is in the building of new cells to form plant tissue. 2
Assimilation’ takes place only in sunlight, but growth goes on most
rapidly. at “night. In the former process oxygen is set free and given off
through . the leaf pores or stomata, but. in the latter, air is ‘taken i in

through the stomata, and, ‘as its oxygen is used up, carbonic acid gas ‘is

’ Nores ON THE Stupy or Borany. 249.

given off. It will thus be seen, as tersely put by Mr. L. H. Bailey, Jr.—
“Tf the leaves are the lungs of the plant because they breathe, they are
more emphatically the stomachs of the plant. because they assimilate and
digest.” _

It is now in order for the student to learn something of class-
ification, as it is by this means he is enabled to analyze and recognize
by name the plants with which he meets, thus to avail himself of all
that has been recorded concerning them by botanists before him.

To the ordinary observer plants differ so much from one another
that he can see no points of resemblance which could connect them
naturally. For example, what likeness is there between the common
strawberry and the mountain ash ? Yet both belong to the rose family.
Notwithstanding this great external dissimilarity, the botanist can
readily point out in both, characters which at once stamp them as
closely akin. ‘The points which determine the relationship of plants
are not confined to any one part of them: they may exist in the roots,
leaves, flowers or fruits, but the natural system now in use aims to
bring together those which most closely resemble each other in all
these particulars, laying especial stress on the flowers and fruit. In this
respect it differs from the Linnzan and all other artifical systems,
which took up a certain set of organs and based kindredship on those
alone.

The means by which a plant reproduces itself and is prevented
from becoming extinct is evidently its most important and essential
part, and itis upon this the fruit, that the vegetable kingdom is
primarily divided, viz, into flowerless plants, such as ferns, mosses and
fungi, and flowering plants, such as herbs, shrubs and trees. The
former reproduce themselves by spores, which are commonly simple,
minute cells and contain no embyro; the latter by seeds, which are
embyro plantlets enclosed in an integument. Among flowering plants,
increase in the diameter of the stem forms the first basis of division.
There are two general methods in which this increase takes place. In
the one case the woody tissue ts scattered as separate threads through-
out the whole stem, and the increase in diameter is by the interposition
of new woody threads which stretch its surface ; while in the other case,

250 Tue Ortawa NATURALIST. *

the woody tissue is all collected so as to form a layer between a centray
cellular’ part, the pith, and an outer cellular part, the bark, the increase
in'diameter being by the addition of new layers of wood beneath the
bark. The former class of plauts, which includes our grasses, sedges ©
and lilies, is. called endogenous or “ inside-growing ;” while the latter,
which includes all our northern trees and shrubs and most of our
herbs, is known as exogenous or “outside-growing.” In Canada, the
endogens are all herbs with the single exception of Smilax, but in warm.
climates they are largely represented by the palms. It is not, how-

ever, only. the manner of growth that separates these two great divisions
of flowering plants ; marked distinctions exist in the seeds, flowers and

leaves. But I shall not weary you with these distinctions, nor by — —
describing the principles upon which the exogens are again subdivided
into polypetale, gamopetalz, and apetale ; neither will I inflict upon you
the method of applying the system of classification to the naming of
plants. All these you will find laid down in your structural botany
under the heading ‘ How to study plants.” This I will say, however,
that the analysis or naming of plants, tedious and difficult as it may at
first seem, soon becomes very easy. After a few analyses the primary
steps can be rapidly passed over, and I will guarantee that any one who
will conscientiously study out twenty to twenty-five good examples will
afterwards experience little difficulty in naming most of our flowering
plants... Be not discouraged at the slow progress you will at first make ;
each successtul analysis. will facilitate the next, and very soon it will
become SO. that when you. have worked out one species of a genus you
will be likely to know others when you see them, and even when plants -
of.a-different genus of the same family are met with, you will, ere long,
generally. be able to recognize their order at a glance from the family
likeness. A capital practice for the beginner is to work out a. few
plants with whose names he is already familiar. Success in these
attempts will naturally inspire confidence in the determination of plants
previously unknown. .

By his initial reading over of his text book the student has got some
knowledge of plants and plant-life, as well as an insight into the manner
in which their names are determined. He is like the race-horse to.

~ . ‘. ‘
oh tn Saew rive.
aa, % \

eee “ A
aS 4 . ° ;

Fh 3ar

Novres on THE Srupy or Borany. 251

, ; which the. jockey has just given a preliminary canter that he may

“feel his legs” preparatory for his true task, the race, which lies before
him. ‘The knowledge he has gained is slight I grant you, but he is not

quite inthe dark. A foundation has been laid upon which it now

becomes his duty to raise a creditable superstructure ; a superstructure;
the first step towards which should be the commencement of an herbarium

which, however, should be subservient to, or a co-partner with, the highest

aim in botancial science, the elucidation of the mysteries of plant-life.

Laying such stress as I do on the formation of a collection as an aid to

further study, let me for a little call your attention to the advantages to

be derived from having one, and the best appliances and methods for

accomplishing this.

The use of an herbarium is, in general terms, to have constantly
on hand material for study in‘any class of plants, for, by soaking them
in water, dried specimens can be studied almost as easily as fresh. In
no other way can we see simultaneously specimens of neighboring
species, different states of the same species, and specimens of a species
from different localities; and some of the brightest theories on the
distribution of plants have been worked out by the aid of the “ hortus
siccus” or herbarium. The nomenclature and classification of objects
can be best acquired by the constant handling of them, and the price
of a good herbarium is incessant vigilance in warding of the attacks of
insect pests. But in this vigilance what a throng of pleasant
memories is perpetually being called up; the time and the locality, the
surroundings, and, if you were not alone when gathered, your
companions. Each specimen represents so much information, and the
very mention of its name will recall to mind associations connected
with its study. These results trom the possession of an herbarium
have been so beautifully set forth by Professor Bailey of Brown
University that I cannot refrain from quoting his words on the
subject.

‘In looking them over one sees not alone the specimens themselves, but the
locality in which they were gathered. Many an incident of his life, the memory of
which has long since become dormant will be re-awakened as by an enchanter’s
wand. ‘He-will thread the forest paths gay with flowers ; te will pause in imagina,

252 THe OrrawA NATURALIST.

tion for the nooning by some fern-laced spring ; he will climb the mountain ravine
where the blood-root and orchis bloom ; or wander, full of speechless yearning, by
the ocean shore. Not only do the natural scenes return thus vividly, but the faces of
friends who enjoyed the occasion with him. He is once more seated, may be, by a
little lake on the mouatain, in a garden of alpine flowers. Cool streams flow by
him, and he picks the’tart fruit of the cowberry. The world lies mapped at his feet,
and the infinite heaven is above him. He hears the merry jest and ringing laughter,
and his heart becomes gay with the thought of those old-time rambles. ”

A collector’s outfit, which will answer all ordinary purposes, is cheap
and most of it can be got or made at home. It consists of a
botanical box or vasculum ;a plant press ; a pocket lens ; a trowel; a
sharp pocket knife ; and a note-book. The clothing worn in collecting
should be strong, as one often has to make his way through a tangle
of thorny bushes, and old, so that no nervousness at fear of spoiling it
may be excited. For foot-wear, stout shoés are generally recommended,
but I prefer the oldest and easiest pair I have. A pair with plenty of
holes in them. One has occasionally to wade through a swamp where
the water comes above the tops of any ordinary boots, and’it is much
better that it should run out freely as fast as it enters, than to have to sit
down, take off and empty one’s shoes,or continue to walk with the water
sogging about in them.

With the vasculum you are all doubtless familiar. Any easily
portable box will answer the purpose. Of late years, however, I have
entirely abandoned its use, putting my specimens directly into the
press, and carrying in my pocket an old newspaper or two, in which,
previously dampening it, I loosely wrap up any plant that I wish to make
special examination of.

Plant presses are of various kinds. She one that I commonly use,
and which has stood me in good stead from Cape Breton to British
Columbia, was given me by our mutual friend Dr. George Dawson
when we were in the North-West together, away back in 1871. Though
battered, as you see, it is useful as ever, and that after twenty-five years
of honest service. It is made of quarter inch basswood strengthened
by four cleats, and is 18 inches long by 11% inches wide. The
straps are provided with a cross piece, like a shawl strap, which prevents
them becoming separated when the press is open, and also serves for a

Nores oN tHE Stupy or Botany. 253

handle to carry it by. Wire presses and those of lattice. woodwork are
highly. recommended by some, the advantages claimed being’ lightness
and a free escape of moisture. In wet weather, however, the’ ordinary
form has the great merit of keeping one’s paper dry. For an excursion
the press should contain a good supply of : specimen sheets. and. driers
with. one or two pieces of mill-board or thin deal,-all. ‘of them, a
little smaller than the press. Any thin, cheap paper will’ answer for
specimen sheets. What is known as printing paper is the kind I
ordinaiily use. For driers a special paper is manufactured, but it.is
expensive, and I substitute “filter paper” which is obtainable at most
druggists. Blotting paper of any kind will do, and, if. economy, be an
object, old newspapers can be made to serve. Some of the finest and
most beautiful specimens I have ever seen were turned out from news-
papers alone. The object is to have a medium that will quickly absorb
moisture and as quickly part with it again. The mill-boards or deals
are to keep apart the damp papers containing the plants and the dry.
unused ones. I also usually carry in my press a few sheets of cotton-
batting to lay over ripe fruits, such as strawberries or raspberries, to
prevent their receiving too much pressure and so getting crushed out
of shapv.

A pocket lens should always accompany the collector, and should not
be of too high power, (an inch to an inch and a half focal. distance.) A.
very powerful lens while magnifying greatly, inconveniently narrows the
field of vision. .

A stout table knife answers the purpose of.a trowel, which is used

for taking up plants by the root.

The note book is an object of prime importance, and should be of
such a shape that it can be easily carried in the pocket. In this book
are to be jotted down any observations one cannot trust to memory,
e.g. the color of flowers, the height of plants, the character of the: soil
in which they grow, etc. Unless the collector takes field-notes he will
run the risk of letting important observations escape him,, and he cannot
too soon learn to make them in a concise, systematic and. legible way,
never mixing up conjectures with actually observed facts. . Everyone is

954 * Tor OrrawA NATURALIST.

prone to get into'a hutried way’ of making notes, under the idea that
they are for his own use only, and that- he will readily recollect any
facts omitted at the time. This is a great’ mistake. Notes are. not
often required immediately, because every circumstance: ‘connected
with the subject is fresh in the memory.” But it sometimes happens
that weeks, months or years after, in pursuing some branch of ‘stady,
the exact facts then observed are required; and I know nothing more
disappointing than, on turning to one’s note-book, to find that at the
time, trusting to memory, some of the details had been omitted. —

_ In collecting, when a number of plants of a desired species are
discovered, the first thing is to make a judicious selection. To be
really valuable the specimens in a collection should be as perfect and
characteristic as possible, so that anyone referring to it can
learn. full sat about each species. A perfect specimen com-
prises. all that is necessary for complete botanical investigation ; leaves
(both mature: and immature, cauline and radical) flowers and fruit.
Specimens: can often be secured showing both flowers and fruit on
the same plant, or fruit may be found on more advanced plants at the
same time. ‘Tf not in fruit, it must be collected in this condition later
in the season. The same rule applies to the obtaining of specimens
with. different leaves, or leaves in different stages, and it may require
several seasons to make a complete specimen. The plant should be so
arranged.as to: be:no larger when dried than can be readily mounted on
the herbarium paper.’

Of small herbs, the whole plant, root and all, should be taken, but
in any case enough of the root should be collected to show whether the
plant, is annual, biennial or perennial. Large plants may be doubled

into.a Y.or N shape, and thick stems, roots or bulbs can be thinned

down... Inthe: case, of very delicate plants, as many. ferns, thin.
sheets’ of ‘paper: should be placed-on- both -sides of. the ‘specimen,.
in which sheets it’ remains until perfectly dry. --By “this ‘means «the
delicate leaves’ aré pteventéd from doubling up in changing “the driers: -

ese Ne OE IAA IVOIRE 51a Wi eS Mh

me

=e eer re FO eee

Norges ON THE Stupy oF Boranr. 255

Care should be taken to display the specimens neatly, showing, if
possible, both sides of the leaves. In some cases it is easier to spread
out the leaves and remove creases after a night’s. pressure has. somewhat
subdued: their elasticity. Morning is the best time to collect most
flowering plants, as many close their blossoms by noon, but those that
open in the evening, vespertine flowers, should be gathered at that
time..

The actual pressing and drying of specimens is done at home,
either in the ordinary field press in which they were collected, or
between a couple of pieces of inch board of the same size as the press.
Weights make the best pressure, and a good weight is made of half a
dozen bricks tied together with a cord strong enough to lift them by.

Specimens should be put into the drying press as soon as possible after
gathering, but often in returning from an excursion one is too tired to
care for more Jabour, and I commonly leave mine in the field:press
until next morning, nor do I find them suffer any harm from’'so doing.
Herein lies one of the great advantages of collecting directlyinto-the
field-press instead of a vasculum. In drying, the thin sheets (specimen
sheets) containing the plants are transferred into fresh driers, heated in
the sunlight or by a stove, and remember always, the hotter they are the
better. Be careful to place the specimens in such a way that one part
of the bundle is not materially thicker than the other, by placing’ them
on alternate sides, or putting in wads of paper if necessary: “Plants dry
best in small piles, and for dividing up a package” if too‘large, or for
separating the lots put into the drying press on different days, use thin
deals like those taken out in collecting. Some very succulent plants,
and others with rigid leaves, such as stone crops and pines, dry better
if plunged for a moment into boiling water, ere being put into the
drying press. Every day, or at first even twice a day, the plants in
their specimen sheets are to be shifted into fresh hot driers, ‘the moist
ones taken off being spread out to dry in the sun or by a fire, that they
may take their turn again at the next shifting. The more frequently
the plants are changed the better will they retain, their,color.,, After
the first three or four days the.changes need only be,made_ every other.

256 __ THe Orrawa NaTuRALIsT.

day until the specimens are thoroughly dry. and no. longer moist or
cold to the touch. . The drying usually. occupies from a week to. ten
days, but varies according to the succulency of the plants, the. state, of
the weather, the frequency of. the changes, and the degree of heat of
the driers, The. inost convenient place for changing plants, if it can, be
managed, is a table beside a guod hot range or stove, the top of which
is free for use. If a damp drier be laid flat on the hot metal, steam at
once begins to rise from it, and the moment it ceases to do so the
paper is dry ; leave it for a second until it becomes so hot as to be barely
touchable with the naked hand, then lay. it quickly on a specimen
previously moved from the damp pile, and continue thus until the
whole lot is changed. This plan is invaluable when driers are szarce,
as sometimes happens on a botanizing trip, for by it the same driers, no
matter how wet, can be used again immediately. A plan adopted by.
myself and Professor Macoun a few years ago, while collecting in Nova
Scotia, might be mentioned as worthy of remembrance should any of
you ever be placed in similar circumstances. Though not to be
tecommended for common use, as the specimens fall short of those
obtained by the ordinary method, yet, if so situated that an abundance
of driers is not obtainable, or if the weather be so foggy and wet that they
cannot be properly dried, it will be found of great practical value. On
the trip referred to, a large number of specimens had been collected, but
so bad was the weather from rain and sea fogs that there was great
danger of losing them all. Under these circumstances the thought
occured to take advantage of occasional glimpses of sunshine in the
following way ; each sheet of specimens was placed between two driers,
which were spread in a single layer on the floor of an open balcony
exposed to the sun. Pieces of board, logs, or bark placed in the sun
would of course answer the same purpose as did the balcony. Small
stones placed on the corners of the sheets prevented the wind disturbing
them, and no pressure was used except the weight of the single drier
them covering. An hour of good sunshine served to fully cure most plants.
The plan, is only applicable to specimens previously somewhat wilted in
the pressas the leaves of fresh or insufficiently wilted ones curled up in

the absence of pressure.

Nores on ‘tHe Srupy or Borany. 25T

A collector’s work does not cease when his specimens “are dried:
Plants are subject to the attacks of insects and it is therefore necessary
to poison them in some way. ‘The best protection is corrosive sublimate
dissolved in alchol, which is applied lightly to the specimens with a soft
brush. It should be done as soon as the plants are dried, care being taken
afterwards to leave them spread out until the alcohol has evaporated. The
formula I used is :

Corrosive sublimate. ........ .t.. 1% drachms.
ALBION HCIG © 5 fons. oe Ye ee Soar, 1% ‘>
PREMIO Nhe SG Grd «560 Le a wae See ee ee I2 ounces.

Ail the work hitherto done, the collecting, drying and poisoning,
is but the preparation for the formation of an herbarium, the specimens
in which should be fastened on half sheets of stiffwhite paper, either by
slips of gummed paper or by glue applied to the backs of the specimens
themselves. For a few cents a supply of white gummed paper,
sufficient to last for years, can be purchased at any printing establish-
ment. A narrow slip of this is cut off, moistened with the tongue, and
placed over the part of the plant to be fixed down, The advantage of
this process over actually glueing the specimens to the paper is that, in
case the plant has to be removed for examination or any other purpose,
these slips can be easily lifted. ;

In mounting plants care must be exercised to keep the pile form-
ing each genus as nearly level as possible, by scattering the specimens
over the sheets instead of placing them all in the centre. If the plants
are small put some at the top of a sheet, some at the bottom, some on the
right side and some on the left ; occasionally, in the case of large
specimens, reversing them so as to have the thick stems and roots at
the top. In no case should more than one species be put on the same
sheet,but if small, two or more specimens of the same species may be
so placed. The best size for mounting paper is what is known as the
standard size, from its being the one used in the public herbaria of the
United States. This size, 1614 x 11% inches, experience has determined
to be the best. My own sheets, I am sorry to say, are smaller, being
only 15 14x ro inches, but my collection was started and had grown to
such a size before the standard was adopted, that to change it all would

IHR - Fue Orrawa NaTurALisy.

have entailed great labour and expense. I have therefore considered it
advisable to continue as I began. ‘The Linnzan herbarium is on
paper of the common fools-cap type, but this is much too small.

-.. The labels to be attached to the sheets vary according to taste,the

points. desirable of observance being clear type, neatness-and simplicity.
They should not: be to- large nor yet too small. When a specimen is
given you the accompanying label should always be mounted with it.
Some collectors attach their labels permanently with paste or by having
them printed on gummed paper, but I prefer to merely fasten them
lightly at the sides thus allowing their removal should it ever become
necessary to transfer the specimen to another sheet. All the sheets con-
taining plants of the same genus are placed in genus covers, which are
full sheets of stout, colored paper. They should measure about a quarter
of-an inch more in width than the mounting sheets. The name of the
genus is written at the bottom of the genus cover, or sets of genus labels
can be purchased cheaply and one of these pasted on instead. The various
genera are arranged under the order to which they belong and laid flat
in large pigeon-hole compartments in a closed cabinet, or else placed in
portfolios, which stand upright like books in a_ book-case. The
herbarium is made complete by a list or catalogue of the plants it
contains.

Having thus described the method of collecting and preserving
specimens, let us briefly consider the next step in the study of botany,
viz. excursions. The object of collecting excursions should be three-
fold :

ist. To cultivate habits of observation and secure knowledge of
habitats and the growing appearances of plants.

2nd, To gather specimens for the herbarium.

3rd. To secure material to work on during the study of structural
botany.

Even in the winter season excursions should not be entirely
abandoned. The true naturalist ean always find something to admire,
and much useful work can be done in observing the trunks, branches
and buds .of trees and shrubs.-. Winter is, however, the time pre-—
eminently fitted for herbarium work, preserving, mounting, labelling,

Notes on THe Stupy or Borany. 249.

cataloguing, and, if the necessary appliances are obtainable, - apex
work with the microscope.

The best place to begin collecting is where you live. Be your
abode where it may there are surely some plant rarities near it, and the
first goal to struggle for is a through knowledge of the resources. of your
| own vicinity. When you have made a special study of the plants
} there you may easily extend your researches. If on your excursions
you can have the company of some older botanist so much the better,
since from him you can get the names of the plants you gather and the
prominent characters on which the naming is founded. I would, how-
| ever, strongly advise you always to take home one or two unnamed
_ specimens, on which to practice analysis, for it is only by such practice
_ you can ever become so familiar with the orders as to be able to, at

least pretty nearly, locate strange ones at a glance. The accumulation

ofa mass of unnamed plants is to be avoided, lest a pleasant task
becomes a wearisome labour, inspiring only disgust. Make it a rule to
get your specimens named as soon as possible. If you have no one
near to whoin you can show them, enter into correspondence with some
botanist and arrange with him to name the packets you. may send him
from time to time. You need not fear that your letter asking the
favor will be unanswered. The wonderful spirit of fellowship,
comradeship if I may call it so, existing among scientists, and evinced
by their willingness to lend a helping hand to even the humblest
votary, is to. me one of the greatest charms in scientific pursuits. But
here a word of warning, —never send scraps of plants to be named, for
though a good botanist can often identify them, it is unfair to ask
him. His time is too valuable to be spent in guessing riddles. Courtesy
also demands that in all correspondence the seeker after information
should enclose stamps for return postage. In collecting a specimen for
yourself, if it be at all rare, always, if possible, gather duplicates to be
used in exchange. Under no consideration, however, obliterate a rare:
species from any locality, and do not even make its whereabouts known
to any except true lovers of the science. There are vandals, who,
through mere vanity, would not hesitate to destroy the last survivor of @
‘species ; nor. would they do it only unthinkingly. From the duplicates

260° THE OrrawA NATURALIST,

of the best things around you a large variety of plants can be got by
exchange. and the pleasure and profit in making a collection. is largely.
due to the intercourse thus brought about with those of kindred. tastes.
Nor is this confined to those in your own country; it is often
necessary to have certain specimens from other regions, and you are.
thus brought into correspondence with scientists in all parts of the
world. Let your specimens be well made, and never send away a poor
one unless it be of something very rare. A man soon becomes known
by his exchanges, and if his specimens are poor he is made the subject
of much unpleasant criticism and will in time be avoided by all good
collectors. Always preserve the choicest specimen collected for your
own herbarium, but after this send the best you have to the first
correspondent who asks for it. Keep even a fragment of any species
not represented in your collection until you get a better, but of your
duplicat?s destroy any too poor to send away. Do not hoard up
duplicates. The ‘man who studies science for science sake would
sooner give away every specimen for nothing than allow them to remain
buried like a miser’s gold. Make sure that all plants you send are.
correctly named, and notify your correspondent whether they are.
poisoned or not, Never promise a plant unless you actually have it or
are positively certain of being able to get it, and keep a catalogue of
your duplicates that you may be prepared at all times to answer a brother
collector who applies for anything.

The last stage in botanical study, and the one to which all the
others. should be stepping-stones, is the woiking out of some of the
many unsolved problems of plant life by independent and intelligent
observation and experiment. The breadth of the field for exploration by
originalobservation isimmense,as comparatively little is known of thelaws
governing’ many ofthe phenomenaof plants. Forexample, littleisknown
of the hosts of some of our parasitic plants, and in some cases it is even
disputed whether certain plants, commonly considered such, are
parasites at all; though all plants move more or less, we possess scanty
knowledge of the nature of this movement in many of them, and still
less of its objeet ; we know that cross-fertilization is generally necessary
for the production of perfect seed, but in many. cases we do not know

Nores ON THE Stupy or Borayny. 26L

“ie particular agents that perform the work; we are aware that
Eee eMsrciie flowers produce pods far more fruitful than the ordinary
- blossoms, but we know almost nothing about the proportion of the
kinds, or why a plant should be provided with two sets of blossoms,
_ There are many other points just as vague, hints to which may be
found in such works as Darwin’s “ Climbing Plants,” Bailey’s “ Talks
Ajield,” Prentiss’ “ Mode of Distribution of Plants,’ and Kerner’s

_ Flowers and their Unbidden Guests” ; enough, however, has been said

to show that the way to discoveries new to science is Gpen to even the
humblest votary. There is practically no limit to the papers that could
‘be prepared by many of you for this or similar societies ; papers both
interesting and useful; papers of value to science; papers that I feel

sure the “Orztawa Natura.ist” would gladly find room for. In

conclusion, I would say, that if within his means, and they are very
cheap, no student of botany should neglect to take at least one of the
periodicals devoted to the science. The “ Bulletin of the Torrey
Botanical Club,” the “ Botanical Gazette,’ and the ‘“ American
Naturalist” are among the best. The first two are devoted entirely to
botany, the last takes up other sciences as well. I take it for granted
of course that all of you are already subscribers to your excellent local
Natural History monthly.

If I have trespassed too much on your time, or wearied you with
my effort to make plain to you some poiits on the study of botany, I
pray you pardon me. Each of you who takes up this charming science
will, I have no doubt, see modifications that you think might _ be
advantageously made in the methods suggested. Should it be so, by
all means adopt them. The method employed is of little importance
provided only it brings about the great aim and end of the study, which
is to learn to observe and compare. Do this honestly and you cannot
fail to become lovers of nature, and, as lovers of nature, better and
happier men and women, men and women in some degree approaching

_the illustrious scientist of whom was sung :—

: ; : : ** And Nature, the old nurse, took
oS eee _ The child upon her knee,
Saying: ‘ Here is a story-book

Thy Father has written for thee.’

< a 2. ’ 5 <5 5 z ke
THe Orrawa NAvTurRAList. —
‘Come. wander with me,’ she said, | :
‘Into regions yet untrod ; bea
And read what is still unread F -
In the manuscripts of God.’
»

And he wandered away and away ee
With Nature, the dear old nurse,
Who sang to him night and day
The rhymes of the universe.

And whenever the way seemed long,
Or his heart began to fail,

She would sing a more wonderful song,
Or tell a more marvellous tale.”

GENERAL INDEX

OTTAWA NATURALIST, VOL.

IX,,

AND

1895-'96,

Transactions of the Ottawa Field-Natupalisis’ Club, Vol. XI.

4

Acetylene, the new illuminant,
pager byt, 5. Marsh........

\ Airat Ottawa......

Ami, H. M.—Fossil ‘Insect s “feo
the Leda clays of Ottawa and
LW IDADEr> ..-. <.

Ami, H. M.—Notes on some fossils

from the Trenton of Highgate
Sgrings, Vermort, near the
Canadian boundary line, paper.

Annual Report of Council of Ottawa
Field-Natuaralists’ Club, 1894-
os ee

Anthropology, the present position
of American, note of paper by
Prof. John Campbell.........

Archeology ; Notes on the Antiqut-

{ ties of Lake Deschenes, by Ds
Mees Sowter. >... . ;

Argon, a newly discovered consti-
tuent of the atmosphere, F. T.

‘ Bete PADET = 20545 0-2 wre

Attidze from Canada .

Aylmer, Que,—Note on Geology of

Barlow, A. E.—-On some Dykes
containing *‘ Fluronite ” :

Barlow, A. K.—Geology of the
Ottawa Ship Canal

Barlow, A. E.—Review of paper
by Dr. Adams on ‘* A further

contribution to our knowledge

of the ‘* Laurentian ”
Besserers, Ont., Fossils at.
Botany, the study of, paper by. ‘Dr.
Surgess a A ee ee ae
Botany, Notes:Ones 3 onsen Oe:
Chamberlin, Mrs. Agnes—Cava-
dian Wild Flowers, Review of,

by [>. Stletcher: -.se> eee
Laflamme, Rev. J.C. K., on ‘*Cor-
nut’s Canadensium [’lantarum

Ve B05) 9 | PAM ect aie a Ss
Kare Manitoban Plants, James
Pletcher "0. wc onset. 2i eee
Bushy-tailed Wood Rat, Neotema
cinerca) paper by C. deBlois

Green. Dh: wan Hethio'y sine eae oP
Burgess, Dr. T. J. W., ** Notes on
the Study of Botany,” paper. .

Cambro-Silurian Rocks of | East
Manitolia it ¢ .ni,.ace Cee
Camera Club, Ottawa...
Chemical Notés <)020. 3. Sao
McGill, A. and YT. Macfarlane—
Note of paper on ‘* Viscosity in
Liquids*t, <\ceuatesenyee
Macfarlane, Thomas, ‘‘ On the
Estimation of Starch,” paper
OLE... vaimaes od

208
168

241

229

225

77

Fe ey Pte oo ity
li. Tue Orrawa NATURALIST.
Conchology. Notice of papers
OD, {EtG Wa Oh te rE
Latchford, F. R. (‘* L.”)—Ottawa
and Casselman Shells........ 156
Whiteaves, J. F.—‘‘ Recent Mol-

lusca from the Headwaters of

the Ottawa’ sete eee hier 22
Canadian Spiders, by J. H.

Emerton, review by H. M. A. 182

204
Ganadian® Shrewseencaa5 eaten 236
Canadian Echinodermata from At-

lantie Coast 59
Caribou, Hunting the Barren eround,

by Frank Russells epi. eee 48
Casselman Shells, F. R. Latchford. 156
Central Experimental Farm, Native

sBYees, INNTAOEe ess a. 108, 132, 141
Cilia, paper by Prof. E. E. Prince. 81
GlubsWntes: feet heed eee eee 61
Colourless Blood in Animals, by Prof.

Be He GPYInee Se mechs ana 6
Golen plera seis che ee eee 179
Cornut, J.--Canadian Vlants...... WH
Council of O.F.N.C. for 1805-96.. 61
Corresponding Members.......... 5
Craig, J. (‘*J.C.”)—-Report of Ex-

eursion'to/Galelfas 2 fe.c. cm: 94
Crystals of Huronite in Diabase

from Algoma, (illustrated).... 30
Crystals, paper by W. F. Ferrier... 217
Dale, T. Nelson—-The KRenssellaer

Grit Plateau—Notice of by Dr.

1 EON eee 0 | Fee ane Sa ele 9
Dana, James Dwight, Obituary

Notice Obi sot tae es eee 35
Dawson,-G. M., referred to... 22% 73
Dowling, D. B.—Notes on the

Stratigraphy of the Cambro-

Silurian Rocks of Eastern

Mantloba sat. - Santas) se ates 65
Dykes, containing ‘* Huronite,” by

A de AR IONG eters othe sie het ad 25
Echinoderms of N. E. America, A.

Ba Viertll Lain o<t noe ere an 59
EditonaliNoless ..- osc meee 24
Ells, Rk. W.—Notice of ‘the Rens-

seleer Grit Plateau, by T. Nelson

Dalé . 3/22 oie enone 9
Ells, R. W. and A. E. Barlow,—

‘* The Geology of the proposed

Ottawa Ship Canal”; (22.5... 75
Ells, R. W,—How Rocks ace

formed—paper..t..- tage ome 157
Emerald Lake, Mollusca from.... 22

Emerton, J. H.—Canadian Spiders

. Geological Society of America. .23, 1

by, nue
Entomology, Notes on..... Fee he
Cambrid re Natural History, Vol. a A
-V. review :
Erebia discot

Fletcher

alis, note by James

‘“Frail Children of the Air” (But- _
ter flics)-- review of Dr. Scud-
der’s work by James Fletcher. -

Ormerod, Eleanor, ‘* Report
Observalions of
Insects and
Pests ;

of |
Mysterious

»
Common — Fa arm

review Of.2 = Assen

we
Sphinx luscitiosa, Cram, Note on, | : 4
by J. Fletcher: 22-9 (72
Unusual Abundance of Meloid
Larve, Note by W. H. Tiare
rington’ 952620 eee ee
Loz00n Canadense, review of Sir
Win. Dawson’s -paper = sane
Errata, List of for Vol. 1X., Of {awa
Naturalist for 1895-" 95. ae

Erythrite, Stilpnomelane var. cea: ‘
codite crystallized Monazite ~
and pleochroic Apatite from ae
Canada, by W. F

Evans; N. Ns;

. a

Ferrier. ar: 19.
Chemical ges

bys. S532 Sk eee
Excursion Notices... .. 61, 62, “74,1
Excursion No. I, to Chelan ae
k No.2, to: Galetta: s2=e ae

‘< No. 3. to. Patganeialles

Extinct eae Lecture by Dr.
H. M. Ami,> Notes. on. ogee
Ferrier, Walter F., Crystals, papers
Ferrier, WF: ~ Exythrite ; Stilp-
nomelane var. éhaleadiee: etc.
Flora of Ontario, hy Prof. Macoun i.
196, 2

Yossils Insects ftom the Leda clays

of Ottawa and vicinity, by LE a
M. Ami-.... 7.2.23 . 198
Fossils, mentioned ....70, 56, 190, 205

215, 2

Geology, Notice of papers on.....
Adams, Frank D.-— ‘‘ A. further — p.
contribution to cur knowledge —
ot the Laurentian ”—Review
y A. E. Barlow...c.. 2.58 eee
ae H.M. —“Notes on Canadian
Fossil Bryoz02.”’...0s/isss cael
Ami, H.M.—* Notes on a collec- E.
tion of Silurian fossils from Cape

George, Antigonish Co., N.S.,— 4

be

- Geology (cont'd) :—

ri aaey with descriptions of four new
0 Sea rrr
~ Balen Prof. L.W.— **Preliminary
Report on Geological Investiga-
_ tions in South Western Nova
geascotia.””
- Beecher, Chas. EF. »‘Structure and
a appendages of Trinucleus,”

r Beecher,C.E., ‘‘The Larval Stage
# of Trilobites”—Notice of..

_ Chalmers, Robert, ‘‘On the Glacial
Lake St. Lawrence” of Prof.
W. Upham, Note of.........
Coleman, A. P.,‘‘Antholite” from
Bizivir, Ont., Note of........
Coleman, A. P., ‘Glacial and
_ Interglacial Deposits near
Toronto,” review of by H. M.

a a

Ww
— ff
ah

Dana, J.D., ‘‘Manual of Geology,”
"Notice. of .....
Dawson, Sir Wm. J., Tertiary
x Plants, Notice of paper on
_ Dawson, G.M. and R. G. McCon-
nell. ** On the Glacial Deposits
‘of South Western Alberta,”
_ fo Se
Ells, R. W., ‘‘ The Potsdam and
Calciferous Formations of ( due-
bec and Eastern Ontario ”
Girty, Geo. H., ‘‘Development of
the Corallum of Faz sites For-
best, var. occidentalis”
Se, C.H., Notice of paper by,
Se Syenite- -gneiss, (Leopard
Sock) of Ottawa Co.........
Ilarrington, B. J., Notice of paper
b

y

Jones, T. Rupert, ‘‘ On Some
Fossil Ostracoda from Canada”
Marsh, C., European and
American Dieturs, Review of

ke Ree
enw, G. F., ‘‘ The Organic
Remains of the Little River
a ESS a re
‘Matthew, G. F., Notice of paper
by —L. Cayeux on ‘* Early
MERRIE Sieg poop are as ass
Taylor, Frank B., ‘‘ Niagara and
the Great Lakes,” Note of
ler. Frank B., ‘‘ The Second
ke oy ea
Whiteaves, J. F., ‘‘Descriptions of
Eight New Species of Fossils

from the Galena (Trenton)

gi . 4 ".. Lan a © ae on or 4 a rw &
Bi a gf Ps Shar a “lS a Li) RS oe
we bee a ~ +. - ~~
4 » :

-

INDEX. iii.

2I

151

20

211

57

Geology (cont'd) :
Limestones of Lake Winnipeg
and the Red River barge
Notice ot Dy: i> We Bias 207
Whiteaves, J. F., ‘* Notes on some
Fossils from’ the Cretaceous
Rocks of British Columbia,
with descriptions of two species
that appear to. be new”™..... 206
Williams, H. S., ‘* Devonian
Fossilsin Strata of Carboniferous
Age; ? Norrof. );. 5 scab aeewe 90
Winchell, W. H., ‘‘The Stratigra-
phic Base of the Taconic or
Lower Cambrian”: 2... 2... 56
Wright, G. F., **Glacial Phen-
omena of Newfoundland and
Labrador,” Note of so .<.... 90
Geological Notes..............
Hoffmann, G. C.,
Contributions,” Note of...... 90
Ostracoda from Canada, T. R.
PONS), KA kee «cena cee 21
Protozoa, Early, Notice of...... 56
The Saguenay Gorge, Note on... 181
Geology of Aylmer, Notice of paper
on by T. W. E. Sowter .2:-2. 58
‘** Glacial Deposits in Europe and
America,” by Jas. Geikie,
Notice of by H. M. Ami.....
Green, C. de Blois, Some Account
of the Bushy-tailed Wood Rat

of British Columbia”’........ 225
Halkett, Andrew, Paper on ‘‘Ottawa
PitylHopods ” .<...¢ ons seen 87

Harrington, Dr. Be J.—Analysis by 34
Hickman, W. Birds observed

at Pictou, x $s 1805 409}, >be 231
Highgate Springs Fossils, H. Ami. 215
How Rocks are fermed, Paper by

RW. OEllss x 3.wic eet asin 157
Hunting the Barren Ground Caribou,

by Frank Russell... ss.8% soe 48
Huronite, On some Dykes contain-

ing, by A. E. Barlow ........ 25
Hydrachnida: ai fata es eet 187
Hymenopters:, ¢-%,5 wo eee 180

Iroquois, Nat. Science Association,
Notes of and list of officers...: 79
Karyokinesis of the Ovum, by FE.
Wilson; reviews... sa. ueee ets 205
Koenike, Dr. F., North American
Water mites ake. «cee 187
Labrador, Lecture by Mr. A. P.
Low, Notes 0tie<suss eso rs 8 240
Land and Fresh Water shells of
Alberta, papei by the Rev. Geo.
Wi Taylors cnc be aetesees 173

See? ha
. “or y ? “i
woe, 7

, ; 6s ess :
1V; : THE OTTAWA NATURALIST. Pash?
Lawsonite, Notice of paper on. . 154 Saunders, W. E., on ‘ Blue-bird. -
Lecture Course, notes on......... 240 Dickcissel"2242 5 see eee 21:
Lectures -by.. O; =F 2 IN. etc. Sin Saunders, W. E. » Keen Sight of
Ottawa, P3805-90c- or oes 172 Birds, note@it. .»:2: {eee 214
Lees. W. A. D., ‘‘ Town Birds” 52 Ottawa Phyllopods, Andrew Hal- © |
Leopard Rock, Note on paper by C. kett, paper =," ... -.72.)s.5 eee 87
GordouLess, hepsi a 152. ‘* Ottawa District,” defined....... 6259
Lepidoptera’. 5. ars8 2 6 tee ice 179 Peckham, G. W. and Eliz., Attidze
of North America, review of —
Macoun, Prof. J., The Flora of paper . 2.0.2 Bag A 204
Ontario, gpapeg- see 196, 217‘ Petrographical descriptions of rocks —
Macoun, W. T., ‘‘ List of Native containing ‘‘ Huronite.” ..... 33-3
Trees and Shrubs at Central Phryganea ejecta, Scudder, a new :
Experimental Farm, 1895.” Pleistocene Insect<~ a. sevens 1914
108, 132, 141 Phyllopods from Ottawa, Andrew
Manitoba, Stratigraphy of Cambro- Halkett.i.. 2...) 2 ee 87-4
Silurian Rocks of Eastern-... 65 Pictou Academy. ~-s 160m
Map of Lake Winnipeg, vol, IX, No. Pictou Birds, W. ‘A. Hickman. - 230
FiaRMIP PACE eee. hoe 65 ~ Plant Constituents..2- ¢2eeeeeee Iga
Marsh, Henry S., Acetylene, the Porter’s Island, Fossils on.......- 168 ©
new illuminant, paper. ...... 85 ‘* Practical Entomology ” Review of ~
McGill, A., ‘‘ The Airat Ottawa”. 63 address, by James Fletcher.... 188 —
Meloid Larvae, Abundance of...... 90. ~—s— PPresidental address :—-O. F. N. C., :
Members of the O. F.N.C., Listof 3 by Fe Y.-Shutt2. 22 tee 197
Meteorological observations for 1894 Presidential address:— Ottawa
63, 64 Literary and Scientific Society,
Microscorical Soiree. Notice of..... 191 by. RR. W. SEs? oa eee 200
Minerals new to Canada, W. F. Prince, Prof. E. »E.— Golourlesssass
Hemiere, Aten see Nes ee 193 blood. in. Animals, . 2 eeeee 6:
Moose, A Morning Among, paper Prince, - Prof. E. E.; A. monnnpaaes
by: rok: Princes shee Sass 103 among Moose. 52.45) 65eeem 103.39
Mt. Mica Tourmalines: ....=.2.-.- 210 Prince, Prof. E. E., ‘‘ Cilia "paper. $81
Native trees at Central Experimental Programme of Winter Lecturesin =
Farm in 1895, by W. Macoun Ottawas. i202 6 172_
108, 132, 141 Psychic development in young ;.
Neoloma cinerea, (Wood Rat)..... 225 animals, T. Wesley Mills, ae a
Notes, Reviews and Comments. noted......... - ac 2. =) oe 7633
20, 56, 77, 90, 154, 170, 181, 205, 228. Ranunculacez, Prof. Macoun...... 217 9
Notes on the Flora of Ontario, by Relation of the atmosphere to
Prof. John Macoun....... 196, 217 Agriculture. Paper by F. T. —
Obituary Notice :— Shutt! 22°. 2. ee +12
James Dwight Dana.......... 55 Rensselzer Grit Plateau, Notice of
Thomas. H. Huxley.........: * 96 paper by T. Nelson.” Daleseas
Georpeawsonieni.) 2 Se Se 180 (R. W.. Bills). ). <.22 ee a
Antonio del Castillo......... 181 Report of the Entomological Branch,
Ontario, The Flora of, by Prof. 1894-1895 by the leaders ...., 178
Macouny:./.2, 71.3.2) ee .196, 217. Report of Geological Branch of

Ornithology, Notes on........ :
Kingston, A. G., Winter Birds . 22

Kingston, A. G., A Well Marked

Bird Waves: sce. eee 78
A. G. K., Notes of Chapman’s

** Hand- book of Birds of East

N. a rica. «she premeeaee 112
A. G. K., ‘A new y bird for Eastern

aaa Dns dvecieh eA 92
Pictou Birds Observed by Mr. W.

A: ‘Hickman i022 scoepene 231

O. F. N. C. for 1864-1895 Pie
H. .M.- Anil... 40s oe
‘Royal Society of Canada, Notes on
and review of Geological and 7
Biological papers presented.... 75.
Royal Society of Canada, fourteenth

annual meeting: --.\.enasaines
Ritter William E., on Tunicata of oe
Pacific: Coast... sarc
Russell, Frank, ‘ Hunting | “the

Barren Ground Caribou ”....

oe aes on Omi- '

Beste. wes ewe

Fic an, Notice 7? reales
Ee. Eh, Review of

-T., Argon, a newly dis:
ed constituent of the

ees

2 T. ‘oud A. McGill, Note
“the Air at Ottawa’ %

Archeology,
Antiquities of
ke Deschenes, paper.......
Review of Prof. Emerton’s
on “Canadian Spiders ”
182,
sf Crystallization... .. .
ev. Geo. W., The Land
Freshwater Shells in

eee wee ee ee ee

ee ae |

ee

. Mica, review

212
215

rest ot!
..+ 236

~

of work by Ae G. Harlin... ae
W. A. D. Lees...

** Town Birds,”
Tunicata of Pacific Coast. . Lee
Tyrrell, J. B., North American
Water-Mites oh eal see
Verrill, A. E., Echimoderm of N.
E. America, Notice of.......
Water Mites, North American by ¥;
Koenike: . 5 svat vets rte
Wilson, E. B., ‘‘ An Atlas of the
fertilisation aud Karyokinesis
of the Ovum: Review of work
Hiv TU. Sls So5 a), oie pth we ae
Winnipeg, Map of Lake. .........
Wood Rat of British Columbia....
Zoology, Notes on
Challenger Expedition, Scientific
results in ‘* Natural Science ”
Fletcher, Jas. (**F”) The Common
House Mouse... ......
Merriam,C. Hart, North American
Shrews, review by H. M. A..
Ritter, William E.,Tunicata of the
Pacific Coast of North America
Verrill, A.G.,‘*Distribution of the
Echinoderms of N. E. America”
Whiteaves, J. J., Primnoa reseda
from British Columbia, paper
noted

Pn ee, ee ee

so

52 ,

‘

Page 23, line

“c

ae

ae

te

175;
175;
175;
176,
DD a

178,

ce

ae

ae

2; for Americana, read:

133
325
3255

4;

19;

ce
io
we
ce

se

ERRATA:

Bulimus,
pelle ies 2
1884,

95,
ae

ee

“ae

ce

ae

QH The Canadian field-naturalist

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY

= ont

ata Set adnan Petit

een Soa alee nt iatntenteet ali ct Ve Mae ene le A ne Adie semen ine ay shina ac" etal tn POD daa itil nw